—
ABB MACHINERY DRIVES
ACS380 drive
Quick installation and start-up guide
Safety instructions
Read the safety instructions in ACS380 Hardware manual (3AXD50000029274 [EN]).
WARNING! Obey these safety instructions to prevent physical injury or
death, or damage to the equipment. If you are not a qualified electrician, do
not do electrical installation or maintenance work.
•
When you install the drive, make sure that dust does not go into the drive.
•
When the drive or connected equipment is energized, do not do work on
the drive, motor cable, motor, control cables or control circuits.
•
After you disconnect the input power, wait for 5 minutes to let the
intermediate circuit capacitors discharge.
•
Make sure that the installation is not energized:
•
Use a multimeter with an impedance of at least 1 Mohm.
•
Make sure that the voltage between the drive output terminals (U, V, W)
and the ground (PE) is 0 V.
•
Make sure that the voltage between the drive input power terminals (L1,
L2, L3) and the ground (PE) is 0 V.
•
Make sure that the voltage between the DC and brake resistor terminals
(UDC+, UDC- and R-) and the ground (PE) is 0 V.
•
If you use a permanent magnet synchronous motor, do not do work on the
drive when the motor rotates. A permanent magnet motor that rotates
energizes the drive and the input power terminals.
WARNING! The installation, start-up and operation of this equipment
requires detailed instructions. Refer to this quick guide and the user interface
guide in the drive package. Retain the guides with this device at all times.
For more information, refer to the hardware manual and firmware manual.
You can download these manuals from the ABB website or order hard
copies of the manuals with the delivery.
1. Examine the installation area
The drive is intended for cabinet installation and has an ingress protection rating of
IP20.
Make sure that in the installation area:
•
There is sufficient cooling and hot air does not recirculate.
•
The ambient conditions are suitable. Refer to
Ambient
•
The mounting surface is non-flammable and can hold the weight of the drive.
Refer to
Declaration of
conformity.
•
Materials near the drive are non-flammable.
•
There is sufficient space above and below the drive for maintenance work. Refer
to
Free space
requirements.
2. Install the drive
You can install the drive with screws or to a DIN rail.
Installation requirements:
•
Make sure that there is a minimum of 75 mm of free space at the top and bottom
of the drive for cooling air.
•
Install R0 drives upright. R0 drives do not have a fan.
•
You can install R1, R2, R3 and R4 drives tilted by up to 90 degrees, from vertical
to fully horizontal orientation.
•
You can install several drives side by side. Side-mounted options require
approximately 20 mm of space on the right side of the drive.
WARNING! Do not install the drive upside down. Make sure that the cooling
air exhaust (at the top) is always above the cooling air inlet (at the bottom).
To install the drive with screws
1.
Make marks onto the surface for the
mounting holes. Refer to
Declaration of
conformity. The R3
and R4 drives contain a mounting
template.
2.
Make the holes for the mounting
screws and install suitable plugs or
anchors.
3.
Start to tighten the screws into the
mounting holes.
4.
Install the drive onto the mounting
screws.
5.
Tighten the mounting screws.
To install the drive to a DIN rail
1.
Move the locking part to the left.
2.
Push and hold the locking button
down.
3.
Put the top tabs of the drive onto the
top edge of the DIN installation rail.
4.
Put the drive against the bottom
edge of the DIN installation rail.
5.
Release the locking button.
6.
Move the locking part to the right.
7.
Make sure that the drive is correctly
installed.
8.
To remove the drive, use a flat-head
screwdriver to open the locking part.
3. Measure the insulation resistance
Drive: Do not do voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on the drive, because
this can cause damage to the drive.
Input power cable: Before you connect the input power cable, measure the
insulation of the input power cable. Obey the local regulations.
Motor and motor cable:
1.
Make sure that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from
the drive output terminals T1/U, T2/V and T3/W.
2.
Use a voltage of 500 V DC to measure the
insulation resistance between each phase
conductor and the protective earth conductor. The
insulation resistance of an ABB motor must be more
than 100 Mohm (at 25 °C/77 °F). For the insulation
resistance of other motors, refer to the
manufacturer’s documentation.
Moisture in the motor decreases the insulation resistance. If you think that there
is moisture in the motor, dry the motor and do the measurement again.
4. Select the cables
Input power cable: For the best EMC performance, use a symmetrical shielded
cable and two grounding conductors.
Motor cable: Use a symmetrical shielded cable.
Control cable: Use a double-shielded twisted-pair cable for analog signals. Use a
single-shielded cable for digital, relay and I/O signals. Use separate cables for analog
and relay signals.
5. Connect the power cables
Connection diagram
b
a
a. Two grounding conductors. Use two conductors if the cross-section of grounding
conductor is less than 10 mm
use the cable shield in addition to the fourth conductor.
b. Separate grounding cable (line side). Use it if the conductivity of the fourth
conductor or shield is not sufficient for the protective grounding.
c. Separate grounding cable (motor side). Use it if the conductivity of the shield is not
sufficient for the protective grounding, or there is no symmetrically constructed
conditions.
grounding conductor in the cable.
d. 360-degree grounding of the cable shield. Required for the motor cable and brake
resistor cable, recommended for the input power cable.
Connection procedure
WARNING! Obey the safety instructions in the ACS380 Hardware manual
(3AXD50000029274 [English]). If you ignore them, injury or death, or
damage to the equipment can occur.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to an IT (non-grounded) system or to a
corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the EMC filter grounding screw.
1.
Strip the motor cable.
2.
Ground the motor cable shield under
the grounding clamp.
3.
Twist the motor cable shield into a
bundle, mark it accordingly and
connect it to the grounding terminal.
4.
Connect the phase conductors of
the motor cable to the T1/U, T2/V
and T3/W motor terminals. Torque
the terminals to 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in).
5.
If it is applicable, connect the brake
resistor cable to the R- and UDC+
terminals. Torque the terminals to
0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in). Use a shielded
cable and ground the shield under
the grounding clamp.
6.
Strip the input power cable.
W
7.
If the input power cable has a shield,
twist it into a bundle, mark it and
connect it to the grounding terminal.
8.
Connect the PE conductor of the
input power cable to the grounding
terminal. If it is necessary, use a
second PE conductor.
9.
Connect the phase conductors of the input power cable to the L1, L2 and L3 input
terminals. Torque the terminals to 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in).
10. Mechanically attach the cables on the outside of the drive.
Make sure that there are no sources of strong magnetic fields such as high-current
single-core conductors or contactor coils near the drive. A strong magnetic field can
cause interference or inaccuracy in the operation of the drive. If there is interference,
move the source of the magnetic field away from the drive.
d
d
c
2
2
Cu or 16 mm
Al (IEC/EN 61800-5-1). For example,
6. Connect the control cables
Connection procedure
Do the connections according to the default control connections of the application
macro that you select. For the connections of the factory default macro (ABB standard
macro), refer to
Default I/O connections (ABB standard
fieldbus default macro, refer to
Fieldbus
connections. For the other macros, refer to
the ACS380 Firmware manual (3AXD50000029275 [English]).
Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as near to the terminals as possible to prevent
inductive coupling.
1.
Strip a part of the outer shield of the
control cable for grounding.
2.
Use a cable tie to ground the outer
shield to the grounding tab.
3.
Use metal cable ties for 360-degree
grounding.
4.
Strip the control cable conductors.
5.
Connect the conductors to the
correct control terminals. Torque the
terminals to 0.5 N·m (4.4 lbf·in).
6.
Connect the shields of the twisted
pairs and grounding wires to the
SCR terminal. Torque the terminals
to 0.5 N·m (4.4 lbf·in).
7.
Mechanically attach the control cables on the outside of the drive.
Default I/O connections (ABB standard macro)
For the standard variant (I/O & Modbus) (type ACS380-04xS).
Terminals
Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
+24V
Aux. voltage output common
DGND
Digital input common
DCOM
Stop (0) / Start (1)
DI1
Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
DI2
Speed selection
DI3
Speed selection
DI4
Ramp 1 (0) / Ramp 2 (1)
DIO1
Ready (0) / Not ready (1)
DIO2
Digital output auxiliary voltage
DIO SRC
Digital input/output common
DIO COM
Analog I/O
1…10 kohm
Freq. ref. / Speed ref. (0…10 V)
AI1
Analog input circuit common
AGND
Not configured
AI2
Analog input circuit common
AGND
Max. 500 ohm
Output frequency (0…20 mA)
AO
Analog output circuit common
AGND
Signal cable shield (screen)
SCR
Reference voltage
+10V
Safe torque off (STO)
Safe torque off function. Connected at factory.
S+
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
SGND
S1
S2
Relay output
Relay output 1
RC
No fault [Fault (-1)]
RA
RB
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
B+
A-
BGND
Shield
Termination
Connecting EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal to drive
Connect the fieldbus to the EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal on the BMIO-01 module
which is attached on the control unit of the drive. The connection diagram is shown
below.
Fieldbus controller
Data flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status Word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W
Service messages (acyclic)
requests/responses
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
1
1
1
1
1
Termination OFF
Termination OFF
Drive
Drive
1) The device at both ends on the fieldbus must have termination set to ON.
Fieldbus connections
For the configured drives with the preconfigured fieldbus protocol
(type ACS380-04xC).
Terminals
Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, 200 mA
+24V
Aux. voltage output common
DGND
Digital input common
DCOM
Fault reset
DI1
Not configured
DI2
Safe torque off (STO)
Safe torque off function. Connected at factory.
S+
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
SGND
S1
S2
Relay output
Relay output 1
RC
No fault [Fault (-1)]
RA
RB
Extension module connections
+K457 FCAN-01-M CANopen
DSUB9
CANopen
+K454 FPBA-01-M Profibus DP
DSUB9
Profibus DP
+K469 FECA-01-M EtherCAT
RJ45 X 2
EtherCAT
+K475 FENA-21-M Ethernet/IP, Profinet,
RJ45 X 2
Ethernet IP
Modbus TCP
+K495 BCAN-11 CANopen interface
RJ45 X 2
Profinet
+K470 FEPL-02 Ethernet power link (RJ45x2)
RJ45 X 2
Modbus TCP
+K451 FDNA-01, DeviceNet (Terminal Block)
CANopen
Terminal Block
macro), for the connections of
Descriptions
(1
Termination ON
Fieldbus
ON
ON
ON
…
1
1
1
(1
Termination ON
Drive
Descriptions
Содержание
- ABB кат алоги, инструкции, программы
- Каталоги
- Руководства
- ABB ACS 800
- ABB кат алоги, инструкции, программы
- Каталоги
- Руководства
- ABB ACS 800
- Преобразователь частоты ACS380-040S-038A-4
ABB кат алоги, инструкции, программы
Каталоги
Размер файла: 3.15 мб
Технический каталог Компонентные электроприводы ABB ACS 150 от 0,37 до 4 кВт
Размер файла: 494.88 кб
Низковольтные приводы переменного тока ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS355, ACS550
Размер файла: 3.08 мб
Стандартные приводы ABB ACS 310 0,37 — 22 кВт
Размер файла: 451.79 кб
AББ для высокоточного машиностроения ACSM1, 0,75 — 45 кВт / 1 — 60 л.с.
Размер файла: 1.49 мб
Электроприводы ABB ACS 355 для механизмов общего назначения 0,37 — 22 кВт
Размер файла: 11.04 мб
Промышленные приводы АББ ACS800, мультидрайв от 1,5 до 5600 кВт
Размер файла: 605.67 кб
Низковольтные приводы переменного тока ABB ACS 55, ACS 150, ACS 310, ACS 355, ACS 550
Размер файла: 18.55 мб
Промышленные приводы AББ ACS800, одиночные приводы, от 0,55 до 5600 кВт
Размер файла: 4.51 мб
Каталог запчастей ABB ACS 2000 англ.
Размер файла: 1.36 мб
Технический спецификации ABB ACS 2000
Размер файла: 2.25 мб
Техническое руководство ABB ACS 5000 англ
Размер файла: 3.32 мб
Брошюра ABB ACS 6000
Руководства
Размер файла: 3.36 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная программа управления ACS800 7. х
Размер файла: 10.90 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Инверторные блоки ACS800-107, монтируемые в шкафу ( от 1,5 до 5430 кВт )
Размер файла: 4.52 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации ACS800-307 и ACS800-507 Диодные блоки питания (DSU), монтируемые в шкафу
Размер файла: 15.70 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACH550-01 (0,75-90 кВт) Приводы ACH550-UH (1-150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Приводные модули ACQ810-04 (0,37 – 45 кВт, 0,5 – 60 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная программа управления насосом для приводов ACQ810
Размер файла: 458.78 кб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты ACS 100 мощностью от 0.12 до 2.2 кВт
Размер файла: 4.05 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS150 (0,37-4 кВт, 0,5-5 л.с.)
Размер файла: 1.13 мб
Приводы, монтируемые в шкафу ACS800 Механический монтаж
Размер файла: 6.12 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACH550-02 (110-355 кВт) Приводы ACH550-U2 (125-550 л.с.)
Размер файла: 515.02 кб
Руководство по вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACQ810-04
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации приводов переменного тока типа ACS50 0,18-0,75 кВт
Размер файла: 1.08 мб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты типа ACS 140 Мощность: 0,12 – 2,2 кВт
Размер файла: 1.95 мб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты типа ACS 160 мощностью от 0,55 до 2,2 кВт
Размер файла: 5.50 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS350 (0,37-7,5 кВт, 0,5-10 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.12 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACS310
Размер файла: 5.50 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS350 (0,37-7,5 кВт, 0,5-10 л.с.)
Размер файла: 294.59 кб
Руководство по установке ACS 400
Размер файла: 7.07 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACS550-01 (0,75-110 кВт) Приводы ACS550-U1 (1-150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 7.44 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию преобразователи частоты ACS/ACC/ACP 604/607/627 мощностью от 55 до 630 кВт (от 75 до 700 л. с.)
Размер файла: 2.87 мб
Руководство пользователя для преобразователей частоты типа ACS 400 в диапазоне от 2,2 до 37 кВт
Размер файла: 1.27 мб
Frequency converters ACS 501 2.2 to 75 kW
Размер файла: 5.08 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению ACS580, стандартная программа управления
Размер файла: 682.76 кб
Руководство пользователя ABB ACS 300 англ.
ABB ACS 800
Размер файла: 7.85 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-01 (от 0,55 до 110 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U1 (от 0,75 до 150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 3.21 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-07 (от 45 до 560 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U7 (от 50 до 600 л.с.)
Размер файла: 3.21 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная прикладная программа ACS800 7.x
Размер файла: 7.65 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACS850-04 (55 – 160 кВт, 75 – 200 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.18 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-02 (от 45 до 500 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U2 (от 60 до 600 л.с.)
Размер файла: 8.37 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-07 (от 500 до 2800 кВт)
Размер файла: 666.90 кб
Руководство по прикладному программированию Адаптивная программа
Размер файла: 5.83 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению ACS850, Стандартная программа управления
Размер файла: 0.0 b
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACS880-04 (200 – 710 кВт, 300 – 700 л.с.)
Размер файла: 14.38 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS880-07 (45–560 кВт)
Размер файла: 8.11 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Основная программа управления ACS880
Источник
ABB кат алоги, инструкции, программы
Каталоги
Размер файла: 3.15 мб
Технический каталог Компонентные электроприводы ABB ACS 150 от 0,37 до 4 кВт
Размер файла: 494.88 кб
Низковольтные приводы переменного тока ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS355, ACS550
Размер файла: 3.08 мб
Стандартные приводы ABB ACS 310 0,37 — 22 кВт
Размер файла: 451.79 кб
AББ для высокоточного машиностроения ACSM1, 0,75 — 45 кВт / 1 — 60 л.с.
Размер файла: 1.49 мб
Электроприводы ABB ACS 355 для механизмов общего назначения 0,37 — 22 кВт
Размер файла: 11.04 мб
Промышленные приводы АББ ACS800, мультидрайв от 1,5 до 5600 кВт
Размер файла: 605.67 кб
Низковольтные приводы переменного тока ABB ACS 55, ACS 150, ACS 310, ACS 355, ACS 550
Размер файла: 18.55 мб
Промышленные приводы AББ ACS800, одиночные приводы, от 0,55 до 5600 кВт
Размер файла: 4.51 мб
Каталог запчастей ABB ACS 2000 англ.
Размер файла: 1.36 мб
Технический спецификации ABB ACS 2000
Размер файла: 2.25 мб
Техническое руководство ABB ACS 5000 англ
Размер файла: 3.32 мб
Брошюра ABB ACS 6000
Руководства
Размер файла: 3.36 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная программа управления ACS800 7. х
Размер файла: 10.90 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Инверторные блоки ACS800-107, монтируемые в шкафу ( от 1,5 до 5430 кВт )
Размер файла: 4.52 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации ACS800-307 и ACS800-507 Диодные блоки питания (DSU), монтируемые в шкафу
Размер файла: 15.70 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACH550-01 (0,75-90 кВт) Приводы ACH550-UH (1-150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Приводные модули ACQ810-04 (0,37 – 45 кВт, 0,5 – 60 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная программа управления насосом для приводов ACQ810
Размер файла: 458.78 кб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты ACS 100 мощностью от 0.12 до 2.2 кВт
Размер файла: 4.05 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS150 (0,37-4 кВт, 0,5-5 л.с.)
Размер файла: 1.13 мб
Приводы, монтируемые в шкафу ACS800 Механический монтаж
Размер файла: 6.12 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACH550-02 (110-355 кВт) Приводы ACH550-U2 (125-550 л.с.)
Размер файла: 515.02 кб
Руководство по вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACQ810-04
Размер файла: 6.55 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации приводов переменного тока типа ACS50 0,18-0,75 кВт
Размер файла: 1.08 мб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты типа ACS 140 Мощность: 0,12 – 2,2 кВт
Размер файла: 1.95 мб
Руководство пользователя преобразователей частоты типа ACS 160 мощностью от 0,55 до 2,2 кВт
Размер файла: 5.50 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS350 (0,37-7,5 кВт, 0,5-10 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.12 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACS310
Размер файла: 5.50 мб
Руководство пользователя Приводы ACS350 (0,37-7,5 кВт, 0,5-10 л.с.)
Размер файла: 294.59 кб
Руководство по установке ACS 400
Размер файла: 7.07 мб
Руководство по эксплуатации Приводы ACS550-01 (0,75-110 кВт) Приводы ACS550-U1 (1-150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 7.44 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию преобразователи частоты ACS/ACC/ACP 604/607/627 мощностью от 55 до 630 кВт (от 75 до 700 л. с.)
Размер файла: 2.87 мб
Руководство пользователя для преобразователей частоты типа ACS 400 в диапазоне от 2,2 до 37 кВт
Размер файла: 1.27 мб
Frequency converters ACS 501 2.2 to 75 kW
Размер файла: 5.08 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению ACS580, стандартная программа управления
Размер файла: 682.76 кб
Руководство пользователя ABB ACS 300 англ.
ABB ACS 800
Размер файла: 7.85 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-01 (от 0,55 до 110 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U1 (от 0,75 до 150 л.с.)
Размер файла: 3.21 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-07 (от 45 до 560 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U7 (от 50 до 600 л.с.)
Размер файла: 3.21 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Стандартная прикладная программа ACS800 7.x
Размер файла: 7.65 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACS850-04 (55 – 160 кВт, 75 – 200 л.с.)
Размер файла: 6.18 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-02 (от 45 до 500 кВт) Приводы ACS800-U2 (от 60 до 600 л.с.)
Размер файла: 8.37 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS800-07 (от 500 до 2800 кВт)
Размер файла: 666.90 кб
Руководство по прикладному программированию Адаптивная программа
Размер файла: 5.83 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению ACS850, Стандартная программа управления
Размер файла: 0.0 b
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводные модули ACS880-04 (200 – 710 кВт, 300 – 700 л.с.)
Размер файла: 14.38 мб
Руководство по монтажу и вводу в эксплуатацию Приводы ACS880-07 (45–560 кВт)
Размер файла: 8.11 мб
Руководство по микропрограммному обеспечению Основная программа управления ACS880
Источник
Преобразователь частоты ACS380-040S-038A-4
Скидка действует на позиции со склада на частотные преобразователи ABB серий ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS355, ACS380, ACS580, ACS880 и устройства плавного пуска PSE, PSR, PSTX.
Точность управления и возможность использования различных конфигураций привода для управления двигателем, наряду с надежностью, имеют первостепенное значение при выборе привода. Вы можете рассчитывать на все преимущества, используя приводы АББ для машиностроения, которые позволяют решать задачи различной степени сложности: от самых простых до высокопроизводительных машиностроительных применений. Прямое управление моментом (DTC) позволяет достичь высокой точности управления. Встроенные функции безопасности и прикладные программы управления позволяют максимально эффективно адаптировать приводы для различных областей применения.
- Возможность изменения конфигурации привода и удобное программирование для получения оптимального решения.
- Возможность работы с различными типами двигателей и автоматизированными системами.
- Прикладные программы управления для различных применений.
- Прямое управление моментом Direct torque control (DTC) для точного управления двигателем без датчика обратной связи.
Ключевые преимущества ACS380
- Наличие предварительно сконфигурированных протоколов – обеспечивает возможность быстрой и удобной настройки на работу в самых разнообразных системах автоматизации.
- Возможность управления почти любыми двигателями – асинхронными, сервомоторами, с постоянными магнитами и даже с реактивными роторами.
- Встроенная функция STO (безопасное отключение момента) и адаптивное программирование – позволяют минимизировать необходимость применения внешнего ПЛК, а также настроить преобразователь на работу в соответствии с любыми требованиями относительно его применения.
- Панель с графическим меню – для быстрой и эффективной настройки устройства.
- Наличие интеллектуальной панели управления, поддерживающей русский язык.
- Данная линейка приводов представлена моделями разной номинальной мощности – 0,25-22 кВт. В зависимости от необходимости напряжение питания может быть как однофазным (200-240 В), так и 3-фазным (380-480 В).
Преобразователи серии ACS380 предназначены для механизмов следующих видов
- с постоянным моментом – шлагбаумы, компрессоры, конвейеры ленточного типа;
- с большим крутящим моментом на минимальных скоростях – центрифуги, экструдеры, миксеры;
- с повышенной точностью поддержания скорости и обратной связью – шпиндели, намоточное оборудование, краны.
Источник
ABB MACHINERY DRIVES
ACS380 machinery control program Firmware manual
List of related manuals
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
The code below opens an online listing of the manuals applicable to the product:
Drive hardware manuals and guides Code (English) Drive/converter/inverter safety instructions 3AXD50000037978 ACS380 Hardware manual 3AXD50000029274 Drive firmware manuals and guides ACS380 Firmware manual 3AXD50000029275 ACS380 Quick installation and start-up guide 3AXD50000018553 ACS380 User interface guide 3AXD50000022224 Option manuals and guides ACS-AP-x Assistant control panels users manual 3AUA0000085685 ACS-BP-S Basic control panel users manual 3AXD50000032527 BMIO-01 module quick installation guide 3AXD50000779468 FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module users manual 3AFE68615500 FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module users manual 3AUA0000068940 FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module users manual
3AUA0000093568
FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module users manual 3AFE68573271 FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module users manual
3AUA0000123527
Tool and maintenance manuals and guides Drive Composer PC tool users manual 3AUA0000094606 Adaptive Programming Application guide 3AXD50000028574 NETA-21 remote monitoring tool users manual 3AUA0000096939 NETA-21 remote monitoring tool installation and start- up guide
3AUA0000096881
Firmware manual
ACS380 machinery control program
3AXD50000029275 Rev F EN
EFFECTIVE: 2021-12-15
3. Start-up, ID run and use
Table of contents
Table of contents 1. Introduction to the manual Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2. Control panel Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Home view and Message view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Options menu and Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3. Start-up, ID run and use Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Automatic option configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Do the identification (ID) run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Background information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ID run steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Check motor direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Start and stop the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Change the rotation direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Set the speed or frequency reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Set the drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Open Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Change the units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. Control macros Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 AC500 modbus RTU macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Default control connections for the Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety
PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Default control connections for PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Default control connections for the Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Parameter default values for different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5. Program features Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Local and external control locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating modes and motor control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Overview diagram of control hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Torque control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Frequency control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Autophasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Drive configuration and programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Programming via parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adaptive programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Programmable I/O extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Motor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Constant speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Critical speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Speed controller autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Rush control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Encoder echo support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 DC magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Energy optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Motor overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Control macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 PID trim function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Limit to limit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Limit to limit control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Safety and protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Fixed/Standard protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Energy saving calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Parameter checksum calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 User lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 AI dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 High speed counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6. Parameters Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 03 Input references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 04 Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 05 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 06 Control and status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 07 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 09 Crane application signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10 Standard DI, RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 12 Standard AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 13 Standard AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 15 I/O extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 19 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 20 Start/stop/direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 21 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 22 Speed reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 23 Speed reference ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 24 Speed reference conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 25 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 26 Torque reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 28 Frequency reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 30 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 31 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 33 Generic timer & counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 34 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 35 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 36 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 37 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 40 Process PID set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 41 Process PID set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 43 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 44 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 45 Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 46 Monitoring/scaling settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 47 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 49 Panel port communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 51 FBA A settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 52 FBA A data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 53 FBA A data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 58 Embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 71 External PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 76 Application features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 90 Feedback selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 91 Encoder module settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 92 Encoder 1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 95 HW configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 97 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 98 User motor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 99 Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings . . . 458
7. Additional parameter data Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Parameter groups 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Parameter groups 1099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
8. Fault tracing Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Pure events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Warning/fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Viewing warning/fault information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
QR Code generation for mobile service application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
9. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
10. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Basics of the fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 Contents of the fieldbus Control word (ABB Drives profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Contents of the fieldbus Status word (ABB Drives profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 The state diagram (valid for ABB drives profile only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Automatically changed parameters (all adapters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Specific fieldbus adapter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Parameters set by module detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
11. Control chain diagrams Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Frequency reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Frequency reference modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Speed reference source selection I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Speed reference source selection II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Speed reference ramping and shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Speed error calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Reference selection for torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 Torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Process PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 External PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 External PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 Direction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
12. Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Overview of the crane control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Quick start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Control through the I/O interface using a joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 Control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control . . . . . 633 Control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Configuring speed feedback using a HTL/TTL pulse encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Configuring slowdown with two limits and stop limit logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Configuring Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Crane mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Crane brake control timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Brake system checks overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Brake system checks Torque proving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Brake system checks Brake slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Brake safe closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Extended run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Crane warning masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Dead-band function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Start/stop interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Joystick zero position interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 Joystick reference interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Crane stop limit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Crane slowdown function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Slowdown with two limit inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Fast stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Power on acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Speed reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Unipolar joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Parabolic speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Step reference speed selection/Pendant control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Crane motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Conical motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Further information
Introduction to the manual 11
1 Introduction to the manual
Contents Applicability Safety instructions Target audience Purpose of the manual Terms and abbreviations Related manuals Cybersecurity disclaimer
Applicability The manual applies to the ACS380 machinery control program AMCK6 v2.15.0.12 or later.
To check the version of the control program, see parameter 07.05 Firmware version.
Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions. Read the complete safety instructions in the Hardware manual of the drive before
you install, commission, or use the drive. Read the firmware function-specific warnings before changing parameter values.
Chapter Parameters lists the relevant parameters and related warnings.
12 Introduction to the manual
Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Purpose of the manual This manual provided information for designing, commissioning, or operating the drive system.
Introduction to the manual 13
Terms and abbreviations Term/abbreviation Explanation ACS-AP-x Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for
communication with the drive. The ACS380 support types ACS-AP-I, ACS-AP-S and ACS-AP- W (with a Bluetooth interface).
ACS-BP-S Basic control panel, basic operator keypad for communication with the drive.
AI Analog input; interface for analog input signals AO Analog output; interface for analog output signals AsynM Asynchronous motor BAPO-01 Optional side-mounted auxiliary power extension module BCAN-11 CANopen interface BCBL-01 Optional USB to RJ45 cable BMIO-01 I/O and Modbus module Brake chopper Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate circuit of the
drive to the brake resistor when necessary. The chopper operates when the DC link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit. The voltage rise is typically caused by deceleration (braking) of a high inertia motor.
Brake resistor Dissipates the drive surplus braking energy conducted by the brake chopper to heat. Essential part of the brake circuit. See chapter Resistor breaking in the hardware manual of the drive.
BREL-01 Optional side-mounted relay output extension module BTAC-02 Optional side-mounted pulse encoder interface module Capacitor bank See DC link capacitors. CCA-01 Optional cold configuration adapter Control board Circuit board in which the control program runs DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter DC link capacitors Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC
voltage DI Digital input; interface for digital input signals DO Digital output; interface for digital output signals Drive Frequency converter for controlling AC motors EFB Embedded fieldbus FBA Fieldbus adapter FCAN-01 Optional CANopen adapter module FCNA-01 Optional ControlNet adapter module FDNA-01 Optional DeviceNet adapter module FECA-01 Optional EtherCAT adapter module
14 Introduction to the manual
FENA -21 Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP and PROFINET IO protocols
FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module FPBA-01 Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module Frame (size) Refers to the drive physical size, for example R1 and R2. The
type designation label attached to the drive shows the frame of the drive, see the hardware manual of the drive.
ID run Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. Applies to vector control mode only.
Hexadecimal Describes binary numbers using a numbering system that has 16 sequential numbers as base units. The hexadecimal numbers are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor Intermediate circuit See DC link. Inverter Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and
voltage. I/O Input/Output LSW Least significant word Macro Pre-defined default values of parameters in a drive control
program. Each macro is intended for a specific application. See chapter Control macros.
NETA-21 Optional remote monitoring tool Network control With fieldbus protocols based on the Common Industrial Protocol
(CIP), such as DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP, denotes the control of the drive using the Net Ctrl and Net Ref objects of the ODVA AC/DC Drive Profile. For more information, see www.odva.org, and the following manuals: FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module users manual
(3AFE68573360 [English]), and FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module users manual
(3AUA0000093568 [English]) Parameter User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal
measured or calculated by the drive PDO Process data object PID controller Proportionalintegralderivative controller PLC Programmable logic controller PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor PM Permanent magnet PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO
Registered trademarks of PI — PROFIBUS & PROFINET International
Term/abbreviation Explanation
Introduction to the manual 15
Related manuals The related manuals are listed behind the front cover under List of related manuals.
Cybersecurity disclaimer This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and data via a network interface. It is Customer’s sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
See also section User lock (page 119).
R0, R1, Frame (size) RCD Residual current device Rectifier Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and
voltage. RFI Radio frequency interference RO Relay output; interface for a digital output signal. Implemented
with a relay. SDO Service data object SIL Safety integrity level. See chapter Safe torque off function in the
drive hardware manual. STO Safe torque off. See chapter Safe torque off function in the drive
hardware manual.
Term/abbreviation Explanation
16 Introduction to the manual
2 Control panel
Contents Control panel Home view and Message view Options menu Main menu Submenus
Control panel By default, ACS 380 has an integrated panel. If required, you can use external control panels such as assistant control panel or a basic panel. For more information, refer ACX-AP-x assistant control panels users manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]) or ACS-BP-S basic control panels users manual (3AXD50000032527 [English])
1. Display — shows the Home view as default. 2. Main menu. 3. OK button — open the Main menu, select and save settings. 4. Start button — start the drive. 5. Menu navigation buttons — move in the menus and set
values. 6. Stop button — stop the drive. 7. Back button — open the Options menu, and move back in
the menu. 8. Options menu. 9. Status light — green and red colors indicate the state and
potential problems.
Home view and Message view The Home view is the main view. Open the Main menu and Options menu from the Home view.
The Message view shows fault and warning messages. If there is an active fault or warning, the panel shows the Message view directly.
You can open the Message view from the Options menu or Diagnostics submenu.
Home view 1. Control selection — local or remote 2. Local start/stop control — enabled 3. Rotation direction — forward or reverse 4. Local reference setting — enabled 5. Speed — target 6. Speed — current 7. Main menu — menu list 8. Options menu — quick access menu
Message view: Fault Fault messages require your immediate attention.
Check the code in the Fault messages table on page 504 to troubleshoot the problem.
Message view: Warning Warning messages show possible problems.
Check the code in the Warning messages table on page 490 to troubleshoot the problem.
Options menu and Main menu
Options menu The Options menu is a quick access menu.
Main menu The Main menu is a scroll menu. The menu icons represent specific groups. The groups have submenus.
Note: You can define which Main menu items are visible (see parameter 49.30).
Options menu 1. To open: press the Back
button in the Home view.
Main menu 2. To open: press the OK
button in the Home view.
1. Control location — set to local or remote control 2. Rotation direction — set to forward or reverse 3. Active faults — view possible faults 4. Reference speed — set the reference speed 5. Active warnings — view possible warnings
1. Motor data — motor parameters
2. Motor control — motor settings
3. Control macros
4. Diagnostics — faults, warnings, fault log and connection status
5. Energy efficiency — energy savings
6. Parameters — parameters
Submenus
The Main menu items have submenus. Some submenus also have menus and/or option lists. The content of the submenus depend on the drive type.
Motor Data
1. Motor type — AsynM, PMSM, SynRM 2. Control mode — Scalar, Vector 3. Nominal power 4. Nominal current 5. Nominal voltage 6. Nominal frequency 7. Nominal speed 8. Nominal torque 9. Phase order — U V W, U W V 10.Nominal Cosphi 11.Unit selection — SI or US units
Motor Data: Motor type 1. AsynM 2. PMSM 3. SynRM
Motor Data: Control mode 1. Scalar 2. Vector
Motor Data: Phase order 1. U V W 2. U W V
Motor Data: Unit selection 1. SI units 2. US units
Motor Control
1. Start mode — Const time, Automatic 2. Stop mode — Coast, Ramp, DC hold 3. Acceleration time 4. Deceleration time 5. Maximum allowed speed 6. Maximum allowed current 7. Minimum allowed speed
Motor Control: Start modes 1. Const time 2. Automatic
Motor Control: Stop modes 1. Coast 2. Ramp 3. DC hold
Control macros The available control macros depend on the installed option modules: ABB standard AC500 modbus RTU Alternate Motor potentiometer PID control Torque control
Diagnostics
1. Active Fault — shows the fault code 2. Fault History — list of latest fault codes (newest first) 3. Active Warnings — shows the warning code 4. Connection Status — Fieldbus and I/O signals
Energy Efficiency
1. Saved energy in kWh 2. Saved money 3. Saved energy in MW 4. Saved money x 1000 5. Cost per kWh h
Parameters
1. Complete parameter list — groups menu with complete parameters and parameter levels
2. Modified parameter list 3. Parameter restore — reset to factory default parameters
Start-up, ID run and use 23
3 Start-up, ID run and use
Contents Automatic option configuration Start up the drive Do the identification (ID) run Check motor direction Start and stop the drive Change the rotation direction Set the speed or frequency reference Set the drive parameters Open Diagnostics Change the units
Note: In this chapter the drive uses an integrated panel to perform the start-up, ID run, and other actions. You can also perform these functions using an external control panel or the Drive Composer PC tool.
Automatic option configuration Ensure that the value of parameter 07.35 (Drive configuration) matches the installed option modules. If the parameter value is wrong, use automatic option configuration to update the configuration.
The drive automatically recognizes option modules that are attached to the drive during start-up. If you add or remove option modules, perform the following steps to automatically update the drive configuration to match the new set of option modules:
24 Start-up, ID run and use
1. Set the value of parameters 07.35 (Drive configuration) and 07.36 (Drive configuration 2) to 0x0000.
2. Turn the drive power off, wait for a minute, and then power-up the drive again. (It is also possible to reboot the drive using parameter 96.08 Control board boot.) The drive recognizes the currently attached optional modules and sets the correct settings. This may take a few seconds.
For more information, see section Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control on page 600.
Start up the drive 1. Energize the drive. 2. Enter the Control macros view and select the applicable macro.
For units with a fieldbus adapter connected: you can see the fieldbus in the Control macros view. There are certain parameters that you need to change, e.g. the station ID. See chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter.
3. Enter the Motor data view and select the units (international or US). 4. Set the motor type:
AsynM: Asynchronous motor PMSM: Permanent magnet motor, or SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor
5. Set the motor control mode: Vector: Speed reference. This is suitable for most cases. The drive does an automatic stand-still ID run. Scalar: Frequency reference. Use this mode when: — The number of motors can change. — The nominal motor current is less than 20% of the nominal drive current. Scalar mode is not recommended for permanent magnet motors.
6. Set the nominal motor values: Nominal power Nominal current Nominal voltage Nominal frequency Nominal speed Nominal torque (optional) Nominal cosphi.
7. In the Motor control view, set the start and stop mode.
8. Set the acceleration time and the deceleration time.
Start-up, ID run and use 25
Note: The speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times are based on the value in parameter 46.01 Speed scaling/46.02 Frequency scaling.
9. Set the maximum and minimum speed or frequency. For more information, see parameters 30.11 Minimum speed /30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.12 Maximum speed/30.14 Maximum frequency on page 267.
10. Tune the drive parameters to the application. You can use the Assistant control panel (ACS-AP-x), or the Drive Composer PC tool with the drive.
Do the identification (ID) run
Background information If parameter 99.04 value is set to Vector, ID run is mandatory. In most applications, performing the standstill ID run is enough, but for more demanding applications other ID run modes may be needed.
The drive automatically estimates motor characteristics using Standstill ID run when the drive is started for the first time, and after any motor parameter (group 99 Motor data) is changed. This is valid when: parameter 99.13 ID run requested selection is Standstill, or parameter 99.04 Motor control mode selection isVector.
Use ID run for demanding motor control connections. For example: a permanent magnet motor (PMSM) is used the drive operates near zero speed references, or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed
range is needed.
Note: If you change the motor parameters after the ID run, you need to repeat the ID run.
Note: If you have already parameterized your application using scalar motor control mode and you need to change to vector: in the Motor data submenu, set Motor control to Vector, or set parameter 99.04
Motor control mode selection to Vector. for I/O controlled drive, check parameters in groups 22 Speed reference
selection, 23 Speed reference ramp, 12 Standard AI, 30 Limits and 46 Monitoring/scaling settings.
for torque controlled drive, check also parameters in group 26 Torque reference chain.
26 Start-up, ID run and use
ID run steps
Warning! Make sure it is safe to start the motor and run it in either direction.
1. Open the Main menu. 2. Select the Parameters submenu. 3. Select All parameters. 4. Select 99 Motor data and press OK. 5. Ensure that the nominal motor values have been defined correctly. 6. Select 99.13 ID run requested, select the wanted ID mode and press OK.
An AFF6 Identification run warning message is shown before you press Start. The panel LED starts to blink green to indicate an active warning.
7. Press Start to start the ID run. Do not press any control panel keys during the ID run. If you need to stop the ID run, press Stop.
After the ID run is completed, the status light stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, the panel shows the fault FF61 ID run.
Check motor direction Examine the actual direction of the motor: 1. Go back to the Home view. 2. Adjust the motor reference to a small value. 3. Make sure that is is safe to start the motor in either direction. 4. Start the motor and examine the actual rotation direction of the motor axis. If it is
necessary, change the motor direction with the Phase order setting in the Motor data view or change the phase order of the motor cable.
Warning! Changing the phase order of the motor cable is only allowed for an electrical professional. Before the operation, disconnect the power, wait for 5 minutes for discharging, and measure that there is no voltage.
Start-up, ID run and use 27
Start and stop the drive
Change the rotation direction
Set the speed or frequency reference
1. Press the Start button to start the drive. 2. Press the Stop button to stop the drive.
1. In the Options menu, move to the rotation direction item with the arrow buttons.
2. Press the OK button to change the rotation direction.
1. In the Options menu, move to the speed or frequency reference item and press OK.
2. Press the arrow buttons to edit the value. 3. Press the OK button to confirm the new value.
28 Start-up, ID run and use
Set the drive parameters
Open Diagnostics
1. Select the Main menu from the Home view. 2. Scroll to Parameters, and press the OK button to open
the submenu. 3. Select the complete parameters list with the arrow button
and press the OK button, or 4. Select the modified parameters list with the arrow button
and press the OK button. 5. Select the parameter and press the OK button.
The parameters are shown in respective groups. The first two digits of the parameter number represent the parameter group. For example, parameters starting with 30 are in the Limits group.
See chapter Parameters for more information.
1. Select the Main menu from the Home view. 2. Scroll to Diagnostics and press the OK button to open
the submenu. 3. Select the warning or fault with the arrow button and
press the OK button.
See chapter Fault tracing for more information.
Start-up, ID run and use 29
Change the units
1. Select the Main menu from the Home view. 2. Scroll to Motor data and press the OK button to open the
submenu. 3. Scroll to the unit selection item and press the OK button. 4. Select the unit with the arrow button, then press the OK
button. You can see the selected unit on the Home view.
30 Start-up, ID run and use
4 Control macros
Contents ABB standard macro AC500 modbus RTU macro Alternate macro Motor potentiometer macro PID control macro Torque control macro Parameter default values for different macros
Control macros are sets of default parameter values that apply to a specific control configuration. They make it faster and easier to set up a drive for use.
By default, a macro for the I/O controlled drive is set as the ABB standard macro.
ABB standard macro ABB standard macro is suitable for an IO-controlled drive. Digital inputs control start/stop (2-wire), direction and constant speed selection (3 speeds) and acceleration and deceleration ramp selection.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select to value ABB standard.
This is the default macro for all ACS380 types.
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro This connection diagram is valid for the drive with the BMIO-01 option (for example ACS380-04xS or ACS380-04xC+L538).
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA Aux. voltage output common Digital input common Stop (0) / Start (1) Forward (0) / Reverse (1) Constant frequency / speed selection 1)
Constant frequency / speed selection 1)
Ramp set 1 input (0) / Ramp set 2 input (1)2)
Not ready output (0) / Ready run output (1) Digital output auxiliary voltage Digital input/output common
Analog I/O
Speed / freq.(010V) 4)
Analog input circuit common Not configured 4)
Analog input circuit common Output frequency (020 mA) Analog output circuit common Signal cable shield (screen) Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe Torque Off (STO)
+24V DGND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIO1 DIO2 DIO SRC DIO COM
AI1 AGND AI2 AGND AO AGND SCR +10V3)
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm
Tightening torques: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Reference from the integrated panel. 1) In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain. In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection. Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
2)
Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
Relay output 1 No fault [Fault (-1)]
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
S+ SGND S1 S2
RC RA RB
+24V DGND
DI3 DI4 Operation/Parameter Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1 1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1 0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 22.27 Constant speed 2 1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3 22.28 Constant speed 3
DIO1 Ramp set Parameters 0 1 28.71 Freq ramp set selection,,
28.74 Freq acceleration time 21 2
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Select the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the parameter 12.25.
Input signals Start/Stop selection (DI1) Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (DI2) Speed selection (DI3) Speed selection (DI4) Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1) selection (DIO1) Output frequency or motor speed reference (AI1)
Output signals Output frequency (AO) Ready to run (0) / Not ready (1) (DIO2) No Fault [Fault (-1)]
AC500 modbus RTU macro The AC500 Modbus RTU macro configures the drive communication and control parameters to work with AC500 PLC and Modbus RTU communication. The drive uses the embedded Modbus RTU on the BMIO-01 board.
The macro is available with firmware version 2.15 or later.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting the parameter 96.04 Macro select value as AC500 Modbus RTU.
Activation of the macro changes some values from their default values. For details, see section Parameter default values for different macros on page 46.
Settings
parameter 96.04 Macro select value
Alternate macro This macro provides an I/O configuration where one signal starts the motor in the forward direction and another signal starts the motor in the reverse direction.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select to value Alternate.
The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant (ACS380-04xS) and configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538. You can use it also with the base drive variant (ACS380-04xN) but then you cannot use all the I/O available in the macro.
Activation of the macro changes some values from their default values. For details, see section Parameter default values for different macros on page 46.
Default control connections for the Alternate macro This connection diagram is valid for the drive with the BMIO-01 option (for example ACS380-04xS or ACS380-04xC+L538) (with the Alternate macro selected).
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA Aux. voltage output common Digital input common Start forward; If DI1 = DI2: stop Start reverse Constant speed / frequency selection 1)
Constant speed / frequency selection 1)
Ramp set 1(0) / Ramp set 2 (1) 2)
Ready run (0) / not ready run Digital output auxiliary voltage Digital input/output common
Analog I/O
Output freq./Speed ref.(010V) 4)
Analog input circuit common Not configured 4)
Analog input circuit common Output frequency (020 mA) Analog output circuit common Signal cable shield (screen) Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe Torque Off (STO) Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
Relay output 1
+24V DGND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIO1 DIO2 DIO SRC DIO COM
AI1 AGND AI2 AGND AO AGND SCR +10V3)
S+ SGND S1 S2
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. 1) In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
2) In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain. In vector control: See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
No fault [Fault (-1)]
EIA-485 Modbus RTU Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB).
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
RC RA RB
+24V DGND
B+ A- BGND Shield Termination
DI3 DI4 Operation/Parameter Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1 1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1 0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 22.27 Constant speed 2 1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3 22.28 Constant speed 3
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Select the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the parameter 12.25.
Input signals Start motor forward (DI1) Start motor in reverse (DI2) Constant output frequency / motor speed selection (DI3) Constant output frequency / motor speed selection (DI4) Ramp set selection (DIO1)
Output signals Output frequency or motor speed reference (AI1) Output frequency (AO1) No Fault [Fault (-1)]
DIO2 Ramp set
Parameters Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 1 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 23.12 Acceleration time 1 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1
1 2 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 23.14 Acceleration time 2 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2
Motor potentiometer macro This macro provides a way to adjust the speed with the help of two push buttons, or a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select to value Motor potentiometer.
For more information on the motor potentiometer counter, see section Motor potentiometer on page 119.
The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant (ACS380-04xS) and configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538.
Activation of the macro changes some values from their default values. For details, see section Parameter default values for different macros on page 46.
Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro This connection diagram is valid for drives with the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the Motor potentiometer macro selected).
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA Aux. voltage output common Digital input common Stop (0) / Start (1) Forward (0) / Reverse (1) Frequency / speed up 1)
Frequency / speed down 1)
Constant speed sel 1 2)
Ready run (0) / Not ready run (1) Digital output auxiliary voltage Digital input/output common
Analog I/O
+24V DGND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIO1 DIO2 DIO SRC DIO COM
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. 1) When the input signal is on, the speed/frequency increase or decrease along a
parameter-defined change rate. See parameters 22.75, 22.76, and 22.77. If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the frequency/speed reference is unchanged. The existing frequency/speed reference is stored during stop and power down.
2) In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain. In vector control: See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
Not configured 4)
Analog input circuit common Not configured 4)
Analog input circuit common Not configured Analog output circuit common Signal cable shield (screen) Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe Torque Off (STO) Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
Relay output 1 No fault [Fault (-1)]
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
AI1 AGND AI2 AGND AO AGND SCR +10V
S+ SGND S1 S2
RC RA RB
+24V DGND
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Select the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the parameter 12.25.
Input signals Stop (0) / Start (1) (DI1) Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (DI2) Frequency / speed up (DI3) Frequency / speed down (DI4) Constant speed selection 1 (DIO1)
Output signals No Fault [Fault (-1)]
PID control macro This macro is suitable for applications where the drive is always controlled by PID and the reference comes from analog input AI1.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select to value PID.
The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538.
Activation of the macro changes some values from their default values. For details, see section Parameter default values for different macros on page 46.
DIO1 Ramp set
Parameters Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 1 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 23.12 Acceleration time 1 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1
1 2 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 23.14 Acceleration time 2 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2
Default control connections for PID control macro This connection diagram is valid for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the PID control macro selected).
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA Aux. voltage output common Digital input common Stop (0) / Start (1) Internal setpoint sel1 1)
Internal setpoint sel2 1)
Constant speed / frequency selection 2)
Run enable 1 source Ready run Digital output auxiliary voltage Digital input/output common
Analog I/O
External PID ref 3) 6)
Analog input circuit common Actual PID feedback 4) 6)
Analog input circuit common Output frequency (020 mA) Analog output circuit common Signal cable shield (screen) Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe Torque Off (STO) Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed.
Relay output 1
+24V DGND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIO1 DIO2 DIO SRC DIO COM
AI1 AGND AI2 AGND AO AGND SCR +10V
5)
S+ SGND S1 S2
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. 1) See parameters 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 and 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint
sel2 source table.
2) Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
3) PID: 010 V -> 0100% PID setpoint. 4) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturers instructions. To
use sensors supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the hardware manual of the drive.
5) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
No fault [Fault (-1)]
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
RC RA RB
+24V DGND
Source defined by par. 40.19
DI2
Source defined by par. 40.20
DI3 Internal setpoint active
0 0 Setpoint source: AI1 (par. 40.16) 1 0 1 (par. 40.21) 0 1 2 (par. 40.22) 1 1 3 (par.40.23)
DI4 Operation/Parameter Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1 1 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1
6) Select the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the parameter 12.25.
Input signals External PID ref (AI1) Actual feedback from PID (AI2) Start/Stop selection (DI1) Constant setpoint 1 (DI2) Constant setpoint 2 (DI3) Speed/freq selection (DI4) Ramp pair selection (DIO1)
Output signals Output frequency (AO) No Fault [Fault (-1)]
Torque control macro Note: The torque control macro requires that the BMIO-01 module (option +L538) is connected to the drive.
You can use this macro for applications in which torque control of the motor is required. These are typically tension applications, where a particular tension needs to be maintained in the mechanical system.
The control program reads the torque reference from analog input AI2, typically as a current signal in the range of 020 mA (corresponding to 0100% of rated motor torque).
Connect the start/stop signal to digital input DI1. Digital input DI2 determines the direction. Digital input DI3 allows you to select speed control (EXT1) instead of torque control (EXT2). As with the PID control macro, you can use speed control to commission the system and to check the motor direction.
You can change to local control (control panel or PC tool) if you press the Loc/Rem key. By default, the local reference is speed; if you need a torque reference, change the value of parameter 19.16 to Torque.
You can activate a constant speed (by default, 300 rpm) through DI4. DI5 switches between acceleration/deceleration time sets 1 and 2. Parameters 23.1223.15 define the acceleration and deceleration times, as well as ramp shapes.
Activation of the macro changes some values from their default values. For details, see section Parameter default values for different macros on page 46.
Default control connections for the Torque control macro
Fault
XPOW External power input 1 +24VI 24 V DC, 2 A2 GND
XAI Reference voltage and analog inputs 1 +VREF 10 V DC, RL 110 kohm 2 -VREF -10 V DC, RL 110 kohm 3 AGND Ground 4 AI1+ Ext1 speed reference
0(2)10 V, Rin > 200 kohm5 AI1- 6 AI2+ Torque reference
0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm7 AI2- XAO Analog outputs
1 AO1 Motor speed rpm 020 mA, RL < 500 ohm2 AGND
3 AO2 Motor current 020 mA, RL < 500 ohm4 AGND
XD2D Drive-to-drive link 1 B Master/follower, drive-to-drive or embedded fieldbus
interface connection2 A 3 BGND
XRO1, XRO2, XRO3 Relay outputs 1 NC Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC 2 A
2 COM 3 NO 1 NC Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC 2 A
2 COM 3 NO 1 NC Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC 2 A
2 COM 3 NO
XD24 Digital interlock 1 DIIL Digital interlock. By default, not in use. 2 +24VD +24 V DC 200 mA 3 DICOM Digital input ground 4 +24VD +24 V DC 200 mA 5 DIOGND Digital input/output ground
XDIO Digital input/outputs 1 DIO1 Ramp 1 (0) / Ramp 2 (1) 2 DIO2 Run enable source
XDI Digital inputs 1 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) 2 DI2 Speed control: Forward (0) / Reverse (1) 3 DI3 Speed control (0) / Torque control (1) 4 DI4 Speed control: Constant speed 1 (1 = On) 5 DI5 Acc/Dec time set 1 (0) / set 2 (1) 6 DI6 Run enable (1 = On)
XSTO Safe torque off circuits must be closed for the drive to start. See Hardware manual of drive.
X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connection
Parameter default values for different macros Chapter Parameters shows the default values of all parameters for the ABB standard macro (factory macro). Some parameters have different default values for other macros. The tables below lists the default values for those parameters for each macro. 96.04 Macro select 1 =
ABB stan- dard
5 = AC500 Modbus RTU
12 = Alternate
13 = Motor po- tentiometer
14 = PID
28 = Torque control
10.24 RO1 source 15 = Fault (- 1)
15 = Fault (- 1)
15 = Fault (- 1)
15 = Fault (- 1)
15 = Fault (- 1)
2 = Ready run
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max
50.000 50.000 50.000 50.000 50.000 1500.000
13.12 AO1 source 3 = Output frequency
3 = Output frequency
3 = Output frequency
3 = Output frequency
3 = Output frequency
1 = Motor speed used
13.18 AO1 source max
50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 1500.000
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 5 = DI3
20.01 Ext1 commands
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir
14 = Embedded
3 = In1 Start fwd; In2
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir
1 =In1 Start 2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
2 = DI1 0 = Always off
2 = DI1 2 = DI1 2 = DI1 2 = DI1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
3 = DI2 0 = Always off
3 = DI2 3 = DI2 0 = Always off
3 = DI2
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
20.06 Ext2 commands
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1 = In1 Start
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
2 = DI1
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
3 = DI2
20.12 Run enable 1 source
1 = Selected
1 = Selected 1 = Selected
1 = Selected
10 = DIO1 11 = DIO2
21.05 Emergency stop source
1= Inactive (true)
1= Inactive (true)
1= Inactive (true)
1= Inactive (true)
1= Inactive (true)
1= Inactive (true)
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
1 = AI1 scaled
8 = EFB ref1 1 = AI1 scaled
15 = Motor potentiomet
16 = PID 1 = AI1 scaled
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero
22.22 Constant speed sel1
4 = DI3 0 = Always off
4 = DI3 10 = DIO1 5 = Always offAlways
5 = DI4
22.23 Constant speed sel2
5 = Always offAlways
0 = Always off
5 = Always offAlways
0 = Always off
0 = Always off
5 = DI4
96.04 Macro select 1 = ABB stan- dard
5 = AC500 Modbus RTU
12 = Alternate
13 = Motor po- tentiometer
14 = PID
28 = Torque control
22.71 Motor potentiometer function
0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled (init at power-up)
0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled
22.73 Motor potentiometer up source
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
4 = DI3 0 = Not selected
Not used
22.74 Motor potentiometer down source
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
5 = DI4 0 = Not selected
Not used
23.11 Ramp set selection
10 = DIO1 0 = Acc/Dec time 1
10 = DIO1 0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
10 = DIO1
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
1 = AI1 scaled
8 = EFB ref1 1 = AI1 scaled
15 = Motor potentiomet
16 = PID 1 = AI1 scaled
28.15 Ext1 frequency ref2
0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero 0 = Zero
28.22 Constant frequency sel1
4 = DI3 0 = Always off
4 = DI3 10 = DIO1 5 = DI4 4 = DI3
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
5 = DI4 0 = Always off
5 = DI4 0 = Always off
0 = Always off
5 = DI4
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
10 = DIO1 0 = Acc/Dec time 1
10 =DIO1 0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
40.07 Process PID operation
0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 2 = On when drive running
0 = Off
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
11 = AI1 percent
11 = AI1 percent
11 = AI1 percent
11 = AI1 percent
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
2 = Internal setpoint
0 = Not selected
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
3 = DI2 0 = Not selected
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
4 = DI3 0 = Not selected
40.32 Set 1 gain 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
40.33 Set 1 integration time
60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
5 Program features
Contents Local and external control locations Operating modes and motor control modes Drive configuration and programming Control interfaces Motor control Application control DC voltage control Limit to limit control Safety and protections Diagnostics Miscellaneous
Local and external control locations There are two main control locations: local and external. Select the control by pressing the Loc/Rem key on the panels, or from the Drive Composer PC tool.
Local control The control commands are given from control panels or from a PC equipped with Drive Composer when the drive is in local control. Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control panel overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control.
Changing the control location to local can be prevented by parameter 19.17 Local control disable.
Note: You can use both the control panel or the Drive Composer tool at the same time, but only one can be in local control at a time.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 19.17 Local control disable (page 182) and 49.05 Communication loss action (page 379).
Integrated panel, Assistant control panel (optional) or Drive
composer PC tool (optional)
Fieldbus adapter (Fxxx)
MOTOR
PLC (= Programmable logic controller)
I/O
Embedded fieldbus interface
External control
Local control
Drive
M 3~
External control When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through: the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus
adapter module) an external panel.
Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. You can select the sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location by setting parameters 20.0120.10. The operating mode can be selected separately for each location, which enables quick switching between different operating modes, for example speed and torque control. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. You can also select the source of reference for each operating mode separately, and the operation mode.Block diagram: Run enable source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for run enable for external control location EXT1.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection (page 180), 20.0120.10, and 20.30.
Timed function 13
Supervision 16
Other [bit]
DI1
DI0 2
EXT1 Run enable
EFB MCW bit 3
Select
20.12
DI1
DIO2
FBA A MCW bit 3
0
1
Off
Selected
Embedded fieldbus
Timed function
A bit in a parameter
Supervision
Fieldbus adapter
Operating modes and motor control modes The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference. The operating mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and EXT2) when the motor control mode is Vector (99.04). If the motor control mode is Scalar, the drive operation mode is fixed to frequency control mode.
An overview of the control hierarchy and different reference types and control chains is shown below.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 19 Operation mode (page 180).
Overview diagram of control hierarchy The following is a more detailed representation of the drive control hierarchy reference types and control chains.
Frequency reference Parameter group 26
Torque reference chain
Speed reference Parameter group 26
Torque reference
Torque reference Parameter group 26
Torque reference
Process PID
Vector motor control mode Scalar motor control mode
Frequency controllerTorque controller
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection
Torque reference source selection and
modification
Speed reference source selection I
Frequency reference source selection and
modification
Speed reference source selection II
Speed reference ramping and shaping
Speed error calculation
Vector motor control mode Scalar motor control mode
Speed controller
Process PID controller
Torque limitation
Reference selection for torque controller
Frequency controllerTorque controller
Speed control mode In speed control mode, the motor follows a speed reference given to the drive. This mode can be used with either estimated or measured speed used as feedback.
Speed control mode is available in both local and external control locations. It is supported in vector motor control only.
Speed control uses speed reference chain. Select speed reference with parameters in group 22 Speed reference selection on page 212.
Torque control mode In torque control mode, the motor torque follows a torque reference given to the drive. Torque control mode is available in both local and external control locations. It is supported in vector motor control only.
Torque control uses torque reference chain. Select torque reference with parameters in group 26 Torque reference chain on page 240.
Frequency control mode In frequency control mode, the motor follows the drive output frequency reference. Frequency control is available in both local and external control location. It is supported in scalar motor control only.
Frequency control uses frequency reference chain. Select frequency reference with parameters in group 28 Frequency reference chain on page 247.
Special control modes In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, the following special operating modes are available: Process PID control. For more information, see section Process PID control on
page 88. Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops. Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated. For more information, see section Jogging on page 71. Pre-magnetization: DC magnetization of the motor before start. For more
information, see section Pre-magnetization on page 78. DC hold: Locking the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation.
For more information, see section DC hold on page 78. Pre-heating (motor heating): Keeping the motor warm when the drive is stopped.
For more information, see section Pre-heating (Motor heating) on page 79.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 19 Operation mode (page180) and 99.04 Motor control mode (page 450).
Autophasing Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position of the magnetic flux of a permanent magnet synchronous motor or the magnetic axis of a synchronous reluctance motor. The motor control requires the absolute position of the rotor flux in order to control motor torque accurately.
Sensors like absolute encoders and resolvers indicate the rotor position at all times after the offset between the zero angle of rotor and that of the sensor has been established. On the other hand, a standard pulse encoder determines the rotor position when it rotates but the initial position is not known. However, a pulse encoder can be used as an absolute encoder if it is equipped with Hall sensors, albeit with coarse initial position accuracy. Hall sensors generate so-called commutation pulses that change their state six times during one revolution, so it is only known within which 60 sector of a complete revolution the initial position is.
Many encoders give a zero pulse (also called Z-pulse) once during each rotation. The position of the zero pulse is fixed. If this position is known with respect to zero position used by motor control, the rotor position at the instant of the zero pulse is also known.
Using the zero pulse improves the robustness of the rotor position measurement. The rotor position must be determined during starting because the initial value given by the encoder is zero. The autophasing routine determines the position, but there is a risk of some position error. If the zero pulse position is known in advance, the position found by autophasing can be corrected as soon as the zero pulse is detected for the first time after starting.
Absolute encoder/resolver
Rotor
N
S
The autophasing routine is performed with permanent magnet synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors in the following cases:
1. One-time measurement of the rotor and encoder position difference when an absolute encoder, a resolver, or an encoder with commutation signals is used
2. At every power-up when an incremental encoder is used
3. With open-loop motor control, repetitive measurement of the rotor position at every start
4. When the position of the zero pulse must be measured before the first start after power-up.
Note: In closed-loop control, autophasing is performed automatically after the motor identification run (ID run). Autophasing is also performed automatically before starting when necessary.
In open-loop control, the zero angle of the rotor is determined before starting. In closed-loop control, the actual angle of the rotor is determined with autophasing when the sensor indicates zero angle. The offset of the angle must be determined because the actual zero angles of the sensor and the rotor do not usually match. The autophasing mode determines how this operation is done both in open-loop and closed-loop control.
The rotor position offset used in motor control can also be given by the user see parameter 98.15 Position offset user. Note that the autophasing routine also writes its result into this parameter. The results are updated even if user settings are not enabled by 98.01 User motor model mode.
Note: In open-loop control, the motor always turns when it is started as the shaft is turned towards the remanence flux.
Bit 4 of 06.21 Drive status word 3 indicates if the rotor position has already been determined.
Autophasing modes
The ACS380 uses turning mode (see parameter 21.13 Autophasing mode).
The turning mode (Turning) is the most robust and accurate method. In turning mode, the motor shaft is turned back and forward (360/polepairs) in order to determine the rotor position. In case 3 (open-loop control), the shaft is turned only in one direction and the angle is smaller.
The drive is capable of determining the rotor position when started into a running motor in open-loop or closed-loop control. In this situation, the setting of 21.13 Autophasing mode has no effect.
The autophasing routine can fail and therefore it is recommended to perform the routine several times and check the value of parameter 98.15 Position offset user.
An autophasing fault (3385 Autophasing) can occur with a running motor if the estimated angle of the motor differs too much from the measured angle. This could be caused by, for example, the following: The encoder is slipping on the motor shaft An incorrect value has been entered into 98.15 Position offset user The motor is already turning before the autophasing routine is started Turning mode is selected in 21.13 Autophasing mode but the motor shaft is
locked The wrong motor type is selected in 99.03 Motor type Motor ID run has failed.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 06.21 Drive status word 3 (page 145), 21.13 Autophasing mode (page 90), 98.15 Position offset user (page 449), 99.03 Motor type (page 449), and 99.13 ID run requested (page 454).
Drive configuration and programming The drive control program is divided into two parts: firmware program application program
Drive configuring program
The firmware program performs the main control functions, including speed, torque and frequency control, drive logic (start/stop), I/O, feedback, communication and protection functions. Firmware functions are configured and programmed with parameters, and can be extended by application programming
Application program Firmware
Speed control Torque control Frequency control Drive logic I/O interface Fieldbus interface Protections
Parameter interface
Function block program
Standard block library
M
Programming via parameters Parameters configure all of the standard drive operations and can be set via the integrated panel, as described in chapter Control panel an external panel the Drive Composer PC tool, as described in Drive Composer PC tool users
manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]), or the fieldbus interface, as described in chapters Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter.
All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive. However, if an external +24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit, it is highly recommended to force a save by using parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually before powering down the control unit after any parameter changes have been made.
If necessary, the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96.06 Parameter restore.
Adaptive programming Conventionally, you can control the operation of the drive by parameters. However, the standard parameters have a fixed set of choices or a setting range. To further customize the operation of the drive, an adaptive program can be constructed out of a set of function blocks.
The Drive Composer PC tool (version 1.11 or later, available separately) has an Adaptive programming feature with a graphical user interface for building the custom program. The function blocks include the usual arithmetic and logical functions, as well as e.g., selection, comparison and timer blocks. The adaptive program is executed on a 10 ms time level.
The physical inputs, drive status information, actual values, constants and parameters can be used as the input for the program. The output of the program can be used e.g., as a start signal, external event or reference, or connected to the drive outputs. See the table below for a listing of the available inputs and outputs.
If you connect the output of the adaptive program to a selection parameter that is a pointer parameter, the selection parameter will be write-protected.
Example: If parameter 31.01 External event 1 source is connected to an adaptive programming block output, the parameter value is shown as Adaptive program on a control panel or PC-tool. The parameter is write-protected (= the selection cannot be changed).
The status of the adaptive program is shown by parameter 07.30 Adaptive program status.The adaptive program needs to be enabled for programming and program usage (see parameter 96.70 Disable adaptive program).
For more information, see the Adaptive programming application guide (3AXD50000028574 [English]).
1) Available only if I/O and Modbus module is connected and in use.
Inputs available to the adaptive program Input Source I/O DI1 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0 DI2 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1 DI3 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2 1) DI4 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3 1) AI1 12.11 AI1 actual value 1) AI2 12.21 AI2 actual value 1) DIO1 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0 1) DIO2 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1 1) Actual signals Motor speed 01.01 Motor speed used Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency Motor current 01.07 Motor current Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque Motor shaft power 01.17 Motor shaft power Status Enabled 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 0 Inhibited 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1 Ready to start 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 3 Tripped 06.11 Main status word, bit 3 At setpoint 06.11 Main status word, bit 8 Limiting 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 7 Ext1 active 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 10 Ext2 active 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 11 Data storage Data storage 1 real32 47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Data storage 2 real32 47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Data storage 3 real32 47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Data storage 4 real32 47.04 Data storage 4 real32
Outputs available to the adaptive program Output Target I/O RO1 10.24 RO1 source AO1 13.12 AO1 source 2) DIO1 11.06 DIO1 output source 2) DIO2 11.10 DIO2 output source 2) Start control Ext1/Ext2 selection 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Run enable 1 20.12 Run enable 1 source Ext1 in1 cmd 20.03 Ext1 in1 source
2) Available only if I/O and Modbus module is connected and in use.
Adaptive program fault and aux code formats
The format of the aux code:
Ext1 in2 cmd 20.04 Ext2 in2 source Ext1 in3 cmd 20.05 Ext1 in3 source Ext2 in1 cmd 20.08 Ext2 in1 source Ext2 in2 cmd 20.09 Ext2 in2 source Ext2 in3 cmd 20.10 Ext2 in3 source Fault reset 31.11 Fault reset selection Speed control Ext1 speed reference 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Speed proportional gain 25.02 Speed proportional gain Speed integration time 25.03 Speed integration time Acceleration time 1 23.12 Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 Frequency control Ext1 frequency reference 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Torque control Ext1 torque reference 26.11 Torque ref1 source Ext2 torque reference 26.12 Torque ref2 source Limit function Minimum torque 2 30.21 Min torque 2 source Maximum torque 2 30.22 Max torque 2 source Events External event 1 31.01 External event 1 source External event 2 31.03 External event 2 source External event 3 31.05 External event 3 source External event 4 31.07 External event 4 source External event 5 31.09 External event 5 source Data Storage Data storage 1 real32 47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Data storage 2 real32 47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Data storage 3 real32 47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Data storage 4 real32 47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Process PID Set 1 setpoint 1 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source Set 1 setpoint 2 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source Set 1 feedback 1 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source Set 1 feedback 2 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source Set 1 gain 40.32 Set 1 gain Set 1 integration time 40.33 Set 1 integration time Set 1 tracking mode 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Set 1 track reference 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
Bits 24-31: State number Bits 16-23: block number Bits 0-15: error code
Outputs available to the adaptive program Output Target
If the state number is zero but the block number has a value, the fault is related to a function block in the base program. If both state number and block number are zero, the fault is a generic fault that is not related to a specific block.
Sequence program
An adaptive program can contain base program and sequence program parts. Base program is run continuously when adaptive program is in running mode. The functionality of the base program is programmed using function blocks and system inputs and outputs.
Sequence program is a state machine. This means that only one state of the sequence program is run at a time. You can create a sequence program by adding states and programming the state programs using the same program elements as in the base program. You can program state transitions by adding state transition outputs to the state programs. The state transition rules are programmed using function blocks.
The number of the active state of the sequence program is shown by parameter 07.31 AP sequence state.
Control interfaces The number of inputs and outputs depend on the product variant and if the drive is equipped with any optional I/O extension modules.
S variant: 4 x Digital Inputs 2 x Digital Inputs/Outputs 2 x Analog Inputs 1 x Analog Output 1 x Relay Output
C variant: 2 x Digital Inputs 1 x Relay Output
Programmable analog inputs There are max two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage (0/210 V) or current (0/420 mA) input by a switch on the control unit. Each input can be filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 12 Standard AI (page 163).
Programmable analog outputs There is max one current (020mA) analog output. The output can be filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 13 Standard AO (page170).
Programmable digital inputs and outputs There are max four digital inputs, and two digital inputs/outputs (I/O that can be set as either an input or an output).
Digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be used as frequency input and digital outputs DIO1 and DIO2 can be used as frequency output.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150) and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO (page 156).
Programmable relay outputs There is one relay output as standard. The signal indicated by the output can be selected by parameters.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150).
Programmable I/O extensions Inputs and outputs can be added by using I/O extension modules.
The table below shows the number of I/O on the control unit as well as optional I/O extension modules.
Note: The configuration parameter group 15 I/O extension module (page 175) contains parameters that display the values of the inputs on the extension module.
Location Digital inputs
(DI)
Digital outputs
(DO)
Digital I/Os (DIO)
Analog inputs
(AI)
Analog outputs
(AO)
Relay outputs
(RO) Base unit 2 — — — — 1 BREL — — — — — 4 BIO-01 (original model)
3 1 — 1 — —
BIO-01 (2020 revision)
Max 3 Max. 1 — 1 Max. 1 —
These parameters are the only way of utilizing the inputs on an I/O extension module as signal sources.
BIO-01 extension module
ABB introduced an updated revision of the BIO-01 extension module in 2020. The firmware supports both the 2020 revision and original BIO-01 extension modules.
The new BIO-01 has two DIP switches to specify the port usage. One switch changes S1 port from digital output (DO1) to analog output (AO1) and the second switch S2 port from digital input (DI3) to digital output (DO1).
Note that the new BIO-01 has maximum one digital output (DO1) (the combination of setting the DIP switches so that both ports would be digital outputs is not supported).Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 15 I/O extension module (page 175) and 05.99 BIO-01 DIP switch status.
Fieldbus control The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its fieldbus interfaces. See chapters Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) (page 382), 51 FBA A settings (page 388), 52 FBA A data in (page 390), 53 FBA A data out (page 391) and 58 Embedded fieldbus (page 391).
Motor control
Motor types The drive supports the following motor types: Asynchronous AC induction motors Permanent magnet (PM) motors Synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM).
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 99.03 Motor type (page 449).
Motor identification The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 99.13 ID run requested (page 454).
Power loss ride-through See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 103.
Vector control Vector control is the motor control mode which is intended for applications where high control accuracy is needed. It requires an identification run at startup. Vector control cannot be used in all applications.
The switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required stator flux and motor torque. The switching frequency is changed only if the actual torque and stator flux values differ from their reference values by more than the allowed hysteresis. The reference value for the torque controller comes from the speed controller or directly from an external torque reference source.
Motor control requires measurement of the DC voltage and two motor phase currents. Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space. Motor torque is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and the rotor current. By utilizing the identified motor model, the stator flux estimate is improved. Actual motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control.
The main difference between traditional control and vector control is that torque control operates at the same time level as the power switch control. There is no separate voltage and frequency controlled PWM modulator; the output stage switching is wholly based on the electromagnetic state of the motor.
The best motor control accuracy is achieved by activating a separate motor identification run (ID run).
See also section Speed control performance figures on page 74.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 99.04 Motor control mode (page 450) and 99.13 ID run requested (page 454).
Reference ramping Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed, torque and frequency reference.
With a speed or frequency reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and the value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling. The user can switch between two preset ramp sets using a binary source such as a digital input. For speed reference, also the shape of the ramp can be controlled.
With a torque reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the reference to change between zero and nominal motor torque (01.30 Nominal torque scale).
Variable slope
Variable slope controls the slope of the speed ramp during a reference change. With this feature a constantly variable ramp can be used.
Variable slope is only supported in remote control.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 23.28 Variable slope enable (page 231) and 23.29 Variable slope rate (page 231).
Special acceleration/deceleration ramps
The acceleration/deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined separately; see section Jogging on page 71.
The change rate of the motor potentiometer function (page 119) is adjustable. The same rate applies in both directions.
A deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop (Off3 mode).
Settings and diagnostics
Speed reference ramping — Parameters: 23.1123.15, 23.32 Shape time 1 (page 232), 23.33 Shape time 2 (page 232) and 46.01 Speed scaling (page 373).
Torque reference ramping — Parameters: 01.30 Nominal torque scale (page 130), 26.18 Torque ramp up time (page 244) and 26.19 Torque ramp down time (page 244).
Frequency reference ramping — Parameters: 28.7128.75 and 46.02 Frequency scaling (page 374).
Jogging — Parameters: 23.20 Acc time jogging (page 230) and 23.21 Dec time jogging (page 230).
Motor potentiometer — Parameters: 22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time (page 224).
Emergency stop (Off3 mode) — Parameters: 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 230).
Constant speeds/frequencies Constant speeds and frequencies are predefined references that can be quickly activated, for example, through digital inputs. It is possible to define up to 7 speeds for speed control and 7 constant frequencies for frequency control.
WARNING: Speeds and frequencies override the normal reference irrespective of where the reference is coming from.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 22 Speed reference selection (page 212) and 28 Frequency reference chain (page 247).
Critical speeds/frequencies Critical speeds (sometimes called skip speeds) can be predefined for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for example, mechanical resonance problems.
The critical speeds function prevents the reference from dwelling within a critical band for extended times. When a changing reference enters a critical range, the output of the function freezes until the reference exits the range. Any instant change in the output is smoothed out by the ramping function further in the reference chain.
When the drive is limiting the allowed output speeds/frequencies, it limits to the absolutely lowest critical speed (critical speed low or critical frequency low) when accelerating from standstill, unless the speed reference is over the upper critical speed/ frequency limit.
Example
A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make the drive avoid these speed ranges, enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51, and set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Settings and diagnostics
Critical speeds — Parameters: 22.5122.57. Critical frequencies — Parameters: 28.5128.57. Function input (speed) — Parameters: 22.01 Speed ref unlimited (page 212). Function output (speed) — Parameters: 22.87 Speed reference act 7 (page 225). Function input (frequency) — Parameters: 28.96 Frequency ref act 7 (page 261). Function output (frequency) — Parameters: 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited (page
261).
Speed controller autotune You can adjust the speed controller of the drive automatically with the autotune function. Autotuning is based on an estimation of the mechanical time constant (inertia) of the motor and machine.
The autotune routine will run the motor through a series of acceleration/deceleration cycles. The number of cycles can be adjusted by parameter 25.40. Higher values will produce more accurate results, especially if the difference between initial and maximum speeds is small.
The maximum torque reference used during autotuning will be the initial torque (i.e. torque when the routine is activated) plus the value of 25.38, unless limited by the maximum torque limit (group 30 Limits) or the nominal motor torque (99 Motor data). The calculated maximum speed during the routine is the initial speed (ie. speed when
540
690
1380
1560
1 Par. 22.52 = 540 rpm
2 Par. 22.53 = 690 rpm
3 Par. 22.54 = 1380 rpm
4 Par. 22.55 = 1560 rpm
1 2 3 4
22.01 Speed ref unlimited (rpm) (output of function)
22.87 Speed reference act 7 (rpm) (input of function)
the routine is activated) + the value of 25.39, unless limited by parameter 30.12 or 99.09.
The diagram below shows the behavior of speed and torque during the autotune routine. In this example, parameter 25.40 (Autotune repeat times) is set to 2.
Notes
If the drive cannot produce the requested braking power during the routine, the results will be based on the acceleration stages only, and will not be as accurate as with full braking power.
The motor will exceed the calculated maximum speed slightly at the end of each acceleration stage.
Initial torque + [25.38]
t
Initial torque
Initial speed + [25.39]
Initial speed
Before activating the autotune routine
The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are the following: User has started and the drive has successfully completed the motor identification
run (ID run) — see parameter 99.13 User has defined the speed and torque limits (group 30 Limits) User has monitored the speed feedback for noise, vibrations and other
disturbances caused by the mechanics of the system (Drive Composer PC tool), and user has set the following parameters in order to eliminate the disturbances: speed feedback filtering (group 90 Feedback selection) speed error filtering (group 24 Speed reference conditioning), and zero speed (21.06 and 21.07).
User has started the drive and it is running in speed control mode (99.04).
After these conditions have been fulfilled, user can activate autotuning by parameter 25.33 (or the signal source selected by it).
Autotune modes
Autotuning can be performed in three different ways depending on the setting of parameter 25.34. The selections Smooth, Normal and Tight define how the drive torque reference should react to a speed reference step after tuning. The selection Smooth will produce a slow but robust response; Tight will produce a fast response but possibly too high gain values for some applications. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically 120%).
%
t
n
CB D
nN
A
A: Undercompensated B: Normally tuned (autotuning) C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated speed controller
Autotune results
At the end of a successful autotune routine, its results are automatically transferred into the following parameters: 25.02 Speed proportional gain (proportional gain of the speed controller) 25.03 Speed integration time (integration time of the speed controller) 25.06 Acceleration Compensation Derivation Time (derivation time for
acceleration compensation) 25.37 Mechanical time constant (mechanical time constant of the motor and
machine).
Nevertheless, it is still possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time.
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 25.3325.40. Events: A warning message, AF90 Speed controller autotuning (page 502), will
be generated if the autotune routine does not complete successfully.
Derivative
Proportional, integral
Derivative acceleration compensation
Torque reference
Speed reference
Actual speed
Error value-
+ ++ +
Rush control Rush control is automatically on when the operation mode is torque. In torque control, the motor could potentially rush if the load were suddenly lost. The control program has a rush control function that decreases the torque reference whenever the motor speed exceeds the set minimum speed or maximum speed.
The program sets the proportional gain to 10.0 and integration time to 2.0 s.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 30.11 Minimum speed (page 264), 30.12 Maximum speed (page 265) and 31.30 Overspeed trip margin (page 281).
Encoder echo support The connection of one encoder to several drives with the BTAC-02 encoder interface module can be done by using a daisy chain wiring scheme. This means wiring channels A, B, Z and GND of multiple encoder modules together with the encoder.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 90 Feedback selection (page 424), 91 Encoder module settings (page 426) and 92 Encoder 1 configuration (page 426).
Jogging The jogging function enables the use of a momentary switch to briefly rotate the motor. The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to control the machinery locally.
Two jogging functions (1 and 2) are available, each with their own activation sources and references. The signal sources are selected by parameters 20.26 and 20.27. When jogging is activated, the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging
Motor speed
Time
Overspeed trip level
Overspeed trip level
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
0
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
30.12
30.11
Rush control active
speed along the defined jogging acceleration ramp. After the activation signal switches off, the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp.
The figure and table below provide an example of how the drive operates during jogging. In the example, the ramp stop mode is used (21.03 Stop mode).
Jog cmd = State of source set by 20.26 or 20.27 Jog enable = State of source set by 20.25 Start cmd = State of drive start command.
Phase Jog cmd
Jog enable
Start cmd Description
1-2 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
3-4 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
4-5 0 1 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
6-7 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
7-8 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
8-9 0 1->0 0 Drive is stopped. As long as the jog enable signal is on, start commands are ignored. After jog enable switches off, a fresh start command is required.
9-10 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected acceleration ramp (23.1123.15).
10-11 x 0 1 Drive follows the speed reference.
2 31 4 5 6 8 11 13 1415 16 t7 189 1210 17
Jog cmd
Jog enable
Start cmd
Speed
Notes: Jogging is not available when the drive is in local control. Jogging cannot be enabled when the drive start command is on, or the drive
started when jogging is enabled. Starting the drive after the jog enable switches off requires a fresh start command.
WARNING! If jogging is enabled and activated while the start command is on, jogging will activate as soon as the start command switches off.
If both jogging functions are activated, the one that was activated first has priority. Jogging can be used in vector and scalar control modes. The inching functions activated through fieldbus (06.01 bits 89) use the
references and ramp times defined for jogging, but do not require the jog enable signal.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 20.25 Jog enable (page 194), 20.26 Jog 1 start (page 195), 20.27 Jog 2 start (page 196), 22.42 Jogging 1 ref (page 221), 22.43 Jogging 2 ref (page 221), 23.20 Acc time jogging (page 230), 23.21 Dec time jogging (page 230), 28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref (page 256), and 28.43 Jogging 2 frequency ref (page 256).
11-12 x 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected deceleration ramp (23.1123.15).
12-13 x 0 0 Drive is stopped.
13-14 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected acceleration ramp (23.1123.15).
14-15 x 0->1 1 Drive follows the speed reference. As long as the start command is on, the jog enable signal is ignored. If the jog enable signal is on when the start command switches off, jogging is enabled immediately.
15-16 0->1 1 0 Start command switches off. The drive starts to decelerate along the selected deceleration ramp (23.1123.15). When the jog command switches on, the decelerating drive adopts the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
16-17 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
17-18 0 1->0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
Phase Jog cmd
Jog enable
Start cmd Description
Speed control performance figures The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control with induction motor (asynchronous motor).
Note: By activating the energy optimizer parameter 45.11 it is possible to improve static accuracy at low speeds with low torque. This will slightly reduce the torque dynamics if rapid torque response is required.
Torque control performance figures The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control.
100
t (s)
T TN
(%)
Tload
nact-nref nN
Area < 10% s
TN = rated motor torque nN = rated motor speed nact = actual speed nref = speed reference
Speed control Performance Static accuracy 20% of motor
nominal slip Dynamic accuracy < 1% s with 100%
torque step
t (s)
TN = rated motor torque Tref = torque reference Tact = actual torque
Torque control Performance Non-linearity 5% with nominal
torque ( 20% at the most demanding operating point)
Torque step rise time < 10 ms with nominal torque
100
< 5 ms
90
10
Tref
Tact
T TN
(%)
Scalar motor control Scalar motor control is the default motor control method. It is suitable for applications which do not require the control accuracy available in vector control. In scalar control, you control the drive output frequency reference, and you do not need to do any motor identification run at the first start.
It is recommended to activate scalar motor control mode in the following special situations: In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification (ID run)
If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive Note: During this time, do not activate the motor phase loss fault (31.19 Motor phase loss) as the drive cannot measure the motor current accurately.
If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes) If the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer.
In scalar control, some features are not available.
See also section Operating modes and motor control modes on page 52.
IR compensation for scalar motor control
IR compensation (also known as voltage boost) is available only when the motor control mode is scalar. When IR compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is useful in applications that require a high break-away torque.
In vector control, no IR compensation is possible or needed as it is applied automatically.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 28 Frequency reference chain (page 247), 97.13 IR compensation (page 444) and 99.04 Motor control mode (page 450).
User load curve The User load curve provides a supervisory function that monitors an input signal as a function of frequency or speed, and load. It shows the status of the monitored signal and can give a warning or fault based on the violation of a user defined profile.
Motor voltage
f (Hz)
IR compensation
No compensation
The user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, or just one of them. Each curve is formed by five points that represent the monitored signal as a function of frequency or speed.
In the example below, the user load curve is constructed from the motor nominal torque to which a 10% margin is added and subtracted. The margin curves define a working envelope for the motor so that excursions outside the envelope can be supervised, timed and detected.
An overload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously over the overload curve for a defined time. An underload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously under the underload for a defined time.
Overload can be for example used to monitor for a saw blade hitting a knot or fan load profiles becoming too high.
Underload can be for example used to monitor for load dropping and breaking of conveyer belts or fan belts.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 37 User load curve (page 329).
Motor torque / Nominal torque
1 2
3
Output frequency (Hz) 1 = Overload curve (five points) 2 = Nominal process load curve 3 = Underload curve (five points)
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.2
0.4
0.0
-0.2 0 10 20 30 40 50
U/f ratio The U/f function is only available in scalar motor control mode, which uses frequency control.
The function has two modes: linear and squared.
In linear mode, the ratio of voltage to frequency is constant below the field weakening point. This is used in constant torque applications where it may be necessary to produce torque at or near the rated torque of the motor throughout the frequency range
In squared mode, the ratio of the voltage to frequency increases as the square of the frequency below the field weakening point. This is typically used in centrifugal pump or fan applications. For these applications, the torque required follows the square relationship with frequency. Therefore, if the voltage is varied using the square relationship, the motor operates at improved efficiency and lower noise levels in these applications.
The U/f function cannot be used with energy optimization; if parameter 45.11 Energy optimizer is set to Enable, parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is ignored.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 97.20 U/F ratio (page 445).
Flux braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking. Therefore, flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of flux braking are: The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
TBr
20
40
60
(%) Motor speed
No flux braking
Flux braking
TBr = Braking torque = 100 Nm
Flux braking
No flux braking t (s) f (Hz)
The cooling of the induction motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor.
Flux braking can be used with induction motors and permanent magnet motors.
Two braking power levels are available: Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux
braking is disabled. The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive heating of the motor.
Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking energy to motor thermal energy. Braking time is shorter compared to moderate braking. In cyclic use, motor heating may be significant.
WARNING: The motor needs to be rated to absorb the thermal energy generated by flux braking.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 97.05 Flux braking (page 442).
DC magnetization The drive has different magnetization functions for different phases of motor start/rotation/stop: pre-magnetization, DC hold, post-magnetization and pre-heating (motor heating).
Pre-magnetization
Pre-magnetization refers to DC magnetization of the motor before start. Depending on the selected start mode (vector or scalar) pre-magnetization can be applied to guarantee the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of the nominal torque of the motor. By adjusting the pre-magnetization time, it is possible to synchronize the motor start and, for example, the release of a mechanical brake.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.01 Vector start mode (page 200), 21.19 Scalar start mode (page 207) and 21.02 Magnetization time (page 201).
DC hold
The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation. DC hold is activated by parameter 21.08. When both the reference and motor speed drop below a certain level, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal
current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.10. When the reference exceeds parameter 21.09, normal drive operation continues.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.08 DC current control (page 205), 21.09 DC hold speed (page 205) and 21.10 DC current reference (page 205).
Post-magnetization
The function keeps the motor magnetized for a certain period after stopping. This is to prevent the machinery from moving under load, for example before a mechanical brake can be applied. Post-magnetization is activated by parameter 21.08. The magnetization current is set by parameter 21.10.
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.01 Vector start mode (page 200), 21.02 Magnetization time (page 201), 21.03 Stop mode (page 201), 21.08 DC current control (page 205), 21.09 DC hold speed (page 205) and 21.11 Post magnetization time (page 205).
Pre-heating (Motor heating)
The pre-heating function keeps the motor warm and prevents condensation inside the motor by feeding it with DC current when the drive has been stopped. The heating can only be activated when the drive is in the stopped state, and starting the drive stops the heating.
When pre-heating is activated and the stop command is given, pre-heating starts immediately if the drive is running below the zero speed limit (see bit 0 in parameter 06.19 Speed control status word). If the drive is running above the zero speed limit,
Reference
Motor speed DC hold
21.09 DC hold speed
t
t
pre-heating is delayed by the time defined by parameter 21.15 Pre-heating time delay to prevent excessive current.
The function can be defined to be always active when the drive is stopped or it can be activated by a digital input, fieldbus, timed function or supervision function. For example, with the help of signal supervision function, the heating can be activated by a thermal measurement signal from the motor.
The pre-heating current fed to the motor can be defined as 030% of the nominal motor current.
Notes: In applications where the motor keeps rotating for a long time after the modulation
is stopped, it is recommended to use ramp stop with pre-heating to prevent a sudden pull at the rotor when the pre-heating is activated.
The heating function requires that STO is not triggered. The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted. Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.14 Pre-heating input source (page 206), 21.15 Pre-heating time delay and 21.16 Pre-heating current (page 206).
Energy optimization The Energy optimization function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 120% depending on load torque and speed.
Note: With a permanent magnet motor and synchronous reluctance motor, energy optimization is always enabled.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 45.11 Energy optimizer (page 370).
Switching frequency The drive has two switching frequencies: reference switching frequency and minimum switching frequency. The drive tries to keep the highest allowed switching frequency (= reference switching frequency) if thermally possible, and then adjusts dynamically between the reference and minimum switching frequencies depending on the drive temperature. When the drive reaches the minimum switching frequency (= lowest allowed switching frequency), it starts to limit output current as the heating up continues.
For derating, see the hardware manual of the drive.
Example 1: If you need to fix the switching frequency to a certain value as with some external filters, e.g. with EMC C1 filters (see the hardware manual), set both the reference and the minimum switching frequency to this value and the drive will retain this switching frequency.
Example 2: If the reference switching frequency is set to 12 kHz and the minimum switching frequency is set to 1.5 kHz (or 1 kHz), the drive maintains the highest possible switching frequency to reduce motor noise and only when the drive heats it will decrease the switching frequency. This is useful, for example, in applications where low noise is necessary but higher noise can be tolerated when the full output current is needed.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 97.01 Switching frequency reference (page 441) and 97.02 Minimum switching frequency (page 441).
Speed compensated stop Speed compensation stop is available for example for applications where a conveyer needs to travel a certain distance after receiving the stop command. At maximum speed, the motor is stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp, after the application of a user defined delay to adjust the distance traveled. Below maximum speed, stop is delayed still more by running the drive at current speed before the motor is ramped to a stop. As shown in the figure, the distance traveled after the stop command is the same in both cases, that is, area A + area B equals area C.
Speed compensation does not take into account shape times (23.32 Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2). Positive shape times lengthen the distance traveled.
Used speed
A
Motor speed
Max. speed
B
C
t (s)
Area A + Area B = Area C
Stop command
D1
D1 = Delay defined by parameter 21.31
D2 = Additional delay calculated by speed compensated stop
D2
Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction. Speed compensation is supported in both vector and scalar motor control.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.30 Speed compensated stop mode (page 211), 21.31 Speed compensated stop delay (page 211) and 21.32 Speed comp stop threshold (page 211).
Motor thermal protection The control program features two separate motor temperature monitoring functions. The temperature data sources and warning/trip limits can be set up independently for each function.
The motor temperature can be monitored using the motor thermal protection model (estimated temperature derived internally
inside the drive), or sensors installed in the windings. This will result in a more accurate motor
model.Motor thermal protection model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions:
1. When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is assumed to be at ambient temperature (defined by parameter 35.50 Motor ambient temperature). After this, when power is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C.
The motor thermal protection model fulfills standard IEC/EN 61800-5-1 ed. 2.1 requirements for thermal memory retention and speed sensitivity. The estimated temperature is retained over power down. Speed dependency is set by parameters.35.51 Motor load curve, 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point.
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter.
Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection
WARNING! IEC 60664 and IEC 61800-5-1 require double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical
equipment which are either non-conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
You have four implementation alternatives: If there is double or reinforced insulation between the sensor and the live parts of
the motor, you can connect the sensor directly to the analog/digital input(s) of the drive.
If there is basic insulation between the sensor and the live parts of the motor, you can connect the sensor to the analog/digital input(s) of the drive if all other circuits connected to the digital and analog inputs (typically extra-low voltage circuits) are protected against contact and insulated with basic insulation from other low- voltage circuits. The insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive main circuit. Note that extra-low voltage circuits (such as 24 V DC) typically do not meet these requirements. Alternative: You can connect the sensor with a basic insulation to the
analog/digital input(s) of the drive if you do not connect any other external control circuits to drive digital and analog inputs.
You can connect a sensor to a digital input of the drive via an external thermistor relay. The insulation of the relay of must be rated for the main circuit voltage of the motor.
Temperature monitoring using PTC sensors
13 PTC sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output. The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 1.6 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function calculates the resistance of the sensor and generates an indication if overtemperature is detected.
For wiring of the sensor, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.
The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of temperature.
When analog output is not available or used for other purposes, it is possible to set up a voltage divider utilizing internal resistance of a digital input. 13 PTC sensors are connected in series to 10V reference and Digital and Analog inputs. The voltage over the digital input internal resistance varies depending on the PTC resistance. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage over the sensor from the analog input and calculates the resistance.
Note: It is important to ensure that the DI used for this is not configured to start any action.
PTC analog I/O hardware connection and parameter setting example
35.11 Temperature 1 source = PTC analog I/O (20) 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source = AI1 actual value (1) 12.15 AI1 actual value = V 13.12 AO1 source = Temp sensor 1 excitation (20) 35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit = xx (set to desired value)
In this example, AI1 is used as input for Temperature 1 and AO1 is used to feed the excitation current to the PTC.
PTC AI/DI Voltage Divider tree HW connection and parameter setting example
35.11 Temperature 1 source = PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree (23) 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source = AI1 actual value (1) 12.15 AI1 actual value = V 35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit = xx (set to desired value)
In this example, AI1 is used as input for Temperature 1.
100
550
1330
4000
Ohm
T
Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors
13 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Temperature monitoring using Pt1000 sensors
13 Pt1000 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 0.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Temperature monitoring using Ni1000 sensors
One Ni1000 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Temperature monitoring using KTY84 sensors
One KTY84 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 2.0 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table on page 146 show typical KTY84 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Temperature monitoring using KTY83 sensors
One KTY83 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 1.0 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table below show typical KTY83 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
1000
2000
3000 Ohm
T (oC) -100
0
0 100 200 300
Scaling KTY84 KTY83
C ohm ohm 90 936 1569 110 1063 1774 130 1197 1993 150 1340 2225
KTY83 KTY84
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 35 Motor thermal protection (page 310).
Motor overload protection This section describes motor overload protection without using the motor thermal protection model, either with estimated or measured temperature. For protection with the motor thermal protection model, see section Motor thermal protection on page 76.
Motor overload protection is required and specified by multiple standards including the US National Electric Code (NEC), UL 508C and the common UL\IEC 61800-5-1 standard in conjunction with IEC 60947-4-1. The standards allow for motor overload protection without external temperature sensors.
The protection feature allows the user to specify the class of operation in the same manner as the overload relays are specified in standards IEC 60947-4-1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Motor overload protection requires that you specify a motor current tripping level. This is defined by a curve using parameters 35.51 Motor load curve, 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point. The tripping level is the motor current at which the overload protection will ultimately trip if the motor current remains at this level continuously.
The motor overload class (class of operation), parameter 35.57 Motor overload class, is given as the time required for the overload relay to trip when operating at 7.2 times the tripping level in the case of IEC 60947-4-1 and 6 times the tripping level in the case of NEMA ICS 2. The standards also specify the time to trip for current levels between the tripping level and the 6 times tripping level. The drive satisfies the IEC standard and NEMA standard trip times.
Using class 20 satisfies the UL 508C requirements.
The motor overload algorithm monitors the squared ratio (motor current / tripping level)2 and accumulates this over time. This is sometimes referred to as I2t protection. The accumulated value is shown with parameter 35.05 Motor overload level.
With parameter 35.56 Motor overload action you can define that when 35.05 Motor overload level reaches 88%, a motor overload warning will be generated, and when it reaches 100%, the drive will trip on the motor overload fault. The rate at which this
internal value is increased depends on the actual current, tripping level current and the overload class selected.
Parameters 35.51 Motor load curve, 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point serve a dual purpose. They determine the load curve for temperature estimate when using motor thermal protection model as well as specify the overload tripping level.
Motor overload protection fulfills standard IEC/EN 61800-5-1 ed. 2.1 requirements for thermal memory retention and speed sensitivity. The motor overload state is retained over power down. Speed dependency is set by parameters 35.51 Motor load curve, 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters common to motor thermal protection and motor overload protection: 35.51 Motor load curve, 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point.
Parameters specific to motor overload protection: 35.05 Motor overload level, 35.56 Motor overload action and 35.57 Motor overload class..
Application control
Control macros Control macros are predefined parameter edits and I/O configurations. See chapter Control macros.
Process PID control There is a built-in process PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control process such as pressure or flow in the pipe or fluid level in the container.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint). This means that user does not need to set a frequency/speed/torque reference to the drive but the drive adjust its operation according to the process PID.
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control.
The drive contains two complete sets of process PID controller settings that can be alternated whenever necessary; see parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local and external control locations on page 50.
Sleep and boost functions for process PID control
The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range. The following example visualizes the operation of the function.
Example: The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake- up delay has passed.
The user can extend the PID sleep time by the boost functionality. The boost functionality increases the process setpoint for a predetermined time before the drive enters the sleep mode.
Process PID
AI1 Process actual values
AI2
FBA
Setpoint
Speed, torque or frequency reference chain
Filter
Limitation
Wake-up level (Setpoint — Wake-up deviation [40.47])
t < tsd
Motor speed
Actual value
STOP
tsd = Sleep delay (40.44)
Sleep level (40.43)
START
Wake-up delay (40.48)
tsd
Setpoint
Time
Sleep boost step (40.46)
Sleep mode
Sleep boost time (40.45)
Time
Time
Non-inverted (40.31 = Not inverted (Ref — Fbk))
Wake-up level (Setpoint + Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Actual value
Time
Inverted (40.31 = Inverted (Fbk — Ref))
Tracking
In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection (or 41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection).The internal I term of the PID controller is set so that no transient is allowed to pass on to the output, so when the tracking mode is left, normal process control operation can be resumed without a significant bump.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.04 Macro select (page 432), groups 40 Process PID set 1(page 335) and 41 Process PID set 2 (page 353).
PID trim function The PID trim function helps to maintain the set tension either by trimming the drive main speed reference or torque reference (speed controller output).
WARNING: Make sure that the drive acceleration and deceleration time is set to 0 when using the PID trim function. This is required to do quick tension
control by speed correction.
PID trim is implemented as one of the Process PID functions (groups 40 Process PID set 1 and 41 Process PID set 2). Both PID set 1 and PID set 2 can be used for this functionality.
The trimmed output is calculated from parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual or 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. In most cases 40.01 Process PID output actual is used. This is based on the selection in parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source (for process PID set 1) or 41.56 Set 2 trim source (for process PID set 2). In most of the use cases, the value of parameter 40.56 or 41.56 is set as PID output.
The PID trim functionality in drives is used in applications where tension control of the material is essential. For example, auxiliary drives in metal process industries, infeed and outfeed of rotogravure printing machines, and surface winders.
The examples provided in this chapter are based on PID set 1. You can set the desired values for the PID trim function parameters to get the expected result.
Tension measurement Drive rollers (pull)
Speed controlled conveyor line
When PID trim is activated, bit 5 Trim mode is set to 1 in parameter 40.06 Process PID status word.
See the speed, torque and frequency reference chains in chapter Control chain diagrams for more information on the PID trim addition to the respective reference chains.
The following PID trim modes are available: Direct Proportional Combined.
Direct
The direct method is suitable when you need tension control at fixed rpm/line speed.
In this mode, the PID trim output (40.05) is relative to the maximum speed (30.12), torque (30.20) or frequency (30.14). You can make the selection with parameter 40.52.
The calculated trimmed output actual is the same throughout the speed range with respect to the stable PID output.
The 40.05 value is calculated using the following formula:
The graph below shows the PID trim output in direct mode throughout the speed range. A fixed trim speed reference is added throughout the speed range.
Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100. This is for clarity only. In real life scenarios, the PID output can vary based on the setpoint and the actual value.
Par40.05 Par40.01 100
——————— Par30.12 or 30.20 or 30.14( ) Par40.55=
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust
Drive speed reference0
40.05 Process PID trim output act
Example:
If: parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100) parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5, then:
Proportional
The proportional method is suitable for applications where tension control is required throughout the speed range but not near zero speed.
In this mode, the PID trim output actual (40.05) is relative to the reference selected by 40.53 and with 40.01 or 40.03.
It is recommended that the speed reference selected in 40.53 and the reference source in 22.11 are equal. This is required to make the proportional mode active.
In most of the use cases, the process speed reference is connected in 40.53. For example, if EXT1 control mode is used and the reference source is AI scaled, then 22.11 and 40.53 should be configured to AI1 scaled.
Parameter 40.05 is calculated using the following formula:
The below graph shows the PID trim output in proportional mode throughout the speed range. Here, the trimmed output is directly proportional to the value of parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
Par40.05 100 100 ——— 1500 0.5=
Par40.05 750=
Par40.05 Par40.01 100
——————— Par40.53 Par40.55=
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer0
40.05 Process PID trim output act
Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100. This is for understanding purpose only. In real case scenario, PID output can vary based on the setpoint and actual.
Example:
If: parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500 parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value = 750 (AI1 actual scaled value) parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100) parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5,
then:
At zero speed, the 40.05 Process PID trim output act value depends on both the 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust and 40.54 Set 1 trim mix parameter values. However, adjusting 40.54 Set 1 trim mix near to zero speed will give quick correction.
Example:
If, parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500 parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value = 750 (AI1 actual scaled value) parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100) parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix = 0.1 parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5
then
Par40.05 100 100 ——— 750 0.5=
Par40.05 375=
Par40.05 100 100 ——— 750 0.5=
Par40.05 375=
Combined
The combined mode is suitable for applications where the user needs to maintain tension from zero speed to maximum speed. The combined mode is a combination of direct and proportional modes. Here, the trim for zero speed is defined by parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix and the trim for speed greater than zero speed is defined by parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. The trim value is directly proportional to the value of parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
The process speed reference is connected in parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer. For example, if EXT1 control mode is used and the reference source is AI1 scaled, then 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer shall be configured to AI1 scaled.
The 40.05 Process PID trim output act is calculated using the following formula:
The following graph shows the trim increase in combined mode.
Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100. This is for clarity only. In real life scenarios, PID output can vary based on the setpoint and actual.
At zero speed, the 40.05 Process PID trim output act value depends on both parameters 40.54 Set 1 trim mix and 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. However, adjusting 40.54 Set 1 trim mix near to zero speed will give quick correction.
Example:
If:
Parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed Parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output Parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm
Par40.05 Par30.12 Par40.54( ) 1 Par40.54( ) Par40.53[ ]+{ } Par40.55=
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer0
40.05 Process PID trim output act
40.54 Set 1 trim mix
Par 40.55 Par 40.54
Parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled Parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled Parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500 Parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value = 750 (AI1 actual scaled value) Parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100) Parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix = 0.1 Parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 1
Then:
If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 0:
Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 0.1) + [(1 0.1) 0]} 1 Par40.05 = 150
If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 750:
Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 0.1) + [(1 0.1) 750]} 1 Par40.05 = 825
If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 1500:
Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 0.1) + [(1 0.1) 1500]} 1 Par40.05 = 1500
PID trim auto connection
Parameter 40.65 Trim auto connection activates the connection of PID trim output actual (40.05) to the respective speed, torque and frequency reference chains. The respective reference chains can be selected with 40.52 (for PID set 1) or 41.52 (for PID set 2).
Parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is also taken into consideration while passing the PID trimmed output actual (40.05) to the speed, torque and frequency reference chains. In scalar control mode, the speed trim and torque trim values are zero and in vector control mode, the frequency trim value is zero.
Par40.05 1500 0.1( ) 1 0.1( ) 0[ ]+{ } 1=
Par40.05 150=
Par40.05 1500 0.1( ) 1 0.1( ) 750[ ]+{ } 1=
Par40.05 825=
Par40.05 1500 0.1( ) 1 0.1( ) 1500[ ]+{ } 1=
Par40.05 1500=
Speed trim connection
Speed trim is added at 23.02 and 24.11 and the final speed reference after the trim addition is available in 24.01.
Torque trim connection
Torque trim is added at 26.75 Torque reference act 5 and the final torque reference after the trim addition is available in parameter 26.76 Torque reference act 6.
Frequency trim connection
Frequency trim is added at 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output and the final frequency reference is generated after the trim addition. At the moment, no parameter is available to see the final frequency reference after adding frequency trim.
Note: PID trim output auto connection is disabled in the firmware when the drive is stopped with the 21.04 Emergency stop mode value Ramp stop (Off1) or value Eme ramp stop (Off3). In other words, PID trim output actual (40.05 Process PID trim output act) will not be added to the respective speed, torque and frequency reference chains during ramp stop or emergency stop.
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
24.11 Speed correction
Speed trim
24.01 Used speed reference
+
26.75 Torque reference act 5
Torque trim
26.76 Torque reference act 6+
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
Frequency trim
Final frequency reference+
Mechanical brake control A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. The brake control logic observes the settings of parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control as well as several external signals, and moves between the states presented in the diagram on page 99. The tables below the state diagram detail the states and transitions. The timing diagram on page 101 shows an example of a close-open-close sequence.
For application example, see section Crane mechanical brake control on page 649.
Inputs of the brake control logic
The start command of the drive (bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1) is the main control source of the brake control logic. An optional external open/close signal can be selected by 44.12 Brake close request. The two signals interact as follows: Start command = 1 AND signal selected by 44.12 Brake close request = 0
Request brake to open Start command = 0 OR signal selected by 44.12 Brake close request = 1
Request brake to close
Another external signal for example, from a higher-level control system can be connected via parameter 44.11 Keep brake closed to prevent the brake from opening.
Other signals that affect the state of the control logic are brake status acknowledgment (optional, defined by parameter 44.07 Brake
acknowledge selection), bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (indicates whether the drive is ready to follow the
given reference or not), bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (indicates whether the drive is modulating or
not).
Outputs of the brake control logic
The mechanical brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output (or a digital input/output in output mode) which is then wired to the brake actuator through a relay. See the wiring example on page 102.
The brake control logic, in various states, will request the drive control logic to hold the motor, increase the torque, or ramp down the speed. These requests are visible in parameter 44.01 Brake control status.
Brake state diagram
State descriptions
State name Description BRAKE DISABLED Brake control is disabled (44.06 = 0, and 44.01 b4 = 0). The open signal is
active (44.01 b0 = 1). BRAKE OPENING BRAKE OPENING WAIT Brake has been requested to open. The drive logic is requested to increase the
torque up to opening torque to hold the load in place (44.01 b1 = 1 and b2 = 1). The state of 44.11 is checked; if it is not 0 within a reasonable time, the drive trips on a 71A5 fault *).
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
BRAKE DISABLED BRAKE OPENING
BRAKE OPENING WAIT
BRAKE OPENING DELAY
BRAKE CLOSED
BRAKE OPENBRAKE CLOSING
(from any state)
1
(from any state)
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
7
8
9
11
10
12
State change conditions ( )
BRAKE OPENING DELAY Opening conditions have been met and open signal activated (44.01 Brake control status b0 is set). The opening torque request is removed (44.01 Brake control status b1 0). The load is held in place by the speed control of the drive until 44.08 Brake open delay elapses. At this point, if 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge, the logic proceeds to BRAKE OPEN state. If an acknowledgement signal source has been selected, its state is checked; if the state is not brake open, the drive trips on a 71A3 Mechanical brake opening failed fault *).
BRAKE OPEN The brake is open (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). Hold request is removed (44.01 Brake control status b2 = 0), and the drive is allowed to follow the reference.
BRAKE CLOSING BRAKE CLOSING WAIT Brake has been requested to close. The drive logic is requested to ramp down
the speed to a stop (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The open signal is kept active (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until the motor speed is below 44.14 Brake close level for the time defined by 44.15 Brake close level delay.
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY Closing conditions have been met. The open signal is deactivated (44.01 Brake control status b0 0). The ramp-down request is maintained (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until 44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed. At this point, if 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge, the logic proceeds to BRAKE CLOSED state. If an acknowledgment signal source has been selected, its state is checked; if the state is not brake closed, the drive generates an A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed warning. If 44.17 Brake fault function = Fault, the drive will trip on a 71A2 Mechanical brake closing failed fault after 44.18 Brake fault delay.
BRAKE CLOSED The brake is closed (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 0). The drive is not necessarily modulating. Note concerning open-loop (encoder-less) applications: If the brake is kept closed by a brake close request (either from parameter 44.12) against a modulating drive for longer than 5 seconds, the brake is forced to closed state and the drive trips on a fault, 71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed.
*) A warning can alternatively be selected by parameter 44.17 Brake fault function; if so, the drive will keep modulating and remain in this state.
1 Brake control disabled (44.06 Brake control enable 0). 2 06.11 Main status word, bit 2 = 0. 3 Brake has been requested to open and 44.16 Brake reopen delay has expired. 4 Brake open conditions (such as 44.10 Brake open torque) fulfilled and 44.11 Keep brake closed = 0. 5 44.08 Brake open delay has elapsed and brake open acknowledgement (if chosen by 44.07 Brake
acknowledge selection) has been received. 6 Brake has been requested to close. 7 Motor speed has remained below closing speed 44.14 Brake close level for the duration of 44.15
Brake close level delay. 8 44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed and brake close acknowledgment (if chosen by 44.07 Brake
acknowledge selection) has been received. 9 Brake has been requested to open. 10 Brake control enabled (44.06 Brake control enable 1). 11 1) Brake has been requested to open and 44.16 Brake reopen delay has expired, while brake
acknowledge feedback is CLOSED, or 2) Brake has been requested to open and 44.16 Brake reopen delay has expired and 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection is No acknowledge and 44.13 Brake close delay has expired.
12 Brake has been requested to open and 44.16 Brake reopen delay has expired, while brake acknowledge feedback is OPEN.
State name Description
n
Timing diagram
The simplified timing diagram below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. Refer to the Brake state diagram on page 99.
Ts Start torque at brake open (44.03) Tmem Stored torque value at brake close (44.02) tmd Motor magnetization delay tod Brake open delay (44.08) ncs Brake close speed (44.14) tccd Brake close command delay (44.15) tcd Brake close delay (44.13) tcfd Brake close fault delay (44.18) trod Brake reopen delay (44.16) BOW BRAKE OPENING WAIT BOD BRAKE OPENING DELAY BCW BRAKE CLOSING WAIT BCD BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
Start command (06.16 b5)
Modulating (06.16 b6)
Tmem
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ready ref (06.11 b2)
Torque reference
Speed reference
Brake control signal (44.01 b0)
Opening torque request (44.01 b1)
Ramp to stopped request (44.01 b3)
Hold stopped request (44.01 b2)
tod
Ts
ncs
tccd
tcd tcfd
trod
BRAKE CLOSEDState BRAKE
CLOSEDBRAKE OPEN BRAKE OPENING BRAKE CLOSING
BOW BOD BCW BCD
tmd
Wiring example
The figure below shows a brake control wiring example. The brake control hardware and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations. Note that
the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC/EN 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonized standards. Thus, the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.
The brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. The source of brake acknowledge (status supervision) is selected by parameter 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection. In this example, parameter 10.24 RO1 source is set to Open brake command (ie. bit 0 of 44.01
Brake control status), and parameter 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to DIO1.
Motor
M
115/230 VAC
Drive control unit
Mechanical brake
Brake control hardware
Emergency brake
XRO1
1 NC
2 COM
3 NO
XD24
XDIO
4 +24VD
5 DIO2
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 06.11 Main status word (page 140), 06.16 Drive status word 1 (page 141) and parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control (page 359).
Events: A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed (page 498), 71A2 Mechanical brake closing failed (page 515), 71A3 Mechanical brake opening failed (page 515) and 71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed (page 515).
DC voltage control
Overvoltage control Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or when the load overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than the applied speed or frequency. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached. The overvoltage controller also increases any programmed deceleration times if the limit is reached; to achieve shorter deceleration times, a brake chopper and resistor may be required.
Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue operation after the break if the main contactor (if present) remained closed.
Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g. UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
Implementing the undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)
Implement the undervoltage control function as follows: Check that the undervoltage control function of the drive is enabled with
parameter 30.31Undervoltage control. Parameter 21.01Vector start mode must be set to Automatic (in vector mode) or
parameter 21.19Scalar start mode to Automatic (in scalar mode) to make flying start (starting into a rotating motor) possible.
If the installation is equipped with a main contactor, prevent its tripping at the input power break. For example, use a time delay relay (hold) in the contactor control circuit.
WARNING! Make sure that the flying restart of the motor will not cause any danger. If you are in doubt, do not implement the undervoltage control function.
130
260
390
520
1.6 5.8 8 11.2 15.4 t (s)
UDC
fout
TM
UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = Output frequency of the drive, TM = Motor torque. Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Uinput power
20
40
60
80
40
80
120
160
TM (Nm)
fout (Hz)
UDC (Vdc)
Automatic restart
It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short (max. 10 seconds) power supply failure by using the Automatic restart function, provided that the drive is allowed to run for 10 seconds without the cooling fans operating.
When enabled, the function takes the following actions upon a supply failure to enable a successful restart: The undervoltage fault is suppressed (but a warning is generated). Modulation and cooling is stopped to conserve any remaining energy. DC circuit pre-charging is enabled.
If the DC voltage is restored before the expiration of the period defined by parameter 21.18 Auto restart time and the start signal is still on, normal operation will continue. However, if the DC voltage remains too low at that point, the drive trips on a fault, 3220 DC link undervoltage.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and
continues operation after a supply break.
Voltage control and trip limits The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative to the supply voltage as well as drive/inverter type. The actual measured DC voltage (UDC) is displayed by parameter 01.11 DC voltage. Supply voltage is displayed by parameter 96.03 Estimated AC supply voltage, which is based on the measured DC voltage (UDC/1.41).
The necessary drive DC limits are calculated based on parameters 95.01 (Supply voltage) and 95.02 (Adaptive voltage limits).
The following table shows the values of the selected DC voltage levels in volts. Note that the absolute voltages vary according to drive/inverter type and AC supply voltage range.
When adaptive voltage limit is enabled in parameter 95.02 (Adaptive voltage limits):
DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage
See 95.01 Supply voltage. AC supply voltage
range [V] 208240
AC supply voltage range [V] 380415
AC supply voltage range [V]
440480 Automatic / Not selected
Overvoltage fault limit 421 842 842 842
Overvoltage control limit 389 779 779 779
Internal brake chopper start limit 389 779 779 779
Internal brake chopper stop limit 379 759 759 759
Note: In the above table, 95.03 is the Estimated AC supply voltage while powering up the drive and will not be continuously updated during run time.
When adaptive voltage limit is disabled in parameter 95.02 (Adaptive voltage limits):
Overvoltage warning limit 372 745 745 745
Undervoltage warning limit 0.851.41 par 95.03 value 1)
0.851.41 par 95.03 value 1)
0.851.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.851.41 par 95.03 value 1)
0.851.41208 = 249 2)
0.851.41380 = 455 2)
0.851.41440 = 527 2)
Undervoltage control limit 0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41208 = 229 2)
0.781.41380 = 418 2)
0.781.41440 = 484 2)
Charging relay closing limit / charging deactivation
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.781.41208 = 229 2)
0.781.41380 = 418 2)
0.781.41440 = 484 2)
Charging relay opening limit / charging activation
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41 par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41208 = 214 2)
0.731.41380 = 391 2)
0.731.41440 = 453 2)
DC voltage at upper bound of supply voltage range (UDCmax)
324 560 648 (variable)
DC voltage at lower bound of supply voltage range (UDCmin)
281 513 594 (variable)
Standby limit 0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41208 = 214 2)
0.731.41380 = 391 2)
0.731.41440 = 453 2)
Undervoltage fault limit 3) 0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41par 95.03 value 1)
0.731.41208 = 214 2)
0.731.41380 = 391 2)
0.731.41440 = 4532)
1) If parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is set to Automatic / not selected and 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits is set to Enable, the value of parameter 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage is used, 2) otherwise the lower limit of the range selected with parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is used.
3) The system throws an undervoltage fault when parameter 21.18 (Auto restart time) elapses or the value of parameter 21.18 is 0. In that case the standby limit is used as the undervoltage trip level. The system throws the undervoltage fault only if the drive is modulating when the DC voltage drops below the undervoltage trip level.
DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage
See 95.01 Supply voltage. AC supply voltage
range [V] 208240
AC supply voltage range [V] 380415
AC supply voltage range [V]
440480 Automatic / Not selected
The conditions to trigger undervoltage warning
Undervoltage warning is triggered if one of below conditions is active: If the DC link voltage goes below the undervoltage warning limit (85%) when the
drive is not modulating. If the DC link voltage goes below the standby limit (73%) when the drive is
modulating, and auto restart is enabled (i.e parameter 21.18 Auto restart time
DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage
See 95.01 Supply voltage.
AC supply voltage range [V] 200240
AC supply voltage range
[VAC] 380415
AC supply voltage range
[VAC] 440480
Automatic / Not selected
if 95.03 < 456AC
if 95.03 > 456AC
Overvoltage fault limit 421 842 842 842 842
Overvoltage control limit 389 779 779 779 779
Internal brake chopper start limit 389 779 779 779 779
Internal brake chopper stop limit 379 759 759 759 759
Overvoltage warning limit 372 745 745 745 745
Undervoltage warning limit
0.851.35208 = 239
0.851.35380 = 436
0.851.35440 = 505
0.851.35380 = 436
0.851.3544 0 = 505
Undervoltage control limit
0.781.35208 = 219
0.781.35380 =400
0.781.35440 = 463
0.781.35380 = 400
0.781.3544 0 = 463
Charging relay closing limit / charging deactivation
0.781.35208 = 219
0.781.35380 = 400
0.781.35440 = 463
0.781.35380 = 400
0.781.3544 0 = 463
Charging relay opening limit / charging activation
0.731.35×208 = 205
0.731.35×380 = 374
0.731.35×440 = 434
0.731.35×380 = 374
0.731.35×44 0 = 434
DC voltage at upper bound of supply voltage range (UDCmax)
324 560 648 (variable) (variable)
DC voltage at lower bound of supply voltage range (UDCmin)
281 513 594 (variable) (variable)
Standby limit 0.731.35208 = 205
0.731.35380 = 374
0.731.35440 = 434
0.731.35380 =
374
0.731.3544 0 = 434
Undervoltage fault limit 1)
0.731.35208 = 205
0.731.35380 = 374
0.731.35440 = 434
0.731.35380 =
374
0.731.3544 0 = 434
1) The drive trips on the undervoltage fault when parameter 21.18 (Auto restart time) elapses or the value of parameter 21.18 is 0. In that case the standby limit is used as the undervoltage trip level. The undervoltage fault occurs only if the drive is modulating when the DC voltage drops below the undervoltage trip level.
value > 0 sec). The warning will continue to appear if the actual DC link voltage is continuously below the standby limit and until the auto restart time has elapsed. The control board of the drive must be externally powered by 24 VDC to have this functionality. Otherwise the control board may be switched off if the voltage goes below the hardware limit.
The conditions to trigger undervoltage fault
Undervoltage fault is triggered if the drive is modulating and one of the below conditions is active: If the DC link voltage goes below the undervoltage trip limit (73%) and auto restart
is not enabled (i.e parameter 21.18 Auto restart time value = 0.0 sec). If the DC link voltage goes below the undervoltage trip limit (73%) and auto restart
is enabled (i.e parameter 21.18 Auto restart time value >0 sec), then undervoltage trip will occur if only the DC link voltage is continuously below the undervoltage trip limit and after auto restart time has elapsed. Control board of the drive must be externally powered by 24 VDC source to have this functionality. Otherwise the control board may be switched off, just showing an undervoltage warning.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 01.11 DC voltage (page 129), 30.30 Overvoltage control (page 271), 30.31 Undervoltage control (page 271), 95.01 Supply voltage (page 427) and 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits (page 427).
Brake chopper A brake chopper can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating motor. When the DC voltage rises high enough, the chopper connects the DC circuit to an external brake resistor. The chopper operation is based on hysteresis.
The internal brake choppers in the drive (in frames R0R3) start conducting at internal brake chopper start limit 780 V and stop conducting at internal brake chopper stop limit 760 V (AC supply 380480 V).
For information on external brake choppers, refer to the respective user manual.
Note: Overvoltage control needs to be disabled for the chopper to operate.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 01.11 DC voltage (page 129), 30.30 Overvoltage control (page 271) and parameter group 43 Brake chopper (page 356).
Limit to limit control The Limit to limit control function restricts the forward and reverse movement of a load inside two extreme points. The function supports the monitoring of two sensors at both ends of the movement range: one for the slow down point and the other for the stop point. The system installer must install the sensors (eg, limit switches) and connect them to the drive.
In the forward direction, the function allows normal operation of the drive until the movement reaches the forward limiting points:
— When the drive receives the forward slow down signal, it decelerates the speed to the slow down speed. Slow down speed allows smooth transition to stop at a later stage. Vector mode uses the Speed reference ramp (23.1123.15) and Scalar mode the Freq reference ramp (28.7128.75).
— When the drive receives the forward stop signal, it stops the motor. It uses the drive stop mode selection (21.03). The function allows start only in the reverse direction.
In the reverse direction, the function monitors reverse slow down and reverse stop signals. The operation is similar as in the forward direction.
You can enable the function with parameter 76.02 and define the signal sources for the forward slow down, forward stop, reverse slow down and reverse stop. You can also define the slow down speed by a parameter.
The Limit to limit function detects the signal status changes only when the function is active, and the load is moved by the drive and motor. The function does not update the signal states in its state machine despite of the actual status changes: 1. when the user has deactivated or disabled the function 2. when the function has stopped the motor but the load is moved by a force other
than the drive and motor (e.g., by a gravity).
For application example, see sections Crane stop limit function on page 662, Crane slowdown function on page 664, and Fast stop on page 666.
Limit to limit control function
Limitations The external stop or slow down signals (in either direction) must not be on when
the Limit to limit function is activated for the first time. If that is not possible, change the state manually to match the actual status in the Limit to limit state parameter (76.01).
When drive is stopped, the load must not be moved with external force (the drive cannot monitor direction). If this happens, the Limit to limit state can be manually changed to the correct one in parameter Limit to limit state parameter (76.01).
Coast stop without mechanical brake may cause load moving without Limit to limit control (drive is not controlling load movement). If this happens, the Limit to limit state can be manually changed to the correct one in parameter Limit to limit state parameter (76.01).
When Limit to limit control is in Pulse mode then the state is saved over power cycle. The load must not be moved when the drive is powered off. If this happens, then Limit to limit state can be manually changed to the correct one in parameter Limit to limit state parameter (76.01).
LIMIT-TO-LIMIT PHASE 1
FWD
REV
MAX
+SLOW ZERO
-SLOW
MIN
STATES
R EV
Z ER
O —
FW D
M AX
R EV
S LO
W —
FW D
M AX
R EV
M AX
— FW
D S
LO W
R EV
M AX
— FW
D M
AX
R EV
M AX
— FW
D Z
ER O
R EV
— ST
O P
— S IG
R EV
— SL
O W
— SI
G
FW D
— SL
O W
— SI
G
FW D
— ST
O P
— S IG
Tips You can connect Slow down and Stop signals into the same signal source by
setting the Stop limit and Slow down parameters to the same digital input (76.01 Forward stop limit = DI2 and 76.05 Forward slow down limit = DI2).
You can change the Limit to limit state machine state with the parameter Limit to limit state parameter (76.01), in case of maintenance.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: groups 21 Start/stop mode (page 200), 23 Speed reference ramp (page 228) and 28 Frequency reference chain (page 247), 76.01 Limit to limit control status (page 417), 76.02 Enable limit to limit control (page 418), 76.03 Limit to limit trigger type (page 418), 76.04 Forward stop limit (page 419), 76.05 Forward slow down limit (page 420), 76.06 Reverse stop limit (page 421), 76.07 Reverse slow down limit (page 421), 76.08 Slow down speed (page 421) and 76.09 Slow down frequency (page 421).
Safety and protections
Fixed/Standard protections
Overcurrent
If the output current exceeds the internal overcurrent limit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.
DC overvoltage
See section Overvoltage control on page 103.
DC undervoltage
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 103.
Drive temperature
If the temperature rises high enough, the drive first starts to limit the switching frequency and then the current to protect itself. If it is still keeps heating up, for example because of a fan failure, an overtemperature fault is generated.
Short circuit
In case of a short circuit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.
Emergency stop The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source. An emergency stop can also be generated through fieldbus (06.01, bits 02).
The mode of the emergency stop is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode. The following modes are available: Off1: Stop along the standard deceleration ramp defined for the particular
reference type in use Off2: Stop by coasting Off3: Stop by the emergency stop ramp defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency
stop time.
With Off1 or Off3 emergency stop modes, the ramp-down of the motor speed can be supervised by parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay.
Notes: The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency stop
devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill the required emergency stop categories.
After an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function cannot be canceled even though the signal is canceled.
If the minimum (or maximum) torque limit is set to 0%, the emergency stop function may not be able to stop the drive.
During an emergency stop, the speed and torque reference parameters such as reference ramp shapes (23.32 Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2) are not considered.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.04 Emergency stop mode (page 202), 21.05 Emergency stop source (page 203), 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 230), 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision (page 283) and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay (page 283).
Programmable protection functions
External events (31.0131.10)
Five different event signals from the process can be connected to selectable inputs to generate trips and warnings for the driven equipment. When the signal is lost, an external event (fault, warning, or a mere log entry) is generated.
Motor phase loss detection (31.19)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.
The motor phase loss detection is enabled by default and displays fault 3381 Output phase loss whenever the drive detects a phase loss. The motor phase loss detection
needs to be enabled or disabled based on the motor control mode and the nominal current as follows: With the vector control, the motor phase loss detection is always on and there are
no operational limits. With the scalar control, the motor phase loss detection activates when the motor
frequency is above 10% of the motor nominal frequency. This limit cannot be changed.
With motors having nominal current below 1/6 of drive nominal current, the supervision must be disabled as the drive cannot measure the motor current accurately.
Earth (Ground) fault detection (31.20)
Note that an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection in a grounded supply, the protection activates within 2 milliseconds in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance must be 1 microfarad or more the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 meters will not
activate the protection the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.
Supply phase loss detection (31.20)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected.
Safe torque off detection (31.22)
The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input, and this parameter selects which indications are given when the signals are lost. (The parameter does not affect the operation of the Safe torque off function itself). For more information on the Safe torque off function, see the hardware manual of the drive.
Swapped supply and motor cabling (31.23)
The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been swapped (for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.
Stall protection (31.2431.28)
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition.
Overspeed protection (31.30)
The user can set overspeed (and overfrequency) limits by specifying a margin that is added to the currently-used maximum and minimum speed (or frequency) limits.
Local control loss detection (49.05)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break.
AI supervision (12.0312.04)
The parameters select how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input.
Automatic fault resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage and external faults. The user can also specify a fault that is automatically reset.
By default, automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the user.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 31.1231.16.
Diagnostics
Signal supervision Six signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a supervised signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01 Supervision status is activated, and a warning or fault generated.
The supervised signal is low-pass filtered.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 32 Supervision (page 285).
Energy saving calculators This feature consists of the following functionalities: An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total system
efficiency is maximized A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in
kWh, currency or volume of CO2 emissions, and A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see section Load analyzer
on page 115).
In addition, there are counters that show energy consumption in kWh of the current and previous hour as well as the current and previous day.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.19 Comparison power.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 45 Energy efficiency (page 368), 01.50 Current hour kWh (page 130), 01.51 Previous hour kWh (page 130), 01.52 Current day kWh (page 130) and 01.53 Previous day kWh (page 130).
Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger. The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak. The peak value is sampled at 2 ms intervals.
Amplitude loggers
The control program has two amplitude loggers.
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude.
Parameter 36.40 shows the share of samples that have fallen in range 010% of the reference value during the time that the logging has been active.
Parameter 36.41 shows that share of samples that have fallen in range 1020% of the reference value during the time that the logging has been active
etc.
You can view this graphically with the assistant panel or the Drive Composer PC tool.
Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive (Imax). The maximum output current values are listed in the section Ratings in the Hardware manual of the drive. The measured current is logged continuously. The distribution of samples is shown by parameters 36.2036.29.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 36 Load analyzer (page 325).
sh ar
e of
a ll
sa m
pl es
0 10
%
10
20 %
20
30 %
30
40 %
40
50 %
50
60 %
60
70 %
70
80 %
80
90 %
>9 0%
Amplitude ranges (parameters 36.4036.49)
Miscellaneous
Backup and restore You can make backups of the settings manually to the assistant panel. The panel also keeps one automatic backup. You can restore a backup to another drive, or a new drive replacing a faulty one. You can make backups and restore on the panel, or with the Drive Composer PC tool.
See the relevant assistant control panel for more information on backing up and settings.
Backup
Manual backup
Make a backup when necessary, for example, after you have started up the drive or when you want to copy the settings to another drive.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced parameter saving.
Automatic backup
The assistant panel has space for one automatic backup. An automatic backup is created two hours after the last parameter change. After completing the backup, the panel waits for 24 hours before checking if there are additional parameter changes. If there are, it creates a new backup overwriting the previous one when two hours have passed after the latest change.
You cannot adjust the delay time or disable the automatic backup function.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced parameter saving.
Restore
The backups are shown on the panel. Automatic and manual backups are separately marked.
Note: To restore a backup, the drive has to be in Local control.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.07 Parameter save manually (page 434).
User parameter sets The drive supports four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to use digital inputs to switch between user parameter sets. To change a user parameter set, the drive has to be stopped.
A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 1099 except I/O extension module settings (15 I/O extension module) Data storage parameters (47 Data storage) Fieldbus communication settings (50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)53 FBA A data out
and 58 Embedded fieldbus).
As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set. In an application where different motors are used with the drive, the motor ID run needs to be performed with each motor and the results saved to different user sets. The appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.1096.13.
Data storage parameters Twelve (eight 32-bit, four 16-bit) parameters are reserved for data storage. These parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for linking, testing and commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read from using other parameters source or target selections.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: group 47 Data storage (page 377).
Parameter checksum calculation Parameter checksums A and B can be calculated from a set of parameters to monitor changes in the drive configuration. The parameter sets are different for A and B. Each of the calculated checksum is compared to corresponding reference checksum. If a mismatch occurs, the drive generates an event (a pure event, warning or fault). The calculated checksum can be set as the new reference checksum.
The set of parameters for checksum A does not include fieldbus settings parameters.
The parameters included in the checksum A calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 71, 76, 90, 91, 92, 95, 96, 97, 98, and 99.
The set of parameters for checksum B does not include: fieldbus settings motor data settings, and energy data settings parameters.
The parameters included in the checksum B calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 46, 71, 76, 90, 91, 92, 95, 96, and 97.
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 96.5496.55, 96.6896.69 and 96.7196.72. Events: A686 Checksum mismatch (page 494), B686 Checksum mismatch (page
503) and 6200 Checksum mismatch (page 511).
Motor potentiometer The motor potentiometer is a counter whose value can be adjusted up and down using two digital signals selected by parameters.
When enabled, the motor potentiometer assumes a set value. Depending on the mode selected, the motor potentiometer value is either retained or reset over a power cycle.
The change rate is defined as the time it would take for the value to change from the minimum to the maximum, or vice versa. If the up and down signals are simultaneously on, the motor potentiometer value does not change.
The output of the function is shown, and it can be directly set as the reference source in the main selector parameters, or used as an input by other source selector parameters.
The following example shows the behavior of the motor potentiometer value.
For application example, see section Crane motor potentiometer on page 673.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 22.7122.80.
User lock For better cybersecurity, you can set a master password to prevent eg. the changing of parameter values and/or the loading of firmware and other files.
0
1
0
1
0 22.80
22.74
22.73
22.77
22.76
22.75
WARNING! ABB will not be liable for damages or losses caused by the failure to activate the user lock using a new pass code. See Cybersecurity disclaimer
(page 15).
To activate the user lock for the first time, enter the default pass code, 10000000, into 96.02 Pass code. This will make parameters 96.10096.102 visible. Then enter a new pass code into 96.100 Change user pass code, and confirm the code in 96.101 Confirm user pass code. In 96.102 User lock functionality, define the actions that you want to prevent.
To close the user lock, enter an invalid pass code into 96.02 Pass code, activate 96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power. With the lock closed, parameters 96.10096.102 are hidden.
To reopen the lock, enter your pass code into 96.02 Pass code. This will again make parameters 96.10096.102 visible.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.02 Pass code (page 431) and 96.10096.102.
AI dead band User can define a dead band value (12.110) for the analog input signals. The value is valid both for analog input AI1 and AI2, and both for the voltage and milliampere signals. The dead band value of 100% corresponds to 10 V for a voltage signal and 20 mA for a current signal. In case of voltage: 10 V x (parameter 12.110 value) x 0.01 In case of current: 20 mA x (parameter 12.110 value) x 0.01
The control program automatically calculates a hysteresis value for the AI dead band: AI dead band hysteresis value = AI dead band value x 0.1
Example
Parameter 12.110 (AI dead band) value is set to 50%.
In case of voltage signal: AI unit selection = V AI dead band value = 10 x 50 x 0.01 = 5 V AI Hysteresis value = 5 x 0.1 = 0.5 V AI dead band hysteresis positive value = 5 + 0.5 = 5.5 V AI dead band hysteresis negative value = 5 — 0.5 = 4.5 V
Now, when AI input voltage is increasing up to 5.5 V, AI actual shows 0. As soon as AI input voltage reaches 5.5 V, AI actual shows 5.5 V and continues to detect the AI input voltage up to AI max which is in range of 0 V to 10 V. When AI input voltage is
decreasing, AI actual shows the actual AI applied up to 4.5 V. As soon as AI input goes below 4.5 V, AI actual shows 0 till input voltage reaches 0 V.
High speed counter High speed counter counts pulses from the input source selected by user (33.71). User can also define how to enable or disable the counter (33.80).
The counter value can be read from parameter 33.02, which is an unsigned 32-bit integer. The counter update time is 2 ms. The counter has configurable direction, preset source and value, and high and low limits (parameters 33.73 to 33.77).
The counter value can be configured to roll over or to saturate to limit values (33.72). There is also a divider (33.79) that can be used for scaling down fast pulse counting to a more comprehensive scale (for example when encoder counting divided by encoder pulse number would result in counting the number of axis rotations). The remainder of the division is kept until preset is done. The counter has a status word (33.04) indicating the current count status.
The following counter inputs are supported: Frequency input (up to 16 kHz) 1)
Encoder, where the rising and falling edges are calculated Encoder with direction, where the rising and falling edges are calculated.2)
Digital inputs 15 (up to 125 Hz) DIOs as input (up to 250 Hz) Pointer to any bit in the parameters (maximum frequency depends on the source
bit update cycle). 1) When a digital input (DI3/BMIO-01, DI4/BIO-01) is configured as counter and that is used as the counter source (33.71 = Frequency input 1), then frequency inputs are not available. See configuration parameters for DI3, DI4 and DI5 (11.13, 11.17 and 11.21). 2) When an encoder with direction is selected, the direction parameter 33.73 has no effect.
It is possible to configure two digital inputs as frequency inputs. However, if counter needs to be used, only one input can be configured as frequency input. This is a hardware limitation.
When a digital input (DI1, DI2 / DI3-DI5 or DIO configured as a digital input) is used as the counter source, then the maximum signal frequency is limited to 125 Hz. Higher frequencies can cause aliasing and result in wrong counter values.
The reason for the maximum signal frequency limitation is the 2 ms update time. With two samples required (in the same state), only the rising edge is calculated. The minimum cycle time of 8 ms results in a maximum signal frequency of 125 Hz.
Signal supervision function (group 32 Supervision) can be used to tell when a certain value has been reached outside of the counter status word content.
Settings and diagnostics
Counter parameters: 33.0233.79 Frequency input parameters: 11.13, 11.17 and 11.21 Encoder configuration parameters: groups 90 Feedback selection, 91 Encoder
module settings and 92 Encoder 1 configuration.
6 Parameters
Contents Terms and abbreviations Fieldbus addresses Summary of parameter groups Parameter listing Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency
settings
Terms and abbreviations Term Definition Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be
monitored but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.
Analog src Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter by choosing Other, and selecting the source parameter from a list. In addition to the Other selection, the parameter may offer other pre-selected settings. Not in this version.
Binary src Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit in another parameter value (Other). Sometimes the value can be fixed to 0 (false) or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected settings. Not in this version.
Default The default is shown on the same row as the parameter name. The default value of a parameter for the ABB standard macro with BMIO-01. For information on other macro-specific parameter values, see chapter Control macros.
FbEq16/32 The fieldbus equivalent for 16-bit and 32-bit. They are shown on the same row as the parameter range, or for each selection. 16-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in fieldbus communication when the user selects a 16-bit value in parameter group 52 FBA A data in or 53 FBA A data out. A dash (-) indicates that the user cannot access the parameter in 16-bit format. 32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in communication when a 32- bit value is selected for transmission to an external system.
List Selection list. No. Parameter number. PB Packed Boolean (bit list). Real Real number. Type Type (analogue src, binary src, list, PPB, real). Other The value is taken from another parameter.
Choosing Other displays a parameter list in which the user can specify the source parameter.
Other [bit] The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter. The user selects the source from a parameter list.
Parameter Either a user-adjustable operating instruction for the drive, or an Actual signal.
p.u. Per unit [parameter number] Value of the parameter
Fieldbus addresses Refer to the fieldbus adapter users manual.
Summary of parameter groups Group Contents Page 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive. 128 03 Input references Values of references received from various sources. 132 04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. 133 05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements
related to drive maintenance. 135
06 Control and status words
Drive control and status words. 139
07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information. 146 09 Crane application signals
Signals related to crane applications. 149
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs. 150 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO Configuration of the digital input/outputs. 156 12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs. 163
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs. 170 15 I/O extension module Configuration of the I/O extension module. 175 19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources
and operating modes. 180
20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source selection.
183
21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source selection; DC magnetization settings.
200
22 Speed reference selection
Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings. 212
23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
228
24 Speed reference conditioning
Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration; speed error step.
233
25 Speed control Speed controller settings. 234 26 Torque reference chain Settings for the torque reference chain. 240 28 Frequency reference chain
Settings for the frequency reference chain. 247
30 Limits Drive operation limits. 262 31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of
the drive upon fault situations. 274
32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 13. 285
33 Generic timer & counter
Generic timer and counter functions. 299
34 Timed functions Configuration of the timed functions. 302 35 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan control configuration.
310
36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. 325 37 User load curve Settings for user load curve. 329 40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control. 335 41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control. 353 43 Brake chopper Settings for the internal brake chopper. 356
44 Mechanical brake control
Configuration of mechanical brake control. 359
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators. 368
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings.
373
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters source and target settings.
377
49 Panel port communication
Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
379
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) Fieldbus communication configuration. 382 51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration. 388 52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller through fieldbus adapter A. 390
53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive through fieldbus adapter A.
391
58 Embedded fieldbus Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface. 391 71 External PID1 Configuration of external PID. 414
76 Application features Application parameters for, e.g., Limit to limit control configuration.
417
90 Feedback selection Motor and load feedback configuration. 424
91 Encoder module settings Configuration of encoder interface modules. 426 92 Encoder 1 configuration
Settings for encoder 1. 426
95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings. 427 96 System Language selection; access levels; macro selection;
parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit selection; parameter checksum calculation; user lock.
430
97 Motor control Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
441
Group Contents Page
98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model.
447
99 Motor data Motor configuration settings. 449
Group Contents Page
Parameter listing No. Name/Value Description Default
FbEq 16 01 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. Note: Values of these actual signals are filtered with the filter time defined in group 46 Monitoring/scaling settings. The selection lists for parameters in other groups mean the raw value of the actual signal instead. For example, if a selection is Output frequency it does not point to the value of parameter 01.06 Output frequency but to the raw value.
01.01 Motor speed used Measured or Estimated motor speed depending on the type of feedback used in parameter 96.01 Motor feedback selection. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Measured or estimated motor speed. See par. 46.01
01.02 Motor speed estimated
Estimated motor speed in rpm. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Estimated motor speed. See par. 46.01
01.03 Motor speed % Actual speed in percent of the motor synchronous speed. The filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
—
-1000.00 1000.00%
Motor speed. See par. 46.01
01.04 Encoder 1 speed filtered
Measured motor speed from Encoder 1. The filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
—
-30000 30000 1=1 01.06 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. A filter
time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.12 Filter time output frequency.
—
-500.00500.00 Hz
Estimated output frequency. See par. 46.02
01.07 Motor current Measured (absolute) motor current in A. — 0.0030000.00 Motor current. See par.
46.05
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom
Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal motor current.
—
0.01000.0% Motor current. 1=1% 01.09 Motor current % of
drive nom Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal drive current.
—
0.01000.0% Motor current. 1=1% 01.10 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor
torque. See also parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.13 Filter time motor torque.
—
-1600.01600.0% Motor torque. See par. 46.03
01.11 DC voltage Measured intermediate circuit DC Link voltage. — 0.002000.00 V DC link voltage. 10 = 1 V
01.13 Output voltage Calculated motor voltage in V AC. — 02000 V Motor voltage. 1 = 1 V
01.14 Output power Measured output power in kW. The filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter 46.14 Filter time power.
—
-32768.00 32767.00 kW
Output power. See par. 46.04
01.15 Output power % of motor nom
Measured output power in % of nominal motor power.
—
-300.00 300.00% Output power. 10 = 1% 01.17 Motor shaft power Estimated mechanical power at motor shaft in kW
or hp. Parameter96.16 defines the unit. . The filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter 46.14 Filter time power.
—
-32768.00 32767.00 kW or hp
Motor shaft power. See par. 46.04
01.18 Inverter GWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value is zero.
—
065535 GWh Energy in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh 01.19 Inverter MWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the
drive (in either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.18 Inverter GWh counter is incremented. The minimum value is zero.
—
01000 MWh Energy in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
01.20 Inverter kWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.19 Inverter MWh counter is incremented. The minimum value is zero.
—
01000 kWh Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh 01.24 Flux actual % Used flux in percent of nominal flux of motor. —
0200% Flux value. 1 = 1% 01.30 Nominal torque scale Nominal torque in Nm which corresponds to
100%. Note: This parameter is copied from parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque if given. Otherwise the value is calculated from other motor data.
0
0.0004000000 Nm or lbft
Nominal torque. 1 = 100 unit
01.50 Current hour kWh Current hour energy consumption. This is the energy of the last 60 minutes (not necessarily continuous) the drive has been running, not the energy of a calendar hour. The value is set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is again up and running.
— / —
0.001000000.00 kWh
Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
01.51 Previous hour kWh Previous hour energy consumption. The value Current hour kWh is stored here when its values has been cumulated for 60 minutes. The value is set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is again up and running.
—
0.001000000.00 kWh
Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
01.52 Current day kWh Current day energy consumption. This is the energy of the last 24 hours (not necessarily continuous) the drive has been running, not the energy of a calendar day. The value is set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is again up and running.
—
0.001000000.00 kWh
Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
01.53 Previous day kWh Previous day energy consumption. The value is set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is again up and running.
—
0.00 1000000.00 kWh
Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
01.54 Cumulative inverter energy
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value is zero.
—
-200000000.0 200000000.0 kWh
Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
01.55 Inverter GWh counter (resettable)
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.5501.58 resets all of them.
—
065535 GWh Energy in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh 01.56 Inverter MWh counter
(resettable) Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.55 Inverter GWh counter (resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.5501.58 resets all of them.
—
01000 MWh Energy in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh 01.57 Inverter kWh counter
(resettable) Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.56 Inverter MWh counter (resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.5501.58 resets all of them.
—
01000 kWh Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh 01.58 Cumulative inverter
energy (resettable) Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.5501.58 resets all of them.
—
-200000000.0 200000000.0 kWh
Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
01.61 Abs motor speed used Absolute value of the motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used.
—
0.00 30000.00 rpm
1 = 1 rpm
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
01.62 Abs motor speed % Absolute value of the motor speed % 01.03 Motor speed %.
—
0.00 1000.00% 10 = 1% 01.63 Abs output frequency Absolute value of the output frequency 01.06
Output frequency. —
0.00500.00 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 01.64 Abs motor torque Absolute value of the motor torque 01.10 Motor
torque. —
0.0 1600.0% 1 = 1% 01.65 Abs output power Absolute value of the output power 01.14 Output
power. —
0.00 32767.00 kW
1 = 1 kW
01.66 Abs output power % mot nom
Absolute value of the output power % of motor nominal 01.15 Output power % of motor nom.
—
0.00 300.00% 1 = 1% 01.68 Abs motor shaft power Absolute value of the motor shaft power 01.17
Motor shaft power. —
0.00 332767.00 kW
1 = 1 kW
03 03 Input references Values of references received from various sources.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted.
03.01 Panel reference Local mode reference is given from the control panel.
0
-100000.00 100000.00 rpm, Hz or %
Control panel or PC tool reference. 1 = 10 unit
03.02 Panel reference remote
Remote mode reference given from the control panel.
—
-100000.00 100000.00 rpm, Hz or %
Control panel or PC tool reference. 1 = 10 unit
03.05 FB A reference 1 Scaled fieldbus A reference 1. See parameter 50.14 FBA A reference 1.
0
-100000.00 100000.00
Reference from fieldbus adapter A. 1 = 10
03.06 FB A reference 2 Scaled fieldbus A reference 2. See parameter 50.15 FBA A reference 2.
0
-100000.00 100000.00
Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A. 1 = 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
03.09 EFB reference 1 Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaling is defined by 58.26 EFB ref1 type
—
-30000.00 30000.00
Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
1 = 10
03.10 EFB reference 2 Scaled embedded fieldbus reference 2. — -30000.00 30000.00
Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaling is defined by 58.27 EFB ref2 type
1 = 10
03.17 Integrated Panel ref Local mode reference given from the integrated control panel. The unit (rpm, Hz or %) is set from parameter.
0
-100000.00 100000.00 rpm, Hz or %
Integrated control panel reference. 1 = 10
03.18 Integrated Panel ref remote
Remote mode reference given from the integrated control panel.
0
-100000.00 100000.00 rpm, Hz or %
Integrated control panel reference. 1 = 10
04 04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
For explanations of individual warning and fault codes, see chapter Fault tracing. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted.
04.01 Tripping fault Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the drive to trip as it arrived at the trip register).
—
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.02 Active fault 2 2nd active fault in the trip register. —
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.03 Active fault 3 3rd active fault in the trip register. —
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.06 Active warning 1 1st active warning in warning register. —
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1 04.07 Active warning 2 2nd active warning in warning register. —
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1 04.08 Active warning 3 3rd active warning in warning register. —
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
04.11 Latest fault Latest fault in the trip log store. The trip log store is loaded with the active faults in the order they occur.
—
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.12 2nd latest fault 2nd fault in trip log store. —
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.13 3rd latest fault 3rd fault in trip log store. —
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 1=1 04.16 Latest warning Latest warning in the warning log store. The
warning log store is loaded with the active warnings in the order they occur.
—
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1 04.17 2nd latest warning 2nd warning in trip log store. —
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1 04.18 3rd latest warning 3rd warning in trip log store. —
0000hFFFFh Warning code. 1=1 04.40 Event word 1 Shows the user-defined event word. This word
collects the status of the events (warnings, faults or pure events) selected by parameters 04.4104.71. See chapter Fault tracing (page 123) for the list of event codes. This parameter is read-only.
—
0b00000b1111 Event word. 1 = 1 04.41 Event word 1 bit 0
code Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 0 of parameter 04.40. See chapter Fault tracing (page 487) for the event codes.
0x2310h
0000hFFFFh Code of event. 1 = 1 04.43 Event word 1 bit 1
code Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 1 of parameter 04.40. See chapter Fault tracing (page 487) for the event codes.
0x3210h
0000hFFFFh Code of event. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 User bit 0 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.41 is active. 1 User bit 1 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.43 is active. 15 User bit 15 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.71 is active.
04.45 Event word 1 bit 2 code
0x4310h
04.47 Event word 1 bit 3 code
0x2340h
04.49 Event word 1 bit 4 code
0x0000h
04.51 Event word 1 bit 5 code
0x3220h
04.53 Event word 1 bit 6 code
0x80A0h
04.55 Event word 1 bit 7 code
0x0000h
04.57 Event word 1 bit 8 code
0x7122h
04.59 Event word 1 bit 9 code
0x7081h
04.61 Event word 1 bit 10 code
0xFF61h
04.63 Event word 1 bit 11 code
0x7121h
04.65 Event word 1 bit 12 code
0x4110h
04.67 Event word 1 bit 13 code
0x9081h
04.69 Event word 1 bit 14 code
0x9082h
04.71 Event word 1 bit 15 code
Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 15 of parameter 04.40. See chapter Fault tracing (page 487) for the event codes.
0x2330h
0000hFFFFh Code of event. 1 = 1 05 05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements
related to drive maintenance. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted.
05.01 On-time counter Drive on-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is powered.
—
065535 d On-time counter (number of days). 1 = 1 d 05.02 Run-time counter Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the
inverter modulates. —
065535 d Motor run-time counter. 1 = 1 d
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
05.03 Hours run Corresponding parameter to 05.02 Run-time counter in hours, that is, 24 * 05.02 value + fractional part of a day.
—
0 429496729.5 h
Hours. 1 = 1 h
05.04 Fan on-time counter Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
—
065535 d Cooling fan run-time. 1 = 1 d 05.10 Control board
temperature Measured temperature of the control board. —
-100 300 C or F Temperature in degrees Celsius for Fahrenheit. 1 = unit 05.11 Inverter temperature Estimated drive temperature in percent of fault
limit. The fault limit varies according to the type of the drive. 0.0% = 0 C (32 F) 100.0% = Fault limit
—
-40.0160.0% Temperature in percent. 1 = 1% 05.20 Diagnostic word 1 Diagnostic word 1. For possible causes and
remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. 0b0000
0b00000b1111 Diagnostic word 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Value 0 Any warning or fault 1 = Drive has generated a warning or tripped on a
fault. 1 Any warning 1 = Drive has generated a warning. 2 Any fault 1 = Drive has tripped on a fault. 3 Reserved 4 Overcurrent fault 1 = Drive has tripped on fault 2310 Overcurrent. 5 Reserved 6 DC overvoltage 1 = Drive has tripped on fault 3210 DC link
overvoltage. 7 DC undervoltage 1 = Drive has tripped on fault 3220 DC link
undervoltage. 8 Reserved 9 Device overtemp flt 1 = Drive has tripped on fault 4310 Excess
temperature. 10…15 Reserved
05.21 Diagnostic word 2 Diagnostic word 2 For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
0b0000
0b00000b1111 Diagnostic word 2. 1 = 1 05.22 Diagnostic word 3 Diagnostic word 3. For possible causes and
remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. 0b0000
0b00000b1111 Diagnostic word 3. 1 = 1 05.80 Motor speed at fault Copy of parameter 24.02 Used speed feedback
(in both scalar and speed control modes) at the occurrence of the latest fault.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Motor speed at fault. See par. 46.01
05.81 Output frequency at fault
Displays the output frequency (01.06) at which fault occurred.
—
-500.00500.00 Hz
Output frequency at fault. See par. 46.02
05.82 DC voltage at fault Displays the DC link volt age (01.11) at which fault occurred.
—
0.002000.00 V DC voltage at fault. 10 = 1 V 05.83 Motor current at fault Displays the motor current (01.07) at which fault
occurred. —
0.0030000.00 A Motor current at fault. See par. 46.05
05.84 Motor torque at fault Displays the motor torque (01.10) at which fault occurred
—
-1600.01600.0% Motor torque at fault. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Value 0…9 Reserved 10 Motor overtemp flt 1 = Drive has tripped on fault 4981 External
temperature 1 or 4982 External temperature 2. 1115 Reserved
Bit Name Value 0…8 Reserved 9 kWh pulse 1 = kWh pulse is active. 10 Reserved 11 Fan command 1 = The drive fan is rotating above the minimum fan speed.
In case of an On/Off fan that is not stopped, this bit is 1. 1215 Reserved
05.85 Main status word at fault
Copy of parameter 06.11 Main status word at the occurrence of the latest fault.
—
0000hFFFFh Main status word. 1 = 1 05.86 DI delayed status at
fault Displays the DI delayed status (10.02) at which fault occurred. For the bit list, see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status.
0000h
0000hFFFFh DI delayed status at fault. 1 = 1 05.87 Inverter temperature
at fault Displays the inverter temperature (05.11) at which fault occurred.
—
-40160C Inverter temperature at fault. 1 = 1C 05.88 Reference used at
fault Displays the reference used (28.01/26.73/23.01) at which fault occurred. The type of the reference depends on the selected operation mode (19.01).
—
-500.00 500.00 Hz/
-1600.01600.0%/
30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Reference used at fault. See par. 46.02/ See par. 46.03/ See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
06 06 Control and status words
Drive control and status words.
06.01 Main control word The main control word of the drive. This parameter shows the control signals as received from the selected sources (such as digital inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the application program). The bit assignments of the word are as described on page 597. The related status word and state diagram are presented on pages 598 and 599 respectively. This parameter is read-only. Note: With the fieldbus control, the parameter value is not same as the value that it receives from the PLC. For the correct value, see parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Main control word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name 0 Off1 control 1 Off2 control 2 Off3 control 3 Run 4 Ramp out zero 5 Ramp hold 6 Ramp in zero 7 Reset 8 Inching 1 9 Inching 2 10 Remote cmd 11 Ext ctrl loc 12 User bit 0 13 User bit 1 14 User bit 2 15 User bit 3
06.11 Main status word ABB Drives Profile Main status word. Reflects the status of the drive irrespective of control source e.g. a fieldbus system, control panel (keypad), PC- Tool, standard I/O, application program or sequence programming, and irrespective of the actual control profile which is used to control the drive. The bit assignments are described on page 597 (Contents of the fieldbus control word). The state diagram (valid for ABB drives profile) is on page 599. This parameter is read-only. Note: With the fieldbus control, the parameter value is not same as the value that it receives from the PLC. For the correct value, see parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Main status word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name 0 Ready to switch
ON 1 Ready run 2 Ready ref 3 Tripped 4 Off 2 inactive 5 Off 3 inactive 6 Switch-on inhibited 7 Warning 8 At setpoint 9 Remote 10 Above limit 11 User bit 0 12 User bit 1 13 User bit 2 14 User bit 3 15 Reserved
06.16 Drive status word 1 Drive status word 1. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Drive status word 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Enabled 1 = Both run enable (see par. 20.12) and start enable
(20.19) signals are present. Note: This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault.
1 Inhibited 1 = Start inhibited. To start the drive, the inhibiting signal (see par. 06.18) must be removed and the start signal cycled.
2 DC charged 1 = DC circuit has been charged 3 Ready to start 1 = Drive is ready to receive a start command 4 Following
reference 1 = Drive is ready to follow given reference
5 Started 1 = Drive has been started 6 Modulating 1 = Drive is modulating (output stage is being controlled) 7 Limiting 1 = Any operating limit (speed, torque, etc.) is active 8 Local control 1 = Drive is in local control 9 Network control 1 = Drive is in Network control (see page 14). 10 Ext1 active 1 = Control location EXT1 active 11 Ext2 active 1 = Control location EXT2 active 12 Reserved 13 Start request 1 = Start requested. 0 = When Enable to rotate signal (see
par. 20.22) is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled).
14 Running 1 = One of the following statuses is active: Started + Run Permissive granted + no faults Started + Run Permissive granted + faulted + auto reset
not expired Started + Run Permissive granted + DC hold Started + Run Permissive granted + PID sleep (w/wo
motor heating) Started + Run Permissive granted + Pre-magnetization Not started or start inhibited + in ramp stop
06.17 Drive status word 2 Drive status word 2. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Drive status word 2. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Identification run
done 1 = Motor identification (ID) run has been performed
1 Magnetized 1 = The motor has been magnetized 2 Torque control 1 = Torque control mode active 3 Speed control 1 = Speed control mode active 4 Reserved 5 Safe reference
active 1 = A safe reference is applied by functions such as parameters 49.05 and 50.02
6 Last speed active 1 = A last speed reference is applied by functions such as parameters 49.05 and 50.02
7 Reserved 8 Emergency stop
failed 1 = Emergency stop failed (see parameters 31.32 and 31.33)
9 Jogging active 1 = Jogging enable signal is on 10 Above limit Actual speed, frequency or torque equals or exceeds the
limit (defined by parameters 46.31…45.33). Valid for both directions of rotation.
1112 Reserved 13 Start delay active 1 = Start delay (par. 21.22) active. 1415 Reserved
06.18 Start inhibit status word
Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source of the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from starting. The conditions marked with an asterisk (*) only require that the start command is cycled. In all other instances, the inhibiting condition must be removed first. See also parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Start inhibit status word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Not ready run 1 = DC voltage is missing or drive has not been
parametrized correctly. Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99.
1 Ctrl location changed
* 1 = Control location has changed
2 SSW inhibit 1 = Control program is keeping itself in inhibited state 3 Fault reset * 1 = A fault has been reset 4 Lost start enable 1 = Start enable signal missing 5 Lost run enable 1 = Run enable signal missing 6 Reserved 7 STO 1 = Safe torque off function active 8 Current calibration
ended * 1 = Current calibration routine has finished
9 ID run ended * 1 = Motor identification run has finished 10 Reserved — 11 Em Off1 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off1) 12 Em Off2 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off2) 13 Em Off3 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off3) 14 Auto reset inhibit 1 = The autoreset function is inhibiting operation 15 Jogging active 1 = The jogging enable signal is inhibiting operation
06.19 Speed control status word
Speed control status word. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Speed control status word. 1 = 1 06.20 Constant speed status
word Constant speed/frequency status word. Indicates which constant speed or frequency is active (if any). See also parameter 06.19 Speed control status word, bit 7, and section Constant speeds/frequencies. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Constant speed/frequency status word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description
0 Zero speed
1 = Drive has been running below zero speed limit (par. 21.06) for a time defined by parameter 21.07 Zero speed delay
1 Forward 1 = Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed limit (par. 21.06)
2 Reverse 1 = Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed limit (par. 21.06)
3 Out of window Speed out of speed window
4 Internal speed feedback Estimate used for motor control
5 Encoder 1 feedback Encoder 1 feedback used for motor control 6 Encoder 2 feedback Encoder 2 feedback used for motor control
7 Any constant speed request
1 = A constant speed or frequency has been selected; see par. 06.20 below.
8 Follower speed correction min lim
Minimum limit of speed correction is reached by speed controlled follower application.
9 Follower speed correction max lim
Maximum limit of speed correction is reached by speed controlled follower application.
10…15 Reserved
Bit Name Description 0 Constant speed 1 1 = Constant speed or frequency 1 selected 1 Constant speed 2 1 = Constant speed or frequency 2 selected 2 Constant speed 3 1 = Constant speed or frequency 3 selected 3 Constant speed 4 1 = Constant speed or frequency 4 selected 4 Constant speed 5 1 = Constant speed or frequency 5 selected 5 Constant speed 6 1 = Constant speed or frequency 6 selected 6 Constant speed 7 1 = Constant speed or frequency 7 selected 715 Reserved
06.21 Drive status word 3 Drive status word 3. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Drive status word 1. 1 = 1 06.29 MSW bit 10
selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 10 (User bit 0) of parameter 06.11 Main status word.
Above limit
False 0. 0 True 1. 1 Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 2 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
06.30 MSW bit 11 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 11 (User bit 0) of 06.11 Main status word.
Ext ctrl loc
False 0. 0 True 1. 1 Ext ctrl loc Bit 11 of 06.01 Main control word. 2 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
06.31 MSW bit 12 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 12 (User bit 1) of 06.11 Main status word.
Ext run enable
False 0. 0 True 1. 1 Ext run enable Status of the external run enable signal (see
parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 06.32 MSW bit 13 selection Selects a binary source whose status is
transmitted as bit 13 (User bit 2) of 06.11 Main status word.
False
False 0. 0 True 1. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 DC hold active 1 = DC hold is active 1 Post-
magnetizing active
1 = Post-magnetizing is active
2 Motor pre- heating active
1 = Motor pre-heating is active
315 Reserved
06.33 MSW bit 14 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 14 (User bit 3) of 06.11 Main status word.
False
False 0. 0 True 1. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
07 07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information.
All parameters in this group are read-only. 07.03 Drive rating id Type of the drive/inverter unit. — 07.04 Firmware name Firmware identification. — 07.05 Firmware version Version number of the firmware. — 07.06 Loading package
name Name of the firmware loading package. —
07.07 Loading package version
Version number of the firmware loading package. —
07.11 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. — 0100% Microprocessor load. 1 = 1-
07.25 Customization package name
First five ASCII letters of the name given to the customization package. The full name is visible under System info on the control panel or the Drive Composer PC tool. _N/A_ = None.
—
07.26 Customization package version
Customization package version number. Also visible under System info on the control panel or the Drive Composer PC tool.
—
07.30 Adaptive program status
Shows the status of the adaptive program. See section Adaptive programming on page 58.
—
0000hFFFFh Adaptive program status 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Initialized Adaptive program initialized. 1 Editing Adaptive program in editing state. 2 Edit done Editing of the adaptive program finished. 3 Running Adaptive program running. 4-13 Reserved 14 State
changing State changing on-going in the adaptive programming engine.
15 Faulted Adaptive program faulted.
07.31 AP sequence state Shows the number of the active state of the sequence program part of the adaptive program (AP). If adaptive programming is not running, or it does not contain a sequence program, the parameter is zero.
020 1 = 1 07.35 Drive configuration Plug n play configuration. Performs HW
initialization, and shows the detected module configuration of the drive. During the HW initialization, if the drive is not able to detect any module, the value is set to 1, Base unit. For more information, see section Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control on page 600.
0x0000
0x0000oxffff Drive configuration. 1 = 1 07.36 Drive configuration 2 Shows the detected option module configuration. See
parameter 07.35.
0x0000
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Reserved 1 Base unit 2 BMIO-01 1 = I/O and Modbus module included 3 FENA-21 1 = Ethernet adapter module included 4 FECA-01 1 = EtherCAT adapter module
included 5 FPBA-01 1 = PROFIBUS DP adapter module
included 6 FCAN-01 1 = CANopen adapter module
included 7 BCAN-01 1 = CANopen adapter module
included 8 BIO-01 1 = binary I/O module included 9 RIIO-01 1 = modbus power module included 10 FSCA-01 1 = RS-485 adapter module included 11 FEIP-21 1 = EtherNet/IP adapter module
included 12 FMBT-21 1 = Modbus/TCP adapter module
included 13 Reserved
0000hFFFFh Drive configuration 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Reserved 1 FDNA-01 1 = FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter
module included 2 FCNA-01 1 = FCNA-01 ControlNet adapter
module included 3…6 Reserved 7 FSPS-21 1 = FSPS-21 adapter module
included 8…15 Reserved
09 09 Crane application signals
Signals related to crane applications. All parameters in this group are read-only.
09.01 Crane SW1 Shows the crane status word 1. 0000h
0000h…FFFFh Crane status word 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Brake slip at
standstill 1 = Speed matching function detected a brake slip when the motor was not running.
1 Slowdown activated 1 = Slowdown command is active either in the forward or reverse direction.
2 Forward slowdown limit
1 = Slowdown command is inactive in the forward direction.
3 Reverse slowdown limit
1 = Slowdown command is inactive in the reverse direction.
4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Forward stop limit 1 = Forward limit command is inactive. 8 Reverse stop limit 1 = Reverse limit command is inactive. 9 Reserved 10 Joystick reference
check 1 = Reference is greater than +/- 10% of the minimum or maximum scaled value of the used joystick reference, and the joystick zero position input is active.
11 Joystick zero position
1 = Drive does not accept a start command because of a wrong state of the joystick zero position input.
12 Brake control selected
1 = Mechanical brake control is selected.
13 Torque prove ok 1 = Torque proving has been successfully performed or Torque proving has been disabled.
14 Fast stop 1 = Fast stop command is active. 15 Power on
acknowledge warning
1 = Power on acknowledgment circuit is open, main contactor is open, warning D20B Power on acknowledge is generated. 0 = Power on acknowledgment circuit is closed, main contactor is closed. See parameter 20.212 Power on acknowledge (page 197) and section Power on acknowledgment (page 667).
09.03 Crane FW1 Shows the crane fault status word 1 with fault bits. 0000h
0000h…FFFFh Crane fault status word 1 with fault bits. 1 = 1 09.06 Crane speed
reference Shows the final speed reference received from the signal source.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Final crane speed reference. 1 = 1 rpm
09.16 Crane frequency reference
Shows the final frequency received from the signal source.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Final crane frequency reference. 10 = 1 Hz 10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
10.01 DI status Displays the electrical status of digital inputs DI1DI6. The activation/deactivation delays of the inputs (if any are specified) are ignored. Bits 05 reflect the status of DI1DI6. Example: 0000000000010011b = DI5, DI2 and DI1 are on, DI3, DI4 and DI6 are off. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Status of digital inputs. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Reserved 1 Speed match 1 = D105 Speed match (page 523) 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Stops limits IO error 1 = D108 Stop limits I/O error (page 523) 5 Reserved 6 Torque prove 1 = D100 Torque prove (page 522) 7 Brake slip 1 = D101 Brake slip (page 522) 8 Brake safe closure 1 = D102 Brake safe closure (page 522) 915 Reserved
Bit Value 0 DI1 = Sstatus of digital input 1. 1 DI2 = Status of digital input 2. 2 DI3 = Status of digital input 3. 3 DI4 = Status of digital input 4. 4 DI5 = Status of digital input 5. 5 DI6 = Status of digital input 6. 6…15 Reserved.
10.02 DI delayed status Displays the status of digital inputs. This word is updated only after activation / deactivation delays.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Delayed status of digital inputs. 1 = 1 10.03 DI force selection Selects the digital inputs, states of which will be
controlled by parameter 10.04 DI forced data. A bit in parameter 10.04 DI forced data is provided for each digital input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 10.03 and 10.04).
0000h
0000hFFFFh Override selection for digital inputs. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 DI1 = Delayed status of digital input 1. 1 DI2 = Delayed status of digital input 2. 2 DI3 = Delayed status of digital input 3. 3 DI4 = Delayed status of digital input 4. 4 DI5 = Delayed status of digital input 5. 5 DI6 = Delayed status of digital input 6. 6…15 Reserved.
Bit Value 0 1 = Force DI1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 1 1 = Force DI2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 2 1 = Force DI3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 3 1 = Force DI4 to value of bit 3 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 4 1 = Force DI5 to value of bit 4 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 5 1 = Force DI6 to value of bit 5 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. 6…15 Reserved.
10.04 DI forced data Defines the forced values for the digital inputs selected by parameter 10.03 DI force selection. It is only possible to force an input that has been selected in parameter 10.03 DI force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for DI1.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Forced values of digital inputs. 1 = 1 10.05 DI1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI1. 0.00 s
0.00 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 s 10.06 DI1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI1. 0.00 s
0.00 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 s 10.07 DI2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI2. 0.00 s
0.00 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 s 10.08 DI2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI2. 0.00 s
0.00 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 s 10.21 RO status Status of relay outputs R01…RO5. —
0000hFFFFh Status of relay outputs. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 Force the value of this bit to D1, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 1 Force the value of this bit to D2, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 2 Force the value of this bit to D3, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 3 Force the value of this bit to D4, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 4 Force the value of this bit to D5, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 5 Force the value of this bit to D6, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection. 6…15 Reserved.
Bit Value 0 1 = RO1 is energized. 1 1 = RO4 is energized. 2 1 = RO5 is energized. 3…15 Reserved.
10.22 RO force selection Selects the relay outputs that will be controlled by parameter 10.23. The signals connected to the relay outputs can be overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.23 RO forced data is provided for each relay output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 10.22 and 10.23).
0000h
0000hFFFFh Override selection for relay outputs. 1 = 1 10.23 RO forced data Contains the values of relay outputs that are used
instead of the connected signals if selected in parameter 10.22 RO force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for RO1. This provides the possibility to test the drive functionality without the plant wiring. Ton and Toff delays are passed.
0000hFFFFh Forced RO values. 1 = 1 10.24 RO1 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay
output RO1. Fault (-1)
Not energized Output is not energized. 0 Energized Output is energized. 1 Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word. 2 Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 1 = Force RO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data (0 =
Normal mode). 1 1 = Force RO4 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data (0 =
Normal mode). 2 1 = Force RO5 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data (0 =
Normal mode). 315 Reserved
Bit Value 0 1 = Force the value of this bit to RO1, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO
force selection. 1 1 = Force the value of this bit to RO4, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO
force selection. 2 1 = Force the value of this bit to RO5, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO
force selection. 315 Reserved
Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 5 Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 6 Running Bit 14 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 7 Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word. 8 At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word. 9 Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 10 Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 11 Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 12 Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 13 Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 14 Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 15 Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. 16 Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. 17 Overvoltage A drive is tripped to overvoltage fault. 18 Drive temp A drive is tripped to drive temperature fault. 19 Undervoltage A drive is tripped to undervoltage fault. 20 Motor temp A drive is tripped to motor temperature fault. 21 Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status. 22 Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 23 Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word. 24 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 27 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 28 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 29 Reserved Bit 3 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 30 Reserved Bit 4 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 31 Reserved Bit 5 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 32 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 33 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 34 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 35 Start delay Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 39 RO/DIO control word bit0
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 40
RO/DIO control word bit1
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 41
RO/DIO control word bit2
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 42
Event word 1 Parameter 04.40 Event word 1. 53
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
User load curve Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word (see page 329).
61
RO/DIO control word Maps to corresponding bit in parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word. For example, Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO1, Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO4, and so on.
62
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 10.25 RO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1. 0.0 —
tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 — 10.26 RO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output
RO1. See parameter 10.25 RO1 ON delay. 0.0 —
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 — 10.99 RO/DIO control word Storage parameter for controlling the relay outputs
eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface. To control the relay outputs (RO) of the drive, send a control word with the bit assignments shown below as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.10158.114) to RO/DIO control word. In the source selection parameter of the desired output, select the appropriate bit of this word.
0000h
0000hFFFFh RO control word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
Status of selected source
RO status
Time
Bit Name Description 0 RO1 Source bits for relay outputs RO1RO5 (see parameter
10.24).1 RO4 2 RO5 3 RO6 4 RO7 57 RO8-10 8…15 DIO1-8
10.101 RO1 toggle counter Displays the number of times relay output RO1 has changed states.
—
04294967000 State change count. 1 = 1 11 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO Configuration of the digital inputs/outputs (DIO) for use as
digital inputs,
11.02 DIO delayed status Displays the delayed status of digital input/outputs DIO2 and DIO1. This word is updated only after activation/deactivation delays (if any are specified). Example: 0010 = DIO2 is on, DIO1 is off. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000b0011b Status of digital input/outputs. 1 = 1 11.03 DIO force selection Selects the digital inputs, states which will be
controlled by parameter 11.04. A bit in parameter 11.04 is provided for each digital input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh Forced selections of digital inputs/outputs. 1=1 11.04 DIO force data Defines the forced values for the digital inputs
selected by parameter 11.03 DIO force selection. It is only possible to force an input that has been selected in parameter 10.03 DI force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for DIO1.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh Forced values of digital inputs/outputs. 1=1 11.05 DIO1 configuration Selects whether DIO1 is used as a digital output,
digital input, or frequency output. Note: DIOs cannot be used as frequency inputs.
Input
Digital output DIO1 is used as a digital output. 0 Input Digital input. 1 Frequency output DIO1 is used as frequency output. 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 1 = Force DIO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 11.04 DIO force data. 1 1 = Force DIO2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 11.04 DIO force data. 2…15 Reserved
Bit Value 0 Set state of DIO1. 1 Set state of DIO2. 2…15 Reserved
11.06 DIO1 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input/output DIO1 when it is configured to digital output by parameter 11.05.
Not energized
Not energized Output is not energized. 0 Energized Output is energized. 1 Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word. 2 Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 4 Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 5 Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 6 Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 7 Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word. 8 At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word. 9 Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 10 Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 11 Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 12 Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 13 Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 14 Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 15 Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. 16 Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. 17 Overvoltage A drive is tripped to overvoltage fault. 18 Drive temp A drive is tripped to drive temperature fault. 19 Undervoltage A drive is tripped to undervoltage fault. 20 Motor temp A drive is tripped to motor temperature fault. 21 Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status. 22 Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 23 Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word. 24 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 27 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 28 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 29 Reserved Bit 3 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 30 Reserved Bit 4 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 31 Reserved Bit 5 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 32 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 33 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 34 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 35 Start delay Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 39
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
RO/DIO control word bit0
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 40
RO/DIO control word bit1
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 41
RO/DIO control word bit2
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 42
User load curve Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word (see page 329).
61
RO/DIO control word Maps to corresponding bit in parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word. For example, Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO1, Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO4, and so on.
62
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 11.07 DIO1 ON delay Defines the on (activation) delay for digital
input/output DIO1 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
0.00 s
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for DIO1. 10 = 1 s 11.08 DIO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital
input/output DIO1 (when used as a digital output or digital input). See parameter 11.07 DIO1 ON delay.
0.00 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO1. 10 = 1 s 11.09 DIO2 configuration Selects whether DIO2 is used as a digital output or
input, or a frequency output. Note: DIOs cannot be used as frequency inputs.
Digital output
Digital output DIO2 is used as a digital output. 0 Input DIO2 is used as a digital input. 1 Frequency output DIO2 is used as frequency output. 2
11.10 DIO2 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input/output DIO2 when parameter 11.09 DIO2 configuration is set to Digital output. For the available selections, see parameter 11.06 DIO1 output source.
Ready run
11.11 DIO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input/output DIO2 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
0.00 s
0.0 300.0 s Activation delay for DIO2 10 = 1 s 11.12 DIO2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital
input/output DIO2 (when used as a digital output or digital input). See parameter 11.11 DIO1 ON delay.
0.00 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO2. 10 = 1 s 11.13 DI3 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI3: normal digital
input or frequency input. Digital input
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Digital input Digital input. See parameter 11.42 for more information.
0
Frequency input Frequency input. 1 Counter This value is available only when the BMIO-01
module is attached. If DI3 is configured as Counter, DI4 will not function as Frequency Input 2 due to hardware limitation.
0
11.17 DI4 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI4: normal digital input or frequency input.
Digital input Digital input. 0 Frequency input Frequency input. 1 Counter Available only when the BMIO-01 module is
attached. If DI3 is configured as Counter, DI4 will not function as Frequency Input 2 due to hardware limitation.
0
11.21 DI5 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI5: normal digital input or frequency input.
Digital input Digital input. 0 Frequency input Frequency input. 1 Counter This value is available only when the BIO-01
module is attached. If DI5 is configured as Counter, DI6 will not function as Frequency Input 2 due to hardware limitation.
0
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value Displays the value of frequency input 1 before scaling. See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min. This parameter is read-only.
—
0 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value Displays the value of frequency input 1 after
scaling. See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768.000 32767.000
Scaled value of frequency input 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
11.42 Freq in 1 min Defines the minimum for the frequency actually arriving at frequency input 1. The incoming frequency signal (11.38 Freq in 1 actual value) is scaled into an internal signal (11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value) by parameters 11.4211.45 as follows:
0 Hz
0 16000 Hz Minimum frequency of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.43 Freq in 1 max Defines the maximum value of the frequency
signal actually arriving at frequency input 1. See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
16000 Hz
0 16000 Hz Maximum frequency of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min Defines the value that corresponds to the actual
minimum input frequency defined by parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
0.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 1.
1 = 1
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max
Defines the value that corresponds to the actual maximum input frequency defined by parameter 11.43 Freq in 1 max. See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
1500.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 1.
1 = 1
11.46 Freq in 2 actual value Displays the value of frequency input 2 before scaling. See parameter 11.50 Freq in 2 min This parameter is read-only.
—
0 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz 11.47 Freq in 2 scaled Displays the value of frequency input 2 after
scaling. See parameter 11.50 Freq in 2 min. This parameter is read-only.
—
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
11.43
11.45
11.42
11.39
fin (11.38)
11.44
-32768.000 32767.000
Scaled value of frequency input 2. 1 = 1
11.50 Freq in 2 min Defines the minimum value for frequency input 2. 0 Hz 0 16000 Hz Minimum frequency of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz
11.51 Freq in 2 max Defines the maximum value for frequency input 2. 16000 Hz 0 16000 Hz Maximum frequency for frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz
11.52 Freq in 2 at scaled min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum frequency input 2 value defined by parameter Freq in 2 min.
0.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 2.
1 = 1
11.53 Freq in 2 at scaled max
Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum frequency input 2 value defined by parameter Freq in 2 max.
1500.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 2.
1 = 1
11.54 Freq out 1 actual value Displays the value of frequency output 1 after scaling. See parameter 11.58 Freq out 1 src min. This parameter is read-only.
—
0 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz 11.55 Freq out 1 source Selects a signal to be connected to frequency
output 1. Motor speed used
Not selected None 0 Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used 1 Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency 3 Motor current 01.07 Motor current 4 Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque 6 DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage 7 Output power 01.13 Output power 8 Speed ref ramp in 23.02 Speed ref ramp input 10 Speed ref ramp out 23.01 Speed ref ramp output 11 Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference 12 Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used 13 Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output 14 Process PID out 40.04 Process PID deviation actual 16 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
11.58 Freq out 1 src min Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter 11.55 Freq out 1 source and shown by parameter 11.54 Freq out 1 actual value) that corresponds to the minimum value of frequency output 1 (defined by parameter 11.60 Freq out 1 at src min).
0.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to minimum value of frequency output 1.
1 = 1
11.59 Freq out 1 src max Defines the minimum value for frequency output 1. 1500.000 -32768.000 32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to maximum value of frequency output 1.
1 = 1
11.60 Freq out 1 at src min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum frequency output 1 value defined by parameter Freq out 1 min.
0 Hz
0 16000 Hz Minimum value of frequency output 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.61 Freq out 1 at src
max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum frequency output 1 value defined by parameter Freq out 1 max.
16000 Hz
0 16000 Hz Maximum value of frequency output 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.62 Freq out 2 actual value Displays the value of frequency output 2 after
scaling. See parameter 11.66 Freq out 2 source min. This parameter is read-only.
—
0 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz 11.63 Freq out 2 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to the
frequency output 2. For the available selections, see parameter 11.55 Freq out 1 source.
Not selected
11.66 Freq out 2 source min Defines the minimum value for frequency output 2. 0.000 -32768.000 32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to minimum value of frequency output 2.
1 = 1
11.67 Freq out 2 source max Defines the minimum value for frequency output 2. 1500.000 -32768.000 32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to maximum value of frequency output 2.
1 = 1
11.68 Freq out 2 at src min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum frequency output 2 value defined by parameter Freq out 2 min.
0 Hz
0 16000 Hz Minimum value of frequency output 2. 1 = 1 Hz 11.69 Freq out 2 at src max Defines the real value that corresponds to the
maximum frequency output 2 value defined by parameter Freq out 2 max.
16000 Hz
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0 16000 Hz Maximum value of frequency output 2. 1 = 1 Hz 12 12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs.
12.02 AI force selection The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided for each analog input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: AI filter times (parameters 12.16 AI1 filter time and 12.26 AI1 filter time) have no effect on forced AI values (parameters 12.13 AI1 forced value and 12.23 AI2 forced value). Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameter 12.02).
0000h
0000hFFFFh Forced values selector for analog inputs AI1 and AI2.
1 = 1
12.03 AI supervision function Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input. The supervision applies a margin of 0.5 V or 1.0 mA to the limits. For example, if the maximum limit for the input is 7.000 V, the maximum limit supervision activates at 7.500 V. The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by parameter 12.04 AI supervision selection.
No action
No action No action taken. 0 Fault Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision. 1 Warning Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning. 2 Last speed Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision)
and freezes the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was operating at. The speed/frequency is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
communication break.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 1 = Force AI1 to value of parameter 12.13 AI1 forced value. 1 1 = Force AI2 to value of parameter 12.23 AI2 forced value. 215 Reserved
Speed ref safe Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
communication break.
4
12.04 AI supervision selection
Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See parameter 12.03 AI supervision function.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Activation of analog input supervision. 1 = 1 12.05 AI supervision force Activates/deactivate the Analog Input supervision
for each control location (EXT1, EXT2, Local). When a particular control location is not utilizing AI for referencing, then the AI supervision can be deactivated using this parameter, by deactivating particular AI supervision force bit. The user can mask the fault/warning for the selected control location.
0000 0000b
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 AI1 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active. 1 AI1 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active. 2 AI2 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active. 3 AI2 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active. 415 Reserved
Bit Name Description 0 AI1 Ext1 0 = AI1 supervision not active when EXT1 control is being
used. 1 AI1 Ext2 0 = AI1 supervision not active when EXT2 control is being
used. 2 AI1 Local 0 = AI1 supervision not active when Local control is being
used. 3 Reserved 4 AI2 Ext1 0 = AI2 supervision not active when EXT1 control is being
used. 5 AI2 Ext2 0 = AI2 supervision not active when EXT2 control is being
used. 6 AI2 Local 0 = AI2 supervision not active when Local control is being
used. 715 Reserved
AI1 Ext1 If active control location is EXT1, and AI supervision selection is high for AI1 (either bit0 AI1 < MIN or bit1 AI1 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 0 (AI1 Ext1) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
0
AI1 Ext2 If active control location is EXT2, and AI supervision selection is high for AI1 (either bit0 AI1 < MIN or bit1 AI1 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 1 (AI1 Ext2) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
1
AI1 Local If active control location is Local, and AI supervision selection is high for AI1 (either bit0 AI1 < MIN or bit1 AI1 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 1 (AI1 Local) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
2
AI2 Ext1 If active control location is EXT1, and AI supervision selection is high for AI2 (either bit2 AI2 < MIN or bit3 AI2 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 4 (AI2 Ext1) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
4
AI2 Ext2 If active control location is EXT1, and AI supervision selection is high for AI2 (either bit2 AI2 < MIN or bit3 AI2 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 4 (AI2 Ext1) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
5
AI2 Local If active control location is Local, and AI supervision selection is high for AI1 (either bit2 AI2 < MIN or bit3 AI2 > MAX is true) and Supervision force bit 6 (AI2 Local) is deactivated, then the corresponding supervision function (fault/warning) can be masked.
6
12.11 AI1 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage by a hardware setting). This parameter is read-only.
—
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.000 V
Value of analog input AI1. 1000 = 1 unit
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
12.12 AI1 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See parameters 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768 32767 Scaled value of analog input AI1. 1 = 1 12.13 AI1 forced value Defines the forced value that can be used instead
of the true reading of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selection.
—
— 1000 = 1 — 12.15 AI1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to
analog input AI1. See the default control connections of the macro in use, in chapter Control macros (page 31).
V
V Volts. 2 mA Milliamperes. 10
12.16 AI1 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1.
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.100 s
0.00030.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
63
%
100
T t
O = I (1 — e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal
12.17 AI1 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI1. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
4.000 mA or 0.000 V
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.00 V
Minimum value of AI1. 1000 = 1 mA or V
12.18 AI1 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI1. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
20.000 mA or 10.00 V
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.00 V
Maximum value of AI1. 1000 = 1 mA or V
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.17 AI1 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.19 and 12.20 can effectively invert the analog input.)
0
-32768.000 32767.000
1 = 1
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.18 AI1 max. See the drawing at parameter 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
50.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
12.20
12.18
12.17
12.19
AIin (12.11)
AIscaled (12.12)
12.21 AI2 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage by a hardware setting). This parameter is read-only.
—
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.000 V
Value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1 mA or V
12.22 AI2 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.101 AI1 percent value. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768.000 32767.000
Scaled value of analog input AI2. 1 = 1
12.23 AI2 forced value Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selectionn.
—
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.000 V
Forced value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1 mA or V
12.25 AI2 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI2. See the default control connections of the macro in use, in chapter Control macros (page 31).
mA
V Volts. 2 mA Milliamperes. 10
12.26 AI2 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time. Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.100 s
0.00030.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s 12.27 AI2 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input
AI2. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
4.000 mA or 0.000 V
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.000 V
Minimum value of AI2. 1000 = 1 mA or V
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
12.28 AI2 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI2. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
20.000 mA or 10.000 V
0.00022.000 mA or 0.00011.000 V
Maximum value of AI2. 1000 = 1 mA or V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.27 AI2 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.29 and 12.101 can effectively invert the analog input.)
0.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value. 1 = 1
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.28 AI2 max. See the drawing at parameter of 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min
50.000
-32768.000 32767.000
Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value. 1 = 1
12.101 AI1 percent value Value of analog input AI1 in percent of AI1 scaling (12.18 AI1 max — 12.17 AI1 min).
—
0.00 100.00 AI1 value 100 = 1% 12.102 AI2 percent value Value of analog input AI2 in percent of AI1 scaling
(12.28 AI2 max — 12.27 AI2 min). —
0.00 100.00 AI2 value 100 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
12.101
12.28
12.27
12.29
AIin (12.21)
AIscaled (12.22)
12.110 AI dead band AI dead band value in percentage where 100% = 10V in voltage mode and 100% = 20mA in current mode. Applicable for both AI1 and AI2.
Note: 10% of AI dead band value is internally added in firmware as AI dead band hysteresis positive and negative.
See section AI dead band on page 139,
0.40 %
0100 % AI dead band value 100 13 13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs.
13.02 AO force selection Selects the analog outputs that will be forced to values defined by parameters. The true source signals of the analog outputs can be overridden for eg. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided for each analog output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 13.02 and 13.11).
0000h
0000hFFFFh Forced values selector for analog output AO1. 1 = 1 13.11 AO1 actual value Displays the value of AO1 in mA.
This parameter is read-only. —
0.00022.000 mA Value of AO1. 1 = 1 mA 13.12 AO1 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output
AO1. Output frequency
Zero None. 0 Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used 1 Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency 3 Motor current 01.07 Motor current 4 Motor current % of motor nom
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom 5
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque 6 DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage 7 Output power 01.14 Output power 8 Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 1 = Force AO1 to value of parameter 13.13 AO1 forced value. 115 Reserved.
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output 11 Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference 12 Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output 14 Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual 16 Temp sensor 1 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection.
20
Temp sensor 2 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the temperature sensor 2, see parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. See section Motor thermal protection in chapter Program features.
21
Abs motor speed used 01.61 Abs motor speed used 26 Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed % 27 Abs output frequency 01.63 Abs output frequency 28 Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque 30 Abs output power 01.65 Abs output power 31 Abs motor shaft power 01.68 Abs motor shaft power 32 External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value 33 AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage 37 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
13.13 AO1 forced value Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
0.000 mA
— 1000 = 1 — 13.15 AO1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to
analog output AO1. mA
V Volts. 10 mA Milliamperes. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
13.16 AO1 filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1.
0.100 s
0.000 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
63
%
100
T t
O = I (1 — e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal
13.17 AO1 source min Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the minimum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min).
Setting 13.17 to the maximum value and 13.18 to the minimum value inverts the output.
0.0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
13.1813.17
13.20
13.19
IAO1 (mA)
Signal selected by 13.12
IAO1 (mA)
13.20
13.19
13.18 13.17 Signal (real) selected by 13.12
AO has automatic scaling. Every time the source for the AO is changed, the scaling range is changed accordingly. User given minimum and maximum values override the automatic values.
-32768.032767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output value.
1 = 1
13.18 AO1 source max Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the maximum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max). See parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
50.0
-32768.032767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output value.
1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
13.12 AO1 source, 13.22 AO2 source
13.17 AO1 source min, 13.27 AO2 source min
13.18 AO1 source max, 13.28 AO2 source max
0 Zero N/A (Output is constant zero.) 1 Motor speed used 0 46.01 Speed scaling 3 Output frequency 0 46.02 Frequency scaling 4 Motor current 0 Max. value of 30.17
Maximum current 5 Motor current % of motor
nom 0% 100%
6 Motor torque 0 46.03 Torque scaling 7 DC voltage Min. value of 01.11 DC
voltage Max. value of 01.11 DC voltage
8 Output power 0 46.04 Power scaling 10 Speed ref ramp in 0 46.01 Speed scaling 11 Speed ref ramp out 0 46.01 Speed scaling 12 Speed ref used 0 46.01 Speed scaling 14 Freq ref used 0 46.02 Frequency scaling 16 Process PID out Min. value of 40.01
Process PID output actual Max. value of 40.01 Process PID output actual
20 Temp sensor 1 excitation N/A (Analog output is not scaled; it is determined by the sensors triggering voltage.)21 Temp sensor 2 excitation
26 Abs motor speed used 0 46.01 Speed scaling 27 Abs motor speed % 0 46.01 Speed scaling 28 Abs output frequency 0 46.02 Frequency scaling 30 Abs motor torque 0 46.03 Torque scaling 31 Abs output power 0 46.04 Power scaling 32 Abs motor shaft power 0 46.04 Power scaling 33 External PID1 out Min. value of 71.01
External PID act value Max. value of 71.01 External PID act value
Other Min. value of the selected parameter
Max. value of the selected parameter
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min
Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1. See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000 mA
0.00022.00 mA 0.00011.000 V
Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max
Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1. See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
20.000 mA
0.00022.000 mA 0.00011.000 V
Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
13.91 AO1 data storage Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO1 eg. through fieldbus. In parameter 13.12 AO1 source, select AO1 data storage. Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming value data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.10158.124 to AO1 data storage).
0.00
-327.68 327.67 Storage parameter for AO1. 100 = 1 15 15 I/O extension module Configuration of the I/O extension module.
Note: The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I/O extension module type.
15.01 Extension module type Activates (and specifies the type of) I/O extension module. If the value is None, when an extension module has been installed and the dive is powered, the drive automatically sets the value to the type it has detected (= value of parameter 15.02 Detected extension module); otherwise warning A7AB Extension I/O configuration failure is generated and you have to set the value of this parameter manually.
None
None Inactive. 0 BREL External relay option BREL-01. 5 BAPO-01 Auxiliary power extension module option BAPO-
01. 6
BTAC-02 BTAC-02 pulse encoder interface module option BTAC-02.
7
15.02 Detected extension module
Shows the I/O extension module that the control program has automatically detected on the drive.
None
None Inactive. 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
BREL External relay option BREL-01. 5 BAPO-01 Auxiliary power extension module option BAPO-
01. 6
BTAC-02 Pulse encoder interface module option BTAC-02. 7 15.04 RO status Displays the status of the relay outputs RO4, RO5,
RO6 and RO7 on the extension module. 0000h
0000hFFFFh Status of relay outputs. 1 = 1 15.05 RO force selection The electrical statuses of the relay outputs can be
overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 15.06 RO forced data is provided for each relay output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 15.05 and 15.06).
0000h
0000hFFFFh Override selection for relay outputs. 1 = 1 15.06 RO forced data Allows the data value of a forced relay or relay
output to be changed from 0 to 1. It is only possible to force an output that has been selected in parameter 15.05 RO force selection Bits 03 are the forced values for RO4RO7.
0000h
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 Status of RO4 (1= relay closed, 0=relay open) 1 Status of RO5 (1= relay closed, 0=relay open) 2 Status of RO6 (1= relay closed, 0=relay open) 3 Status of RO7 (1= relay closed, 0=relay open) 4…15 Reserved
Bit Value 0 1= Force RO4 to value of bit 0 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. 1 1= Force RO5 to value of bit 1 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. 2 1= Force RO6 to value of bit 2 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. 3 1= Force RO7 to value of bit 3 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. 415 Reserved
Bit Value 0 1= Force RO4 to value of bit 0 of parameter 15.05 RO force selection 1 1= Force RO5 to value of bit 1 of parameter 15.05 RO force selection 2 1=Force RO6 to value of bit 2 of parameter 15.05 RO force selection 3 1= Force RO7 to value of bit 3 of parameter 15.05 RO force selection 4…15 Reserved
0000hFFFFh Forced values of relay outputs. 1 = 1 15.07 RO4 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay
output RO4. Not energized
Not energized Output is not energized. 0 Energized Output is energized. 1 Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word 2 Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 4 Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 5 Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 6 Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 7 Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word. 8 At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word. 9 Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 10 Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 11 Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 12 Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 13 Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 14 Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 15 Fault/Warning Bit 3 OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 16 Overcurrent Relay is energized when drive is tripped to
overcurrent fault. 17
Overvoltage Relay is energized when drive is tripped to overvoltage fault.
18
Drive temp Relay is energized when drive is tripped to drive temperature fault.
19
Undervoltage Relay is energized when drive is tripped to undervoltage fault.
20
Motor temp Relay is energized when drive is tripped to motor temperature fault.
21
Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status. 22 Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 23 Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word. 24 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 27 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 28 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 29 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 33 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 34 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 35
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Start delay 39 RO/DIO control word bit0
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 40
RO/DIO control word bit1
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 41
RO/DIO control word bit2
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 42
Event word 1 Parameter 04.40 Event word 1. 53 User load curve Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output
status word (see page 329). 61
RO/DIO control word Maps to corresponding bit in parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word. For example, Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO1, Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word controls RO4, and so on.
62
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 15.08 RO4 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO4. 0.0 s
tOn = 15.08 RO4 ON delay tOff = 15.09 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO4. 1 = 1 s 15.09 RO4 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output
RO4. See parameter 15.08 RO4 ON delay. 0.0 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO4. 1 = 1 s 15.10 RO5 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay
output RO5. Not energized
See parameter 15.07 RO4 source for the available selections.
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
Status of selected source
RO status
Time
15.11 RO5 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO5. 0.0 s
tOn = 15.11 RO5 ON delay tOff = 15.12 RO5 OFF delay
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO5. 1 = 1 s 15.12 RO5 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output
RO5. See parameter 15.11 RO5 ON delay. 0.0 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO5. 1 = 1 s 15.13 RO6 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay
output RO6. Not energized
See parameter 15.07 RO4 source for the available selections.
15.14 RO6 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO6. 0.0 s
tOn = 15.08 RO6 ON delay tOff = 15.09 RO6 OFF delay
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO6. 1 = 1 s 15.15 RO6 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output
RO6. See parameter 15.14 RO6 ON delay. 0.0 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO6. 1 = 1 s 15.16 RO7 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay
output RO7. Not energized
See parameter 15.07 RO4 source for the available selections.
15.17 RO7 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO7. 0.0 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
Status of selected source
RO status
Time
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
Status of selected source
RO status
Time
tOn = 15.17 RO5 ON delay tOff = 15.18 RO7 OFF delay
0.0 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO7. 1 = 1 s 15.18 RO7 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output
RO7. See parameter 15.17 RO5 ON delay. 0.0 s
0.0 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO7. 1 = 1 s 19 19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources
and operating modes. See section Operating modes and motor control modes in chapter Program features.
19.01 Actual operation mode Displays the operating mode currently used. See parameters 19.1119.14. This parameter is read-only.
—
Zero Zero. 1 Speed Speed control (in vector motor control mode). 2 Torque Torque control (in vector motor control mode). 3 Min The torque selector is comparing the output of the
speed controller (25.01) and torque reference (26.74) and the smaller of the two is used (in vector motor control mode).
4
Max The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed controller (25.01) and torque reference (26.74) and the greater of the two is used (in vector motor control mode).
5
Scalar (Hz) Frequency control in scalar motor control mode (in scalar motor control mode).
10
Forced magn. Motor is in magnetizing mode. 20 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selects the source for external control location
EXT1/EXT2 selection. 0 = EXT1 1 = EXT2
EXT1
EXT1 EXT1 (permanently selected). 0 EXT2 EXT2 (permanently selected). 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
Status of selected source
RO status
Time
FBA A MCW bit 11 Control word bit 11 received through fieldbus interface A.
2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 Always offAlways offDI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
12
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 21 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 30 EFB MCW bit 11 Control word bit 11 received through the
embedded fieldbus interface. 32
FBA A connection loss Detected communication loss of fieldbus interface A changes control mode to EXT2.
33
EFB connection loss Detected communication loss of embedded fieldbus interface changes control mode to EXT2.
35
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 19.12 Ext1 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control
location EXT1 in vector motor control mode. Speed
Zero None. 1 Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01
Torque reference speed control (output of the speed reference chain).
2
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Minimum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the smaller of the two. If speed error becomes negative, the drive follows the speed controller output until speed error becomes positive again. This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
4
Maximum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the greater of the two. If speed error becomes positive, the drive follows the speed controller output until speed error becomes negative again. This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
5
19.14 Ext2 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2 in vector motor control mode. For the selections, see parameter 19.12 Ext1 control mode.
Speed
19.16 Local control mode Selects the operating mode for local control in vector motor control mode.
Speed
Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque reference speed control (output of the speed reference chain).
0
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
1
19.17 Local control disable Enables/disables local control (start and stop buttons on the control panel, and the local controls on the PC tool).
WARNING! Before disabling local control, ensure that the control panel is not needed
for stopping the drive.
No
No Local control enabled. 0 Yes Local control disabled. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20 20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source selection. For information on control locations, see section Local and external control locations (page 50).
20.01 Ext1 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for external control location 1 (EXT1). See also parameters 20.0220.05. See parameter 20.21 for the determination of the actual direction.
In1 Start; In2 Dir
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0 In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is
selected by parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
1
In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.03) Command
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
Start
0 Stop
State of source 1 (20.03)
State of source 2 (20.04) Command
0 Any Stop 0 -> 1 (20.02 =
Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
0 Start forward
1 Start reverse
In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev
The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the forward start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
3
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Notes: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no
effect with this setting. When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on
the control panel are disabled.
4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.03)
State of source 2 (20.04) Command
0 0 Stop 0 -> 1 (20.02 =
Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
0 Start forward
0 0 -> 1 (20.02 =
Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
Start reverse
1 1 Stop
State of source 1 (20.03)
State of source 2 (20.04) Command
0 -> 1 1 Start Any 0 Stop
In1P Start; In2 Stop; In3 Dir
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Notes: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no
effect with this setting. When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on
the control panel are disabled.
5
In1P Start fwd; In2P Start rev; In3 Stop
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source, 20.04 Ext1 in2 source and 20.05 Ext1 in3 source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Note: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
6
Control panel Start; stop and direction commands through control panel; when EXT1 is active. Applies also for PC-Tool when it is connected via panel port.
11
Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter A. Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
12
Embedded fieldbus The start and stop commands are taken from the embedded fieldbus interface. Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
14
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.03)
State of source 2 (20.04)
State of source 3 (20.05)
Command
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward 0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse Any 0 Any Stop
State of source 1 (20.03)
State of source 2 (20.04)
State of source 3 (20.05)
Command
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse Any Any 0 Stop
Integrated Panel Start; stop and direction commands from Integrated Panel
23
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control location EXT1 is edge-triggered or level-triggered. Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse- type start signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
Level
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0 Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.03 Ext1 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
DI1
Always off 0 (always off). 0 Always on 1 (always on). 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
20.04 Ext1 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
DI2
20.05 Ext1 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20.06 Ext2 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for external control location 2 (EXT2). See also parameters 20.0720.10. See parameter 20.21 for the determination of the actual direction.
Not selected
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0 In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is
selected by parameter 20.08 Ext2 in1 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
1
In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
2
In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev
The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the forward start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext1 in2 source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.08) Command
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
Start
0 Stop
State of source 1 (20.08)
State of source 2 (20.09) Command
0 Any Stop 0 -> 1 (20.07 =
Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
0 Start forward
1 Start reverse
State of source 1 (20.08)
State of source 2 (20.09) Command
0 0 Stop 0 -> 1 (20.07 =
Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
0 Start forward
0 0 -> 1 (20.07 =
Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
Start reverse
1 1 Stop
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext1 in2 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Notes: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no
effect with this setting. When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on
the control panel are disabled.
4
In1P Start; In2 Stop; In3 Dir
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext1 in2 source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Notes: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no
effect with this setting. When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on
the control panel are disabled.
5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.08)
State of source 2 (20.09) Command
0 -> 1 1 Start Any 0 Stop
State of source 1 (20.08)
State of source 2 (20.09)
State of source 3 (20.10)
Command
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward 0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse Any 0 Any Stop
In1P Start fwd; In2P Start rev; In3 Stop
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source, 20.09 Ext1 in2 source and 20.10 Ext2 in3 source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Note: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
6
Control panel Start; stop and direction commands through control panel; when EXT1 is active. Applies also for PC-Tool when it is connected via panel port.
11
Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter A. Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
12
Embedded fieldbus Start; stop and direction commands through embedded fieldbus protocol when EXT1 is active. Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
14
Integrated Panel Start; stop and direction commands from Integrated Panel
23
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control location EXT2 is edge-triggered or level-triggered. Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse- type start signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
Level
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0 Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.08 Ext2 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
State of source 1 (20.08)
State of source 2 (20.09)
State of source 3 (20.10)
Command
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse Any Any 0 Stop
20.09 Ext2 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
20.10 Ext2 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
20.11 Run enable stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable signal switches off. The source of the run enable signal is selected by parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Coast
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it is safe to stop the drive by
coasting.
0
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
1
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20).
2
20.12 Run enable 1 source Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start. If already running, the drive will stop according to the setting of parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode. 1 = Run enable signal on.
See also parameter 20.19 Enable start signal
Selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 FBA A MCW bit 3 Control word bit 3 received through fieldbus
interface A. 30
EFB MCW bit 3 Control word bit 3 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
32
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 20.19 Enable start signal Selects the source for the start enable signal.
1 = Start enable. With the signal switched off, any drive start command is inhibited. (Switching the signal off while the drive is running will not stop the drive.) See also parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
On
Off 0. 0 On 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
12
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20.21 Direction Reference direction lock. Defines the direction of the drive rather than the sign of the reference, except in some cases. In the table the actual drive rotation is shown as a function of parameter 20.21 Direction and Direction command (from parameter 20.01 Ext2 commands or 20.06 Ext2 commands).
Request
Request In external control the direction is selected by a direction command (parameter 20.01 Ext2 commands or 20.06 Ext2 commands). If the reference comes from Constant (constant speeds/frequencies), Motor potentiometer, PID, Fail, Last (last speed reference), Jogging (jogging speed) or Panel reference, the reference is used as is. If the reference comes from a fieldbus: if the direction command is forward, the
reference is used as is if the direction command is reverse, the
reference is multiplied by -1.
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Direction command = Forward
Direction command = Reverse
Direction command not defined
Par. 20.21 Direction = Forward
Forward Forward Forward
Par. 20.21 Direction = Reverse
Reverse Reverse Reverse
Par. 20.21 Direction = Request
Forward, but If reference from
Constant, Motor potentiometer, PID, Safe speed, Last, Jogging or Panel reference, reference used as is.
If reference from the network, reference used as is.
Reverse, but If reference from
Constant, PID or Jogging reference, reference used as is.
If reference from the network, Panel, Analog input, Motor potentiometer, Safe speed or Last reference, reference multiplied by -1.
Forward
Forward Motor rotates forward regardless of the sign of the external reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero. Positive reference values are used as is.)
1
Reverse Motor rotates reverse regardless of the sign of the external reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero. Positive reference values are multiplied by -1.)
2
20.22 Enable to rotate Setting this parameter to 0 stops motor rotating but does not affect any other conditions for rotating. Setting the parameter back to 1 starts motor rotating again. This parameter can be used for example with a signal from some external equipment to prevent the motor rotating before the equipment is ready. When this parameter is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled), bit 13 of parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1 is set to 0.
Selected
Not selected 0 (always off). 0 Selected 1 (always on). 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
12
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20.25 Jog enable Selects the source for a jog enable signal. (The sources for jogging activation signals are selected by parameters 20.26 Jog 1 start and 20.27 Jog 2 start.) 1 = Jogging is enabled. 0 = Jogging is disabled. Notes: Jogging is supported in vector control mode
only. Jogging can be enabled only when no start
command from an external control location is active. On the other hand, if jogging is already enabled, the drive cannot be started from an external control location (apart from inching commands through fieldbus).
See section Rush control on page 71.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
12
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20.26 Jog 1 start If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jog enable, selects the source for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20.25.) 1 = Jogging 1 active. Notes: Jogging is supported in vector control mode
only. If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one
that was activated first has priority. This parameter cannot be changed while the
drive is running.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
12
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
20.27 Jog 2 start If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jog enable, selects the source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20.25.) 1 = Jogging 2 active. For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jog 1 start. Notes: Jogging is supported in vector control mode
only. If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one
that was activated first has priority. This parameter cannot be changed while the
drive is running. For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jog 1 start.
Not selected
20.30 Enable signal warning function
Selects the enable signal warnings that will be suppressed. This parameter can be used to prevent these warnings from being added to the event log. Whenever a bit of this parameter is set to 1, the corresponding warning is suppressed.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Word for disabling enable signal warnings. 1 = 1 20.210 Fast stop input Selects the source for activating the Fast stop
command. 0 = Fast stop command is active. 1 = Fast stop command is inactive (normal operation). When the command is active, the drive decelerates according to the value of parameter 23.206 Fast stop deceleration time.
Inactive (true)
Active (false) Fast stop command is enabled. 0 Inactive (true) Fast stop command is disabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Enable to rotate 1 = Warning AFED Enable to rotate is suppressed. 1 Run enable missing 1 = Warning AFEB Run enable missing is
suppressed. 315 Reserved
DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0).
11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
20.211 Fast stop mode Selects the mode of the Fast stop function. Ramp Ramp The drive decelerates to zero speed according to a
defined ramp time. The mechanical brake closes when the drive reaches the brake close speed.
1
Torque limit The drive decelerates to zero speed against the drive torque limits. The mechanical brake closes when the drive reaches the brake close speed.
2
Mechanical brake The function forces the mechanical brake to close. 3 20.212 Power on
acknowledge Selects the source for activating the Power on acknowledgment signal. 1 = Power on acknowledgment circuit is closed, main contactor is closed. 0 = Power on acknowledgment circuit is open, main contactor is open, warning D20B Power on acknowledge generated. For more information on the function, see section Power on acknowledgment on page 667.
Selected
Not Selected Power on acknowledge function is disabled. 0 Selected Power on acknowledge function is enabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
20.213 Power on ackn reset delay
Defines the time delay for a fault reset after the Power on acknowledgment signal is activated.
1000 ms
030000 ms Time delay. 1 = 1 ms 20.214 Joystick zero position Selects the source for activating the joystick zero
position input. 0 = Joystick is not at zero position. 1 = Joystick is at zero position. For more information, see section Start/stop interlocking on page 659.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
20.215 Joystick warning delay Defines the time delay for generating warning D208 Joystick reference check. The warning is generated if 20.214 Joystick zero position is active and the speed reference is greater than +/- 10% of the minimum or maximum scaled value of the joystick reference used.
1000 ms
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
030000 ms Time delay. 1 = 1 ms 20.216 Crane control word 1 Shows the control signals as received from the
selected sources. The parameter updates based on the parameter group 53 FBA A data out selections. Note: These bits are not connected to any functions by default. The bit names exists already for which you need to make connections separately.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Crane control program control word 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Start forward 1 = Start command in the forward direction. 1 Start reverse 1 = Start command in the reverse direction. 2 Fault reset 1 = Activate a fault reset. 3 Step reference
mode 1 = Enable the Step reference mode.
4 Step reference select 2
1 = Enable step reference selection pointer 2.
5 Step reference select 3
1 = Enable step reference selection pointer 3.
6 Step reference select 4
1 = Enable step reference selection pointer 4.
7 Slowdown forward 1 = Deactivate the Slowdown command in the forward direction.
8 Slowdown reverse 1 = Deactivate the Slowdown command in the reverse direction.
9 Forward stop limit 1 = Deactivate the forward stop limit command. 10 Reverse stop limit 1 = Deactivate the reverse stop limit command. 11 Fast stop 1 = Activate the Fast stop command. 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved
21 21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal
source selection; DC magnetization settings.
21.01 Vector start mode Selects the motor start function for the vector motor control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Vector. Notes: The start function for the scalar motor control
mode is selected by parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode.
Starting into a rotating motor is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).
With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode must be used.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
See also section DC magnetization on page 78.
Const time
Fast The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-magnetizing time is determined automatically, typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. Select this mode if a high break-away torque is required.
0
Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02 Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre- magnetizing time is set long enough.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting into a rotating motor) and the automatic restart function. The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions. Note: If parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar, no flying start or automatic restart is possible unless parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Automatic.
2
21.02 Magnetization time Defines the pre-magnetization time when parameter 21.01 Vector start mode is set to
Const time (in vector motor control mode), or parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to
Const time (in scalar motor control mode). After the start command, the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor for the set time. To ensure full magnetizing, set this parameter to the same value as, or higher than, the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
500 ms
010000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time. 1 = 1 ms 21.03 Stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop
command is received. Additional braking is possible by selecting flux braking (see parameter 97.05 Flux braking).
Ramp
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, make sure it is safe to stop the drive by
coasting.
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time
< 1 kW > 50 to 100 ms
1 to 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp or 28 Frequency reference chain.
1
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20). This mode is only possible in vector motor control mode.
2
21.04 Emergency stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when an emergency stop command is received. The source of the emergency stop signal is selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
Ramp stop (Off1)
Ramp stop (Off1) With the drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Normal stop along the standard deceleration
ramp defined for the particular reference type (see section Reference ramping on page 65). After the drive has stopped, it can be restarted by removing the emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped: 1 = Starting allowed. 0 = Starting not allowed.
0
Coast stop (Off2) With the drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting. With the drive stopped: 1 = Starting allowed. 0 = Starting not allowed.
1
Eme ramp stop (Off3) With the drive running: 1 = Normal operation 0 = Stop by ramping along emergency stop
ramp defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time. After the drive has stopped, it can be restarted by removing the emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped: 1 = Starting allowed 0 = Starting not allowed
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.05 Emergency stop source
Selects the source of the emergency stop signal. The stop mode is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode. 0 = Emergency stop active 1 = Normal operation Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Inactive (true)
Active (false) 0. 0 Inactive (true) 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6 DIO1 Digital input DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status bit 0). 10 DIO2 Digital input DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status bit 0). 11
21.06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along a speed ramp (when ramped stop is selected or emergency stop time is used) until the defined zero speed limit is reached. After the zero speed delay, the motor coasts to a stop.
30.00 rpm
0.0030000.00 rpm
Zero speed limit. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive knows the rotor position accurately.
0 ms
Without zero speed delay: The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill.
With zero speed delay: The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, the zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart. Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with the jogging function.
030000 ms Zero speed delay. 1 = 1 ms
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Speed controller switched off: Motor coasts to a stop
21.06 Zero speed limit
Speed
Time
Speed controller remains active. Motor is decelerate to true zero speed.
21.06 Zero speed limit
Speed
TimeDelay
21.08 DC current control Activates/deactivates the DC hold and post- magnetization functions. See section DC magnetization on page 78. Note: DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC magnetization times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC magnetization period is long, DC magnetization cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
0b0000
0b00000b1111 DC magnetization selection. 1 = 1 21.09 DC hold speed Defines the DC hold speed in speed control mode.
See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold on page 78.
5.00 rpm
0.001000.00 rpm DC hold speed. See par. 46.01
21.10 DC current reference Defines the DC hold current and post magnetization current in percent of the motor nominal current. See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC magnetization on page 78. After 100 s post-magnetization time, the maximum magnetization current is limited to the magnetization current corresponding to the actual flux reference.
30.0%
0.0100.0% DC hold current. 1 = 1% 21.11 Post magnetization
time Defines the length of time for which post- magnetization is active after stopping the motor. The magnetization current is defined by parameter 21.10 DC current reference. See parameter 21.08 DC current control
0 s
03000 s Post-magnetization time. 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 1 = DC hold. See section DC hold on page 78.
Note: The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off. 1 1 = Post-magnetization. See section Post-magnetization on page 79.
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode (see parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
215 Reserved
21.14 Pre-heating input source
Selects the source for triggering pre-heating for the motor. The status of the pre-heating is shown as bit 2 of 06.21 Drive status word 3. Notes: The heating function requires that STO is not
triggered. The heating function requires that the drive is
not faulted. Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Off
Off 0. Pre-heating is always deactivated. 0 On 1. Pre-heating is always activated when the drive
is stopped. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 285). 8 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 285). 9 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 285). 10 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page
302) 11
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 302).
12
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 302)
13
DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0).
14
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
15
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 21.15 Pre-heating time delay Time delay before pre-heating starts after the drive
is stopped. 60 s
10…3000 s Pre-heating time delay. 1 = 1 s 21.16 Pre-heating current Defines the DC current used to heat the motor.
The value is in percent of the nominal motor current.
0.0%
0.030.0% Pre-heating current. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.18 Auto restart time The motor can be automatically started after a short supply power failure using the automatic restart function. See section Automatic restart on page 105. When this parameter is set to 0.0 seconds, automatic restarting is disabled. Otherwise, the parameter defines the maximum duration of the power failure after which restarting is attempted. Note that this time also includes the DC pre-charging delay.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous
situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and continues operation after a supply break.
10.0 s
0.0 s Automatic restart disabled. 0 0.010.0 s Maximum power failure duration. 1 = 1 s
21.19 Scalar start mode Selects the motor start function for the scalar motor control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar. Notes: The start function for the vector motor control
mode is selected by parameter 21.01 Vector start mode.
With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode must be used.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
See also section DC magnetization on page 78.
Const time
Normal Immediate start from zero speed. 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02 Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre- magnetizing time is set long enough. Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
1
Automatic The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor. This is useful for flying starts: if the motor is already rotating, the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency. Note: Cannot be used in multimotor systems.
2
Torque boost Torque boost is applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when output frequency is equal to reference.
3
Automatic + boost If the Flystart routine does not detect rotating motor, torque boost is applied.
4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Flying start The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor. If the motor is already rotating, drive will start smoothly at the current frequency. The mode will start the motor with vector control and switch to scalar control on the fly when the motor speed has been found. Compared to the Automatic start mode, Flying start detects the motor speed faster. Flying start requires more accurate information about motor model. Therefore standstill ID run is done automatically when the drive is started for the first time after selecting Flying start. Motor plate values should be accurate. Wrong plate values may decrease the starting performance. Notes: Flying start cannot be used in multimotor
systems. During flying start, the drive will at first run in
vector control mode. This is why, when using flying start, the drive nominal current setting must be in the allowed range for vector control mode. See parameter 99.06.
5
Flying start+boost Flying start with torque boost. Flying start is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, torque boost is applied.
6
21.21 DC hold frequency Defines the DC hold frequency, which is used instead of parameter 21.09 DC hold speed when the operating mode in use is Scalar frequency mode. See parameters 19.01 Actual operation mode, 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold on page 78.
5.00 Hz
0.001000.00 Hz DC hold frequency. 1 = 1 Hz 21.22 Start delay Defines the start delay. After the conditions for
start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor. During the delay, warning AFE9 Start delay is shown. Start delay can be used with all start modes.
0.00 s
0.0060.00 s Start delay 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.23 Smooth start Enables smooth start function. Smooth start function restricts the motor current below the limit defined by parameter 21.24 Smooth start current when the motor speed is below 21.25 Smooth start speed. Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors only.
Disabled
Disabled Smooth start disabled 0 Enabled always Smooth start function is always active when the
speed is below the smooth start speed. 1
Start only Smooth start function is only active during starting until the smooth start speed is reached..
2
21.24 Smooth start current Current applied to motor when the smooth start is active.
50.0%
10.0… 200.0% 1=1% 21.25 Smooth start speed Set the smooth start speed until when the current
is applied. 10.0%
2.0… 100.0% 1=1% 21.26 Torque boost current Defines the maximum supplied current to motor
during Torque boost starting mode. Parameter value is in percent of the motor nominal current. Nominal value of the parameter is 100.0%. Torque boost starting mode can be used only when motor control mode is Scalar. Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when output frequency is equal to reference.
100.0%
15.0… 300.0% 0.01 = 1% 21.27 Torque boost time Defines the minimum and maximum torque boost
time. If torque boost time is less than 40% of frequency acceleration time (see parameters 28.72 and 28.74), torque boost time is set at 40% of the frequency acceleration time.
WARNING! Long run operation of smooth start at low speed with high current may
heat the motor.
20.0 s
0.0… 60.0s Nominal motor time. 1=1s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.30 Speed compensated stop mode
Selects the method used to stop the drive. See also section Speed compensated stop on page 81. Speed compensated stop is active only if the operation mode is not torque, and
parameter 21.03 Stop mode is Ramp, or parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode is
Ramp (in case Run enable is missing).
Off
Off Stop according parameter 21.03 Stop mode, no speed compensated stop.
0
Speed comp FWD If the direction of rotation is forward, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp. If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped along a ramp.
1
Speed comp REV If the direction of rotation is reverse, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp. If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped along a ramp.
2
Speed comp bipolar Regardless of the direction of rotation, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
3
21.31 Speed compensated stop delay
This delay adds distance to the total distance traveled during a stop from maximum speed. It is used to adjust the distance to match requirements so that the distance traveled is not solely determined by the deceleration rate.
0.00 s
0.001000.00 s Speed delay. 1 = 1 s 21.32 Speed comp stop
threshold This parameter sets a speed threshold below which the Speed compensated stop feature is disabled. In this speed region, the speed compensated stop is not attempted and the drive stops as it would, using the ramp option.
10%
0100% Speed threshold as a percent of the motor nominal speed.
1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
21.34 Force auto restart Forces automatic restart. The parameter is applicable only if parameter 95.04 Control board supply is set to External 24V.
Disable
Disable Force auto restart disabled. Parameter 21.18 Auto restart time is in effect if its value is more than 0.0 s.
0
Enable Force auto restart enabled. Parameter 21.18 Auto restart time is ignored. The drive never trips on the undervoltage fault and the start signal is on forever. When he DC voltage is restored, the normal operation continues.
1
22 22 Speed reference selection
Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings. See the control chain diagrams on pages 612616.
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Displays the output of the speed reference selection block. See the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Value of the selected speed reference. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Selects Ext1 speed reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.13 Ext1 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext1 reference (A in the figure below). A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be used to switch between Ext1 reference and the corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1, 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 and 22.20 Ext2 speed function (B in the figure below). Note: The default value depends on plug and play configuration and/or the selected macro. See Control macros on page 31.
The default depends on the drive configurati on: AI1 scaled with an IO controlled drive and FB A ref 1 with a fieldbus controlled drive.
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
19.11
1
0
22.13
MUL SUB ADD
MIN MAX
22.11
22.12
22.86
0 AI
Other
0 AI
Other
Ref1
22.20
MUL SUB ADD
MIN MAX
22.18
22.19
0 AI
Other
0 AI
Other
Ref1
A
B
Ext1
Ext2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2. 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
MotPot Crane Output of the crane motor potentiometer. See 22.230 Crane motpot ref act.
31
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2 Selects Ext1 speed reference source 2.
For the diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Zero
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2. 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
22.13 Ext1 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Ref1
Ref1 Signal selected by 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 is used as speed reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 — ref2) The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] — [22.12 Ext1 speed ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
5
Abs (ref1) The absolute value of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1
6
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.20 Ext2 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1. 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9 Motor potentiometer 22.19 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
Zero
22.20 Ext2 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
Ref1
Ref1 Signal selected by Ext2 speed ref1 is used as speed reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 — ref2) The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] — [22.12 Ext1 speed ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
5
Abs (ref1) The absolute value of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1
6
22.21 Constant speed function
Determines how constant speeds are selected, and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed.
0b0001
0b0000…ob1111 Constant speed configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Constant
speed mode 1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24. 0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority.
1 Direction enable
1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.2622.32) is multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant speeds if all values in 22.2622.32 are positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative, the drive will run in
the forward direction. 0 = According to Par: The running direction for the constant frequency is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 28.2628.32).
2 Speed step 1 = Speed step enable; 0 = Speed step disable 315 Reserved
22.22 Constant speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See Control macros on page 31. When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.23 Constant speed sel2 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows:
DI2
Always off 0 (always off). 0 Always on 1 (always on). 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Source defined by par. 22.22
Source defined by par. 22.23
Source defined by par. 22.24
Constant speed active
0 0 0 None 1 0 0 Constant speed 1 0 1 0 Constant speed 2 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 0 0 1 Constant speed 4 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 0 1 1 Constant speed 6 1 1 1 Constant speed 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 22.23 Constant speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed
function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 2. When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant speed sel1 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See Control macros on page 31.
Always off
22.24 Constant speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 3. When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant speed sel1 and 22.23 Constant speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1. For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
Always off
22.26 Constant speed 1 Defines constant speed 1 (the speed the motor will turn when constant speed 1 is selected).
300.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 1. See par. 46.01
22.27 Constant speed 2 Defines constant speed 2. 600.00 rpm -30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 2. See par. 46.01
22.28 Constant speed 3 Defines constant speed 3. 900.00 rpm -30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 3. See par. 46.01
22.29 Constant speed 4 Defines constant speed 4. 1200.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 4. See par. 46.01
22.30 Constant speed 5 Defines constant speed 5. 1500.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 5. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
22.31 Constant speed 6 Defines constant speed 6. 2400.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 6. See par. 46.01
22.32 Constant speed 7 Defines constant speed 7. 3000.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 7. See par. 46.01
22.41 Speed ref safe Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with supervision functions such as 12.03 AI supervision function 49.05 Communication loss action 50.02 FBA A comm loss func.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Safe speed reference. See par. 46.01
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For more information on jogging, see page 71.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 1. See par. 46.01
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For more information on jogging, see page 71.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 2. See par. 46.01
22.51 Critical speed function Enables/disables the critical speeds function. Also determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not. See also section Critical speeds/frequencies on page 66.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh Critical speeds configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Enable 1 = Enable: Critical speeds enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical speeds disabled. 1 Sign mode 1 = Signed: The signs of parameters 22.52 22.57 are taken
into account. 0 = Absolute: Parameters 22.52 22.57 are handled as absolute values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
215 Reserved
22.52 Critical speed 1 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22.53 Critical speed 1 high.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 1. See par. 46.01
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22.52.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 1. See par. 46.01
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of parameter 22.55.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 2. See par. 46.01
22.55 Critical speed 2 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of parameter 22.54.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 2. See par. 46.01
22.56 Critical speed 3 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of parameter 22.57 .
0.00 rpm
-30000.0030000. 00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 3. See par. 46.01
22.57 Critical speed 3 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of parameter 22.56.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 3. See par. 46.01
22.70 Motor potentiometer reference enable
Determines when 22.73 and 22.74 may change 22.80.
Selected
Not selected Motor potentiometer up and down sources (22.73 and 22.74) are disabled.
0
Selected Motor potentiometer up and down sources (22.73 and 22.74) are enabled.
1
While running Motor potentiometer reference enable follows bit 4 Following reference of parameter 06.16.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
22.71 Motor potentiometer function
Activates and selects the mode of the motor potentiometer. See section Speed control performance figures in chapter Program features.
Disabled
Disabled Motor potentiometer is disabled and its value set to 0.
0
Enabled (init at power- up)
When enabled, the motor potentiometer first adopts the value defined by parameter 22.72. The value can then be adjusted from the up and down sources defined by parameters 22.73 and 22.74. A power cycle will reset the motor potentiometer to the predefined initial value (22.72).
1
Enabled (resume always)
As Enabled (init at power-up), but the motor potentiometer value is retained over a power cycle.
2
Enabled (init to actual) Whenever another reference source is selected, the value of the motor potentiometer follows that reference. After the source of reference returns to the motor potentiometer, its value can again be changed by the up and down sources (defined by 22.73 and 22.74).
3
Enabled (resume/init to Actual)
As Enabled (init to actual), but the motor potentiometer ref act value is retained over power cycle.
4
22.72 Motor potentiometer initial value
Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor potentiometer. See the selections of parameter 22.71.
0.00
-32768.00 32767.00
Initial value for motor potentiometer. 1 = 1
22.73 Motor potentiometer up source
Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal. 0 = No change 1 = Increase motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not change.)
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
22.74 Motor potentiometer down source
Selects the source of motor potentiometer down signal. 0 = No change 1 = Decrease motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not change.) For the selections, see parameter 22.73.
Not selected
22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Defines the change rate of the motor potentiometer. This parameter specifies the time required for the motor potentiometer to change from minimum (parameter 22.76) to maximum (parameter 22.77). The same change rate applies in both directions.
40.0 s
0.03600.0 s Motor potentiometer change time. 1 = 1 s 22.76 Motor potentiometer
min value Defines the minimum value of the motor potentiometer. Note: If vector control mode is used, the value of this parameter must be changed.
-50.00
-32768.00 32767.00
Motor potentiometer minimum. 1 = 1
22.77 Motor potentiometer max value
Defines the maximum value of the motor potentiometer. Note: If vector control mode is used, the value of this parameter must be changed.
50.00
-32768.00 32767.00
Motor potentiometer maximum. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act
Shows the output of the motor potentiometer function. (The motor potentiometer is configured using parameters 22.7122.74.) This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768.00 32767.00
Value of motor potentiometer. 1 = 1
22.86 Speed reference act 6 Displays the value of the speed reference (Ext1 or Ext2) that has been selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 or the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference after additive 2. See par. 46.01
22.87 Speed reference act 7 Displays the value of speed reference before application of critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page 612. The value is received from 22.86 Speed reference act 6 unless overridden by any constant speed a jogging reference network control reference control panel reference safe speed reference. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference before application of critical speeds.
See par. 46.01
22.211 Speed reference shape
Defines the speed reference shape. See also section Parabolic speed reference on page 670.
Linear
Linear Linear speed reference. 0 Parabolic 1 X2 speed reference. 1 Parabolic 2 X3 speed reference. 2
22.220 Crane motpot enable Enables or selects the source to activate the Crane motor potentiometer function. See section Crane motor potentiometer on page 673.
Not selected
Not selected Crane motor potentiometer function is disabled. 0 Selected Crane motor potentiometer function is enabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
22.223 Crane motpot accel sel
Selects the source of Crane motor potentiometer accelerate signal. See section Crane motor potentiometer on page 673.
Not selected
Not selected No change. 0 Selected Increases the motor potentiometer value
depending on the selected direction. The possible effect can be seen in parameter 22.225 Crane motpot sw, bits 3 and 4.
1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
22.224 Crane motpot min speed
Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor potentiometer at start. See section Crane motor potentiometer on page 673.
0.00
0.00…30000 Minimum speed. 1 = 1 22.225 Crane motpot sw Crane motor potentiometer status word. 0000h
0000h…FFFFh Status word. 1 = 1 22.226 Crane motpot min
value Defines the minimum value of the Crane motor potentiometer.
-50.00
-30000.00… 30000.00
Minimum value 1= 1
22.227 Crane motpot max value
Defines the maximum value of Crane motor potentiometer.
50.00
-30000.00… 30000.00
Maximum value 1 = 1
22.230 Crane motpot ref act Displays the output of the motor potentiometer function.
0.00
-30000.00… 30000.00
1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Crane motpot
enabled Status of the Crane motor potentiometer function. 1 = Crane motor potentiometer enabled. 0 = Crane motor potentiometer disabled.
1…2 Reserved 3 Crane motpot
up source Used as source for four inputs of the motor potentiometer to increase the output value. 1 = Crane motor potentiometer with increased output reference. 0 = Crane motor potentiometer without increased output reference.
4 Crane motpot dn source
Used as source for four inputs of the motor potentiometer to decrease the output value. 1 = Crane motor potentiometer with decreased output reference. 0 = Crane motor potentiometer without decreased output reference.
515 Reserved
23 23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the
acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive). See the control chain diagram on page 614.
23.01 Speed ref ramp input Displays the used speed reference (in rpm) before it enters the ramping and shaping functions. See the control chain diagram on page 614. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference before ramping and shaping. See par. 46.01
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm. See the control chain diagram on page 614. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference after ramping and shaping. See par. 46.01
23.11 Ramp set selection Selects the source that switches between the two sets of acceleration/deceleration ramp times defined by parameters 23.12 23.15 0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are active 1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are active.
DIO1
Acc/Dec time 1 0. 0 Acc/Dec time 2 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
FBA A Only for the Transparent16 or Transparent32 profile. Transparent16 or Transparent32 control word bit received through the fieldbus A interface.
18
EFB DCU CW bit 10 Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
20
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed). If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate. If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference. If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits.
3.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s 23.13 Deceleration time 1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required
for the speed to change from the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not from parameter 30.12 Maximum speed) to zero. If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference. If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. If the deceleration rate is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits (or not to exceed a safe DC link voltage). If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that DC overvoltage control is on (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control). Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
3.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s 23.14 Acceleration time 2 Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 23.12
Acceleration time 1. 60.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 23.13
Deceleration time 1. 60.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
23.20 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function ie. the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. See section Rush control on page 71.
60.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Acceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s 23.21 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging
function ie. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero. See section Rush control on page 71.
60.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Deceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s 23.23 Emergency stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped
if an emergency stop Off3 is activated (ie. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling to zero). Emergency stop mode and activation source are selected by parameters 21.04 Emergency stop mode and 21.05 Emergency stop source respectively. Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus. Notes: Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard
deceleration ramp as defined by parameters 23.1123.15.
The same parameter value is also used in frequency control mode (ramp parameters 28.7128.75).
3.000 s
0.000 1800.000 s Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
23.28 Variable slope enable Activates the variable slope function, which controls the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. This allows for a constantly variable ramp rate to be generated, instead of just the standard two ramps normally available. If the update interval of the signal from an external control system and the variable slope rate (23.32 Variable slope rate) are equal, speed reference (23.02 Speed ref ramp output) is a straight line.
This function is only active in remote control.
Off
Off Variable slope disabled. 0 On Variable slope enabled (not available in local
control). 1
23.29 Variable slope rate Defines the rate of the speed reference change when variable slope is enabled by parameter 23.28 Variable slope enable. For the best result, enter the reference update interval into this parameter.
50 ms
230000 ms Variable slope rate. 1 = 1 ms
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
t
Speed reference
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Speed reference
Time
A
t = update interval of signal from external control system A = speed reference change during t
23.32 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 1. 0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. 0.0011000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between. Acceleration:
Deceleration:
0.000 s
0.1001800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s
23.33 Shape time 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 23.32 Shape time 1.
0.000 s
0.1001800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Speed
Time
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s
Speed
Time
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
23.206 Fast stop deceleration time
Defines the time within which the drive stops if the drive receives a Fast stop command (20.210 Fast stop input).
0.500 s
0.00 3000.000 s Fast stop deceleration time. 10 = 1 s 24 24 Speed reference conditioning
Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration; speed error step. See the control chain diagram on page 612.
24.01 Used speed reference Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference (before speed error calculation). See the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed reference used for speed error calculation. See par. 46.01
24.02 Used speed feedback Displays the speed feedback used for speed error calculation. See the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed feedback used for speed error calculation. See par. 46.01
24.03 Speed error filtered Displays the filtered speed error. See the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0 rpm
Filtered speed error. See par. 46.01
24.04 Speed error inverted Displays the inverted (unfiltered) speed error. See the control chain diagram on page 612. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0 rpm
Inverted speed error. See par. 46.01
24.11 Speed correction Defines a speed reference correction, ie. a value added to the existing reference between ramping and limitation. This is useful to trim the speed if necessary, for example to adjust draw between sections of a paper machine. See the control chain diagram on page 612.
0.00 rpm
-10000.00 10000.00 rpm
Speed reference correction. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
24.12 Speed error filter time Defines the time constant of the speed error low- pass filter. If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with this filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A very long filter time results in unstable control.
0 ms
010000 ms Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled.
1 = 1 ms
25 25 Speed control Speed controller settings.
See the control chain diagram on page 616. 25.01 Torque reference
speed control Displays the speed controller output that is transferred to the torque controller. See the control chain diagram on page 616. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Limited speed controller output torque. See par. 46.03
25.02 Speed proportional gain
Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. Too high a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
10.00
If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference — actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by 10%, ie. the output value is input gain.
0.00 250.00 Proportional gain for speed controller. 100 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time = 0 TD= Derivation time = 0
%
Controller output =
Kp e Time
e = Error value Controller output Error value
25.03 Speed integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. This time constant must be set to the same order of magnitude as the time constant (time to respond) of the actual mechanical system being controlled, otherwise instability will result. Setting the integration time to zero disables the I- part of the controller. This is useful to do when tuning the proportional gain; adjust the proportional gain first, then return the integration time. Anti-windup (the integrator just integrates up to 100%) stops the integrator if the controller output is limited. See 06.05 Limit word1. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
2.50 s
0.001000.00 s Integration time for speed controller. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Kp e
Kp e
%
e = Error value
Time
Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time = 0
Controller output
TI
25.04 Speed derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances. For simple applications (especially those without a pulse encoder), derivative time is not normally required and should be left at zero. The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
0.000 s
0.00010.000 s Derivation time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s 25.05 Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See
parameter 25.04 Speed derivation time. 8 ms
010000 ms Derivation filter time constant. 1 = 1 ms
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time > 0 Ts= Sample time period = 250 s
Kp TD e Ts
Controller output
e = Error value
Error value
TimeTI
Kp e
Kp e
%
25.06 Acc comp derivation time
Defines the derivation time for acceleration(/deceleration) compensation. In order to compensate for a high inertia load during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described under parameter 25.04 Speed derivation time. Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine. The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp. No acceleration compensation:
Acceleration compensation:
0.00 s
0.001000.00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Time
Speed
Actual speed
Time
Speed
Actual speed
25.07 Acc comp filter time Defines the acceleration (or deceleration) compensation filter time constant. See parameters 25.04 Speed derivation time and 25.06 Acc comp derivation time.
8.0 ms
0.01000.0 ms Acceleration/deceleration compensation filter time. 1 = 1 ms 25.15 Proportional gain em
stop Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller when an emergency stop is active. See parameter 25.02 Speed proportional gain.
10.00
1.00250.00 Proportional gain upon an emergency stop. 100 = 1 25.30 Flux adaptation enable Enables/disables speed controller adaptation
based on motor flux reference (01.24 Flux actual %). The proportional gain of the speed controller is multiplied by a coefficient of 01 between 0100% flux reference respectively.
Enable
Disable Speed controller adaptation based on flux reference disabled.
0
Enable Speed controller adaptation based on flux reference enabled.
1
25.33 Speed controller auto tune
Activates (or selects a source that activates) the speed controller auto tune function. See section Speed controller autotune (page 67). The autotune will automatically set parameters 25.02 Speed proportional gain, 25.03 Speed integration time and 25.37 Mechanical time constant..
Off
Off Not activated. 0 On Activated. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Coefficient for Kp (proportional gain)
1.000
0.000 1000
Flux reference
25.34 Autotune control preset
Defines a control preset for the speed controller auto tune function. The setting affects the way the torque reference will respond to a speed reference step.
Normal
Smooth Slow yet robust response. 0 Normal Normal response. 1 Tight Fast response which can produce high gain value. 2
25.37 Mechanical time constant
Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as determined by the speed controller autotune function. The value can be adjusted manually.
—
0.00 1000.00 s Mechanical time constant. 10 = 1 s 25.38 Autotune torque step Defines an added torque value used by the auto
tune function. This value is scaled to the motor nominal torque. Note: The torque used by the auto tune function can also be limited by the torque limits (in parameter group 30 Limits) and the nominal motor torque.
10.00
0.00 20.00 % 25.39 Autotune speed step Defines a speed value added to the initial speed
for the auto tune function. The initial speed (speed used when auto tune is activated) plus the value of this parameter is the calculated maximum speed used by the auto tune routine. The maximum speed can also be limited by the speed limits (in parameter group 30 Limits) and nominal motor speed. The value is scaled to the motor nominal speed. Note: The motor will exceed the calculated maximum speed slightly at the end of each acceleration stage.
10.00
0.00 20.00 % 25.40 Autotune repeat times Determines how many acceleration/deceleration
cycles are performed during the auto tune routine. Increasing the value will improve the accuracy of the auto tune function, and allow the use of smaller torque or speed step values
10
0 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
25.53 Torque prop reference Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 616. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0%
P-part output of speed controller. See par. 46.03
25.54 Torque integral reference
Displays the output of the integral (I) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 616. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0%
I-part output of speed controller. See par. 46.03
25.55 Torque deriv reference Displays the output of the derivative (D) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 616. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0%
D-part output of speed controller. See par. 46.03
25.56 Torque acc compensation
Displays the output of the acceleration compensation function. See the control chain diagram on page 616. This parameter is read-only.
—
-30000.0 30000.0%
Output of acceleration compensation function. See par. 46.03
26 26 Torque reference chain Settings for the torque reference chain.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 549 and 617.
26.01 Torque reference to TC
Displays the final torque reference given to the torque controller in percent. This reference is then acted upon by various final limiters, like power, torque, load etc. See the control chain diagrams on pages 549 and 617. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
26.02 Torque reference used Displays the final torque reference (in percent of motor nominal torque) given to the torque controller, and comes after frequency, voltage and torque limitation. See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par. 46.03
26.08 Minimum torque ref Defines the minimum torque reference. Allows for local limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1.
-300.0%
-1000.00.0% Minimum torque reference. See par. 46.03
26.09 Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference. Allows for local limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to parameter 30.20 Maximum torque 1.
300.0%
0.01000.0% Maximum torque reference. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
26.11 Torque ref1 source Selects torque reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. A digital source selected by 26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection can be used to switch between the two sources, or a mathematical function (26.13 Torque ref1 function) applied to the two signals to create the reference.
Zero
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 132). 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 132). 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 133). 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 133). 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
26.14
1
0
26.11
0 AI
26.12
26.72
26.71
Other
0 AI
Other
26.13
MUL SUB ADD
MIN MAX
Ref1
26.70
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved) 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 26.12 Torque ref2 source Selects torque reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
Zero
26.13 Torque ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 26.11 Torque ref1 source and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
Ref1
Ref1 Signal selected by 26.11 Torque ref1 source is used as torque reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 — ref2) The subtraction ([26.11 Torque ref1 source] — [26.12 Torque ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
Mul (ref1 ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1.
5
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Configures the selection between torque references 1 and 2. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source. 0 = Torque reference 1 1 = Torque reference 2
Torque reference 1
Torque reference 1 0. 0 Torque reference 2 1. 1 Follow Ext1/Ext2 selection
Torque reference 1 is used when external control location EXT1 is active. Torque reference 2 is used when external control location EXT2 is active. See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 26.17 Torque ref filter time Defines a low-pass filter time constant for the
torque reference. 0.000 s
0.00030.000 s Filter time constant for torque reference. 1000 = 1 s 26.18 Torque ramp up time Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, ie. the
time for the reference to increase from zero to nominal motor torque.
0.000 s
0.00060.000 s Torque reference ramp-up time. 100 = 1 s 26.19 Torque ramp down
time Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, ie. the time for the reference to decrease from nominal motor torque to zero.
0.000 s
0.00060.000 s Torque reference ramp-down time. 100 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
26.20 Torque reversal Inverts the torque reference or selects the source for the inversion signal. Torque reversal is located in the torque reference chain after torque reference act 3 signal, so the inversion is visible in torque reference act 4 signal.
Always off
Always off Torque reference is not inverted. 0 Always on Torque reference is inverted. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations)). —
26.70 Torque reference act 1 Displays the value of torque reference source 1 (selected by parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source). See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Value of torque reference source 1. See par. 46.03
26.71 Torque reference act 2 Displays the value of torque reference source 2 (selected by parameter 26.12 Torque ref2 source). See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Value of torque reference source 2. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
26.72 Torque reference act 3 Displays the torque reference after the function applied by parameter 26.13 Torque ref1 function (if any), and after selection (26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection). See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference after selection. See par. 46.03
26.73 Torque reference act 4 Displays the torque reference after application of reference additive 1. See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference after application of reference additive 1.
See par. 46.03
26.74 Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping. See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference after limiting and ramping. See par. 46.03
26.75 Torque reference act 5 Displays the torque reference after control mode selection. See the control chain diagram on page 617. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference after control mode selection. See par. 46.03
26.76 Torque reference act 6 Displays the torque reference after torque trim. See the control chain diagram on page 617. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.01600.0% Torque reference See par. 46.03
26.81 Rush control gain Rush controller gain term. See section Rush control (page 71).
10.0
0.0 10000.0 Rush controller gain (0.0 = disabled). 1 = 1 26.82 Rush control
integration time Rush controller integration time term. 2.0 s
0.0 10.0 s Rush controller integration time (0.0 = disabled). 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
28 28 Frequency reference chain
Settings for the frequency reference chain. See the control chain diagrams on pages 549 and 617.
28.01 Frequency ref ramp input
Displays the used frequency reference before ramping. See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-500.00500.00 Hz
Frequency reference before ramping. See par. 46.02
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
Displays the final frequency reference (after selection, limitation and ramping). See the control chain diagram on page 549. This parameter is read-only.
—
-500.00500.00 Hz
Final frequency reference. See par. 46.02
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.13 Ext1 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext1 reference (A in the figure below). A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be used to switch between Ext1 reference and the corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1, 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 and 28.17 Ext2 frequency function (B in the figure below). Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See chapter Control macros on page 31.
Integrated panel (ref saved)
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 132). 4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
19.11
1
0
28.13
MUL SUB ADD
MIN MAX
28.11
28.12
28.92
0 AI
Other
0 AI
Other
Ref1
28.17
MUL SUB ADD
MIN MAX
28.15
28.16
0 AI
Other
0 AI
Other
Ref1
A
B
Ext1
Ext2
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 132). 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 133). 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 133). 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
MotPot Crane Output of the crane motor potentiometer. See 22.230.
31
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2 Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 2.
For the diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
Zero None. 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 132). 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 132). 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 133). 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 133). 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
28.13 Ext1 frequency function
Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Ref1
Ref1 Signal selected by 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 is used as frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 — ref2) The subtraction ([28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1] — [28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
5
Abs (ref1) The absolute value of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
6
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.17 Ext2 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 132). 4 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 132). 5 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 133). 8 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 133). 9 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act(output of the
motor potentiometer). 15
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
17
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
19
Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 20
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input).
22
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
Zero
28.17 Ext2 frequency function
Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
Ref1
Ref1 Signal selected by 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 is used as frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 — ref2) The subtraction ([28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1] — [28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
Mul (ref1 ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
5
Abs (ref1) Selects a mathematical function between the frequency reference sources.
6
28.21 Constant frequency function
Determines how constant frequencies are selected, and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant frequency.
0b00001
0b0000…0b1111 Constant frequency configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Const freq
mode 1 = Packed: 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24. 0 = Separate: Constant frequencies 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant frequency with the smaller number takes priority.
1 Direction enable
1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant frequency, the sign of the constant frequency setting (parameters 28.2628.32) is multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant frequencies if all values in 28.2628.32 are positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active constant frequency is negative, the drive will run
in the forward direction. 0 = According to Par: The running direction for the constant frequency is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 28.2628.32).
2 Frequency step
Frequency step: 1 = Freq step enable; 0 = Freq step disable
28.22 Constant frequency sel1
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 1. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See chapter Control macros on page 31. When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant frequencies as follows:
DI2
Always off 0 (always off). 0 Always on 1 (always on). 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0) 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Source defined by par. 28.22
Source defined by par. 28.23
Source defined by par. 28.24
Constant frequency active
0 0 0 None 1 0 0 Constant frequency 1 0 1 0 Constant frequency 2 1 1 0 Constant frequency 3 0 0 1 Constant frequency 4 1 0 1 Constant frequency 5 0 1 1 Constant frequency 6 1 1 1 Constant frequency 7
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 2. When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See Control macros on page 31.
Always off
28.24 Constant frequency sel3
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 3. When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
Always off
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 1 (the frequency the motor will turn when constant frequency 1 is selected).
5.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 1. See par. 46.02
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Defines constant frequency 2. 10.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 2. See par. 46.02
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Defines constant frequency 3. 15.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 3. See par. 46.02
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Defines constant frequency 4. 20.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 4. See par. 46.02
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Defines constant frequency 5. 25.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 5. See par. 46.02
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Defines constant frequency 6. 40.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 6. See par. 46.02
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Defines constant frequency 7. 50.00 Hz -500.00500.00 Hz
Constant frequency 7. See par. 46.02
28.41 Frequency ref safe Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with supervision functions such as 12.03 AI supervision function 49.05 Communication loss action 50.02 FBA A comm loss func.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Safe frequency reference. See par. 46.02
28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref
Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 1 in scalar control mode.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Jogging 1 frequency reference. See par. 46.02
28.43 Jogging 2 frequency ref
Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 2 in scalar control mode.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Jogging 2 frequency reference. See par. 46.02
28.51 Critical frequency function
Enables/disables the critical frequencies function. Also determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not. See also section Critical speeds/frequencies on page 66.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Critical frequencies configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Crit freq 1 = Enable: Critical frequencies enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical frequencies disabled. 1 Sign mode 1 = According to par: The signs of parameters 28.5228.57
are taken into account. 0 = Absolute: Parameters 28.5228.57 are handled as absolute values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.53 Critical frequency 1 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 1. See par. 46.02
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
High limit for critical frequency 1. See par. 46.02
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.55 Critical frequency 2 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 2. See par. 46.02
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
High limit for critical frequency 2. See par. 46.02
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.57 Critical frequency 3 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 3. See par. 46.02
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
High limit for critical frequency 3. See par. 46.02
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
Selects a source that switches between the two sets of acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters 28.7228.75. 0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force. 1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. See chapter Control macros on page 31.
Acc/Dec time 1
Acc/Dec time 1 0 0 Acc/Dec time 2 1 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
FBA A Only for the Transparent16 or Transparent32 profile. Transparent16 or Transparent32 control word bit received through the fieldbus A interface.
18
EFB DCU CW bit 10 Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
20
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 28.72 Freq acceleration time
1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. After this frequency has been reached, the acceleration continues with the same rate to the value defined by parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency. If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor will follow the acceleration rate. If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference. If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits.
3.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s 28.73 Freq deceleration time
1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the frequency to change from the frequency defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not from parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency) to zero. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that DC overvoltage control (30.30 Overvoltage control) is on. Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
3.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2
Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1.
60.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s 28.75 Freq deceleration time
2 Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1.
60.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s 28.76 Freq ramp in zero
source Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to zero. 0 = Force frequency reference to zero 1 = Normal operation
Inactive
Active 0. 0 Inactive 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
28.82 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 1. 0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. 0.0011000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between. Acceleration:
Deceleration:
0.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s
28.83 Shape time 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 28.82 Shape time 1.
0.000 s
0.0001800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Speed
Time
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s
Speed
Time
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Displays the frequency reference after the function applied by parameter 28.13 Ext1 frequency function (if any), and after selection (19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection ). See the control chain diagram on page 610. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Frequency reference after selection. See par. 46.02
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Displays the frequency reference after application of constant frequencies, control panel reference, etc. See the control chain diagram on page 610. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Frequency reference 7. See par. 46.02
28.97 Frequency ref unlimited
Displays the frequency reference after application of critical frequencies, but before ramping and limiting. See the control chain diagram on page 610. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Frequency reference before ramping and limiting. See par. 46.02
28.211 Frequency reference shape
Defines the Frequency reference shape. Linear
Linear Linear frequency reference. 0 Parabolic 1 X2 frequency reference. 1 Parabolic 2 X3 frequency reference. 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30 30 Limits Drive operation limits.
30.01 Limit word 1 Displays limit word 1. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Limit word 1. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Torq lim 1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control
(undervoltage control, current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or by the torque limits defined by parameters.
12 Reserved 3 Torq ref max 1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.09 Maximum
torque ref or 30.20 Maximum torque 1 4 Torq ref min 1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.08 Minimum
torque ref or 30.19 Minimum torque 1 5 Tlim max
speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of maximum speed limit (30.12 Maximum speed)
6 Tlim min speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of minimum speed limit (30.11 Minimum speed)
7 Max speed ref lim
1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.12 Maximum speed
8 Min speed ref lim
1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.11 Minimum speed
9 Max freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.14 Maximum frequency
10 Min freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.13 Minimum frequency
1115 Reserved
30.02 Torque limit status Displays the torque controller limitation status word. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Torque limitation status word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Undervoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage 1 Overvoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage 2 Minimum
torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.19 Minimum torque 1, 30.26 Power motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
3 Maximum torque
*1 = Torque is being limited by 30.20 Maximum torque 1, 30.26 Power motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
4 Internal current 1 = An inverter current limit (identified by bits 811) is active 5 Load angle (With permanent magnet motors and reluctance motors only)
1 = Load angle limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more torque
6 Motor pullout (With asynchronous motors only) Motor pull-out limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more torque
7 Reserved 8 Thermal 1 = Input current is being limited by the main circuit thermal
limit 9 Max current *1 = Maximum output current (IMAX) is being limited 10 User current *1 = Output current is being limited by 30.17 Maximum
current 11 Thermal IGBT *1 = Output current is being limited by a calculated thermal
current value 12 IGBT
overtemperatur e
*1 = Output current is being limited because of the estimated IGBT temperature
13 IGBT overload *1 = Output current is being limited because of the IGBT junction to case temperature
1415 Reserved *Only one out of bits 03, and one out of bits 911 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first.
30.11 Minimum speed Defines together with 30.12 Maximum speed allowed speed range. See the figure below. A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. A negative minimum speed value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.11 Minimum speed must not be higher than the
30.12 Maximum speed. WARNING! In speed control mode only. In frequency control mode, use frequency limits (30.13 and 30.14).
-1500.00 rpm
-30000.0030000. 00 rpm
Minimum allowed speed. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Speed
Speed range allowed
Speed range allowed
Speed range allowed
Time
Speed
Time
0
0
30.11 value is < 0 30.12
30.11
30.11 value is > 0
30.12
30.11
-30.11
-30.12
30.12 Maximum speed Defines together with 30.11 Minimum speed allowed speed range. See parameter 30.11 Minimum speed. Note: This parameter does not affect the speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.12 Maximum speed must not be lower than
30.11 Minimum speed. WARNING! In speed control mode only. In frequency control mode, use frequency limits (30.13 and 30.14).
1500.00 rpm
-30000.00 30000.00 rpm
Maximum speed. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.13 Minimum frequency Defines together with 30.14 Maximum frequency allowed frequency range. See the figure below. A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. A negative minimum frequency value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.13 Minimum frequency must not be higher than
30.14 Maximum frequency. WARNING! in frequency control mode only.
-50.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Minimum frequency. See par. 46.02
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Frequency
Frequency range allowed
Frequency range allowed
Frequency range allowed
Time
Frequency
Time
0
0
30.13 value is < 0 30.14
30.13
30.13 value is > 0
30.14
30.13
-30.13
-30.14
30.14 Maximum frequency Defines together with 30.13 Minimum frequency allowed frequency range. See 30.13 Minimum frequency. Note: This parameter does not affect the speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
WARNING! This absolute value of 30.14 Maximum frequency must not be lower than
30.13 Minimum frequency. WARNING! In frequency control mode only.
50.00 Hz
-500.00500.00 Hz
Maximum frequency. See par. 46.02
30.17 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current. The system sets the default value to 90% of the rated current. If required, you can increase the parameter value by 10%. Note: The maximum current range and default value depends on the drive type.
2.88 A
0.003.20 A Maximum motor current. 1 = 1 A
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.18 Torq lim sel Selects a source that switches between two different predefined minimum torque limit sets. 0 = minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.20 are active 1 = minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.22 are active The user can define two sets of torque limits, and switch between the sets using a binary source such as a digital input. The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.19 and 30.20. The second set has selector parameters for both the minimum (30.21) and maximum (30.22) limits that allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
Note: In addition to the user-defined limits, torque may be limited for other reasons (such as power limitation). Refer to the block diagram on page 547.
Torque limit set 1
Torque limit set 1 0 (minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.20 are active).
0
Torque limit set 2 1 (minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.22 are active).
1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.21
User-defined minimum torque
limit
0 AI1 AI2 PID
30.23
0 AI1 AI2 PID
30.24
30.19
30.22
30.18
0
1
30.20
30.18
0
1
User-defined maximum torque
limit
DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0).
6
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
7
EFB Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 15 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 30.19 Minimum torque 1 Defines a minimum torque limit for the drive (in
percent of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel. The limit is effective when the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
WARNING! Do not use minimum torque to stop reverse rotation of the motor. Usage of
minimum torque limits disables the drive to reach zero speed and fails to stop the motor.
-300.0%
-1600.00.0% Minimum torque limit 1. See par. 46.03
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Defines a maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel. The limit is effective when the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
300.0%
0.01600.0% Maximum torque 1. See par. 46.03
30.21 Min torque 2 source Defines the source of the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim
sel is 1, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel. Note: Any positive values received from the selected source are inverted.
Minimum torque 2
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the
process PID controller). 15
Minimum torque 2 30.23 Minimum torque 2. 16
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 30.22 Max torque 2 source Defines the source of the maximum torque limit for
the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim
sel is 1, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel. Note: Any negative values received from the selected source are inverted.
Maximum torque 2
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 166). 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 168). 2 PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the
process PID controller). 15
Maximum torque 2 30.24 Maximum torque 2. 16 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2 and 30.21 Min torque 2 source is set to Minimum
torque 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
-300.0%
-1600.00.0% Minimum torque limit 2. See par. 46.03
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when The limit is effective when the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2 and 30.22 Max torque 2 source is set to Maximum
torque 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
300.0%
0.01600.0% Maximum torque limit 2. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.26 Power motoring limit Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the motor in percent of nominal motor power.
300.00%
0.00600.00% Maximum motoring power. 1 = 1% 30.27 Power generating limit Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the
motor to the inverter in percent of nominal motor power.
-300.00%
-600.000.00% Maximum generating power. 1 = 1% 30.30 Overvoltage control Enables the overvoltage control of the
intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper and resistor, or a regenerative supply unit, the controller must be disabled.
Enable
Disable Overvoltage control disabled. 0 Enable Overvoltage control enabled. 1
30.31 Undervoltage control Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to a stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
Enable
Disable Undervoltage control disabled. 0 Enable Undervoltage control enabled. 1
30.35 Thermal current limitation
Enables/disables temperature-based output current limitation. The limitation should only be disabled if required by the application.
Enable
Disable Thermal current limitation disabled. 0 Enable Thermal current limitation enabled. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.36 Speed limit selection Selects a source that switches between two different predefined adjustable speed limit sets. 0 = minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 and maximum speed limit defined by 30.12 are active 1 = minimum speed limit selected by 30.37 and maximum speed limit defined by 30.38 are active. The user can define two sets of speed limits, and switch between the sets using a binary source such as a digital input. The user can define two sets of speed limits, and switch between the sets using a binary source such as a digital input. The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed. The second set has selector parameters for both the minimum (30.37) and maximum (30.38) limits that allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
Not selected
Not selected Adjustable speed limits are disabled. (Minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 Minimum speed and maximum speed limit defined by 30.12 Maximum speed are active).
0
Selected Adjustable speed limits are enabled. (Minimum speed limit defined by 30.37 Min speed source source and maximum speed limit defined by 30.38 Max speed source are active).
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
30.37
User-defined minimum speed
limit
0 AI1 AI2
Minimum speed
0 AI1 AI2
Maximum speed
30.11
30.38
30.36
0
1
30.12
30.36
0
1
User-defined maximum speed
limit
Ext1 active Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT1 is active.
2
Ext2 active Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT2 is active.
3
Torque control Adjustable speed limits are enabled if Torque control mode (vector motor control) is active.
4
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 5 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 6 DI3 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 7 DI4 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 8 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
30.37 Min speed source Defines the source of a minimum speed limit for the drive when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit selection.
WARNING! In vector motor control mode only. In scalar motor control mode, use
frequency limits 30.13 and 30.14.
Minimum speed
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2 Minimum speed 30.11 Minimum speed. 11 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
30.38 Max speed source Defines the source of a maximum speed limit for the drive when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit selection.
WARNING! In vector motor control mode only. In scalar motor control mode, use
frequency limits 30.13 and 30.14.
Maximum speed
Zero None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2 Maximum speed 30.12 Maximum speed. 12 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
30.203 Deadband forward Defines the dead-band area for the positive speed reference when the speed reference is taken from an analog input.
0.00%
0.00…100.00% 10=1% 30.204 Deadband reverse Defines the dead-band area for the negative speed
reference when the speed reference is taken from an analog input.
0.00%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0.00…100.00% 10=1% 31 31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of
the drive upon fault situations.
31.01 External event 1 source
Defines the source of external event 1. See also parameter 31.02 External event 1 type. 0 = Trigger event 1 = Normal operation
Inactive (true)
Active (false) 0. 0 Inactive (true) 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 31.02 External event 1 type Selects the type of external event 1. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0 Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.03 External event 2 source
Defines the source of external event 2. See also parameter 31.04 External event 2 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Inactive (true)
31.04 External event 2 type Selects the type of external event 2. Fault Fault The external event generates a fault. 0 Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.05 External event 3 source
Defines the source of external event 3. See also parameter 31.06 External event 3 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Inactive (true)
31.06 External event 3 type Selects the type of external event 3. Fault The external event generates a fault. 0 Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.07 External event 4 source
Defines the source of external event 4. See also parameter 31.08 External event 4 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Inactive (true)
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
31.08 External event 4 type Selects the type of external event 4. Fault The external event generates a fault. 0 Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.09 External event 5 source
Defines the source of external event 5. See also parameter 31.10 External event 5 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Inactive (true)
31.10 External event 5 type Selects the type of external event 5. Fault Fault The external event generates a fault. 0 Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.11 Fault reset selection Selects the source of an external fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists. 0 -> 1 = Reset Note: A fault reset via FBA A and EFB MCW bit 7 is useful when the start stop signal is through DIs (parameter 20.01 or 20.06) or from local control mode and the user wants a fault reset through the fieldbus. Whenever the remote control mode is in fieldbus (Start stop command and reference is through fieldbus), the fault can be reset from the fieldbus regardless of the selection of the parameter.
Not used
Not used Not used 0 Not used Not used 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 FBA A MCW bit 7 Control word bit 7 received through fieldbus
interface A. 30
EFB MCW bit 7 Control word bit 7 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
32
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 31.12 Autoreset selection Selects faults that are automatically reset. The
parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is automatically reset.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and continues operation after a fault. The bits of this binary number correspond to the following faults:
0000h
0000hFFFFh Automatic reset configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Fault 0 Overcurrent 1 Overvoltage 2 Undervoltage 3 AI supervision fault 49 Reserved 10 Selectable fault (see parameter 31.13 Selectable fault) 11 External fault 1 (from source selected by parameter 31.01 External event 1
source) 12 External fault 2 (from source selected by parameter 31.03 External event 2
source) 13 External fault 3 (from source selected by parameter 31.05 External event 3
source) 14 External fault 4 (from source selected by parameter 31.07 External event 4
source) 15 External fault 5 (from source selected by parameter 31.09 External event 5
source)
31.13 Selectable fault Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection, bit 10. Faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 487). Note: The fault codes are in hexadecimal. The selected code must be converted to decimal for this parameter.
0
0000hFFFFh Fault code. 10 = 1 31.14 Number of trials Defines the maximum number of automatic resets
that the drive is allowed to attempt within the time defined by parameter 31.15 Total trials time. If the fault persists, subsequent reset attempts will be made at intervals defined by 31.16 Delay time. The faults to be automatically reset are defined by 31.12 Autoreset selection.
0
05 Number of automatic resets. 10 = 1 31.15 Total trials time Defines a time window for automatic fault resets.
The maximum number of attempts made during any period of this length is defined by 31.14 Number of trials. Note: If the fault condition remains and cannot be reset, each reset attempt will generate an event and start a new time window. In practice, if the specified number of resets (31.14) at specified intervals (31.16) take longer than the value of 31.15, the drive will continue to attempt resetting the fault until the cause is eventually removed.
30.0 s
1.0600.0 s Time for automatic resets. 10 = 1 s 31.16 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault
before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection.
0.0 s
0.0120.0 s Autoreset delay. 10 = 1 s 31.19 Motor phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase
loss is detected. See section Motor phase loss detection (31.19) on page 112.
Fault
No action No action taken. 0 Fault The drive trips on fault 3381 Output phase loss. 1
31.20 Earth fault Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault or current unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable.
Fault
No action No action taken. 0 Warning The drive generates an A2B3 Earth leakage
warning. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Fault The drive trips on fault 2330 Earth leakage. 2 31.21 Supply phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase
loss is detected.
Fault
No action No action taken. Note: When this option is selected, the drive will eventually overheat or the supply bridge may be damaged if one supply phase is lost, unless 50% derating is done when dimensioning the system.
0
Fault The drive trips on fault 3130 Input phase loss. 1 31.22 STO indication
run/stop Selects which indications are given when one or both Safe torque off (STO) signals are switched off or lost. The indications also depend on whether the drive is running or stopped when this occurs. The tables at each selection below show the indications generated with that particular setting. Notes: This parameter does not affect the operation of
the STO function itself. The STO function will operate regardless of the setting of this parameter: a running drive will stop upon removal of one or both STO signals, and will not start until both STO signals are restored and all faults reset.
The loss of only one STO signal always generates a fault as it is interpreted as a malfunction.
For more information on the STO, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive.
Fault/Fault
Fault/Fault 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Inputs Indication (running or stopped)IN1 IN2 0 0 Fault 5091 Safe torque off 0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2 1 1 (Normal operation)
Fault/Warning 1
Fault/Event 2
Warning/Warning 3
Event/Event 4
No Indication/No Indication
5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Inputs Indication IN1 IN2 Running Stopped
0 0 Fault 5091 Safe torque off
Warning A5A0 Safe torque off
0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)
Inputs Indication IN1 IN2 Running Stopped
0 0 Fault 5091 Safe torque off
Event B5A0 Safe torque off
0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)
Inputs Indication (running or stopped)IN1 IN2 0 0 Warning A5A0 Safe torque off 0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2 1 1 (Normal operation)
Inputs Indication (running or stopped)IN1 IN2 0 0 Event B5A0 Safe torque off
0 1 Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)
Inputs Indication (running or stopped)IN1 IN2 0 0 None 0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2 1 1 (Normal operation)
31.23 Wiring or earth fault Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection).
Fault
No action No action taken. 0 Fault The drive trips on fault 3181 Cross
connectionOutput wiring or earth fault. 1
31.24 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. A stall condition is defined as follows: The drive exceeds the stall current limit (31.25
Stall current limit), and the output frequency is below the level set by
parameter 31.27 Stall frequency limit or the motor speed is below the level set by parameter 31.26 Stall speed limit, and
the conditions above have been true longer than the time set by parameter 31.28 Stall time.
No action
No action None (stall supervision disabled). 0 Warning The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 7121 Motor stall. 2
31.25 Stall current limit Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the motor. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
200.0%
0.01600.0% Stall current limit. — 31.26 Stall speed limit Stall speed limit in rpm. See parameter 31.24 Stall
function. 150.00 rpm
0.0010000.00 rpm
Stall speed limit. See par. 46.01
31.27 Stall frequency limit Stall frequency limit. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.
15.00 Hz
0.001000.00 Hz Stall frequency limit. See par. 46.02
31.28 Stall time Stall time. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. 20 s 03600 s Stall time. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
31.30 Overspeed trip margin Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor (overspeed protection). If the speed (24.02 Used speed feedback) exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 30.11 or 30.12 by more than the value of this parameter, the drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the speed in vector motor control mode. The
function is not effective in scalar motor control mode. Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.
500.00 rpm
0.0010000.00 rpm
Overspeed trip margin. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Speed (24.02)
Time
30.12
30.11
31.30
Overspeed trip level
Overspeed trip level
31.30
0
31.31 Frequency trip margin Defines, together with 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency, the maximum allowed frequency of the motor. If the speed (28.01 Frequency ref ramp input) exceeds the frequency limit defined by parameter 30.13 or 30.14 by more than the value of this parameter, the drive trips on the 73F0 Overfrequency fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the speed in scalar motor control mode. The
function is not effective in vector motor control mode. Example: If the maximum speed is 40 Hz and speed trip margin is 10 Hz, the drive trips at 50 Hz.
15.00 Hz
0.0010000.00 Hz Overfrequency trip margin. See par. 46.02
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Frequency (28.02)
Time
30.14
30.13
31.31
Overfrequency trip level
Overfrequency trip level
31.31
0
31.32 Emergency ramp supervision
Parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay, together with the derivative of 24.02 Used speed feedback, provide a supervision function for emergency stop modes Off1 and Off3. The supervision is based on either observing the time within which the motor stops,
or comparing the actual and expected deceleration
rates. If this parameter is set to 0%, the maximum stop time is directly set in parameter 31.33. Otherwise, 31.32 defines the maximum allowed deviation from the expected deceleration rate, which is calculated from parameters 23.11 23.15 (Off1) or 23.23 Emergency stop time (Off3). If the actual deceleration rate (24.02) deviates too much from the expected rate, the drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a stop. If 31.32 is set to 0% and 31.33 is set to 0 s, the emergency stop ramp supervision is disabled. See also parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode.
0%
0300% Maximum deviation from expected deceleration rate.
1 = 1%
31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay
If parameter 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision is set to 0%, this parameter defines the maximum time an emergency stop (mode Off1 or Off3) is allowed to take. If the motor has not stopped when the time elapses, the drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a stop. If 31.32 is set to a value other than 0%, this parameter defines a delay between the receipt of the emergency stop command and the activation of the supervision. It is recommended to specify a short delay to allow the speed change rate to stabilize.
0 s
0100 s Maximum ramp-down time, or supervision activation delay.
1 = 1 s
31.40 Disable warning messages
Selects the warnings to be suppressed. This parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a warning. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding warning is not logged to event log.
0000h
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0000hFFFFh Word for disabling warnings. 1 = 1 31.54 Fault action Selects the stop mode when a non-critical fault
occurs. Coast
Coast The drive coasts to stop. 0 Emergency ramp The drive follows the ramp specified for an
emergency stop by parameter 22.23. 1
31.205 Crane warning masking
Selects which crane warnings trigger events to the drive. Whenever a bit of this parameter is set to 1, the corresponding warning can trigger an event. If a bit is set to 0, the warning does not appear in the event logger or control panel, and the warning can be read only from parameters 09.01 Crane SW1.The bits of this binary number correspond to the following warnings:
FFFFh
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Reserved 1 DC link undervoltage 1 = Warning A3A2 DC link undervoltage is
suppressed. 24 Reserved 5 Emergency stop off2 1 = Warning AFE1 Emergency stop (off2) is
suppressed. 6 Emergency stop off1,
off3 1 = Warning AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 or off3) is suppressed.
715 Reserved
Bit Name Description 0 Brake slip at standstill D200 Brake slip at standstill2 1 Slowdown
forward/reverse D201 Forward slowdown limit, D202 Reverse slowdown limit
2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 End limit
forward/reverse D205 Forward stop limit, D206 Reverse stop limit
5 Reserved 6 Joystick reference
check D208 Joystick reference check
7 Joystick zero position D209 Joystick zero position2 8 Power on acknowledge D20B Power on acknowledge 9 Reserved 10 Fast stop D20A Fast stop 1115 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh Crane warning masking status word 1 = 1 32 32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 13.
Three values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or fault is generated whenever predefined limits are exceeded. See also section Signal supervision (page 114).
32.01 Supervision status Signal supervision status word. Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal supervision functions are within or outside their respective limits. Note: This word is independent of the drive actions defined by parameters 32.06, 32.16, 32.26, 32.36, 32.46 and 32.56.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh Signal supervision status word. 1 = 1 32.05 Supervision 1 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1.
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.07) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.09 and 32.10 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.06.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 1 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Supervision 1 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.07 is outside its limits. 1 Supervision 2 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.17 is outside its limits. 2 Supervision 3 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside its limits. 3 Supervision 4 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.37 is outside its limits. 4 Supervision 5 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.47 is outside its limits. 5 Supervision 6 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.57 is outside its limits. 615 Reserved
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 1 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 1 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 1 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 1 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
32.06 Supervision 1 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 1 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
32.07 Supervision 1 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 1.
Frequency
Zero None. 0 Speed 01.01 Motor speed used. 1 Frequency 01.06 Output frequency. 3 Current 01.07 Motor current. 4 Torque 01.10 Motor torque. 6 DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. 7 Output power 01.14 Output power. 8 AI1 12.11 AI1 actual value. 9 AI2 12.21 AI2 actual value. 10 Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 18 Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output. 19 Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference. 20 Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used. 21 Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output. 22 Inverter temperature 05.11 Inverter temperature. 23 Process PID output 40.01 Process PID output actual. 24 Process PID feedback 40.02 Process PID feedback actual. 25 Process PID setpoint 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. 26 Process PID deviation 40.04 Process PID deviation actual. 27 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.08 Supervision 1 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 1.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.09 Supervision 1 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
32.10 Supervision 1 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.11 Supervision 1 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 1. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.05, not just selection Hysteresis (7).
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. — 32.15 Supervision 2 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2.
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.17) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.19 and 32.20 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.16.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 2 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 2 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 2 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 2 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 2 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.16 Supervision 2 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 2 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
32.17 Supervision 2 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 2. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Current
32.18 Supervision 2 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 2.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.19 Supervision 2 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
32.20 Supervision 2 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.21 Supervision 2 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 2. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.15, not just selection Hysteresis (7).
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. — 32.25 Supervision 3 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3.
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.27) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.29 and 32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.26.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 3 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 3 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 3 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 3 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 3 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 3 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 3 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 3 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 3 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
32.26 Supervision 3 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 3 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
32.27 Supervision 3 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 3. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Torque
32.28 Supervision 3 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 3.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.29 Supervision 3 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
32.30 Supervision 3 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.31 Supervision 3 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 3. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.25, not just selection Hysteresis (7).
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.35 Supervision 4 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 4. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.37 is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.39 and 32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.36.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 4 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 4 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 4 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 4 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 4 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
32.36 Supervision 4 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 4 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
32.37 Supervision 4 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 4. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.38 Supervision 4 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 4.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.39 Supervision 4 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 4. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.40 Supervision 4 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 4. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.41 Supervision 4 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 4. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.35, not just selection Hysteresis (7).
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. — 32.45 Supervision 5 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 5.
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.47) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.49 and 32.40 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.46.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 5 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 5 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 5 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 5 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 5 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
32.46 Supervision 5 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 5 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.47 Supervision 5 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 5. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.48 Supervision 5 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 5.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.49 Supervision 5 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 5. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
32.50 Supervision 5 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 5. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.51 Supervision 5 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 5. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.45, not just selection Hysteresis.
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. — 32.55 Supervision 6 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 6.
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.57) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.59 and 32.50 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.56.
Disabled
Disabled Signal supervision 6 not in use. 0 Low Action is taken whenever the signal is below the
Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is above the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
1
High Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
2
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is below the absolute value of the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
4
Both Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is in between the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
5
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal is above the absolute value of the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis or below the absolute value of the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5*hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the absolute value of the signal is in between the absolute value of the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis and the absolute value of the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
6
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal is above the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated whenever the signal is below the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. The status is unchanged when the signal value is in between the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis and the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis.
7
Low falling Action is taken whenever the signal falls from a value higher than the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is lower than the Supervision 6 low limit — 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal rises to higher than the Supervision 6 low limit + 0.5*hysteresis.
8
High rising Action taken whenever the signal rises from a value lower than the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5 * hysteresis to a value which is higher than the Supervision 6 high limit + 0.5 * hysteresis. Action is deactivated when the signal falls to lower than the Supervision 6 high limit — 0.5*hysteresis.
9
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
32.56 Supervision 6 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 6 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action No warning or fault generated. 0 Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2 Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if
running. 3
32.57 Supervision 6 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 6. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.58 Supervision 6 filter time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 6.
0.000 s
0.000 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s 32.59 Supervision 6 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 6. 0.00
-21474830.00 21474830.00
Low limit. —
32.60 Supervision 6 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 6. 0.00 -21474830.00 21474830.00
Upper limit. —
32.61 Supervision 6 hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 6. Note: This parameter applies to all selections of parameter 32.55, not just selection Hysteresis.
0.00
0.00100000.00 Hysteresis. — 33 Generic timer & counter
Generic timer and counter functions.
33.02 HS counter actual value
Actual value of the high speed counter. The counter is updated every 2 ms.
0
0…4294967295 Counter value. 1 = 1 (shows only lower bits)
33.04 HS counter status word
Status word for the high speed counter. 0000h
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0000hFFFFh Status word. 1= 1 33.71 HS counter source
selection Selects the signal source for the high speed counter.
Not in use
Not in use Counter not active. 0 F1 Counter source is the frequency IO pin of input 1. 1 Encoder without direction
Encoder pulse edges are used as the counter source. The counter value increases by one per each rising or falling pulse edge.
5
Encoder with direction Encoder pulse edges are used as the counter source. The direction of rotation is taken into account. When a rising or a falling edge is detected , and the direction of the rotation is forward, the
counter value increases by one. and the direction of the rotation is reverse, the
counter value decreases by one. With selection Encoder with direction, parameter 33.73 HS counter direction selection is ignored.
6
DI1 (slow) Digital input 1. 10 DI2 (slow) Digital input 2. 11 DI3 (slow) Digital input 3. 12 DI4 (slow) Digital input 4. 13 DI5 (slow) Digital input 5. 14 DI6 (slow) Digital input 6. Not available in ACS380. 15 DIO1 (slow) Digital I/O 1. With BMIO-01. 20 DIO2 (slow) Digital I/O 2. With BMIO-01. 21 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Counter rollover 1 = Counter has rolled over to the opposite limit. The bit
will remain 1 until the counter has been preset. See parameter 33.72 HS counter limit mode selection.
1 Counter saturated 1 = Counter is at the minimum/maximum limit. See parameter 33.72 HS counter limit mode selection.
2 Counter under preset
1 = Counter value below the preset value. See parameter 33.77 HS counter preset value.
3 Counter at preset 1 = Counter value at the preset value. See parameter 33.77 HS counter preset value.
4 Counter over preset 1 = Counter value over the preset value. See parameter 33.77 HS counter preset value.
515 Reserved
33.72 HS counter limit mode selection
Selects how the counter value is changed after minimum or maximum limit has been exceeded.
Rollover
Rollover Counter rolls over when maximum or minimum is reached.
0
Saturated Counter saturates to maximum or minimum when reached.
1
33.73 HS counter direction selection
Selects the direction of the high speed counter. This parameter has no effect if Encoder with direction is selected in parameter 33.71 HS counter source selection.
Up
Up Counter counts upwards. 0 Down Counter counts downwards. 1 Motor actual direction Direction follows parameter 06.19 Speed control
status word bit 2. If the value of the bit is zero, direction is up, otherwise down.
2
DI1 Digital input 1. 10 DI2 Digital input 2. 11 DI3 Digital input 3. 12 DI4 Digital input 4. 13 DI5 Digital input 5. 14 DI6 Digital input 6. 15 DIO1 Digital I/O 1. 20 DIO2 Digital I/O 2. 21 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
33.74 HS counter lower limit Defines the lowest possible value for the high speed counter.
0
0…4294967295 Lower limit value. 1 = 1 33.75 HS counter upper limit Defines the highest possible value for the high
speed counter. 429496729 5
0…4294967295 Upper limit value. 1 = 1 33.76 HS counter preset
selection Selects the signal source for the high speed counter preset activation. Rising edge of the signal is used.
Not in use
Not in use Preset is not in use. 0 Preset Preset is active. To preset the counter again, Not in
use must be selected first. 1
DI1 Digital input 1. 2 DI2 Digital input 2. 3 DI3 Digital input 3. 4 DI4 Digital input 4. 5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DI5 Digital input 5. 6 DI6 Digital input 6. 7 DIO1 Digital I/O 1. 10 DIO2 Digital I/O 2. 11 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
33.77 HS counter preset value
Defines the value to which the high speed counter is set during preset.
0
0…4294967295 Preset value. 1 = 1 33.79 HS counter divider With high speed counter divider (n), the counter
value can be increased after every n pulses received from the selected counter source.
1
1 Divider is not used. 1 = 1 2…4294967295 Divider value. 1 = 1
33.80 HS counter enable Enables the high speed counter. Off Off High speed counter is off. 0 On High speed counter is on. 1 DI1 Counter is enabled by Digital Input 1 (see
parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 0). 2
DI2 Counter is enabled by Digital input 2 (see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 1).
3
DI3 Counter is enabled by Digital Input 3 (see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 2).
4
DI4 Counter is enabled by Digital Input 4 (see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 3).
5
DI5 Counter is enabled by Digital Input 5 (see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 4).
6
DI6 Counter is enabled by Digital Input 6 (see parameter 10.02 DI delayed status bit 5).
7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 34 34 Timed functions Configuration of the timed functions
34.01 Timed functions status Shows the status of the timed functions. The status of a timed function is the logical OR of all timers connected to it. This parameter is read-only. User can select the operation and timer for each timed function from the assistant panel Primary settings menu (Menu > Primary settings > Advanced functions > Time functions). The parameters in this group can be used to set the timers for each function.
—
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0000h0FFFFh Status of combined timers 13. 1 = 1 34.02 Timer status Shows the status of timers 112.
This parameter is read-only. —
0000hFFFFh Timer status. 1 = 1 34.04 Season/exception day
status Shows the status of seasons 13, exception workday and exception holiday. Only one season can be active at a time. A day can be a workday and a holiday at the same time. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Status of the seasons and exception workday and holiday.
1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Timed function 1 1 = Active. 1 Timed function 2 1 = Active. 2 Timed function 3 1 = Active. 315 Reserved
Bit Name Description 0 Timer 1 1 = Active. 1 Timer 2 1 = Active. 2 Timer 3 1 = Active. 3 Timer 4 1 = Active. 4 Timer 5 1 = Active. 5 Timer 6 1 = Active. 6 Timer 7 1 = Active. 7 Timer 8 1 = Active. 8 Timer 9 1 = Active. 9 Timer 10 1 = Active. 10 Timer 11 1 = Active. 11 Timer 12 1 = Active. 1215 Reserved
Bit Name Description 0 Status of season 1 1 = Active. 1 Status of season 2 1 = Active. 2 Status of season 3 1 = Active. 3 Status of season 4 1 = Active. 49 Reserved 10 Status of exception workday 1 = Active. 11 Status of exception holiday 1 = Active. 1215 Reserved
34.10 Timed functions enable
Selects the source for the timed functions enable signal. 0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled. Note: The ACS380 drives do not have an inbuilt timer. Time needs to be provided through an external assistant control panel or PLC.
Disabled
Disabled 0. 0 Enabled 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
34.11 Timer 1 configuration Defines when timer 1 is active. 000001111 0000000
0000hFFFFh Configuration of timer 1. 1 = 1 34.12 Timer 1 start time Defines the daily start time of timer 1. The time can
be changed in second steps. The timer can be started at an other time than the start time. E.g. if the timer’s duration is more than one day and the active session starts during the time, the timer is started at 00:00 and stopped when there is no duration left.
00:00:00
00:00:0023:59:59 Daily start time of the timer. 1 = 1 34.13 Timer 1 duration Defines the duration of timer 1. The duration can
be changed in minute steps. The duration can extend over the change of the day but if an exception day becomes active, the period is interrupted at midnight. In the same way the period started on an exception day stays active only until the end of the day, even if the duration is longer. The timer will continue after a break if there is duration left.
00 00:00
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Monday 1 = Monday is an active start day. 1 Tuesday 1 = Tuesday is an active start day. 2 Wednesday 1 = Wednesday is an active start day. 3 Thursday 1 = Thursday is an active start day. 4 Friday 1 = Friday is an active start day. 5 Saturday 1 = Saturday is an active start day. 6 Sunday 1 = Sunday is an active start day. 7 Season 1 1 = Timer is active in season 1. 8 Season 2 1 = Timer is active in season 2. 9 Season 3 1 = Timer is active in season 3. 10 Season 4 1 = Timer is active in season 4. 11 Exceptions 0 = Exceptions days are disabled.
1 = Exception days are enabled. Bits 12 and 13 are taken into account.
12 Holidays 0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as «Holiday». 1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as «Holiday».
13 Workdays 0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as «Workday». 1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as «Workday».
1415 Reserved
00 00:0007 00:00 Timer duration. 1 = 1 34.14 Timer 2 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.15 Timer 2 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.16 Timer 2 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.17 Timer 3 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.18 Timer 3 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.19 Timer 3 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.20 Timer 4 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.21 Timer 4 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.22 Timer 4 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.23 Timer 5 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.24 Timer 5 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.25 Timer 5 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.26 Timer 6 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.27 Timer 6 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.28 Timer 6 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.29 Timer 7 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.30 Timer 7 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.31 Timer 7 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.32 Timer 8 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.33 Timer 8 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.34 Timer 8 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.35 Timer 9 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.36 Timer 9 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.37 Timer 9 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.38 Timer 10 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.39 Timer 10 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.40 Timer 10 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.41 Timer 11 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
34.42 Timer 11 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.43 Timer 11 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.44 Timer 12 configuration See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration. 000001111
0000000 34.45 Timer 12 start time See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.46 Timer 12 duration See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.60 Season 1 start date Defines the start date of season 1 in format
dd.mm, where dd is the number of the day and mm is the number of the month. The season changes at midnight. One season can be active at a time. Timers are started on exception days even if they are not inside the active season. The season start dates (14) must be given in increasing order to use all seasons. The default value is interpreted that the season is not configured. If the season start dates are not in increasing order and the value is something else than the default value, a season configuration warning is given.
01.01.
01.0131.12 Season start date. 34.61 Season 2 start date Defines the start date of season 2.
See 34.60 Season 1 start date. 01.01.
34.62 Season 3 start date Defines the start date of season 3. See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
01.01.
34.63 Season 4 start date Defines the start date of season 4. See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
01.01.
34.70 Number of active exceptions
Defines how many of the exceptions are active by specifying the last active one. All preceding exceptions are active. Exceptions 13 are periods (duration can be defined) and exceptions 416 are days (duration is always 24 hours). Example: If the value is 4, exceptions 14 are active, and exceptions 516 are not active.
3
016 Number of active exception periods or days. — 34.71 Exception types Defines the types of exceptions 116 as workday
or holiday. Exceptions 13 are periods (duration can be defined) and exceptions 416 are days (duration is always 24 hours).
0b0000
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0b0000…0b1111 Types of exception period or days. 1 = 1 34.72 Exception 1 start Defines the start date of the exception period in
format dd.mm, where dd is the number of the day and mm is the number of the month. The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at 23:59:59 even if it has duration left. The same date can be configured to be holiday and workday. The date is active if any of exception days are active.
01.01.
01.01.31.12. Start date of exception period 1. 34.73 Exception 1 length Defines the length of the exception period in days.
Exception period is handled the same as a number of consecutive exception days.
0
060 Length of exception period 1. 1 = 1 34.74 Exception 2 start See 34.72 Exception 1 start. 01.01. 34.75 Exception 2 length See 34.73 Exception 1 length. 0 34.76 Exception 3 start See 34.72 Exception 1 start. 01.01. 34.77 Exception 3 length See 34.73 Exception 1 length. 0 34.78 Exception day 4 Defines the date of exception day 4. 01.01.
01.01.31.12. Start date of exception day 4. The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at 23:59:59 even if it has duration left.
34.79 Exception day 5 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.80 Exception day 6 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Exception 1 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 1 Exception 2 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 2 Exception 3 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 3 Exception 4 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 4 Exception 5 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 5 Exception 6 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 6 Exception 7 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 7 Exception 8 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 8 Exception 9 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 9 Exception 10 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 10 Exception 11 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 11 Exception 12 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 12 Exception 13 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 13 Exception 14 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 14 Exception 15 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 15 Exception 16 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
34.81 Exception day 7 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.82 Exception day 8 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.83 Exception day 9 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.84 Exception day 10 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.85 Exception day 11 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.86 Exception day 12 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.87 Exception day 13 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.88 Exception day 14 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.89 Exception day 15 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.90 Exception day 16 See 34.79 Exception day 4. 01.01 34.100 Timed function 1 Defines which timers are connected to timed
function 1. 0 = Not connected. 1 = Connected. See parameter 34.01 Timed functions status.
0b0000
0b0000…0b1111 Timers connected to timed function 1. 1 = 1 34.101 Timed function 2 Defines which timers are connected to timed
function 2. See 34.01 Timed functions status.
0b0000
34.102 Timed function 3 Defines which timers are connected to timed function 3. See 34.01 Timed functions status.
0b0000
34.110 Boost time function Defines which timed functions (that is, timers that are connected to the timed functions) are activated with the boost time function.
0b0000
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Timer 1 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 1 Timer 2 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 2 Timer 3 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 3 Timer 4 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 4 Timer 5 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 5 Timer 6 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 6 Timer 7 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 7 Timer 8 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 8 Timer 9 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 9 Timer 10 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 10 Timer 11 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 11 Timer 12 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 1215 Reserved
0000hFFFFh Timed functions including the boost timer. 1 = 1 34.111 Boost time activation
source Selects the source of boost time activation signal. 0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled.
Off
Off 0. 0 On 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 34.112 Boost time duration Defines the time inside which the boost time is
deactivated after boost time activation signal is switched off. Example: If parameter 34.111 Boost time activation source source is set to DI1 and 34.112 is set to 00 01:30, the boost time is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated.
00 00:00
00 00:0000 00:00 Boost time duration. 1 = 1 35 35 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan control configuration. See also section Motor thermal protection (page 76).
35.01 Motor estimated temperature
Displays the motor temperature as estimated by the internal motor thermal protection model (see parameters 35.5035.55). The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. This parameter is read-only.
20 C
-601000 C Estimated motor temperature. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Timed function 1 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 1 Timed function 2 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 2 Timed function 3 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 315 Reserved
35.02 Measured temperature 1
Displays the temperature received through the source defined by parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. This parameter is read-only.
20 C
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Measured temperature 1. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohm. If the measured temperature source selection (35.11) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.14) to PTC resistance value (ohms), and shows it in this parameter. This is the case even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (C or F). You cannot change the unit to ohm for the time being (96.16).
1 = 1 unit
35.03 Measured temperature 2
Displays the temperature received through the source defined by parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. This parameter is read-only.
20 C
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Measured temperature 2. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms. If the measured temperature source selection (35.21) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.24) to PTC resistance value (ohms), and shows it in this parameter. This is the case even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (C or F). You cannot change the unit to ohm for the time being (96.16).
1 = 1 unit
35.05 Motor overload level Shows the motor overload level as a percentage of the motor overload fault limit.See section Motor overload protection (page 87). This parameter is read-only.
0.0%
0.0…300.0% Motor overload level. 0.0% No motor overloading. 88.0% Motor overloaded to warning level. 100.0% Motor overloaded to fault level.
10 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
35.11 Temperature 1 source Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is read. Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per the selection list. Note: Depending on this parameter selection the control program hides the non-relevant parameters in this group.
Estimated temperatur e
Disabled None. Temperature monitoring function 1 is disabled.
0
Estimated temperature Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature). The temperature is estimated from an internal drive calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
1
KTY84 analog I/O KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the switch related to the analog input to U
(voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1 x Pt100 analog I/O Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
5
2 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
6
3 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
7
Direct temperature The temperature is taken from the source selected by parameter 35.14. The value of the source is assumed to be in the unit of temperature specified by parameter 96.16.
11
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
KTY83 analog I/O KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
12
1 Pt1000 analog I/O Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
13
2 Pt1000 analog I/O As selection 1 Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
14
3 Pt1000 analog I/O As selection1 Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
15
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ni1000 Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
16
PTC analog I/O PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 and an analog output. The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. Note: With this selection, the control program converts the analog signal to PTC resistance value in ohms and shows it in parameter 35.02. The parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
20
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree
PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14, DIn and 10 V reference. A special voltage divider connection must be in use instead of the normal PTC connection. The voltage divider connection uses the terminals +10 V, digital input and analog input. See the drive hardware manual for the actual connection. This selection makes it possible to connect the PTC when no analog output is available. The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. In case of PTC the voltage read by the analog input is converted into ohms. Notes: The used DI must not be configured to start any
action in this setup. Make sure that the digital input that you connect
to this voltage divider circuit is not used for any other purpose in the control program.
With this selection, the parameter 35.02 shows PTC resistance in ohms, not motor temperature even the parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
23
35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 1. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
130 C, or 4500 ohm
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 1. 1 = 1 unit
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision function 1. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
110 C, or 4000 ohm
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 1.
1 = 1 unit
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source
Selects the input for parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source selections 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, 2 x Pt100 analog I/O, 3 x Pt100 analog I/O, and Direct temperature.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 AI1 actual value Analog input AI1. 1 AI2 actual value Analog input AI2. 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 35.21 Temperature 2 source Selects the source from which measured
temperature 2 is read. Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per the selection list.
Estimated temperatur e
Disabled None. Temperature monitoring function 2 is disabled.
0
Estimated temperature Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature). The temperature is estimated from an internal drive calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
1
KTY84 analog I/O KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 36.24 and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
1 x Pt100 analog I/O Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 35.24 and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
5
2 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
6
3 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
7
Direct temperature The temperature is taken from the source selected by parameter 35.24. The value of the source is assumed to be in the unit of temperature specified by parameter 96.16.
11
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
KTY83 analog I/O KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.24 and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
12
1 Pt1000 analog I/O Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 36.24 and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
13
2 Pt1000 analog I/O As selection 1 Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
14
3 Pt1000 analog I/O As selection 1 Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
15
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ni1000 Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 34.24 and an analog output. The following settings are required: Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the
analog input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot.
Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
16
PTC analog I/O PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.24 and an analog output. The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. If a PTC sensor is used, the voltage ready by the analog input is converted into ohms.. Note: With this selection, the control program converts the analog signal to PTC resistance value in ohms and shows it in parameter 35.03. The parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
20
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree
PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.24, DIn and 10 V reference. A special voltage divider connection must be in use instead of the normal PTC connection. The voltage divider connection uses the terminals +10 V, digital input and analog input. See the drive hardware manual for the actual connection. This selection makes it possible to connect the PTC when no analog output is available. The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. In case of PTC the voltage read by the analog input is converted into ohms. Notes: The used DI must not be configured to start any
action in this setup. Make sure that the digital input that you connect
to this voltage divider circuit is not used for any other purpose in the control program.
With this selection, the parameter 35.03 shows PTC resistance in ohms, not motor temperature even the parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
23
35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 2. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
130 C, or 4500 ohm
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 2. 1 = 1 unit
35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision function 2. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
110 C, or 4000 ohm
-605000 C, or 0…5000 ohm
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 2.
1 = 1 unit
35.24 Temperature 2 AI source
Selects the input for parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source selection Direct temperature.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 AI1 actual value Analog input AI1 on the control unit. 1 AI2 actual value Analog input AI2 on the control unit. 2 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
35.50 Motor ambient temperature
Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for the motor thermal protection model. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. The motor thermal protection model estimates the motor temperature on the basis of parameters 35.50 35.55. The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve, and decreases if it operates in the region below the load curve.
WARNING! The model cannot protect the motor if the motor does not cool properly
because of dust, dirt, etc.
20 C or 68 F
-60100 C or -75 212 F
Ambient temperature. 1 = 1
35.51 Motor load curve Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point. The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model to estimate the motor temperature. When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is taken as the value of parameter 99.06 Motor nominal current (higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value set in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
110%
50150% Maximum load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
50
100
150
35.51
35.53
35.52
I/IN (%) I = Motor current
IN = Nominal motor current
Drive output frequency
35.52 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.51 Motor load curve and 35.53 Break point. Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve. A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the cooling. See the motor manufacturer’s recommendations. See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
70%
25150% Zero speed load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1% 35.53 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with
parameters 35.51 Motor load curve and 35.52 Zero speed load. Defines the break point frequency of the load curve ie. the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 35.51 Motor load curve towards the value of parameter 35.52 Zero speed load. See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
45.00 Hz
1.00500.00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve. See par. 46.02
35.54 Motor nominal temperature rise
Defines the temperature rise of the motor above ambient when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the motor manufacturer’s recommendations. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
80 C or 176 F
0300 C or 32572 F
Temperature rise. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Motor nominal temperature rise
Temperature
Time
Ambient temperature
35.55 Motor thermal time constant
Defines the thermal time constant for use with the motor thermal protection model, defined as the time to reach 63% of the nominal motor temperature. See the motor manufacturer’s recommendations.
256 s
10010000 s Motor thermal time constant. 1 = 1 s 35.56 Motor overload action Defines what action the drive should take when the
system detects the motor overload specified by parameter 35.57.
Warning and fault
No action No action taken. 0 Warning only Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload
when the motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is, parameter 35.05 reaches value 88.0%.
1
Warning and fault Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload when the motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is, parameter 35.05 reaches value 88.0%. Drive trips on fault 7122 Motor overload when the motor is overloaded to the fault level, that is, parameter 35.05 reaches value 100.0%.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
100%
63%
100%
Time
Time
Motor thermal time
Motor current
Temperature rise
35.57 Motor overload class Defines the motor overload class to be used. The class of protection is specified by the user as the time for tripping in seconds at 6 times the tripping level current.
The function shares the following parameters with the Motor thermal model: 35.51 35.52 35.53 Together, these three parameters set the tripping level as a function of motor frequency.
Class 20
Class 5 Motor overload class 5. 0 Class 10 Motor overload class 10. 1 Class 20 Motor overload class 20. 2 Class 30 Motor overload class 30. 3 Class 40 Motor overload class 40. 4
36 36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
See also section Load analyzer (page 115). 36.01 PVL signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak
value logger. The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by parameter 36.02 PVL filter time. The peak value is stored, along with other pre- selected signals at the time, into parameters 36.10 36.15. The peak value logger can be reset using parameter 36.09 Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36.16 and 36.17 respectively.
Output power
Not selected None (peak value logger disabled). 0 Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used. 1 Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency. 3 Motor current 01.07 Motor current. 4 Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque. 6 DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. 7 Output power 01.14 Output power. 8 Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 10 Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output. 11 Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference. 12 Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used. 13 Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output. 14
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual. 16 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
36.02 PVL filter time Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
2.00 s
0.00120.00 s Peak value logger filtering time. 100 = 1 s 36.06 AL2 signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude
logger 2. The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals. The results are displayed by parameters 36.40 36.49. Each parameter represents an amplitude range, and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range. The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by parameter 36.07 AL2 signal scaling. Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36.09 Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36.50 and 36.51 respectively. For the selections, see parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
Motor torque
See parameter 36.01 for the selections. 36.07 AL2 signal scaling Defines the monitored signal value for the
amplitude logger AL2 that corresponds to 100% sample value.
100.00
0.0032767.00 Signal value corresponding to 100%. 1 = 1 36.09 Reset loggers Resets the peak value logger and/or amplitude
logger 2. (Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.) Done
Done Reset completed or not requested (normal operation).
0
All Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2.
1
PVL Reset the peak value logger. 2 AL2 Reset amplitude logger 2. 3
36.10 PVL peak value Shows the peak value recorded by the peak value logger.
0.00
-32768.00 32767.00
Peak value. 1 = 1
36.11 PVL peak date Shows the date when the peak value was recorded.
01/01/1980
1/1/1980…6/5/2159 Peak occurrence date. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
36.12 PVL peak time Shows the time when the peak value was recorded.
00:00:00
— Peak occurrence time. — 36.13 PVL current at peak Shows the Motor current at the moment the peak
value was recorded. 0.00 A
-32768.00 32767.00 A
Motor current at peak. 1 = 1 A
36.14 PVL DC voltage at peak
Shows the voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 V
0.002000.00 V DC voltage at peak. 10 = 1 V 36.15 PVL speed at peak Shows the Motor speed at the moment the peak
value was recorded. 0.00 rpm
-30000 30000 rpm
Motor speed at peak. See par. 46.01
36.16 PVL reset date Shows the date on which the peak value logger was last reset.
01/01/1980
1/1/1980…6/5/2159 Last reset date of the peak value logger. — 36.17 PVL reset time Shows the time when the peak value logger was
last reset. 00:00:00
— Last reset time of the peak value logger. — 36.20 AL1 0 to 10% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10%. 100% corresponds to the Imax value given in the ratings table in chapter Technical data in the hardware manual.
0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1% 36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 10 and 20%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1% 36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 20 and 30%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1% 36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 30 and 40%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1% 36.24 AL2 40 to 50% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 40 and 50%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
36.25 AL1 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1% 36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 1 that fall between 60 and 70%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1% 36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 1 that fall between 70 and 80%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1% 36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 1 that fall between 80 and 90%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1% 36.29 AL1 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 1 that exceed 90%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%. 1 = 1% 36.40 AL2 0 to 10% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 0 and 10%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1% 36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 10 and 20%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1% 36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 20 and 30%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1% 36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 30 and 40%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1% 36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 40 and 50%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1% 36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 50 and 60%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1% 36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 60 and 70%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1% 36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that fall between 70 and 80%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1% 36.49 AL2 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude
logger 2 that exceed 90%. 0.00%
0.00100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%. 1 = 1% 36.50 AL2 reset date The date on which amplitude logger 2 was last
reset. 01/01/1980
1/1/1980…6/5/2159 Last reset date of amplitude logger 2. — 36.51 AL2 reset time The time at which amplitude logger 2 was last
reset. 00:00:00
— Last reset time of amplitude logger 2. — 37 37 User load curve Settings for user load curve.
See also section User load curve (page 75). 37.01 ULC output status
word Displays the status of the monitored signal (37.02). The status is shown only while the drive is running. (The status word is independent of the actions and delays selected by parameters 37.03, 37.04, 37.41 and 37.42.) This parameter is read-only.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Status of the monitored signal. 1 = 1 37.02 ULC supervision
signal Selects the signal to be monitored. The function compares the absolute value of the signal against the load curve.
Motor torque %
Not selected No signal selected. Monitoring disabled. 0 Motor speed % 01.03 Motor speed %. 1 Motor current % 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom. 2 Motor torque % 01.10 Motor torque. 3 Output power % of motor nom
01.15 Output power % of motor nom. 4
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Under load limit 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve. 1 Within load range 1 = Signal between the underload and overload
curve. 2 Overload limit 1 = Signal higher than the overload curve. 3 Outside load limit 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve or higher
than the overload curve. 415 Reserved
37.03 ULC overload actions Selects how the drive reacts if the absolute value of the monitored signal stays continuously above the overload curve for longer than the value of 37.41 ULC overload timer.
Disabled
Disabled No warnings or fault generated. 0 Warning The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload
warning if the signal has been continuously over the overload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
1
Fault The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal has been continuously over the overload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
2
Warning/Fault The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the signal has been continuously over the overload curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer. The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal has been continuously over the overload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
3
37.04 ULC underload actions
Selects an action taken if the signal (37.02) stays under the underload curve for a defined time.
Disabled
Disabled No warnings or fault generated. 0 Warning The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload
warning if the signal has been continuously under the underload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
1
Fault The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal has been continuously under the underload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
2
Warning/Fault The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload warning if the signal has been continuously under the underload curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer. The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal has been continuously under the underload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
37.11 ULC speed table point 1
Defines the first of the five speed points on the X- axis of the user load curve. The values of the parameters must satisfy: — 30000.0 rpm < 37.11 ULC speed table point 1 < 37.12 ULC speed table point 2 < 37.13 ULC speed table point 3 < 37.14 ULC speed table point 4 < 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 < 30000.0 rpm. Speed points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Vector or if 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is rpm. The five points must be in order from lowest to highest. The points are defined as positive values, but the range is symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
150.0 rpm
-30000.030000.0 rpm
Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
37.12 ULC speed table point 2
Defines the second speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
750.0 rpm
-30000.030000.0 rpm
Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
37.13 ULC speed table point 3
Defines the third speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1290.0 rpm
-30000.030000.0 rpm
Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
37.14 ULC speed table point 4
Defines the fourth speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1500.0 rpm
-30000.030000.0 rpm
Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
37.15 ULC speed table point 5
Defines the fifth speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1800.0 rpm
-30000.030000.0 rpm
Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
37.16 ULC frequency table point 1
Defines the first of the five frequency points on the X-axis of the user load curve. The values of the parameters must satisfy: — 500.0 Hz < 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1 < 37.17 ULC frequency table point 2 < 37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 < 37.19 ULC frequency table point 4 < 37.20 ULC frequency table point 5 < 500.0 Hz. Frequency points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is Hz. The five points must be in order from lowest to highest. The points are defined as positive values, but the range is symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
5.0 Hz
-500.0500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz 37.17 ULC frequency table
point 2 Defines the second frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
25.0 Hz
-500.0500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz 37.18 ULC frequency table
point 3 Defines the third frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
43.0 Hz
-500.0500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz 37.19 ULC frequency table
point 4 Defines the fourth frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
50.0 Hz
-500.0500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz 37.20 ULC frequency table
point 5 Defines the fifth frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
60.0 Hz
-500.0500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
37.21 ULC underload point 1 Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed table point 1 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 or 37.15 ULC speed table point 537.15 ULC frequency table point 5) define the underload (lower) curve. The following conditions must be fulfilled: 37.21 ULC underload point 1 <= 37.31 ULC
overload point 1 37.22 ULC underload point 2 <= 37.32 ULC
overload point 2 37.23 ULC underload point 3 <= 37.33 ULC
overload point 3 37.24 ULC underload point 4 <= 37.34 ULC
overload point 4 37.25 ULC underload point 5 <= 37.35 ULC
overload point 5
10.0%
-1600.01600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.22 ULC underload point 2 Defines the second underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1. 15.0%
-1600.01600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.23 ULC underload point 3 Defines the third underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1. 25.0%
-1600.01600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.24 ULC underload point 4 Defines the fourth underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1. 30.0%
-1600.01600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.25 ULC underload point 5 Defines the fifth underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1. 30.0%
-1600.01600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.31 ULC overload point 1 Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that
together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed table point 137.15 ULC frequency table point 5 or 37.15 ULC frequency table point 537.20 ULC frequency table point 5) define the overload (higher) curve. At each of the five points the value of the underload curve point must be equal to or smaller than the value of the overload curve point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.01600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
37.32 ULC overload point 2 Defines the second overload point. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.01600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1% 37.33 ULC overload point 3 Defines the third overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1. 300.0%
-1600.01600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1% 37.34 ULC overload point 4 Defines the fourth overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1. 300.0%
-1600.01600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1% 37.35 ULC overload point 5 Defines the fifth overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1. 300.0%
-1600.01600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1% 37.41 ULC overload timer Defines the time for which the monitored signal
must continuously stay above the overload curve before the drive takes the action selected by 37.03 ULC overload actions.
20.0 s
0.010000.0 s Time. 1 = 1 s 37.42 ULC underload timer Defines the time for which the monitored signal
must continuously stay below the underload curve before the drive takes the action selected by 37.04 ULC underload actions.
20.0 s
0.010000.0 s Time. 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40 40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control.
The drive output can be controlled by the process PID. When the process PID control is enabled, the drive controls the process feedback to the reference value. Two different parameter sets can be defined for the process PID. One parameter set is in use at a time. The first set is made up of parameters 40.0740.50, the second set is defined by the parameters in group 41 Process PID set 2. The binary source that defines which set is used is selected by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection. See also the PID control chain diagrams in chapter Control chain diagrams.
40.01 Process PID output actual
Displays the output of the process PID controller. See the control chain diagram on page 620. This parameter is read-only.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00%
Process PID controller output. 1 = 1%
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
Displays the value of process feedback after source selection, mathematical function (parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function), and filtering. See the control chain diagram on page 620. This parameter is read-only.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Process feedback. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source selection, mathematical function (40.18 Set 1 setpoint function), limitation and ramping. See the control chain diagram on page 620. This parameter is read-only.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Setpoint for process PID controller. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40.04 Process PID deviation actual
Displays the process PID deviation. By default, this value equals setpoint — feedback, but deviation can be inverted by parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. See the control chain diagram on page 620. This parameter is read-only.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
PID deviation. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.05 Process PID trim output act
Displays the trimmed reference output. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768…32767 Trimmed reference. 1 = 1 unit 40.06 Process PID status
word Displays status information on process PID control. This parameter is read-only.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Process PID control status word. 1 = 1 40.07 Process PID operation
mode Activates/deactivates process PID control. Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local and external control locations (page 50).
Off
Off Process PID control inactive. 0 On Process PID control active. 1 On when drive running Process PID control is active when the drive is
running. 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Value 0 PID active 1 = Process PID control active. 1 Setpoint frozen 1 = Process PID setpoint frozen. 2 Output frozen 1 = Process PID controller output frozen. 3 PID sleep mode 1 = Sleep mode active. 4 Sleep boost 1 = Sleep boost active. 5 Trim mode 1 = Trim function active. 6 Tracking mode 1 = Tracking function active. 7 Output limit high 1 = PID output is being limited by parameter 40.37. 8 Output limit low 1 = PID output is being limited by parameters 40.36 9 Deadband active 1 = Deadband active (see parameter 40.39) 10 PID set 0 = Parameter set 1 in use. 1 = Parameter set 2 in use. 11 Reserved 12 Internal setpoint
active 1 = Internal setpoint active (see parameters 40.1640.23)
1315 Reserved
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source
Selects the primary source of process feedback. See the control chain diagram on page 619.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2 Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value 3 AI1 percent 12.101 AI1 percent value 8 AI2 percent 12.102 AI2 percent value 9 Feedback storage 40.91 Feedback data storage 9 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source
Selects the second source of process feedback. The second source is used only if the setpoint function requires two inputs. For the selections, see parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
Not selected
40.10 Set 1 feedback function
Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two feedback sources selected by parameters 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source and 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
In1
In1 Source 1. 0 In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1 In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2 In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3 In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4 MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5 MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6 AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7 sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8 sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 — source 2). 9 sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10 sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time
Defines the filter time constant for process feedback.
0.000 s
0.00030.000 s Feedback filter time. 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling, a general scaling factor for the process PID control chain. The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter 40.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz. In effect, the output of the PID controller = [40.15] when deviation (setpoint — feedback) = [40.14] and [40.32] = 1. Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 40.14 and 40.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce the same scaling as 1 and 30.
0.00
32768.0032767.0 0
Process setpoint base. 1 = 1
40.15 Set 1 output scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 1500.00; 1800.00 (95.20 b0)
32768.0032767.0 0
Process PID controller output base. 1 = 1
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Selects the primary source of process PID setpoint. See the control chain diagram on page 619.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 Internal setpoint Internal setpoint. See parameter 40.19 Set 1
internal setpoint sel1. 2
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 3 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 4 Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the
motor potentiometer). 8
Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value 10 AI1 percent 12.101 AI1 percent value 11 AI2 percent 12.102 AI2 percent value 12
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Control panel (ref saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
13
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 132) for the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
14
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 15 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 16 EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 19 EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 20 Setpoint data storage 40.92 Setpoint data storage 24 Integrated panel (ref saved)
See above Control panel (ref saved). 26
Integrated panel (ref copied)
See above Control panel (ref copied. 27
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2
source Selects the second source of process setpoint. The second source is used only if the setpoint function requires two inputs. For the selections, see parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
Not selected
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function Selects a function between the setpoint sources selected by parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
In1
In1 Source 1. 0 In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1 In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2 In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ext1 -> Ext2 t
Reference
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference Ext2 reference Active reference
t Inactive reference
Reference
In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4 MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5 MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6 AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7 sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8 sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 — source 2). 9 sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10 sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
Selects together with 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 the internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters 40.2140.23. Note: Parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source must be set to Internal setpoint
Not selected
.
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Source defined by par. 40.19
Source defined by par. 40.20
Internal setpoint active
0 0 Setpoint source 1 0 1 (par. 40.21) 0 1 2 (par. 40.22) 1 1 3 (par. 40.23)
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
Selects together with 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 the internal setpoint used out of the three internal setpoints defined by parameters 40.2140.23. See table at 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status 23 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1
Internal process setpoint 1. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel11.
0.00 PID customer units
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Internal process setpoint 1. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2
Internal process setpoint 2. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID customer units
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Internal process setpoint 2. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3
Internal process setpoint 3. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID customer units
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Internal process setpoint 3. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0
Internal process setpoint 0. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID customer units
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Internal process setpoint 0. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller setpoint.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1 = 1
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller setpoint.
200000.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Maximum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1 = 1
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to increase from 0% to 100%.
0.0 s
0.01800.0 s Setpoint increase time. 1 = 1 40.29 Set 1 setpoint
decrease time Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to decrease from 100% to 0%.
0.0 s
0.01800.0 s Setpoint decrease time. 1 = 1 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze
enable Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the setpoint of the process PID controller. This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process feedback connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process. 1 = Process PID controller setpoint frozen See also parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable
Not selected
Not selected Process PID controller setpoint not frozen. 0 Selected Process PID controller setpoint frozen. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion
Inverts the input of the process PID controller. 0 = Deviation not inverted (Deviation = Setpoint — Feedback) 1 = Deviation inverted (Deviation = Feedback — Setpoint) See also section Sleep and boost functions for process PID control (page 89).
Not inverted (Ref — Fbk)
Not inverted (Ref — Fbk)
0. 0
Inverted (Fbk — Ref) 1. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.32 Set 1 gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
1.00
0.01100.00 Gain for PID controller. 100 = 1 40.33 Set 1 integration time Defines the integration time for the process PID
controller. This time needs to be set to the same order of magnitude as the reaction time of the process being controlled, otherwise instability will result.
Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the I part, turning the PID controller into a PD controller.
60.0 s
0.09999.0 s Integration time. 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Ti
O I
G I
G I
I = controller input (error) O = controller output G = gain
Time
Error/Controller output
40.34 Set 1 derivation time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: PID DERIV TIME (EK — EK-1)/TS, in which TS = 2 ms sample time E = Error = Process reference — process feedback.
0.000 s
0.00010.000 s Derivation time. 1000 = 1 s 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter
time Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller.
0.0 s
0.010.0 s Filter time constant. 10 = 1 s 40.36 Set 1 output min Defines the minimum limit for the process PID
controller output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation range.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Minimum limit for process PID controller output. 1 = 1
40.37 Set 1 output max Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller output. See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
100.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Maximum limit for process PID controller output. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
63
%
100
T t
O = I (1 — e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal
40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable
Freezes (or defines a source that can be used to freeze) the output of the process PID controller, keeping the output at the value it was before freeze was enabled. This feature can be used when, for example, a sensor providing process feedback must to be serviced without stopping the process. 1 = Process PID controller output frozen See also parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
Not selected
Not selected Process PID controller output not frozen. 0 Selected Process PID controller output frozen. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40.39 Set 1 deadband range Defines a deadband around the setpoint. Whenever process feedback enters the deadband, a delay timer starts. If the feedback remains within the deadband longer than the delay (40.40 Set 1 deadband delay), the PID controller output is frozen. Normal operation resumes after the feedback value leaves the deadband.
0.00
0.00200000.00 Deadband range. 1 = 1 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Delay for the deadband. See parameter 40.39 Set
1 deadband range. 0.0 s
0.0 3600.0 s Delay for deadband area. 1 = 1 s 40.43 Set 1 sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the
value is 0.0, set 1 sleep mode is disabled. The sleep function compares the motor speed to the value of this parameter. If the motor speed remains below this value longer than the sleep delay defined by 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay, the drive enters the sleep mode and stops the motor.
0.0
0.0200000.0 Sleep start level. 1 = 1 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Defines a delay before the sleep function actually
becomes enabled, to prevent nuisance sleeping. The delay timer starts when the sleep mode is enabled by parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level, and resets when the sleep mode is disabled.
60.0 s
0.03600.0 s Sleep start delay. 1 = 1 s 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See
parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step. 0.0 s
0.03600.0 s Sleep boost time. 1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Setpoint
Time
Feedback
PID controller output
40.39 Set 1 deadband range
40.40 Set 1 deadband delay
PID controller output frozen
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step When the drive is entering sleep mode, the process setpoint is increased by this value for the time defined by parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time. If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
0.00 PID customer units
0.00200000.00 PID customer units
Sleep boost step. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation
Defines the wake-up level as deviation between process setpoint and feedback. When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter, and remains there for the duration of the wake-up delay (40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay), the drive wakes up. See also parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
0.00 PID customer units
— 200000.00…20000 0.0 PID customer units
Wake-up level (as deviation between process setpoint and feedback).
1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Defines a wake-up delay for the sleep function to prevent nuisance wake-ups. See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation. The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the wake-up level (40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation), and resets if the deviation falls below the wake-up level.
0.50 s
0.0060.00 s Wake-up delay. 1 = 1 s 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Activates (or selects a source that activates)
tracking mode. In tracking mode, the value selected by parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection is substituted for the PID controller output. See also section Tracking (page 91). 1 = Tracking mode enabled
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
Selects the value source for tracking mode. See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2 FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1. 3 FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2. 4 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.51 Set 1 trim mode Activates the trim function and selects between direct and proportional trimming (or a combination of both). With trimming, it is possible to apply a corrective factor to the drive reference (setpoint). The output after trimming is available as parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act.
Off
Off The trim function is inactive. 0 Direct The trim function is active. The trimming factor is
relative to the maximum speed, torque or frequency; the selection between these is made by parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection.
1
Proportional The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the reference selected by parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
2
Combined The trim function is active. The trimming factor is a combination of both Direct and Proportional modes; the proportions of each are defined by parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix.
3
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Selects whether trimming is used for correcting the speed, torque or frequency reference.
Speed
Torque Torque reference trimming. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Speed Speed reference trimming. 2 Frequency Frequency reference trimming. 3
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer
Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Note: This selection is applicable for Proportional and Combined mode only.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 AI1 scaled Analog input AI1 scaling. 1 AI2 scaled Analog input AI2 scaling. 2 FBA ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 132). 3 FBA ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 132). 4 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.54 Set 1 trim mix When parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode is set to Combined, defines the effect of direct and proportional trim sources in the final trimming factor. 0.000 = 100% proportional 0.500 = 50% proportional, 50% direct 1.000 = 100% direct Note: This parameter is applicable only to the Combined mode.
0.000
0.000…1.000 Trim mix. 1 = 1 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor. This
value is multiplied by the result of parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. Consequently, the result of the multiplication is used to multiply the result of parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source.
1.000
-100.000…100.000 Multiplier for trimming factor. 1 = 1 40.56 Set 1 trim source Selects the reference to be trimmed. PID output
PID ref PID setpoint. 1 PID output PID controller output. 2
40.57 PID set1/set2 selection
Selects the source that determines whether process PID parameter set 1 (parameters 40.0740.50) or set 2 (group 41 Process PID set 2) is used. 0 = PID set 1 in use 1 = PID set 2 in use
PID set 1
PID set 1 PID set 1. 0 PID set 2 PID set 2. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
40.58 Set 1 increase prevention
Activates increase prevention of PID integration term for PID set 1
No
No Increase prevention not in use. 0 Limiting The process PID integration term is not increased.
This parameter is valid for the PID set 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention
Activates decrease prevention of PID integration term for PID set 1.
No
No Decrease prevention not in use. 0 Limiting The process PID integration term is not decreased.
This parameter is valid for the PID set 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
40.60 Set 1 PID activation source
Selects the source of process PID set 1 activation. On
Off Set 1 PID activation source is Off. 0 On Set 1 PID activation source is On. 1 Follow Ext1/Ext2 selection
Selection follows the value of parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. By changing to Ext2 control location, Process PID set 1 is activated.
2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
10
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
40.61 Setpoint scaling actual Actual setpoint scaling. See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling.
0.00
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Scaling. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.62 PID internal setpoint actual
Displays the value of the internal setpoint. See the control chain diagram on page 619. This parameter is read-only.
0.00 PID unit 1
-200000.00 200000.00 PID customer units
Process PID internal setpoint. 1 = 1 PID customer unit
40.65 Trim auto connection Enables the PID trim auto connection and connects the 40.05 Process PID trim output act to either speed, torque or frequency chains based on the trim selection parameter 40.52 or 41.52.
Disable Disables PID trim auto connection. 0 Enable Enables PID trim auto connecton. 1
40.79 Set 1 units Selects the unit used for PID set 1. User text User text User editable text. User text default is PID unit 1. 0 % Percentage. 4 bar Bar. 74 kPa Kilopascal. 75 Pa Pascal, 77 psi Pound per square inch. 76 CFM Cubic feet per minute. 26 inH2O Inch of water. 58 C Centigrade. 150 F Fahrenheit. 151 mbar Millibar. 44 m3/h Cubic meters per hour. 78 dm3/h Cubic decimeters per hour. 21 l/s Liters per second. 79 l/min Liters per minute. 37 l/h Liters per hour. 38 m3/s Cubic meter per second. 88
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
m3/min Cubic meter per minute. 40 km3/h Cubic kilometers per hour. 131 gal/s Gallons per second. 47 ft3/s Cubic feet per second. 50 ft3/min Cubic feet per minute. 51 ft3/h Cubic feet per hour. 52 ppm Parts per million. 34 inHg Inch of mercury. 29 kCFM Thousands of cubic feet per hour. 126 inWC Inch water column. 65 gpm Gallons per minute. 80 gal/min Gallons per minute. 48 in wg Inch of water. 59 MPa Megapascal. 94 ftWC Foot water column. 125
40.80 Set 1 PID output min source
Selects the source for set 1 PID output minimum. Set1 output min
None None. 0 Set1 output min 40.36 Set 1 output min. 1 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
40.81 Set 1 PID output max source
Selects the source for set 1 PID output maximum. Set1 output max
None None. 0 Set1 output max 40.37 Set 1 output max. 1 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier
Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function specified by parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function is multiplied.
1.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Multiplier. 1 = 1
40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier
Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function specified by parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function is multiplied.
1.00
-200000.00 200000.00
Multiplier. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
40.91 Feedback data storage
Storage parameter for receiving a process feedback value eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface. The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.10158.114) to Feedback data storage. In 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source (or 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source), select Feedback storage.
0.00
-327.68 327.67 Storage parameter for process feedback. 100 = 1 40.92 Setpoint data storage Storage parameter for receiving a process setpoint
value eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface. The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.10158.114) to Setpoint data storage. In 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source (or 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source), select Setpoint data storage.
0.00
-327.68 327.67 Storage parameter for process setpoint. 100 = 1 40.96 Process PID output % Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.01
Process PID feedback actual. 0.00%
-100.00100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1% 40.97 Process PID feedback
% Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback actual.
0.00%
-100.00100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1% 40.98 Process PID setpoint
% Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual.
0.00%
-100.00100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1% 40.99 Process PID deviation
% Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation actual.
0.00%
-100.00100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1% 41 41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
The selection between this set and first set (parameter group 40 Process PID set 1) is made by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection. See also parameters 40.0140.06, and the control chain diagrams on pages 619 and 620.
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 source
See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source. Not selected
41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 source
See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source. Not selected
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
41.10 Set 2 feedback function
See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function. In1
41.11 Set 2 feedback filter time
See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time. 0.000 s
41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 100.00 41.15 Set 2 output scaling See parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling. 1500.00;
1800.00 (95.20 b0)
41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 source
See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source. Not selected
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 source
See parameter 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source. Not selected
41.18 Set 2 setpoint function See parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function. In1 41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint
sel1 See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1. Not
selected 41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint
sel2 See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2. Not
selected 41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint
1 See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1. 0.00 PID
customer units
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2
See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2. 0.00 PID customer units
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3
See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3. 0.00 PID customer units
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0. 0.00 PID customer units
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. 0.00 41.27 Set 2 setpoint max See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. 200000.00 41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase
time See parameter 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time. 0.0 s
41.29 Set 2 setpoint decrease time
See parameter 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time.
0.0 s
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze enable
See parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable. Not selected
41.31 Set 2 deviation inversion
See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. Not inverted (Ref — Fbk)
41.32 Set 2 gain See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. 1.00 41.33 Set 2 integration time See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time. 60.0 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
41.34 Set 2 derivation time See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time. 0.000 s 41.35 Set 2 derivation filter
time See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time. 0.0 s
41.36 Set 2 output min See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. 0.00 41.37 Set 2 output max See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. 100.00 41.38 Set 2 output freeze
enable See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not
selected 41.39 Set 2 deadband range See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range. 0.00 41.40 Set 2 deadband delay See parameter 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay. 0.0 s 41.43 Set 2 sleep level See parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level. 0.0 41.44 Set 2 sleep delay See parameter 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay. 60.0 s 41.45 Set 2 sleep boost time See parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time. 0.0 s 41.46 Set 2 sleep boost step See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step. 0.00 PID
customer units
41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation
See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation. 0.00 PID customer units
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay See parameter 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay. 0.50 s 41.49 Set 2 tracking mode See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode. Not
selected 41.50 Set 2 tracking ref
selection See parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection. Not
selected 41.51 Set 2 trim mode See parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. Off 41.52 Set 2 trim selection See parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection. Speed 41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref
pointer See parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer. Not
selected 41.54 Set 2 trim mix See parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix. 0.000 41.55 Set 2 trim adjust See parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. 1.000 41.56 Set 2 trim source See parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source. PID output 41.58 Set 2 increase
prevention See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention. No
41.59 Set 2 decrease prevention
See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention. No
41.60 Set 2 PID activation source
See parameter 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source. On
41.79 Set 2 units See parameter 40.79 Set 1 units. User text 41.80 Set 2 PID output min
source Selects the source for set 2 PID output minimum. Set2 output
min None None. 0 Set2 output min 41.36 Set 2 output min. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
41.81 Set 2 PID output max source
Selects the source for set 2 PID output maximum. Set2 output max
None None. 0 Set2 output max 40.47 Set 2 output max 1
41.89 Set 2 setpoint multiplier
See parameter 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier. 1.00
41.90 Set 2 feedback multiplier
Defines the multiplier k used in formulas of parameter 41.10 Set 2 feedback function. See parameter 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier.
1.00
43 43 Brake chopper Settings for the internal brake chopper.
43.01 Braking resistor temperature
Displays the estimated temperature of the brake resistor, or how close the brake resistor is to being too hot. The value is given in percent where 100% is the eventual temperature the resistor would reach when loaded long enough with its rated maximum load capacity (43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont). The temperature calculation is based on the values of parameters 43.08, 43.09 and 43.10, and on the assumption that the resistor is installed as instructed by the manufacturer (ie, it cools down as expected).
—
0.0120.0% Estimated brake resistor temperature. 1 = 1% 43.06 Brake chopper enable Enables brake chopper control and selects the
brake resistor overload protection method (calculation or measurement). Note: Before enabling brake chopper control, ensure that a brake resistor is connected overvoltage control is switched off (parameter
30.30 Overvoltage control) the supply voltage range (parameter 95.01
Supply voltage) has been selected correctly.
Disabled
Disabled Brake chopper control disabled. 0 Enabled with thermal model
Brake chopper control enabled with the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. If you select this, you must also specify the values needed by the model, ie. parameters 43.08, and 43.09, 43.10, 43.11 and 43.12. See the resistor manufacturer data sheet.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Enabled without thermal model
Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload protection based on the thermal model if the resistor is equipped with a thermal switch that is wired to open the main contactor of the drive if the resistor overheats. For more information, see chapter Resistor braking in the hardware manual.
2
Overvoltage peak protection
Brake chopper control enabled in an overvoltage condition. This setting is intended for situations where the braking chopper is not needed for runtime
operation, ie. to dissipate the inertial energy of the motor,
the motor is able to store a considerable amount magnetic energy in its windings, and
the motor might, deliberately or inadvertently, be stopped by coasting.
In such a situation, the motor would potentially discharge enough magnetic energy towards the drive to cause damage. To protect the drive, the brake chopper can be used with a small resistor dimensioned merely to handle the magnetic energy (not the inertial energy) of the motor. With this setting, the brake chopper is activated only whenever the DC voltage exceeds the overvoltage limit. During normal use, the brake chopper is not operating.
3
43.07 Brake chopper runtime enable
Selects the source for quick brake chopper on/off control. 0 = Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off 1 = Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation allowed. This parameter can be used to enable the chopper operation only when the supply is missing from a drive with a regenerative supply unit.
On
Off 0. 0 On 1. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
43.08 Brake resistor thermal tc
Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor thermal model.
0 s
010000 s Brake resistor thermal time constant, ie, the rated time to achieve 63% temperature.
1 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont
Defines the maximum continuous load of the brake resistor which will eventually raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value (= continuous heat dissipation capacity of the resistor in kW) but not above it. The value is used in the resistor overload protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper enable. See the data sheet of the brake resistor used.
0.00 kW
0.00 10000.00 kW
Maximum continuous load of the brake resistor. 1 = 1 kW
43.10 Brake resistance Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper enable.
0.0 ohm
0.01000.0 ohm Brake resistor resistance value. 1 = 1 ohm 43.11 Brake resistor fault
limit Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper enable. When the limit is exceeded, the drive trips on fault 7183 BR excess temperature. The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
105%
0150% Brake resistor temperature fault limit. 1 = 1% 43.12 Brake resistor warning
limit Selects the warning limit for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper enable. When the limit is exceeded, the drive generates a A793 BR excess temperature warning. The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
95%
0150% Brake resistor temperature warning limit. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44 44 Mechanical brake control
Configuration of mechanical brake control. See also parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1 and 41 Process PID set 2.
44.01 Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word. This parameter is read-only.
0000h
0000hFFFFh Mechanical brake control status word. 1 = 1 44.02 Brake torque memory Displays the torque (in percent) at the instant of
the previous brake close command. This value can be used as a reference for the brake open torque. See parameters 44.09 Brake open torque source and 44.10 Brake open torque.
—
-1600.0 1600.0%
Torque at brake closure. See par. 46.03
44.03 Brake open torque reference
Displays the currently active brake open torque. See parameters 44.09 Brake open torque source and 44.10 Brake open torque. This parameter is read-only.
—
-1600.0 1600.0%
Currently active brake open torque. See par. 46.03
44.06 Brake control enable Activates/deactivates (or selects a source that activates/deactivates) the mechanical brake control logic. 0 = Brake control inactive 1 = Brake control active
Not selected
Not selected The brake control function is disabled. 0 Selected The brake control function is enabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Open command Close/open command to brake actuator (0 = close, 1 =
open). Connect this bit to desired output. 1 Opening torque
request 1 = Opening torque requested from drive logic
2 Hold stopped request
1 = Hold requested from drive logic
3 Ramp to stopped
1 = Ramping down to zero speed requested from drive logic
4 Enabled 1 = Brake control is enabled 5 Closed 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSED state 6 Opening 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPENING state 7 Open 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPEN state 8 Closing 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSING state 915 Reserved
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status.x 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
44.07 Brake acknowledge selection
Activates/deactivates (and selects the source for) brake open/close status (acknowledgment) supervision. When a brake control error (unexpected state of the acknowledgment signal) is detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 44.17 Brake fault function. 0 = Brake closed 1 = Brake open
No acknowled ge
Off The brake acknowledge function is disabled. 0 On The brake acknowledge function is enabled. 1 No acknowledge Brake open/closed supervision disabled. 2 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 11
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44.08 Brake open delay Defines the brake open delay, ie. the delay between the internal open brake command and the release of motor speed control. The delay timer starts when the drive has magnetized the motor. Simultaneously with the timer start, the brake control logic energizes the brake control output and the brake starts to open. Set this parameter to the value of mechanical opening delay specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00 s
0.005.00 s Brake open delay. 100 = 1 s 44.09 Brake open torque
source Defines a source that is used as a brake opening torque reference if its absolute value is greater than the setting of
parameter 44.10 Brake open torque, and its sign is the same as the setting of 44.10 Brake
open torque. See parameter 44.10 Brake open torque.
Brake open torque
Zero Zero. 0 AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2 FBA ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1. 3 FBA ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2. 4 Brake torque memory Parameter 44.02 Brake torque memory. 7 Brake open torque Parameter 44.10 Brake open torque. 8
44.10 Brake open torque Defines the sign (ie. direction of rotation) and minimum absolute value of the brake open torque (motor torque requested at brake release in percent of motor nominal torque). The value of the source selected by parameter 44.09 Brake open torque source is used as the brake open torque only if it has the same sign as this parameter and has a greater absolute value. Note: This parameter is not effective in scalar motor control mode.
0.0%
-1600.0 1600.0%
Minimum torque at brake release. See par. 46.03
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44.11 Keep brake closed Selects a source that prevents the brake from opening. 0 = Normal brake operation 1 = Keep brake closed Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44.12 Brake close request Selects the source of an external brake close request signal. When on, the signal overrides the internal logic and closes the brake. 0 = Normal operation/No external close signal connected 1 = Close brake Notes: In an open-loop (encoderless) application, if the
brake is kept closed by a brake close request against a modulating drive for longer than 5 seconds, the brake is forced to close and the drive trips on a fault, 71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44.13 Brake close delay Specifies a delay between a close command (that is, when the brake control output is de-energized) and when the drive stops modulating. This is to keep the motor live and under control until the brake actually closes. Set this parameter equal to the value specified by the brake manufacturer as the mechanical make- up time of the brake.
0.00 s
0.0060.00 s Brake close delay. 100 = 1 s 44.14 Brake close level Defines the brake close speed as an absolute
value. After motor speed has decelerated to this level, a close command is given.
10.00 rpm
0.001000.00 rpm Brake close speed. See par. 46.01
44.15 Brake close level delay
Defines a brake close level delay. See parameter 44.14 Brake close level.
0.00 s
0.00 10.00 s Brake close level delay. 100 = 1 s 44.16 Brake reopen delay Defines a minimum time between brake closure
and a subsequent open command. 0.00 s
0.00 10.00 s Brake reopen delay. 100 = 1 s 44.17 Brake fault function Determines how the drive reacts upon a
mechanical brake control error. Note: If parameter 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge, acknowledgment status supervision is disabled altogether and will generate no warnings or faults. However, the brake open conditions are always supervised.
Fault
Fault The drive trips on a 71A2 Mechanical brake closing failed The drive trips on a A7A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed fault if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled (for example, the required motor starting torque is not achieved).
0
Warning The drive generates a A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed The drive generates a A7A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed warning if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled (for example, the required motor starting torque is not achieved).
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Open fault Upon closing the brake, the drive generates a A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed warning if the status of the acknowledgment does not match the status presumed by the brake control logic. The drive trips on a 71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed fault if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled (for example, the required motor starting torque is not achieved).
2
44.18 Brake fault delay Defines a close fault delay, ie. time between brake closure and brake close fault trip.
0.00 s
0.00 60.00 s Brake close fault delay. 100 = 1 s 44.202 Torque proving Selects whether Torque proving (electrical test) is
active or not. For more information on the function, see section Brake system checks Torque proving on page 652. Note: For scalar motor control, disable Torque proving and Brake open torque. Select the following: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque = 0% 44.202 Torque proving = Not selected
Not selected
Not selected Torque proving is inactive. 0 Selected Torque proving is active. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
44.203 Torque proving reference
Defines the Torque proving (electrical test) reference to be used when the Torque proving function is enabled.
25.0%
0.0 300.0% Torque proving (electrical test) reference in percentage of the motor nominal torque (01.10 Motor torque).
1 = 1%
44.204 Brake system check time
Defines the time delay during which Torque proving is active and the electrical and mechanical tests of the crane system are done against a closed brake. If the actual torque cannot be reached during this check time, he drive trips on fault D100 Torque prove.
0.30 s
0.10.30.00 s Time delay. 1000 = 1 s 44.205 Brake slip speed limit Defines the speed limit used for examining the
system for brake slips during Torque proving (mechanical test). For more information on the function, see section Brake system checks Brake slip on page 653.
30.00 rpm
0.00 30000.00 rpm
Brake slip speed limit. 1 = 1 rpm
44.206 Brake slip fault delay Defines the time delay before the drive trips on fault D101 Brake slip during Torque proving (mechanical test). If a brake slip is detected during the system check time (44.204 Brake system check time), the fault is generated immediately, even if the check time had not yet elapsed.
300 ms
030000 ms Time delay. 1 = 1 ms 44.207 Safety close select Selects whether the Brake safe closure function is
active or not. For more information on the function, see section Brake safe closure on page 654.
Not selected
Not selected Brake safe closure function is inactive. 0 Selected Brake safe closure function is active. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on
page 124). —
44.208 Safety close speed Defines the speed limit for the Brake safe closure function.
50.00 rpm
0.00 30000.00 rpm
Brake safe closure speed. 1 = 1 rpm
44.209 Safety close delay Defines the time delay before the drive trips on fault D102 Brake safe closure.
2000 ms
030000 ms Time delay. 1 = 1 ms 44.211 Extended runtime Defines the time period during which drive keeps
the motor magnetized after the brake is closed. The Extended run time function is enabled if this value is less than 3600 seconds or greater than 0 seconds. Note: The extended run time function is active only when all these conditions are satisfied: the drive is set to vector motor control mode
(see page 52) the drive is in Remote control
WARNING! Extended runtime causes the motor to heat up. In cases where long magnetization time is required, make sure to use motors with external
ventilation.
0.0 s
0.03600.0 s Time period. 10 = 1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
44.212 Extended runtime sw Shows the status of the Extended runtime function. This parameter is read-only.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh Extended runtime status. — 45 45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators.
See also section Energy saving calculators (page 114).
45.01 Saved GW hours Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.02 Saved MW hours rolls over. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
065535 GWh Energy savings in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh 45.02 Saved MW hours Energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on-line
motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.03 Saved kW hours rolls over. When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.01 Saved GW hours is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0999 MWh Energy savings in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh 45.03 Saved kW hours Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line
motor connection. If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all energy fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into heat, but the calculation still records savings made by controlling the speed. If the chopper is disabled, then regenerated energy from the motor is also recorded here. When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.02 Saved MW hours is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0.0999.9 kWh Energy savings in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Extended run in operation 0 = Extended run time is active.
1= Extended run time is not active. 1 Extended run enabled 1 = Extended run time function is enabled.
0 = Extended run time function is disabled. 215 Reserved
45.04 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0.0214748364.7 kWh
Energy savings in kWh. 1 = 1 kWh
45.05 Saved money x1000 Displays the monetary savings in thousands compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when parameter 45.06 Saved money rolls over. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
04294967295 thousands
Monetary savings in thousands of units. 1 = 1 unit
45.06 Saved money Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff (45.14 Tariff selection). When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.05 Saved money x1000 is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0.00999.99 units Monetary savings. 1 = 1 unit 45.07 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line
motor connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff (45.14 Tariff selection). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0.00 21474836.47 units
Monetary savings. 1 = 1 unit
45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is incremented when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in tons rolls over. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
065535 metric kilotons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons. 1 = 1 metric kiloton
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5 metric tons/MWh). When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset)
—
0.0999.9 metric tons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons. 1 = 1 metric ton
45.10 Total saved CO2 Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5 metric tons/MWh). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
—
0.0214748364.7 metric tons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons. 1 = 1 metric ton
45.11 Energy optimizer Enables/disables the energy optimization function. The function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 120% depending on load torque and speed. Note: With a permanent magnet motor or a synchronous reluctance motor, energy optimization is always enabled regardless of this parameter.
Disable
Disable Energy optimization disabled. 0 Enable Energy optimization enabled. 1
45.12 Energy tariff 1 Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). Depending on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff selection, either this value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2 is used for reference when monetary savings are calculated. Note: Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection, and are not applied retroactively.
1.000 units
0.000 4294967.295 units
Energy tariff 1. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh). See parameter 45.12 Energy tariff 1.
2.000 units
0.000 4294967.295 units
Energy tariff 2. —
45.14 Tariff selection Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre-defined energy tariff is used. 0 = 45.12 Energy tariff 1 1 = 45.13 Energy tariff 2
Energy tariff 1
Energy tariff 1 0. 0 Energy tariff 2 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
45.18 CO2 conversion factor Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). For example, 45.10 Total saved CO2 = 45.02 Saved kW hours 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (tn/MWh).
0.500 tn/MWh
0.00065.535 tn/MWh
Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions.
1 = 1 tn/MWh
45.19 Comparison power Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected direct-on-line and operating the application. The value is used for reference when energy savings are calculated. Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of this value. If nothing is entered here, then the nominal motor power is used by the calculation, but that may inflate the energy savings reported as many motors do not absorb nameplate power.
0.00 kW
0.00100000.00 kW
Motor power. 1 = 1 kW
45.21 Energy calculations reset
Resets the savings counter parameters 45.0145.10.
Done
Done Reset not requested (normal operation), or reset complete.
0
Reset Reset the savings counter parameters. The value reverts automatically to Done.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
45.24 Hourly peak power value
Value of the peak power during the last hour, that is, the most recent 60 minutes after the drive has been powered up. The parameter is updated once every 10 minutes unless the hourly peak is found in the most recent 10 minutes. In that case, the values is shown immediately.
0.00 kW
-3000.00 3000.00 kW
Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
45.25 Hourly peak power time
Time of the peak power value during the last hour. 00:00:00
Time. N/A 45.26 Hourly total energy
(resettable) Total energy consumption during the last hour, that is, the most recent 60 minutes. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
0.00 kWh
-3000.00 3000.00 kWh
Total energy. 10 = 1 kWh
45.27 Daily peak power value (resettable)
Value of the peak power since midnight of the present day. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
0.00 kW
-3000.00 3000.00 kW
Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
45.28 Daily peak power time Time of the peak power since midnight of the present day.
00:00:00
Time. N/A 45.29 Daily total energy
(resettable) Total energy consumption since midnight of the present day. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
0.00 kWh
-30000.00 30000.00 kWh
Total energy. 1 = 1 kWh
45.30 Last day total energy Total energy consumption during the previous day, that is, between midnight of the previous day and midnight of the present day
0.00 kWh
-30000.00 30000.00 kWh
Total energy. 1 = 1 kWh
45.31 Monthly peak power value (resettable)
Value of the peak power during the present month, that is, since midnight of the first day of the present month. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
0.00 kW
-3000.00 3000.00 kW
Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
45.32 Monthly peak power date
Date of the peak power during the present month. 1/1/1980
1/1/1980…6/5/2159 Date. N/A 45.33 Monthly peak power
time Time of the peak power during the present month. 00:00:00
Time. N/A 45.34 Monthly total energy
(resettable) Total energy consumption from the beginning of the present month. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
0.00 kWh
-1000000.00 1000000.00 kWh
Total energy. 0.01 = 1 kWh
45.35 Last month total energy
Total energy consumption during the previous month, that is, between midnight of the first day or the previous month and midnight of the first day of the present month.
0.00 kWh
-1000000.00 1000000.00 kWh
0.01 = 1 kWh
45.36 Lifetime peak power value
Value of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 0.00 kW
-3000.00 3000.00 kW
Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
45.37 Lifetime peak power date
Date of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 1/1/1980
Date. N/A 45.38 Lifetime peak power
time Time of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 00:00:00
Time. N/A 46 46 Monitoring/scaling settings
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings.
46.01 Speed scaling Defines the maximum speed value used to define the acceleration ramp rate and the initial speed value used to define the deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp). The speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed). Also defines the 16-bit scaling of speed-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
1500.00 rpm
0.1030000.00 rpm
Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed. 1 = 1 rpm
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
46.02 Frequency scaling Defines the maximum frequency value used to define the acceleration ramp rate and the initial frequency value used to define deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain). The frequency acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value (not to parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency. Also defines the 16-bit scaling of frequency-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
50.00 Hz
0.101000.00 Hz Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial frequency.
10 = 1 Hz
46.03 Torque scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of torque parameters. The value of this parameter (in percent of nominal motor torque) corresponds to 10000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
100.0%
0.11000.0% Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 10 = 1% 46.04 Power scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of power parameters.
The value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in the fieldbus communication. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. (For 32-bit scaling, see parameter 46.43)
100.00
0.1030000.00 Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 1 = 1 unit 46.05 Current scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of current parameters.
The value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus, master/follower, etc. communication. (For 32-bit scaling see parameter 46.44.)
100 A
030000 A Current corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 1 = 1 A 46.06 Speed ref zero scaling Defines a speed corresponding to a zero reference
received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus interface, or interface FBA A). For example, with a setting of 500, the fieldbus reference range of 020000 would correspond to a speed of 500[46.01] rpm. Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives communication profile.
0.00 rpm
0.00 30000.00 rpm
Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference.
1 = 1 rpm
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
46.07 Frequency ref zero scaling
Defines a frequency corresponding to a zero reference received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus interface, or interface FBA A or FBA B). For example, with a setting of 30, the fieldbus reference range of 020000 would correspond to a speed of 30[46.02] Hz. Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives communication profile.
0.00 Hz
0.00 1000.00 Hz Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference.
10 = 1 Hz
46.11 Filter time motor speed
Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used and 01.02 Motor speed estimated.
500 ms
220000 ms Motor speed signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms 46.12 Filter time output
frequency Defines a filter time for signal 01.06 Output frequency.
500 ms
220000 ms Output frequency signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms 46.13 Filter time motor
torque Defines a filter time for signal 01.10 Motor torque. 100 ms
220000 ms Motor torque signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms 46.14 Filter time power Defines a filter time for signal 01.14 Output power. 100 ms
220000 ms Output power signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms 46.21 At speed hysteresis Defines the at setpoint limits for speed control of
the drive. When the difference between reference (22.87 Speed reference act 7) and the speed (24.02 Used speed feedback) is smaller than 46.21 At speed hysteresis, the drive is considered to be at setpoint. This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
50.00 rpm
0.0030000.00 rpm
Limit for at setpoint indication in speed control. See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
24.02 (rpm)
0 rpm
22.87 + 46.21 (rpm)
22.87 (rpm)
22.87 — 46.21 (rpm)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
46.22 At frequency hysteresis
Defines the at setpoint limits for frequency control of the drive. When the absolute difference between reference (28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual frequency (01.06 Output frequency) is smaller than 46.22 At frequency hysteresis, the drive is considered to be at setpoint. This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
2.00 Hz
0.001000.00 Hz Limit for at setpoint indication in frequency control.
See par. 46.02
46.23 At torque hysteresis Defines the at setpoint limits for torque control of the drive. When the absolute difference between reference (26.73 Torque reference act 4) and actual torque (01.10 Motor torque) is smaller than 46.23 At torque hysteresis, the drive is considered to be at setpoint. This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word
5.0%
0.0300.0% Limit for at setpoint indication in torque control. See par. 46.03
46.31 Above speed limit Defines the trigger level for above limit indication in speed control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter 06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual speed exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.00 rpm
0.0030000.00 rpm
Above limit indication trigger level for speed control.
See par. 46.01
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
01.06 (Hz)
0 Hz
28.96 + 46.22 (Hz)
28.96 (Hz)
28.96 — 46.22 (Hz)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
01.10 (%)
0%
26.73 + 46.23(%)
26.73 (%)
26.73 — 46.23 (%)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
46.32 Above frequency limit Defines the trigger level for above limit indication in frequency control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter 06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual frequency exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.00 Hz
0.001000.00 Hz Above limit indication trigger level for frequency control.
See par. 46.02
46.33 Above torque limit Defines the trigger level for above limit indication in torque control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter 06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual torque exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.0%
0.01600.0% Above limit indication trigger level for torque control.
See par. 46.03
46.41 kWh pulse scaling Defines the trigger level for the kWh pulse on for 50 ms. The output of the pulse is bit 9 of 05.22 Diagnostic word 3.
1.000 kWh
0.001 1000.000 kWh
kWh pulse on trigger level. 1 = 1 kWh
46.43 Power decimals Defines the number of display decimal places and 32-bit scaling of power-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to the number of decimals assumed in the 32-bit integer fieldbus communication (for 16-bit scaling, see parameter 46.04).
2
0…3 Number of decimals. 1 = 1 46.44 Current decimals Defines the number of display decimal places and 32-bit
scaling of current-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to the number of decimals assumed in the 32-bit integer fieldbus communication (for 16-bit scaling, see parameter 46.05).
2
0…3 Number of decimals. 1 = 1 47 47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read
from using other parameters source and target settings. Note that there are different storage parameters for different data types. See also section Data storage parameters (page 118).
47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Data storage parameter 1. Parameters 47.0147.04 are real 32-bit numbers that can be used as source values of other parameters.
0.000
-2147483.008 2147483.008
32-bit real (floating point) number. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Data storage parameter 2. See also parameter 47.01.
0.000
-2147483.008 2147483.008
32-bit real (floating point) number. —
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Data storage parameter 3. See also parameter 47.01.
0.000
-2147483.008 2147483.008
32-bit real (floating point) number. —
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Data storage parameter 4. See also parameter 47.01.
0.000
-2147483.008 2147483.008
32-bit real (floating point) number. —
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Data storage parameter 9. 0 -2147483648 2147483647
32-bit integer. —
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Data storage parameter 10. 0 -2147483648 2147483647
32-bit integer. —
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Data storage parameter 11. 0 -2147483648 2147483647
32-bit integer. —
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Data storage parameter 12. 0 -2147483648 2147483647
32-bit integer. —
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Data storage parameter 17. 0 -3276832767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Data storage parameter 18. 0 -3276832767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Data storage parameter 19. 0 -3276832767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Data storage parameter 20. 0 -3276832767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
49 49 Panel port communication
Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
49.01 Node ID number Defines the node ID of the drive. All devices connected to the network must have a unique node ID. Note: For networked drives, it is advisable to reserve ID 1 for spare/replacement drives.
1
132 Node ID. 1 = 1 49.03 Baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the link. 115.2 kbps
38.4 kbps 38.4 kbit/s. 1 57.6 kbps 57.6 kbit/s. 2 86.4 kbps 86.4 kbit/s. 3 115.2 kbps 115.2 kbit/s. 4 230.4 kbps 230.4 kbit/s. 5
49.04 Communication loss time
Sets a timeout for control panel (or PC tool) communication. If a communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 49.05 Communication loss action is taken.
10.0 s
0.33000.0 s Panel/PC tool communication timeout. 10 = 1 s 49.05 Communication loss
action Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or PC tool) communication break.
Fault
No action No action taken. 0 Fault Drive trips on 7081 Control panel loss. 1 Last speed Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
communication break.
2
Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
communication break.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
49.06 Refresh settings Applies the settings of parameters 49.0149.05. Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, so reconnecting the drive may be required.
Done
Done Refresh done or not requested. 0 Configure Refresh parameters 49.0149.05. The value
reverts automatically to Done. 1
49.19 Basic panel home view 1
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 1 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S).
Zero
Zero Shows the factory default parameters. 0 Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used. 1 Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency. 3 Motor current 01.07 Motor current. 4 Motor current % of motor nominal
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom. 5
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque. 6 DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. 7 Output power 01.14 Output power. 8 Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 10 Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output. 11 Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference. 12 Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output. 14 Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual. 16 Temp sensor 1 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page 76).
20
Temp sensor 2 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the temperature sensor 2, see parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page 76).
21
Abs motor speed used 01.61 Abs motor speed used. 26 Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed %. 27 Abs output frequency 01.63 Abs output frequency. 28 Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque. 30 Abs output power 01.66 Abs output power. 31 Abs motor shaft power 01.68 Abs motor shaft power. 32 External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value. 33 AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage. 37 Other
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
49.20 Basic panel home view 2
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 2 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S). See parameter 49.19 for the selection.
Zero
49.21 Basic panel home view 3
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 3 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S). See parameter 49.19 for the selection.
Zero
49.30 Basic panel menu hiding
Parameter to hide main level menus in the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S). Values are: 0 = Menu visible 1 = Menu hidden
0000h
0000hFFFFh 1=1 49.219 Basic panel home
view 4 Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 4 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S). For the selections, see parameter 49.19.
Zero
49.220 Basic panel home view 5
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 5 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S). For the selections, see parameter 49.19
Zero
49.221 Basic panel home view 6
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 6 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP- S). For the selections, see parameter 49.19.
Zero
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Value 0 Motor data 1 Motor control 2 Control macros 3 Diagnostics 4 Energy efficiency 5 Parameters 6…15 Reserved
40 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) Fieldbus communication configuration.
See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 591).
50.01 FBA A enable Enables/disables communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter A, and specifies the slot the adapter is installed into.
Disable
Disable Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A disabled.
0
Enable Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A enabled. The adapter is in slot 1.
1
50.02 FBA A comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication break. The time delay is defined by parameter 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out.
Fault
No action No action taken. 0 Fault The drive trips on a 7510 FBA A communication.
This only occurs if control is expected from the fieldbus (FBA A selected as source of start/stop/reference in the currently active control location).
1
Last speed Communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, the drive generates a warning (A7C1 FBA A communication) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
2
Speed ref safe Communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, the drive generates a warning (A7C1 FBA A communication) and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
3
Fault always The machinery control unit trips on a communication fault even though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
4
Warning The machinery control unit generates a communication warning even though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
50.03 FBA A comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter 50.02 FBA A comm loss func is taken. Time count starts when the communication link fails to update the message. Note: There is a 60-second boot-up delay immediately after power-up. During the delay, the communication break monitoring is disabled (but communication itself can be active).
0.3 s
0.36553.5 s Time delay. 1 = 1 s 50.04 FBA A ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1
received from fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46.0146.04, depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
Transparent No scaling is applied (the scaling is 1 = 1 unit). Note: All decimal information is lost, for example, 1.23 = 1.
1
General Generic reference with a scaling of 100 = 1 (that is, integer and two decimals). Note: All data after two decimals is lost, for example, 1.234 = 123.
2
Torque The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Reference 1 type
Speed control Speed Torque control Speed
Scalar (Hz) Frequency
50.05 FBA A ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46.0146.04, depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
Transparent No scaling is applied (the scaling is 100 = 1 unit). Note: All decimal information is lost, for example, 1.23 = 1.
1
General Generic reference with a scaling of 100 = 1 (that is, integer and two decimals). Note: All data after two decimals is lost, for example, 1.234 = 123.
2
Torque The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
50.06 FBA A SW sel Selects the source of the status word to be sent to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Auto
Auto Source of the status word is chosen automatically. 0 Transparent mode The source selected by parameter 50.09 FBA A
SW transparent source is transmitted as the status word to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
1
50.07 FBA A actual 1 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46.0146.04, depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Reference 2 type
Speed control Torque Torque control Torque
Scalar (Hz) Torque
Transparent The value selected by parameter 50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is applied (the scaling is 1 = 1 unit). Note: All decimal information is lost, for example, 1.23 = 1.
1
General The value selected by parameter 50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source is sent as actual value 1 with a scaling of 100 = 1 unit (that is, integer and two decimals). Note: All data after two decimals is lost, for example, 1.234 = 123.
2
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
50.08 FBA A actual 2 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46.0146.04, depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Actual value 1 type (source) Scaling
Speed control Speed (01.01 Motor speed
used) 46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control
Scalar (Hz) Frequency
(01.06 Output 46.02 Frequency
scaling
Transparent The value selected by parameter 50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source is sent as actual value 2. No scaling is applied (the scaling is 1 = 1 unit). Note: All decimal information is lost, for example, 1.23 = 1.
1
General The value selected by parameter 50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source is sent as actual value 2 with a scaling of 100 = 1 unit (that is, integer and two decimals). Note: All data after two decimals is lost, for example, 1.234 = 123.
2
Torque 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 2. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
50.09 FBA A SW transparent source
Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when parameter 50.06 FBA A SW sel is set to Transparent mode.
Not selected
Not selected No source selected. — Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source
When parameter 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type is set to Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Not selected
Not selected No source selected. — Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Actual value 2 type Scaling
Speed control Speed (01.01 Motor speed
used) 46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control
Scalar (Hz) Frequency
(01.06 Output 46.02 Frequency
scaling
50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source
When parameter 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type is set to Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Not selected
Not selected No source selected. — Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
50.12 FBA A debug mode This parameter enables debug mode. Displays raw (unmodified) data received from and sent to fieldbus adapter A in parameters 50.1350.18.
Disable
Disable Debug mode disabled. 0 Fast Debug mode enabled. Cyclical data update is as
fast as possible which increases CPU load on the drive.
1
50.13 FBA A control word Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
00000000h FFFFFFFFh
Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. —
50.14 FBA A reference 1 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF1 sent by the master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
-2147483648 2147483647
Raw REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. —
50.15 FBA A reference 2 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF2 sent by the master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
-2147483648 2147483647
Raw REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. —
50.16 FBA A status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
00000000h FFFFFFFFh
Status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
50.17 FBA A actual value 1 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
-2147483648 2147483647
Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. —
50.18 FBA A actual value 2 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
—
-2147483648 2147483647
Raw ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. —
51 51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
51.01 FBA A type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module. 0 = Module is not found or is not properly connected, or is disabled by parameter 50.01 FBA A enable; 0 = None; 1 = PROFIBUS DP; 32 = CANopen; 37 = DeviceNet; 128 = Ethernet; 132 = PROFINET IO; 135 = EtherCAT; 136 = ETH Pwrlink; 485 = RS-485 comm; 101 = ControlNet; This parameter is read-only.
—
51.02 FBA A Par2 Parameters 51.0251.26 are adapter module- specific. For more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily in use.
—
065535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1 = 1 51.26 FBA A Par26 See parameter 51.02 FBA A Par2. —
065535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1 = 1 51.27 FBA A par refresh Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module
configuration settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to Done. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Done
Done Refreshing done. 0 Configure Refreshing. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
51.28 FBA A par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive). In format axyz, where ax = major table revision number; yz = minor table revision number. This parameter is read-only.
—
Parameter table revision of adapter module. — 51.29 FBA A drive type code Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus
adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive). This parameter is read-only.
—
065535 Drive type code stored in the mapping file. 1 = 1 51.30 FBA A mapping file
ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format. This parameter is read-only.
—
065535 Mapping file revision. 1 = 1 51.31 D2FBA A comm status Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module
communication. Not configured
Not configured Adapter is not configured. 0 Initializing Adapter is initializing. 1 Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication
between the adapter and the drive. 2
Configuration error Adapter configuration error: mapping file not found in the file system of the drive, or mapping file upload has failed more than three times.
3
Off-line Fieldbus communication is off-line. 4 On-line Fieldbus communication is on-line, or fieldbus
adapter has been configured not to detect a communication break. For more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter.
5
Reset Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6 51.32 FBA A comm SW ver Displays the common program revision of the
adapter module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or letter. Example: 190A = revision 1.90A. Common program revision of adapter module. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
51.33 FBA A appl SW ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or letter. Example: 190A = revision 1.90A. Application program version of adapter module. —
52 52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller through fieldbus adapter A. Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved.
52.01 FBA A data in1 Parameters 52.0152.12 select data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A.
None
None None. 0 CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits). 1 Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits). 2 Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits). 3 SW 16bit Status Word (16 bits). 4 Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits). 5 Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits). 6 CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits). 11 Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits). 12 Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits). 13 SW 32bit Status Word (32 bits). 14 Act1 32bit Actual value ACT1 (32 bits). 15 Act2 32bit Actual value ACT2 (32 bits). 16 SW2 16bit Status Word 2 (16 bits). 24
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 52.12 FBA A data in12 See parameter 52.01 FBA A data in1. None 53 53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller
to drive through fieldbus adapter A. Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved.
53.01 FBA A data out1 Parameters 53.0153.12 select data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus adapter A.
None
None None. 0 CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits). 1 Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits). 2 Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits). 3 CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits). 11 Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits). 12 Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits). 13 CW2 16bit Control Word 2 (16 bits). 21 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
53.12 FBA A data out12 See parameter 53.01 FBA A data out1. None 58 58 Embedded fieldbus Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.
See chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB). Note: Different embedded fieldbus protocols (Modbus or CANopen) require different hardware options.
58.01 Protocol enable Enables/disables the embedded fieldbus interface and selects the protocol to use.
None
None None (communication disabled). 0 Modbus RTU Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses
the Modbus RTU protocol. 1
CANopen Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses the CANopen protocol.
3
58.02 Protocol ID Displays the protocol ID and revision. This parameter is read-only.
—
Protocol ID and revision. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.03 Node address Defines the node address of the drive on the fieldbus link. Values 1247 are allowable. Two devices with the same address are not allowed on-line. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, the name of this parameter, 58.03 is Node ID (see below).
1
0255 Node address (values 1247 are allowed). 1 = 1 58.03 Node ID Defines the node address for the drive on the
CANopen bus. Values 1127 are allowable. Two devices with the same address are not allowed on-line. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, the name of this parameter 58.03 is Node address (see above).
3
0255 Node address (values 1127 are allowed). 1=1 58.04 Baud rate Selects the transfer rate of the Modbus fieldbus
link. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, the Baud rate range and the selection list item names change. See Baud rate below.
19.2 kbps
4.8 kbps 4.8 kbit/s. 1 9.6 kbps 9.6 kbit/s. 2 19.2 kbps 19.2 kbit/s. 3 38.4 kbps 38.4 kbit/s. 4 57.6 kbps 57.6 kbit/s. 5 76.8 kbps 76.8 kbit/s. 6 115.2 kbps 115.2 kbit/s. 7
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.04 Baud rate Defines the communication speed of the CANopen bus. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
125 kbps
50 kbps 50 kbit/s. 1 100 kbps 100 kbit/s. 2 125 kbps 125 kbit/s. 3 250 kbps 250 kbit/s. 4 500 kbps 500 kbit/s. 5 1 Mbps 1 Mbit/s. 6
58.05 Parity Selects the type of parity bit and number of stop bits. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
8 EVEN 1
8 NONE 1 Eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit. 0 8 NONE 2 Eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits. 1 8 EVEN 1 Eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit. 2 8 ODD 1 Eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit. 3
58.06 Communication control
Takes changed EFB settings in use, or activates silent mode.
Enabled
Enabled Normal operation. 0 Refresh settings Refreshes settings (Modbus parameters
58.0158.05, 58.1458.17, 58.25, 58.2858.34, CANopen parameters 58.03, 58.04, 58.06, 58.14, 58.23…58.29, 58.70…58.93 and 58.101…58.124) and takes changed EFB configuration settings in use. Reverts automatically to Enabled.
1
Silent mode Activates silent mode (no messages are transmitted). Silent mode can be terminated by activating the Refresh settings selection of this parameter. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this option is not available.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.07 Communication diagnostics
Displays the status of the EFB communication. This parameter is read-only. Note that the name is only visible when the error is present (bit value is 1). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
—
0000hFFFFh EFB communication status. 1 = 1 58.08 Received packets Displays a count of valid packets addressed to the
drive. During normal operation, this number increases constantly. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
—
04294967295 Number of received packets addressed to the drive.
1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Description 0 Init failed 1 = EFB initialization failed 1 Addr config err 1 = Node address not allowed by protocol 2 Silent mode 1 = Drive not allowed to transmit
0 = Drive allowed to transmit 3 Autobauding 4 Wiring error 1 = Errors detected (A/B wires possibly swapped) 5 Parity error 1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.04 and 58.05 6 Baud rate error 1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.05 and 58.04 7 No bus activity 1 = 0 bytes received during last 5 seconds 8 No packets 1 = 0 packets (addressed to any device) detected during
last 5 seconds 9 Noise or addressing
error 1 = Errors detected (interference, or another device with the same address on line)
10 Comm loss 1 = 0 packets addressed to the drive received within timeout (58.16)
11 CW/Ref loss 1 = No control word or references received within timeout (58.16)
12 Not active Reserved 13 Protocol 1 Reserved 14 Protocol 2 Reserved 15 Internal error 1 = Internal errors detected
58.09 Transmitted packets Displays a count of valid packets transmitted by the drive. During normal operation, this number increases constantly. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
—
04294967295 Number of transmitted packets. 1 = 1 58.10 All packets Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any
device on the bus. During normal operation, this number increases constantly. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
—
04294967295 Number of all received packets. 1 = 1 58.11 UART errors Displays a count of character errors received by
the drive. An increasing count indicates a configuration problem on the bus. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
—
04294967295 Number of UART errors. 1 = 1 58.12 CRC errors Displays a count of packets with a CRC error
received by the drive. An increasing count indicates interference on the bus. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter, is hidden.
—
04294967295 Number of CRC errors. 1 = 1 58.14 Communication loss
action Selects how the drive reacts to an EFB communication break. The drive does not trip if only reference is coming from EFB and the communication is lost. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See also parameters 58.15 Communication loss mode and 58.16 Communication loss time.
Fault
No action No action taken (monitoring disabled). 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Fault Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This occurs only if control in the currently active control location is expected from the EFB.
1
Last speed Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering. This occurs only if control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
communication break.
2
Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used). This occurs only if control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
3
Fault always Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This happens even thought the drive is in a control location where the EFB start/stop or reference is not used.
4
Warning Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning. This occurs even though no control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
5
58.15 Communication loss mode
Defines which message types reset the timeout counter for detecting an EFB communication loss. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See also parameters 58.14 Communication loss action and 58.16 Communication loss time Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2
Any message Any message addressed to the drive resets the timeout.
1
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2 A write of the control word or a reference resets the timeout.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.16 Communication loss time
Sets a timeout for EFB communication. If a communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 58.14 Communication loss action is taken. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See also parameter 58.15 Communication loss mode. Notes: There is a 30-second boot-up delay immediately
after power-up. During the delay, the communication break monitoring is disabled (but communication itself can be active).
If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, the default value is set as 0.3 seconds.
3.0 s
0.06000.0 s EFB communication timeout. 1 = 1 58.17 Transmit delay Defines a minimum response delay in addition to
any fixed delay imposed by the protocol. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
0 ms
065535 ms Minimum response delay. 1 = 1 58.18 EFB control word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by
the drive to the Modbus controller. For debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only.
—
0…FFFFFFFFh Control word sent by the controller to the drive. 1 = 1 58.19 EFB status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word for
debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only.
—
0…FFFFFFFFh Status word sent by the drive to the controller. 1 = 1 58.22 CANopen NMT state This parameter tells the CANopen NMT state of
the drive. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
Uninitialize d
Uninitialized Node is not initialized. 0 Stopped Node is in STOPPED state. 4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operational Node is in OPERATIONAL state. 5 Pre-operational Node is in PRE-OPERATIONAL state. 127
58.23 Configuration location This parameter defines where communication configuration for the device comes from. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
CAN objects
Drive parameters 0 CAN objects Communication configuration is written by
CANopen master to CANopen objects. The configuration can be saved into the drives non- volatile memory. In that case, the parameters dont need to be set every time the system is powered on
1
58.24 Transparent 16 scale Defines the scaling value for Transparent 16 communication profile. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
99
0…65535 Actual values and reference values are multiplied by this value + 1 in the object dictionary.
1 = 1
58.25 Control profile Defines the communication profile used by the protocol. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
ABB Drives
ABB Drives ABB Drives control profile (with a 16-bit control word).
0
DCU Profile DCU control profile (with a 16 or 32-bit control word).
5
CiA 402 CiA 402 control profile. 7 Transparent 16 Transparent control profile (with a 16-bit control
word). 8
Transparent 32 Transparent control profile (with a 32-bit control word).
9
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.26 EFB ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaled reference is displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows.
0
Transparent No scaling is applied. 1 General Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling:
1 = 100. 2
Torque Torque reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed Speed reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency Frequency reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
58.27 EFB ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaled reference is displayed by 03.10 EFB reference 2.
Speed or frequency
58.28 EFB act1 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus.network through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Reference 1 type
Speed control Speed Torque control Speed
Frequency control Frequency
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Actual 1 type (source) Scaling
Speed control Speed (01.01 Motor speed
used) 46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control
Frequency control Frequency
(01.06 Output 46.02 Frequency
scaling
Transparent The value selected by parameter 58.31 EFB act1 transparent source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
1
General The value selected by parameter 58.31 EFB act1 transparent source is sent as actual value 1 with a 16-bit scaling of 100 =1 unit (ie. integer and two decimals).
2
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
58.29 EFB act2 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through the embedded fieldbus interface. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, default value is set as Speed or frequency.
Transparen t
Speed or frequency Type/source and scaling are chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows:
0
Transparent The value selected by parameter 58.32 EFB act2 transparent source is sent as actual value 2. No scaling is applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
1
General The value selected by parameter 58.32 EFB act2 transparent source is sent as actual value 2 with a 16-bit scaling of 100 =1 unit (i.e. integer and two decimals).
2
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 2. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scalingg.
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Actual 1 type (source) Scaling
Speed control Speed (01.01 Motor speed
used) 46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control
Frequency control Frequency
(01.06 Output 46.02 Frequency
scaling
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 2. Scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
58.31 EFB act1 transparent source
Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter 58.28 EFB act1 type is set to Transparent.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
58.32 EFB act2 transparent source
Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter 58.29 EFB act2 type is set to Transparent.
Not selected
Not selected None. 0 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
58.33 Addressing mode Defines the mapping between parameters and holding registers in the 400101465535 Modbus register range. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
Mode 0
Mode 0 16-bit values (groups 199, indexes 199): Register address = 400000 + 100 parameter group + parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 2200 + 80 = 402280. 32-bit values (groups 199, indexes 199): Register address = 420000 + 200 parameter group + 2 parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 420000 + 4400 + 160 = 424560.
0
Mode 1 16-bit values (groups 1255, indexes 1255): Register address = 400000 + 256 parameter group + parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 5632 + 80 = 405712.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Mode 2 32-bit values (groups 1127, indexes 1255): Register address = 400000 + 512 parameter group + 2 parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 11264 + 160 = 411424.
2
58.34 Word order Selects in which order 16-bit registers of 32-bit parameters are transferred. For each register, the first byte contains the high order byte and the second byte contains the low order byte. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [3] CANopen, this parameter is hidden.
LO-HI
HI-LO The first register contains the high order word, the second contains the low order word.
0
LO-HI The first register contains the low order word, the second contains the high order word.
1
58.70 EFB debug mode This parameter enables debug mode. RAW-data is echoed to drive parameters 58.18 EFB control word, 58.71 EFB reference 1, 58.72 EFB reference 2, 58.19 EFB status word, 58.73 EFB actual value 1 and 58.74 EFB actual value 2 Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
1
Disable Debug mode disabled. 58.18 EFB control word, 58.71 EFB reference 1, 58.72 EFB reference 2, 58.19 EFB status word, 58.73 EFB actual value 1 and 58.74 EFB actual value 2 are not updated.
0
Enable Debug mode enabled. 58.18 EFB control word, 58.71 EFB reference 1, 58.72 EFB reference 2, 58.19 EFB status word, 58.73 EFB actual value 1 and 58.74 EFB actual value 2 are updated.
1
58.71 EFB reference 1 Displays the raw (unmodified) reference value 1for debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
-100000100000 Reference value 1 1=1 58.72 EFB reference 2 Displays the raw (unmodified) reference value 2
for debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
-100000100000 Reference value 2 1=1 58.73 EFB actual value 1 Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 1 for
debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
-100000100000 Actual value 1 1=1 58.74 EFB actual value 2 Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 2 for
debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
-100000100000 Actual value 2 1=1 58.76 RPDO1 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO.
Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0001
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.77 RPDO1 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.78 RPDO1 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Defines the time-out time for the PDO. 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and not received for event timer milliseconds, 58.14 Communication loss time is performed. Note: The timeout supervision is activated upon a successful reception of the RPDO.
1=1 ms
58.79 TPDO1 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0001
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.80 TPDO1 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.81 TPDO1 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Event timer 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and has not been transmitted for event timer milliseconds, a transmission is forced
1=1 ms
58.82 RPDO6 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0000
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.83 RPDO6 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.84 RPDO6 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Defines the time-out time for the PDO. 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and not received for event timer milliseconds, 58.14 Communication loss time is performed. Note: The timeout supervision is activated upon a successful reception of the RPDO.
1=1 ms
58.85 TPDO6 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0000
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.86 TPDO6 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.87 TPDO6 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Event timer 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and has not been transmitted for event timer milliseconds, a transmission is forced
1=1 ms
58.88 RPDO21 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parametersand after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0000
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.89 RPDO21 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.90 RPDO21 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Defines the time-out time for the PDO. 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and not received for event timer milliseconds, 58.14 Communication loss time is performed. Note: The timeout supervision is activated upon a successful reception of the RPDO.
1=1 ms
58.91 RPDO21 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0x0000
0x0000…0x07ff COB-ID. 0 = RPDO disabled, 1 = use COB-ID from CiA 301 pre-defined connection set, = use selected COB-ID.
1=1
58.92 TPDO21 transmission type
Set the transmission type of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
255
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
1=1
58.93 TPDO21 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
0
0…65535 Event timer 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and has not been transmitted for event timer milliseconds, a transmission is forced
1=1 ms
58.101 Data I/O 1 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus register 1 (400001). The master defines the type of the data (input or output). The value is transmitted in a Modbus frame consisting of two 16-bit words. If the value is 16-bit, it is transmitted in the LSW (least significant word). If the value is 32-bit, the subsequent parameter is also reserved for it and must be set to None.
CW 16bit
TPDO1 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO1 word 1. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location is Drive parameters and after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
SW 16bit
None No mapping, register is always zero. 0 CW 16bit ABB Drives, CiA402 and Transparent 16 profiles:
16-bit control word; DCU Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU control word.
1
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits). 2 Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits). 3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
SW 16bit ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives status word; DCU Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU status word.
4
Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits). 5 Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits). 6 CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits). 11 Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits). 12 Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits). 13 SW 32bit Status Word (32 bits). 14 Act1 32bit Actual value ACT1 (32 bits). 15 Act2 32bit Actual value ACT2 (32 bits). 16 CW2 16bit ABB Drives profile, CANopen: not used; DCU
Profile: upper 16 bits of the DCU control word 21
SW2 16bit CANopen: Error code. ABB Drives profile: not used / always zero; DCU Profile: upper 16 bits of the DCU status word.
24
RO/DIO control word CANopen: not used. Parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word.
31
AO1 data storage CANopen: not used. Parameter 13.91 AO1 data storage.
32
Feedback data storage
CANopen: not used. Parameter 40.91 Feedback data storage.
40
Setpoint data storage CANopen: not used. Parameter 40.92 Setpoint data storage
41
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). — 58.102 Data I/O 2 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus
master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400002. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref1 16bit
TPDO1 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO1 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
Act1 16bit
58.103 Data I/O 3 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400003. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref2 16bit
TPDO1 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO1 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
Act2 16bit
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.104 Data I/O 4 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400004. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
SW 16bit
TPDO1 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO1 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.105 Data I/O 5 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400005. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act1 16bit
RPDO1 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO1 word 1. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
CW 16bit
58.106 Data I/O 6 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400006. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act2 16bit
RPDO1 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO1 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
Ref1 16bit
58.107 Data I/O 7 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400007. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
RPDO1 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO1 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
Ref2 16bit
58.108 Data I/O 8 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400008. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
RPDO1 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO1 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.109 Data I/O 9 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400009. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
TPDO6 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO6 word 1. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.110 Data I/O 10 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400010. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
TPDO6 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO6 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.111 Data I/O 11 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400011. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
TPDO6 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO6 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.112 Data I/O 12 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400012. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
TPDO6 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO6 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.113 Data I/O 13 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400013. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
RPDO6 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO6 word 1. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
58.114 Data I/O 14 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400014. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
RPDO6 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO6 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1.
None
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.11 5
RPDO6 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO6 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.11 6
RPDO6 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO6 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.11 7
TPDO21 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO21 word 1. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.11 8
TPDO21 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO21 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.11 9
TPDO21 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO21 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.12 0
TPDO21 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO21 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.121 RPDO21 word 1 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO21 word 1. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.122 RPDO21 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO21 word 2. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
58.123 RPDO21 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO21 word 3. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
58.124 RPDO21 word 4 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO21 word 4. For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word 1. Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden.
None
71 71 External PID1 Configuration of external PID.
71.01 External PID act value See parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual. — 71.02 Feedback act value See parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback
actual. —
71.03 Setpoint act value See parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. — 71.04 Deviation act value See parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation
actual. —
71.06 PID status word Displays status information on process external PID control. This parameter is read-only.
—
0000hFFFFh Process PID control status word. 1 = 1 71.07 PID operation mode See parameter 40.07 Process PID operation
mode. Off
71.08 Feedback 1 source See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source. Not selected
71.11 Feedback filter time See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time. 0.000 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Value 0 PID active 1 = Process PID control active. 1 Reserved 2 Output frozen 1 = Process PID controller output frozen. Bit is set if
parameter 71.38 Output freeze enable is TRUE, or the deadband function is active (bit 9 is set).
36 Reserved 7 Output limit high 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37. 8 Output limit low 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36. 9 Deadband active 1 = Deadband is active. 1011 Reserved 12 Internal setpoint
active 1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.1640.16)
1315 Reserved
71.14 Setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 71.15 Output scaling, a general scaling factor for the external PID control chain. The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter 71.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz. In effect, the output of the PID controller [71.15] when deviation (setpoint — feedback) = [71.14] and [71.32] = 1. Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 71.14 and 71.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce the same scaling as 1 and 3.
1500.00
-200000.00… 200000.00
Process setpoint base. 1 = 1
71.15 Output scaling See parameter 71.14 Setpoint scaling. 1500.00 -200000.00… 200000.00
Process PID controller output base. 1 = 1
71.16 Setpoint 1 source See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source. Not selected
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1. Not selected
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2. Not selected
71.21 Internal setpoint 1 See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1. 0.00 PID customer units
71.22 Internal setpoint 2 See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2. 0.00 PID customer units
71.23 Internal setpoint 3 See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3. 0.00 PID customer units
71.26 Setpoint min See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. 0.00 71.27 Setpoint max See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. 200000.00 71.31 Deviation inversion See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. Not
inverted (Ref — Fbk)
71.32 Gain See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. 1.00 71.33 Integration time See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time. 60.0 s 71.34 Derivation time See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time. 0.000 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
71.35 Derivation filter time See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time. 0.0 s 71.36 Output min See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. -200000.00 71.37 Output max See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. 200000.00 71.38 Output freeze enable See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not
selected 71.39 Deadband range The control program compares the absolute value
of parameter 71.04 Deviation act value to the deadband range defined by this parameter. If the absolute value is within the deadband range for the time period defined by parameter 71.40 Deadband delay, PID’s deadband mode is activated and 71.06 PID status word bit 9 Deadband active is set. Then PID’s output is frozen and 71.06 PID status word bit 2 Output frozen is set. If the absolute value is equal or greater than the deadband range, PID’s deadband mode is deactivated.
0.0
0.0200000.0 Range. 1 = 1 71.40 Deadband delay Defines the deadband delay for the deadband
function. See parameter 71.39 Deadband range. 0.0 s
0.03600.0 s Delay. 1 = 1 s 71.58 Increase prevention Activates increase prevention of PID integration
term for Ext PID 1. No
No Increase prevention not in use. 0 Limiting The Ext PID integration term is not increased. 1 Process PID min lim The Ext PID integration term is not increased when
the output of the PID process has reached its minimum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the PID process. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
2
Process PID max lim The Ext PID integration term is not increased when the output of the PID process has reached its maximum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the PID process.
3
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
71.59 Decrease prevention Activates decrease prevention of PID integration term for Ext PID 1.
No
No Increase prevention not in use. 0 Limiting The Ext PID integration term is not decreased. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Process PID min lim The Ext PID integration term is not decreased when the output of the PID process has reached its minimum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the PID process.
2
Process PID max lim The Ext PID integration term is not decreased when the output of the PID process has reached its maximum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the PID process.
3
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 124).
—
71.62 Internal setpoint actual See parameter 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual. — 71.79 External PID units See parameter 40.79 Set 1 units. % 76 76 Application features Application parameters.
See also section Limit to limit control on page 109 and Conical motor control on page 679.
76.01 Limit to limit control status
Displays the state of the Limit to limit control state machine.
Not initialized
Not initialized The initial value of the state machine. 0 Rev zero, Fwd max speed
The reverse speed is limited to zero speed, and the forward direction speed is not limited by Limit to limit control.
1
Rev safe, Fwd max speed
The reverse speed is limited to safe speed, and the forward direction speed is not limited by Limit to limit control.
2
Rev max, Fwd max speed
The reverse speed is not limited, and the forward direction speed is not limited by Limit to limit control.
3
Rev max, Fwd safe speed
The reverse speed is not limited, and the forward direction speed is limited to safe speed by Limit to limit control.
4
Rev max, Fwd zero speed
The reverse speed is not limited, and the forward direction speed is limited to zero speed by Limit to limit control.
5
Rev safe, Fwd zero speed
The reverse speed is limited to safe speed, and the forward direction speed is limited to zero speed by Limit to limit control.
6
Rev zero, Fwd safe speed
The reverse speed is limited to zero speed, and the forward direction speed is limited to safe speed by Limit to limit control.
7
Rev safe, Fwd safe speed
The reverse speed is limited to safe speed, and the forward direction speed is limited to safe speed by Limit to limit control.
8
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Rev zero, Fwd zero speed
The reverse speed is limited to zero speed, and the forward direction speed is limited to zero speed by Limit to limit control.
9
0…9 1 = 1 76.02 Enable limit to limit
control Enables the Limit to limit control or selects the source for limit to limit control function. For more information on the function, see section Limit to limit control on page 109.
Not selected
Not selected The Limit to limit control function is disabled. 0 Selected The Limit to limit control function is enabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
76.03 Limit to limit trigger type
Selects the Limit to limit control trigger type. Rising Edge
Rising Edge Safe and stop limits are handled as pulses. Limit to limit state machine changes states due to rising edge.
0
Falling edge Safe and stop limits are handled as pulses. Limit to limit state machine changes states due to falling edge.
1
Level high Safe and stop limits are handled as static signals. Limit to limit state machine changes states due state of high signal.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Level low Safe and stop limits are handled as static signals. Limit to limit state machine changes states due state of low signal.
3
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). 76.04 Forward stop limit Selects the source to activate the Forward stop
limit function. When the you enable the Forward stop command, the function activates an stop command in the forward direction, and the drive stops as per the stop mode defined in the parameter 76.12. For more information on the function, see section Crane stop limit function on page 662.
Not selected
Not selected Disables the stop limit function if the Limit to limit trigger type (76.03) is Rising edge or Level high. Enables the function if the trigger type is Falling edge or Level low.
0
Selected Enables the stop limit function if the Limit to limit trigger type (76.03) is Rising edge or Level high. Disables the function if the trigger type is Falling edge or Level low.
1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
76.05 Forward slow down limit
Selects the source to activate the Forward slowdown function. When the command is active, the drive limits the speed reference to the value of parameter 76.08 Slow down speed. The slowdown frequency is read from parameter 76.09 Slow down frequency. For more information on the function, see section Crane slowdown function on page 664.
Not selected
Not selected Disables the slowdown function if the Limit to limit trigger type (76.03) is Rising edge or Level high. Enables the function if the trigger type is Falling edge or Level low.
0
Selected Enables the slowdown function if the Limit to limit trigger type (76.03) is Rising edge or Level high. Disables the function if the trigger type is Falling edge or Level low.
1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
76.06 Reverse stop limit Selects the source to activate the Reverse stop limit function. When the command is enabled, the function activates an stop command in the reverse direction, and the drive stops as per the stop mode defined in the parameter 76.12. For more information on the function, see section Crane stop limit function on page 662.
Not selected
For the available selections, see parameter 76.04 Forward stop limit.
76.07 Reverse slow down limit
Selects the source to activate the Reverse slowdown function. When the command is active, the drive limits the speed reference to the value of parameter 76.08 Slow down speed. The Slowdown frequency is read from parameter 76.09 Slow down frequency. For more information on the function, see section Crane slowdown function on page 664.
Not selected
For the available selections, see parameter 76.05 Forward slow down limit.
76.08 Slow down speed Defines the slowdown speed. 0.00 0.0030000.00 rpm
Slowdown speed. 1 = 1
76.09 Slow down frequency Defines the slowdown frequency. 0.00 0.00500.00 Hz Slowdown frequency. 1 = 1
76.11 Limit stop mode Selects the stop ramp mode when a limit stop command is activated.
Normal stop mode
Normal stop mode The motor takes the same stop mode as the mode set by 21.03 Stop mode.
0
Limit ramp stop mode The motor takes ramp stop mode, and the ramp time is defined by 76.12 Limit stop ramp time.
1
76.12 Limit stop ramp time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if 76.11 is Limit ramp stop mode. (ie. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling to zero).
3.000 s
0.000…3000.000 s 10 =1 s
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
76.21 Conical motor control Enables the Conical motor control function. Note: Mechanical brake control must be disabled when the Conical motor control function is used. See parameter 44.06 Brake control enable.
Disable
Disable Conical motor control function is disabled. 0 Enable Conical motor control function is enabled. 1 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
76.22 Start flux level Defines the start flux level, that is, the flux level for opening the brake. The drive uses this value as the flux reference when the Conical motor function is activated and the drive is started. See also parameter 76.24 Start flux hold time.
125 %
0…150 % Start flux level in percentage of the motor nominal flux.
1 = 1 %
76.23 Start stop level Defines the stop flux level, that is, the flux level for closing the brake. The drive uses this value as the flux reference when the stop command is given and the motor actual speed is below 21.06 Zero speed limit.
75 %
0…100 % Stop flux level in percentage of the motor nominal flux.
1 = 1 %
76.24 Start flux hold time Defines the hold time for the start flux level as the flux reference. This hold time makes sure that the start flux level is active for the time required for the brake to open.
2000 ms
0…10000 ms Start flux hold time. 1 = 1 ms 76.25 Flux ramp up time Defines the time for the flux reference to ramp up
from 0 to the normal flux level (100%). 2000 ms
0…10000 ms Flux ramp-up time. 1 = 1 ms 76.26 Flux ramp down time Defines the time for the flux reference to ramp
down from the normal flux level (100%) to 0. 2000 ms
0…10000 ms Flux ramp-down time. 1 = 1 ms 76.27 Flux reference Shows the crane flux reference in percent of the
nominal flux of the motor. This parameter is read-only and used in the crane application for Conical motor control. See section Conical motor control on page 679.
0 %
0…200 % Crane flux reference. 1 = 1 % 76.31 Motor speed match Enables the speed matching function or selects
the source for enable/disable signal. Not selected
Not selected The motor speed matching function is disabled. 0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Selected The motor speed matching function is enabled. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3 DI3 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1).
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26 Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations).
76.32 Motor speed steady deviation level
Defines the allowed motor speed deviation level (absolute value) for the steady state operation (motor started and running).
30.00
0.00….30000.00 rpm
1 = 1
76.33 Motor speed ramp deviation level
Defines the allowed motor speed deviation level (absolute value) for the ramping state (acceleration/deceleration) operation (motor started and running).
70.00
0.00….30000.00 rpm
1 = 1
76.34 Speed match fault delay
Defines the time delay for generating fault D105 Speed match and warning D200 Brake slip at standstill2.
1000 ms
0….30000 ms 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
90 90 Feedback selection Motor and load feedback configuration.
See also sections Rush control (page 71) and Jogging (page 71).
90.01 Motor speed for control
Displays the estimated or measured motor speed that is used for motor control, ie. final motor speed feedback selected by parameter 90.41 Motor feedback selection and filtered by 90.42 Motor speed filter time. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768.00 32767.00 rpm
Motor speed used for control. See par. 46.01
90.02 Motor position Displays the motor position (within one revolution) received from the source selected by parameter 90.41 Motor feedback selection. This parameter is read-only.
—
0.00000000 1.00000000 rev
Motor position. 32767 = 1 rev
90.10 Encoder 1 speed Displays encoder 1 speed in rpm. This parameter is read-only.
—
-32768.00 32767.00 rpm
Encoder 1 speed. See par. 46.01
90.11 Encoder 1 position Displays the actual position of encoder 1 within one revolution. This parameter is read-only.
—
0.00000000 1.00000000 rev
Encoder 1 position within one revolution. 32767 = 1 rev
90.13 Encoder 1 revolution extension
Displays the revolution count extension for encoder 1. With a single-turn encoder, the counter is incremented when encoder position (parameter 90.11) wraps around in the positive direction, and decremented in the negative direction. This parameter is read-only.
—
-2147483648 2147483647
Encoder 1 revolution count extension. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
90.41 Motor feedback selection
Selects the motor speed feedback value used during motor control. Note: With a permanent magnet motor, make sure an autophasing routine (see page 55) is performed using the selected encoder. If necessary, set parameter 99.13 ID run requested requested to Autophasing to request a fresh autophasing routine.
Estimate
Estimate A calculated speed estimate generated from the vector control is used.
0
Encoder 1 Actual speed measured by encoder 1. The encoder is set up by the parameters in group 92 Encoder 1 configuration.
1
90.42 Motor speed filter time Defines a filter time for motor speed feedback used for control (90.01 Motor speed for control).
3 ms
0 10000 ms Motor speed filter time. 1=1 90.45 Motor feedback fault Selects how the drive reacts to loss of measured
motor feedback. Fault
Fault Drive trips on a 7301 Motor speed feedback. or 7381 Encoder fault.
0
Warning Drive generates a A7B0 Motor speed feedback or A7E1 Encoder warning and continues operation using estimated feedbacks. Note: Before using this setting, test the stability of the speed control loop with estimated feedback by running the drive on estimated feedback (see 90.41 Motor feedback selection).
1
90.46 Force open loop Defines the speed feedback used by the vector motor model.
No
No The motor model uses the feedback selected by 90.41 Motor feedback selection.
0
Yes The motor model uses the calculated speed estimate (regardless of the setting of 90.41 Motor feedback selection, which in this case only selects the source of the feedback for the speed controller).
1
90.47 Enable motor encoder drift detection
Enables/disables the motor encoder drift detection. When drift is detected, fault 7301 Motor speed feedback and AUX code 4 Drift detected are set.
Yes
No Drift detection is disabled. 0 Yes Drift detection is enabled. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
91 91 Encoder module settings
Configuration of encoder interface modules.
91.10 Encoder parameter refresh
Validates any changed encoder interface module parameters. This is needed for any parameter changes in groups 9093 to take effect. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to Done. Notes: Permanent magnet motors only: The drive will
perform a fresh autophasing routine (see page 55) at next start if the motor feedback encoder settings have been changed.
The parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Done
Done The refreshing is completed. 0 Refresh Refresh function is running. 1
92 92 Encoder 1 configuration
Settings for encoder 1. Notes: The contents of the parameter group vary
according to the selected encoder type. It is recommended that encoder connection 1
(this group) is used whenever possible. 92.10 Pulses/revolution (Visible when a TTL, TTL + HTL encoder is
selected) Defines the pulse number per revolution.
2048
0…65535 Number of pulses. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
95 95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings.
95.01 Supply voltage Selects the supply voltage range. This parameter is used by the drive to determine the nominal voltage of the supply network. The parameter also affects the current ratings and the DC voltage control functions (trip and brake chopper activation limits) of the drive. See section Voltage control and trip limits on page 105.
WARNING! An incorrect setting may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably, or the
brake chopper or resistor to overload. Note: The selections shown depend on the hardware of the drive. If only one voltage range is valid for the drive in question, it is selected by default.
Automatic / not selected
Automatic / not selected
No voltage range selected. The supply voltage range will be selected automatically based on the measured DC voltage.
0
208240 V 200240 V, available for ACS380-04-xxxx-1/-2 drives
1
380415 V 380480 V, available for ACS380-04-xxxx-4 drives
2
440480 V 440480 V, available for ACS380-04-xxxx-4 drives
3
95.02 Adaptive voltage limits Enables adaptive voltage limits. Adaptive voltage limits can be used if, for example, an IGBT supply unit is used to raise the DC voltage level. If the communication between the inverter and IGBT supply unit is active, the voltage limits are related to the DC voltage reference from the IGBT supply unit. Otherwise the limits are calculated based on the measured DC voltage at the end of the pre-charging sequence. This function is also useful if the AC supply voltage to the drive is high, as the warning levels are raised accordingly.
Enable
Disable Adaptive voltage limits disabled. 0 Enable Adaptive voltage limits enabled. 1
95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage
AC supply voltage estimated by calculation. The estimation is done every time the drive is powered up and is based on the measured DC voltage (UDC/1.41).
—
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
0.065535.0 V Voltage. 10 = 1 V 95.04 Control board supply Specifies how the control board of the drive is
powered. Internal 24V
Internal 24V The drive control board is powered from the drive power unit it is connected to.
0
External 24V The drive control board is powered from an external power supply.
1
95.15 Special HW settings Contains hardware-related settings that can be enabled and disabled by toggling the specific bits. Note: The installation of the hardware specified by this parameter may require derating of drive output, or impose other limitations. Refer to the hardware manual of the drive.
—
01 Hardware options configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Reserved — 1 ABB Sine filter 1 = An ABB sine filter is connected to the output of the
drive/inverter 2…15 Reserved —
95.20 HW options word 1 Specifies hardware-related options that require differentiated parameter defaults. This parameter is not affected by a parameter restore.
—
0000hFFFFh Hardware options configuration word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Value 0 Supply
frequency 60 Hz If you change the value of this bit, you have to do a complete reset to the drive after the change. After reset you have to reselect the macro to be used. See section Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings on page 458. 0 = 50 Hz. 1 = 60 Hz. Note: If bit 0 value is 0 (not activated) and parameter 99.06 value is 3.0 A and parameter 99.09 value is 1430 rpm (the 50Hz defaults), the motor parameters will be reset to defaults. Note: If bit 0 value is 1 (activated) and parameter 99.06 value is 3.4 A and parameter 99.09 value is 1750 rpm (the 60Hz defaults), the motor parameters will be reset to defaults.
112 Reserved 13 du/dt filter
activation When active, an external du/dt filter is connected to the drive/inverter output. The setting will limit the output switching frequency, and force the fan of the drive/inverter module to full speed. 0 = du/dt filter inactive. 1 = du/dt filter active.
1415 Reserved
95.26 Motor disconnect detection
Enables the use of the motor disconnect switch, or selects the source for the enable signal. When enabled, the drive does not trip to a fault when it detects the disconnection but remains operational and returns to normal operation after a reconnection. When this parameter is enabled, the drive will go through the following sequence: 1. Motor is disconnected: Drive detects the disconnection
and indicates it with warning A784. The drive remains in operation and waits for motor reconnection.
2. Motor is reconnected: Drive detects the reconnection, removes the warning and returns to normal operation. The last active reference before the disconnection is in use.
Note: This feature is only available in scalar mode. This parameter does not affect vector mode behavior.
Disable
0 Disable. 1 = 1 1 Enable. 1 = 1
95.200 Cooling fan mode Cooling fan operation mode. Auto Auto Fan runs normally: Fan on/off, fan speed reference
can autochange according to the drive state.
0
Always on Fan always runs at 100% speed reference. 1 96 96 System Language selection; access levels; macro selection;
parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit selection; parameter checksum calculation; user lock.
96.01 Language Selects the language of the parameter interface and other displayed information when viewed on the control panel. Notes: Not all languages listed below are necessarily
supported. This parameter does not affect the languages
visible in the Drive Composer PC tool. (Those are specified under View Settings Drive default language.)
Not selected
Not selected Select a language. 0 English English. 1033 Deutsch German. 1031 Italiano Italian. 1040 Espaol Spanish. 3082
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Portugues Portuguese. 2070 Nederlands Dutch. 1043 Franais French. 1036 Suomi Finnish. 1035 Svenska Swedish. 1053 Russki Russian. 1049 Polski Polish. 1045 Trke Turkish. 1055 Chinese (Simplified, PRC)
Simplified Chinese. 2052
96.02 Pass code Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate further access levels, for example additional parameters, parameter lock, etc. See parameter 96.03 Access levels status. Entering 358 toggles the parameter lock, which prevents the changing of all other parameters through the control panel or the Drive Composer PC tool. Entering the user pass code (by default, 10000000) enables parameters 96.10096.102, which can be used to define a new user pass code and to select the actions that are to be prevented. Entering an invalid pass code will close the user lock if open, ie. hide parameters 96.10096.102. After entering the code, check that the parameters are in fact hidden. Note: We recommend that you change the default user pass code. See also section User lock (page 119).
0
099999999 Pass code. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
96.03 Access levels status Shows which access levels have been activated by pass codes entered into parameter 96.02 Pass code.
0b0000
0b0000…0b1111 Active access levels. — 96.04 Macro select Selects the control macro. See chapter Control
macros for more information. After a selection is made, the parameter reverts automatically to Done. Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings (factory settings) of each standard macro is still available.
Done
Done Macro selection complete; normal operation. 0 ABB standard ABB standard macro. For scalar motor control. 1 AC500 Modbus RTU AC500 modbus RTU macro. 5 Alternate Alternate macro. 12 Motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer macro. 13 PID PID control macro. 14 Torque control Torque control macro. 28
96.05 Macro active Shows which control macro is currently selected. See chapter Control macros for more information. To change the macro, use parameter 96.04 Macro select.
ABB standard
Done Macro selection complete; normal operation. 0 ABB standard ABB standard macro. For scalar motor control. 1 AC500 Modbus RTU AC500 modbus RTU macro. 5 Alternate Alternate macro. 12 Motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer macro. 13 PID PID control macro. 14
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name 0 End user 1 Service 2 Advanced users 310 Reserved 11 OEM access level 1 12 OEM access level 2 13 OEM access level 3 14 Parameter lock 15 Reserved
Torque control Torque control macro. 28 96.06 Parameter restore Restores the original settings of the control
program, ie. parameter default values. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Done
Done Restoring is completed. 0 Restore defaults All editable parameter values are restored to
default values, except motor data and ID run results I/O extension module settings end user texts, such as customized warnings
and faults (external faults and changed), and the drive name
control panel/PC communication settings fieldbus adapter settings control macro selection and the parameter
defaults implemented by it parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it. user lock configuration parameters
96.10096.102.
8
Clear all All editable parameter values are restored to default values, except end user texts, such as customized warnings
and faults (external faults and changed), and the drive name
control panel/PC communication settings fieldbus adapter settings (clears entire existing
settings) control macro selection and the parameter
defaults implemented by it parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it. user lock configuration parameters
96.10096.102. PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring.
62
Reset all fieldbus settings
Restores all fieldbus and communication related settings to default values. Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool communication are interrupted during the restore.
32
Reset home view Restores the Home view layout to show the values of the default parameters defined by the control macro use.
512
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Reset end user texts Restores all end user texts to default values, including the drive name, contact info, customized fault and warning texts, and currency unit. If the value of parameter 40.79 is set to User Text, then the PID unit is also reset. If parameter 40.79 has some other value, the PID unit cannot be reset.
1024
Reset motor data Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID run results to default values.
2
All to factory defaults Restores settings and all editable parameters back to initial factory values, except the differentiated defaults implemented by
parameter 95.20.
34560
96.07 Parameter save manually
Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory on the drive control board to ensure that operation can continue after cycling the power. Save the parameters with this parameter to store values sent from the fieldbus when using external +24 V DC power supply to
the control unit: to save parameter changes before you power down the control unit. The supply has a very short hold-up time when powered off.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or control panel but not when altered through a fieldbus adapter connection.
Done
Done Save completed. 0 Save Save in progress. 1
96.08 Control board boot Changing the value of this parameter to 1 reboots the control unit (without requiring a power off/on cycle of the complete drive module). The value reverts to 0 automatically. Warning: This parameter should not be written with the fieldbus or an adaptive program, as that could cause a continuous boot loop that would paralyze the drive.
0
0 No action. 1 = 1 1 Reboot the control unit.
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
96.10 User set status Shows the status of the user parameter sets. This parameter is read-only. See also section User parameter sets (page 117).
—
n/a No user parameter sets have been saved. 0 Loading A user set is being loaded. 1 Saving A user set is being saved. 2 Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. 3 User1 IO active User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96.12
User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
4
User2 IO active User set 2 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
5
User3 IO active User set 3 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
6
User4 IO active User set 4 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
7
User1 backup User set 1 has been saved or loaded. 20 User2 backup User set 2 has been saved or loaded. 21 User3 backup User set 3 has been saved or loaded. 22 User4 backup User set 4 has been saved or loaded. 23
96.11 User set save/load Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings. The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power-up. Notes: Some hardware configuration settings, such as
I/O extension module, fieldbus and encoder configuration parameters (groups 1416, 47, 5058 and 9293) are not included in user parameter sets.
Parameter changes made after loading a set are not automatically stored they must be saved using this parameter.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running
No action
No action Load or save operation complete; normal operation.
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
User set I/O mode Load user parameter set using parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
1
Load set 1 Load user parameter set 1. 2 Load set 2 Load user parameter set 2. 3 Load set 3 Load user parameter set 3. 4 Load set 4 Load user parameter set 4. 5 Save to set 1 Save user parameter set 1. 18 Save to set 2 Save user parameter set 2. 19 Save to set 3 Save user parameter set 3. 20 Save to set 4 Save user parameter set 4. 21
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User set I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together with parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 as follows:
Not selected
Not selected 0. 0 Selected 1. 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2 DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3 DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4 DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed
status, bit 0). 10
DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1)
11
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 18 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 19 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. 20 Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Status of source
defined by par. 96.12
Status of source
defined by par. 96.13
User parameter
set selected
0 0 Set 1
1 0 Set 2
0 1 Set 3
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status 27 Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
96.13 User set I/O mode in2 See parameter 96.12 User set I/O mode in1. Not selected
96.16 Unit selection Selects the unit of parameters indicating power, temperature and torque.
0b0000
0b0000…0b1111 Unit selection word. 1 = 1 96.20 Time sync primary
source Defines the 1st priority external source for synchronization of the drives time and date. The date and time can also be directly set with parameters 96.2496.26 in which case this parameter is ignored.
Embedded FB
Fieldbus A Fieldbus interface A. FENA/FPNO can get the time from an SNTP server and set it as the time for the drive. Athat
3
Embedded FB Embedded fieldbus interface. The EFB BACnet MS/TP Timesync service can be used to set the time for the drive.
6
Panel link The time for the drive can be set using a control panel, or a PC tool connected to the panel link.
8
Ethernet tool link Drive Composer PC tool through FENA module. The user can set the time manually by using DCP over Ethernet. The time is set in the same way as with USB and panel.
9
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0 Power unit
(mechanical) 0 = kW 1 = hp
1 Reserved 2 Temperature
unit 0 = C 1 = F
3 Reserved 4 Torque unit 0 = Nm (Nm)
1 = lbft (lbft) 515 Reserved
96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980
The number of full days passed since beginning of the year 1980. This parameter, together with 96.25 Time in minutes within 24h and 96.26 Time in ms within one minute makes it possible to set the date and time in the drive via the parameter interface from a fieldbus or application program. This may be necessary if the fieldbus protocol does not support time synchronization.
12055
159999 Days since beginning of 1980. 1 = 1 96.25 Time in minutes within
24h The number of full minutes passed since midnight. For example, the value 860 corresponds to 2:20 pm. See parameter 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
0 min
11439 Minutes since midnight. 1 = 1 96.26 Time in ms within one
minute The number of milliseconds passed since the previous minute. See parameter 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
0 ms
059999 Number of milliseconds since last minute. 1 = 1 96.51 Clear fault and event
logger Clears all events from the drives fault and event logs.
Done
Done 0 = No action. 0 Reset 1 = Resets (clears) fault and event logger. 1
96.54 Checksum action Selects how the drive reacts when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1
(Approved checksum A): if the parameter checksum 96.68 Actual checksum A does not match 96.71 Approved checksum A, and/or
when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum B): if the parameter checksum 96.69 Actual checksum B does not match 96.72 Approved checksum B.
No action
No action No action taken. (The checksum feature is not in use.)
0
Pure event The drive generates an event log entry (B686 Checksum mismatch).
1
Warning The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum mismatch).
2
Warning and prevent start
The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum mismatch). Starting the drive is prevented.
3
Fault The drive trips on 6200 Checksum mismatch. 4
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
96.55 Checksum control word
Bits 89 select which comparison(s) are made: Bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A): 96.68 Actual
checksum A is compared to 96.71 Approved checksum A, and/or
Bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum A): if 96.69 Actual checksum B is compared to 96.72 Approved checksum B.
Bits 1213 select approved (reference) checksum parameter(s) into which the actual checksum(s) from parameter(s) are copied: Bit 12 = 1 (Set approved checksum A): Value of
96.68 Actual checksum A is copied into 96.71 Approved checksum A and/or
Bit 13 = 1 (Set approved checksum B): Value of 96.69 Actual checksum B copied into 96.72 Approved checksum B.
0b0000
0b0000…0b1111 Checksum control word. 1 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Bit Name Information 0…7 Reserved 8 Approved checksum A 1 = Enabled: Checksum A (96.71) is observed. 0 =
Disabled. 9 Approved checksum B 1 = Enabled: Checksum B (96.72) is observed. 0 =
Disabled. 10…11 Reserved 12 Set approved
checksum A 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.68 into 96.71. 0 = Done (copy has been made).
13 Set approved checksum B
1 = Set: Copy value of 96.69 into 96.72. 0 = Done (copy has been made).
14…15 Reserved
96.68 Actual checksum A Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum A. The checksum A is generated and updated whenever an action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A) The set of parameters for checksum A calculation does not include fieldbus settings parameters. The parameters included in the checksum A calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 71, 76, 90, 91, 92, 95, 96, 97, 98, and 99. See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page 118).
0x0000
0x0000…0xffff Actual checksum A. 1 = 1 96.69 Actual checksum B Displays the actual parameter configuration
checksum B. The checksum B is generated and updated whenever an action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum B) The set of parameters for checksum B does not include: fieldbus settings motor data settings, and energy data settings parameters. The parameters included in the checksum B calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 46, 71, 76, 90, 91, 92, 95, 96, and 97. See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page 118).
0x0000
0x0000…0xffff Actual checksum B. 1 = 1 96.70 Disable adaptive
program Selects if the adaptive program is enabled or disabled
No Adaptive program is enabled. Adaptive program is set to running mode automatically when drive is powered on. Commanding adaptive program to running mode is possible from PC tool.
0
Yes Adaptive program is disabled. Setting adaptive program to running mode is not possible. If adaptive program was running when disabled, then adaptive program is stopped and set to init state.
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
96.71 Approved checksum A Approved (reference) checksum A. 0x0000 0x0000…0xffff Approved checksum A. —
96.72 Approved checksum B Approved (reference) checksum B. 0x0000 0x0000…0xffff Approved checksum B. —
97 97 Motor control Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux
braking; anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
97.01 Switching frequency reference
Defines the switching frequency of the drive that is used as long as the drive does not heat too much. See section Switching frequency on page 80. Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise. In multimotor systems, do not change the switching frequency from the default value.
4 kHz
4 kHz 4 kHz. 4 8 kHz 8 kHz. 8 12 kHz 12 kHz. 12
97.02 Minimum switching frequency
Lowest switching frequency that is allowed. Depends on the frame size.
1.5 kHz
1.5 kHz 1.5 kHz. In some larger frame sizes 1 kHz is used instead.
1.5
2 kHz 2 kHz. 2 4 kHz 4 kHz. 4 8 kHz 8 kHz. 8 12 kHz 12 kHz. 12
97.03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0% means no slip gain. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite having the setting at full slip gain. Example: (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm): A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite having full slip gain (= 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm — 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased to 105% (2 rpm / 40 rpm = 5%).
100%
0200% Slip gain. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
97.04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive enters the field weakening area. Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill. If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady-state operation is 0.95 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value, but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier.
-2%
-550% Voltage reserve. Setting voltage reserve to -5- 4% will enable full output voltage (motor voltage = network voltage at rated frequency). This will increase the current harmonics to the motor and might lead to motor heating.
1 = 1%
97.05 Flux braking Defines the level of flux braking power. (Other stopping and braking modes can be configured in parameter group 21 Start/stop mode). Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill.
Disabled
Disabled Flux braking is disabled. 0 Moderate Flux level is limited during the braking.
Deceleration time is longer compared to full braking.
1
Full Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy in the motor.
WARNING! Using full flux braking heats up the motor especially in cyclic operation.
Make sure that the motor can withstand this if you have a cyclic application.
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
97.06 Flux reference select Defines the source of flux reference. Notes: This parameter is not effective if parameter
76.21 Conical motor control is enabled. This is an expert level parameter and should not
be adjusted without appropriate skill. Do not use this parameter in scalar control
mode, if the parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is set to Squared.
User flux reference
Zero Minimum value of parameter 97.07 User flux reference.
0
User flux reference Parameter 97.07 User flux reference. 1 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). —
97.07 User flux reference Defines the flux reference when parameter 97.06 Flux reference select select is set to User flux reference. Notes: This parameter is not effective if parameter
76.21 Conical motor control is enabled. ABB recommends the range of
20.00%…120.00%.
100.00%
0.00…200.00% User-defined flux reference. 100 = 1% 97.08 Optimizer minimum
torque This parameter can be used to improve the control dynamics of a synchronous reluctance motor or a salient permanent magnet synchronous motor. As a rule of thumb, define a level to which the output torque must rise with minimum delay. This will increase the motor current and improve the torque response at low speeds.
0.0%
0.0…1600.0% Optimizer torque limit. 10 = 1% 97.11 TR tuning Rotor time constant tuning.
This parameter can be used to improve torque accuracy in closed-loop control of an induction motor. Normally, the motor identification run provides sufficient torque accuracy, but manual fine-tuning can be applied in exceptionally demanding applications to achieve optimal performance. Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill.
100%
25400% Rotor time constant tuning. 1 = 1%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
97.13 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with a high break-away torque where vector control cannot be applied.
See also section IR compensation for scalar motor control on page 75. Typical IR compensation values are shown below.
WARNING! Set IR compensation value as low as possible. Large IR compensation value can lead to overheating of the motor and damage to the drive, if operated for
longer periods at low speed.
3.20%
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
U / UN (%)
f Field weakening
Relative output voltage. No IR compensation.
Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.
15%
100%
50% of nominal frequency
3-phase 380480V drives PN (kW) 0,
37 0, 75 1,
1 2, 2 4 7, 5 15 22
IR compen s-ation (%)
3, 5 3, 5 3, 2
2, 5 2 1, 5 1, 25
1, 2
3-phase 200…240V drives PN (kW) 0,
37 0, 75 1,
1 2, 2 3 7, 5 11
IR compen s-ation (%)
3, 5 3, 5 2, 6
2, 4 2, 2
1, 7 1, 5
1-phase 200240V drives PN (kW) 0,
37 0, 75 1,
1 1, 5 2,
2 IR 3 0 2 3 2 1 7 1
0.0050.00% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor voltage.
1 = 1%
97.15 Motor model temperature adaptation
Selects whether the temperature-dependent parameters (such as stator or rotor resistance) of the motor model adapt to actual (measured or estimated) temperature or not. See parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection for selection of temperature measurement sources.
Disabled
Disabled Temperature adaptation of motor model disabled. 0 Estimated temperature Estimated temperature (35.01 Motor estimated
temperature) used for adaptation of motor model. 1
97.16 Stator temperature factor
Tunes the motor temperature dependence of stator parameters (stator resistance).
50
0200 % Tuning factor. 97.17 Rotor temperature
factor Tunes the motor temperature dependence of rotor parameters (eg. rotor resistance).
100
0200 % Tuning factor. 97.20 U/F ratio Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency)
ratio below field weakening point. For scalar control only.
Disabled
Linear Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 0 Squared Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan
applications. With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent magnet motors.
1
97.33 Speed estimate filter time
Defines a filtering time for estimated speed. 5.00
0.00…100.00 ms Filtering time for estimated speed. 1 = 1 ms 97.48 UDC stabilizer Enables or disables the DC bus voltage stabilizer. Disabled
Disabled DC bus voltage stabilizer disabled. 0 Enabled min DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, minimum
stabilization. 50
Enabled mild DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, mild stabilization.
100
Enabled medium DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, medium stabilization.
300
Enabled strong DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, strong stabilization.
500
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Enabled max DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, maximum stabilization.
800
97.49 Slip gain for scalar Sets gain for slip compensation (in %) while drive is operating in scalar control mode. A squirrel-cage motor slips under load.
Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip.
Requires parameter 99.04 Motor control mode = Scalar.
0 = No slip compensation. 1…200 = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation according to parameters 99.08 Motor nominal frequency and 99.09 Motor nominal speed.
0
0…200 % Slip compensation in %. 1 = 1% 97.94 IR comp max
frequency Sets the frequency at which IR compensation (set by parameter 97.13 IR compensation) reaches 0 V. The unit is % of motor nominal frequency. IR compensation When enabled, IR compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR compensation, for example, in applications that require a high breakaway torque.
80.0
1.0…200.0 % IR compensation maximum frequency in %. 1 = 1% 97.135 UDC ripple Calculated ripple voltage. 0.0 V
0.0200.0 V Voltage. 1 = 1 V
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
A
B
A = IR compensated
f (Hz)
Motor voltage
97.13
97.94
98 98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the
motor model. These parameters are useful for non-standard motors, or to just get more accurate motor control of the motor on site. A better motor model always improves the shaft performance.
98.01 User motor model mode
Activates the motor model parameters 98.0298.12 and 98.14. Notes: Parameter value is automatically set to zero
when ID run is selected by parameter 99.13 ID run requested. The values of parameters 98.0298.12 are then updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run.
Measurements made directly from the motor terminals during the ID run are likely to produce slightly different values than those on a data sheet from a motor manufacturer.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Not selected
Not selected Parameters 98.0298.12 inactive. 0 Motor parameters The values of parameters 98.0298.12are used
as the motor model. 1
98.02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. With a star-connected motor, RS is the resistance of one winding. With a delta-connected motor, RS is one-third of the resistance of one winding.
0.00000 p.u.
0.000000.50000 p.u.
Stator resistance in per unit. —
98.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.000000.50000 p.u.
Rotor resistance in per unit. —
98.04 Lm user Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 10.00000 p.u.
Main inductance in per unit. —
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
98.05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance LS. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.000001.00000 p.u.
Leakage inductance in per unit. —
98.06 Ld user Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 10.00000 p.u
Direct axis inductance in per unit. —
98.07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 10.00000 p.u
Quadrature axis inductance in per unit. —
98.08 PM flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 2.00000 p.u
Permanent magnet flux in per unit. —
98.09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.
0.00000 ohm
0.00000 100.00000 ohm
Stator resistance. —
98.10 Rs user SI Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 ohm
0.00000 100.00000 ohm
Rotor resistance. —
98.11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00 mH
0.00100000.00 mH
Main inductance. 1 = 10000 mH
98.12 SigmaL user SI Defines the leakage inductance LS. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00 mH
0.00100000.00 mH
Leakage inductance. 1 = 10000 mH
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
98.13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00 mH
0.00 100000.00 mH
Direct axis inductance. 1 = 10000 mH
98.14 Lq user SI Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00 mH
0.00 100000.00 mH
Quadrature axis inductance. 1 = 10000 mH
98.15 Position offset user Defines an angle offset between the zero position of the synchronous motor and the zero position of the position sensor. Notes: The value is in electrical degrees. The electrical
angle equals the mechanical angle multiplied by the number of motor pole pairs.
This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.0 deg
0.0…360.0 deg Angle offset. 1 = 1 deg 99 99 Motor data Motor configuration settings.
99.03 Motor type Selects the motor type. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Asynchro- nous motor
Asynchronous motor Standard squirrel cage AC induction motor (asynchronous induction motor).
0
Permanent magnet motor
Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF voltage. Note: With permanent magnet motors special attention must be paid on setting the motor nominal values correctly in this parameter group (99 Motor data). You must use vector control. If the nominal BackEMF voltage of the motor is not available, a full ID run should be performed for improving performance.
1
SynRM motor Synchronous reluctance motor. Three-phase AC synchronous motor with salient pole rotor without permanent magnets.
2
PMaSynRM motor Permanent Magnet Assisted Synchronous Reluctance Motor
3
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
99.04 Motor control mode Selects the motor control mode. Vector Vector Vector control. Vector control has better accuracy
than scalar control but cannot be used in all situations (see selection Scalar below). Requires motor identification run (ID run). See parameter 99.13 ID run requested. Note: In vector control the drive performs a standstill ID run at the first start if ID run has not been previously performed. A new start command is required after standstill ID run. Note: To achieve a better motor control performance, you can perform a normal ID run without load. See also section Operating modes and motor control modes (page 52).
0
Scalar Scalar control. Suitable for most applications, if top performance is not required. Motor identification run is not required. Note: Scalar control must be used in the following situations: with multimotor applications 1) if the load is not
equally shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification (ID run)
if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive
if the drive is used with no motor connected (for example, for test purposes).
Note: Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the inverter. See also section Speed control performance figures (page 74), and section Operating modes and motor control modes (page 52).
1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
99.06 Motor nominal current Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total current of the motors. Notes: Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the drive.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
If parameter 99.06 value is 0 and parameter 99.09 value is also 0, the motor parameters will be reset to defaults.
4.0 A
0.0(2 IN of the drive) A
Nominal current of the motor. The allowable range: vector control mode: 1/42 IN of the drive scalar control mode: 02 IN of the drive. Note: When using flying start in scalar control mode (see parameter 21.19), the nominal current must be in the range allowed for vector control mode.
1 = 0.01 A (see par. 46.05)
99.07 Motor nominal voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage supplied to the motor. This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Notes: With permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is
the BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor. If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, e.g. 60 V per 1000 rpm, the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is 3 60 V = 180 V. Note that the nominal voltage is not equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage (EDCM) specified by some motor manufacturers. The nominal voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM voltage by 1.7 (or square root of 3).
The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
230.0 V
40.0480.0 Nominal voltage of the motor. 10 = 1 V 99.08 Motor nominal
frequency Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
50.00 Hz
0.00500.00 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor. 10 = 1 Hz
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
99.09 Motor nominal speed Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Notes: This parameter cannot be changed while the
drive is running. If parameter 99.06 value is 0 and parameter
99.09 value is also 0, the motor parameters will be reset to defaults.
1435 rpm
030000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor. 1 = 1 rpm 99.10 Motor nominal power Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must
match the value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total power of the motors. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
1.10 kW or hp
0.00 10000.00 kW or 0.00 13404.83 hp
Nominal power of the motor. 1 = 0.01 unit (see par. 46.04)
99.11 Motor nominal cos Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model. This value is not obligatory, but is useful with an asynchronous motor, especially when performing a standstill identification run. With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor, this value is not needed. Notes: Do not enter an estimated value. If you do not
know the exact value, leave the parameter at zero. This parameter cannot be changed while the
drive is running.
0.00
0.001.00 Cosphi of the motor. 100 = 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
99.12 Motor nominal torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate motor model. Not obligatory. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
0.000 Nm or lbft
0.0004000000.00 0 Nm or 0.0002950248.59 7 lbft
Nominal motor torque. 1 = 100 unit
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
99.13 ID run requested Selects the type of the motor identification routine (ID run) performed at the next start of the drive. During the ID run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. If no ID run has been performed yet (or if default parameter values have been restored using parameter 96.06 Parameter restore), this parameter is automatically set to Standstill, signifying that an ID run must be performed. After the ID run, the drive stops and this parameter is automatically set to None. Notes: To ensure that the ID run can work properly, the drive
limits in group 30 Limits (maximum speed and minimum speed, and maximum torque and minimum torque) must to be large enough (the range specified by the limits must be wide enough. If eg. speed limits are less than the motor nominal speed, the ID run cannot be completed.
For the Advanced ID run, the machinery must always be de-coupled from the motor.
With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor, a Normal, Reduced or Standstill ID run requires that the motor shaft is NOT locked and the load torque is less than 10%.
Once the ID run is activated, it can be canceled by stopping the drive.
The ID run must be performed every time any of the motor parameters (99.04, 99.0699.12) have been changed.
With scalar control mode (99.04 Motor control mode = Scalar), the ID run is not requested automatically. However, an ID run can be performed for more accurate torque estimation.
Ensure that the Safe torque off and emergency stop circuits (if any) are closed during the ID run.
Mechanical brake (if present) is not opened by the logic for the ID run.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
None
None No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected only if the ID run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill/Advanced) has already been performed once.
0
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Normal Normal ID run. Guarantees good control accuracy for all cases. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode should be selected whenever it is possible. Notes: If the load torque will be higher than 20% of motor
nominal torque, or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run, then the driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor during a Normal ID run.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50100% of the nominal
speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
1
Reduced Reduced ID run. This mode should be selected instead of the Normal or Advanced ID Run if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (ie. the
motor cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if
flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (ie. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).
With this ID run mode, the resultant motor control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as motor control following a Normal ID run. Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run (< 90 seconds). Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50100% of the nominal
speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
2
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Standstill Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. With an AC induction (asynchronous) motor, the motor shaft is not rotated. With a permanent magnet motor, the shaft can rotate up to half a revolution. Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal, Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics (e.g. with lift or crane applications).
3
Autophasing The autophasing routine determines the start angle of a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor (see page 55). Autophasing does not update the other motor model values. Autophasing is automatically performed as part of the Normal, Reduced, Standstill, or Advanced ID runs. Using this setting, it is possible to perform autophasing alone. This is useful after changes in the feedback configuration, such as the replacement or addition of an absolute encoder, resolver, or pulse encoder with commutation signals. Notes: This setting can only be used after a Normal,
Reduced, Standstill, or Advanced ID run has already been performed.
Depending on the selected autophasing mode, the shaft can rotate during autophasing.
4
Advanced Advanced ID run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID run takes a very long time to complete. This mode should be selected when top performance is needed across the whole operating area. Note: The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor because of high torque and speed transients that are applied.
WARNING! The motor may run at up to the maximum (positive) and minimum
(negative) allowed speed during the ID run. Several accelerations and decelerations are done. The maximum torque, current and speed allowed by the limit parameters may be utilized. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
6
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Adaptive The drive makes a Standstill ID run first. After that, the motor parameters will be refined during the normal operation to achieve more optimal performance. After the motor model adaptation process is complete, parameter 99.14 will be changed from Standstill to Adaptive. Adaptive ID run is used with Permanent Magnet motors to determine the motor back-emf more accurately when normal ID run cannot be performed. Initially standstill ID run is made and when a short period of stable running with above 50% of motor rated speed is done, back emf is recalculated and automatically updated. It is recommended to give back emf as accurately as possible to have the best possible results.
8
99.14 Last ID run performed Shows the type of ID run that was performed last. None None No ID run has been performed. 0 Normal Normal ID run. 1 Reduced Reduced ID run. 2 Standstill Standstill ID run. 3 Autophasing Autophasing ID run. 4 Advanced Advanced ID run. 6 Adaptive Adaptive ID run.
99.15 Motor polepairs calculated
Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor. 0
01000 Number of pole pairs. 1 = 1 99.16 Motor phase order Switches the rotation direction of motor. This
parameter can be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for example, because of the wrong phase order in the motor cable), and correcting the cabling is considered impractical. Notes: Changing this parameter does not affect speed
reference polarities, so positive speed reference will rotate the motor forward. The phase order selection just ensures that forward is in fact the correct direction.
U V W
U V W Normal. 0 U W V Reversed rotation direction. 1
No. Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings Parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 changes the drive parameter default values according to the supply frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The bit is set according to the market before the drive is delivered.
If you need to change from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or vice versa, change the value of the bit and then do a complete reset to the drive (96.06 Parameter restore). After that you have to reselect the macro to be used. The table below shows the parameters whose default values depend on the supply frequency setting. The supply frequency setting, with the type designation of the drive, also affects group 99 Motor data parameter values (not listed in the table).
No Name 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz = 50 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz = 60 Hz
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max 1500.000 1800.000 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max 1500.000 1800.000 13.18 AO1 source max 1500.0 1800.0 22.26 Constant speed 1 300.00 rpm 360.00 rpm 22.27 Constant speed 2 600.00 rpm 720.00 rpm 22.28 Constant speed 3 900 .00 rpm 1080.00 rpm 22.29 Constant speed 4 1200.00 rpm 1440.00 rpm 22.30 Constant speed 5 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm 22.31 Constant speed 6 2400.00 rpm 2880.00 rpm 22.32 Constant speed 7 3000.00 rpm 3600.00 rpm 28.26 Constant frequency 1 5.00 Hz 6.00 Hz 28.27 Constant frequency 2 10.00 Hz 12.00 Hz 28.28 Constant frequency 3 15.00 Hz 18.00 Hz 28.29 Constant frequency 4 20.00 Hz 24.00 Hz 28.30 Constant frequency 5 25.00 Hz 30.00 Hz 28.31 Constant frequency 6 40.00 Hz 48.00 Hz 28.32 Constant frequency 7 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
30.11 Minimum speed -1500.00 rpm -1800.00 rpm 30.12 Maximum speed 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm 30.13 Minimum frequency -50.00 Hz -60.00 Hz 30.14 Maximum frequency 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz 31.26 Stall speed limit 150.00 rpm 180.00 rpm 31.27 Stall frequency limit 15.00 Hz 18.00 Hz 31.30 Overspeed trip margin 500.00 rpm 500.00 rpm 46.01 Speed scaling 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm 46.02 Frequency scaling 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
No Name 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz = 50 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz = 60 Hz
Additional parameter data 461
7 Additional parameter data
Contents Terms and abbreviations Fieldbus addresses Parameter groups 19 Parameter groups 1099
Terms and abbreviations Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.
Analog src Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter by choosing Other, and selecting the source parameter from a list. In addition to the Other selection, the parameter may offer other pre- selected settings.
Binary src Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit in another parameter value (Other). Sometimes the value can be fixed to 0 (false) or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected settings.
Data Data parameter.
FbEq32 32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is selected for transmission to an external system. The corresponding 16-bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters.
462 Additional parameter data
Fieldbus addresses Refer to the users manual of the fieldbus adapter.
List Selection list.
No. Parameter number.
PB Packed Boolean (bit list).
Real Real number.
Type Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real.
Uint16 16-bit unsigned integer.
Term Definition
Additional parameter data 463
Parameter groups 19 No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
01 Actual values 01.01 Motor speed used Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 01.02 Motor speed estimated Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 01.03 Motor speed % Real -1000.001000.00 % 100 = 1% 01.04 Encoder 1 speed filtered Real -30000 30000 rpm 100 = 1 01.06 Output frequency Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 01.07 Motor current Real 0.0030000.00 A 100 = 1 A 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom Real 0.01000.0 % 10 = 1% 01.09 Motor current % of drive nom Real 0.01000.0 % 10 = 1% 01.10 Motor torque Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 01.11 DC voltage Real 0.002000.00 V 100 = 1 V 01.13 Output voltage Real 02000 V 1 = 1 V 01.14 Output power Real -32768.0032767.00 kW 100 = 1 unit 01.15 Output power % of motor nom Real -300.00300.00 % 100 = 1% 01.17 Motor shaft power Real -32768.0032767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit 01.18 Inverter GWh counter Real 065535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh 01.19 Inverter MWh counter Real 01000 MWh 1 = 1 MWh 01.20 Inverter kWh counter Real 01000 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 01.24 Flux actual % Real 0200 % 1 = 1% 01.30 Nominal torque scale Real 0.0004000000 Nm or
lbft 1000 = 1 unit
01.50 Current hour kWh Real -21474836.48 21474836.47
kWh 100 = 1 kWh
01.51 Previous hour kWh Real -21474836.48 21474836.47
kWh 100 = 1 kWh
01.52 Current day kWh Real -21474836.48 21474836.47
kWh 100 = 1 kWh
01.53 Previous day kWh Real -21474836.48 21474836.47
kWh 100 = 1 kWh
01.54 Cumulative inverter energy Real -200000000.0 200000000.0
kWh 1 = 1 kWh
01.55 Inverter GWh counter (resettable)
Real 065535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
01.56 Inverter MWh counter (resettable)
Real 01000 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
01.57 Inverter kWh counter (resettable)
Real 01000 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
01.58 Cumulative inverter energy (resettable)
Real -200000000.0 200000000.0
kWh 1 = 1 kWh
01.61 Abs motor speed used Real 0.00 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 01.62 Abs motor speed % Real 0.00 100.00% % 100 = 1% 01.63 Abs output frequency Real 0.00500.00 Hz Hz 100 = 1 Hz 01.64 Abs motor torque Real 0.001600.0 % 10 = 1% 01.65 Abs output power Real 0.00 32767.00 kW 100 = 1 kW 01.66 Abs output power % mot nom Real 0.00300.00 % 100 = 1% 01.68 Abs motor shaft power Real 0.00 32767.00 kW 100 = 1 kW
03 Input references 03.01 Panel reference Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 03.02 Panel reference remote Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 unit 03.05 FB A reference 1 Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 03.06 FB A reference 2 Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 03.09 EFB reference 1 Real -30000.0030000.00 — 100 = 1 03.10 EFB reference 2 Real -30000.0030000.00 — 100 = 1 03.17 Integrated Panel ref Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 03.18 Integrated Panel ref remote Real -100000.00100000.00 — 100 = 1
04 Warnings and faults 04.01 Tripping fault Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
464 Additional parameter data
04.02 Active fault 2 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.03 Active fault 3 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.06 Active warning 1 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.07 Active warning 2 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.08 Active warning 3 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.11 Latest fault Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.12 2nd latest fault Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.13 3rd latest fault Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.16 Latest warning Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.17 2nd latest warning Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.18 3rd latest warning Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.40 Event word 1 Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.41 Event word 1 bit 0 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.43 Event word 1 bit 1 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.45 Event word 1 bit 2 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.47 Event word 1 bit 3 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.49 Event word 1 bit 4 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.51 Event word 1 bit 5 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.53 Event word 1 bit 6 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.55 Event word 1 bit 7 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.57 Event word 1 bit 8 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.59 Event word 1 bit 9 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.61 Event word 1 bit 10 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.63 Event word 1 bit 11 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.65 Event word 1 bit 12 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.67 Event word 1 bit 13 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.69 Event word 1 bit 14 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 04.71 Event word 1 bit 15 code Data 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
05 Diagnostics 05.01 On-time counter Real 065535 d 1 = 1 d 05.02 Run-time counter Real 065535 d 1 = 1 d 05.03 Hours run Real 0.0429496729.5 h 10 = 1 h 05.04 Fan on-time counter Real 065535 d 1 = 1 d 05.10 Control board temperature Real -100300 C C or F 10 = 1 C 05.11 Inverter temperature Real -40.0160.0 % 10 = 1% 05.20 Diagnostic word 1 PB 0b00000b1111 — — 05.21 Diagnostic word 2 PB 0b00000b1111 — — 05.22 Diagnostic word 3 PB 0b00000b1111 — — 05.80 Motor speed at fault Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 05.81 Output frequency at fault Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 05.82 DC voltage at fault Real 0.002000.00 V 100 = 1 V 05.83 Motor current at fault Real 0.0030000.00 A 100 = 1 A 05.84 Motor torque at fault Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 05.85 Main status word at fault PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 05.86 DI delayed status at fault PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 05.87 Inverter temperature at fault PB -40.0160.0 C 10 = 1C 05.88 Reference used at fault Real -500.00…500.00 Hz/
-1600.01600.0%/ 30000.00…30000.00 rpm
Hz/ %/ rpm
100 = 1 Hz/ 10 = 1%/
100 = 1 rpm 06 Control and status words
06.01 Main control word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.11 Main status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.16 Drive status word 1 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.17 Drive status word 2 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.18 Start inhibit status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.19 Speed control status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.20 Constant speed status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 06.21 Drive status word 3 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 465
06.29 MSW bit 10 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 06.30 MSW bit 11 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 06.31 MSW bit 12 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 06.32 MSW bit 13 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 06.33 MSW bit 14 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1
07 System info 07.03 Drive rating id List — — 1 = 1 07.04 Firmware name List — — 1 = 1 07.05 Firmware version Data — — 1 = 1 07.06 Loading package name List — — 1 = 1 07.07 Loading package version Data — — 1 = 1 07.11 Cpu usage Real 0100 % 1 = 1% 07.25 Customization package name Data — — 1 = 1 07.26 Customization package version Data — — 1 = 1 07.30 Adaptive program status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 07.31 AP sequence state Data 0…20 — 1 = 1 07.35 Drive configuration Binary src 0x0000…0xffff — 1 = 1 07.36 Drive configuration 2 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
09 Crane application signals 09.01 Crane SW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh — 1 = 1 09.03 Crane FW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh — 1 = 1 09.06 Crane speed reference Real -3000030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 09.16 Crane frequency reference Real -500…500 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
466 Additional parameter data
Parameter groups 1099 No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
10 Standard DI, RO 10.01 DI status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.02 DI delayed status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.03 DI force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.04 DI forced data PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.05 DI1 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.06 DI1 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.07 DI2 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.08 DI2 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.21 RO status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.22 RO force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.23 RO forced data PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.24 RO1 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 10.25 RO1 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.26 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 10.99 RO/DIO control word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 10.101 RO1 toggle counter Real 04294967000 — 1 = 1
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO 11.02 DIO delayed status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 11.03 DIO force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 11.04 DIO force data PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 11.05 DIO1 configuration List 02 — 1 = 1 11.06 DIO1 output source Binary src — — 1 = 1 11.07 DIO1 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 11.08 DIO1 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 11.09 DIO2 configuration List 02 — 1 = 1 11.10 DIO2 output source Binary src — — 1 = 1 11.11 DIO2 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 11.12 DIO2 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 11.13 DI3 configuration List 0, 1 — 1 = 1 11.17 DI4 configuration List 0, 1 — 1 = 1 11.21 DI5 configuration List — — 1 = 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 11.42 Freq in 1 min Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 11.43 Freq in 1 max Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.47 Freq in 2 scaled Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 11.50 Freq in 2 min Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.51 Freq in 2 max Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.52 Freq in 2 at scaled min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.53 Freq in 2 at scaled max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.54 Freq out 1 actual value Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.55 Freq out 1 source List 0, 1, 3, 4, 6…8, 10…14, 16 — 1 = 1 11.58 Freq out 1 src min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.59 Freq out 1 src max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.60 Freq out 1 at src min Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.61 Freq out 1 at src max Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.62 Freq out 2 actual value Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.63 Freq out 2 source List 0, 1, 3, 4, 6…8, 10…14, 16 — 1 = 1 11.66 Freq out 2 source min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.67 Freq out 2 source max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1 = 1 11.68 Freq out 2 at src min Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1 11.69 Freq out 2 at src max Real 016000 Hz 1 = 1
Additional parameter data 467
12 Standard AI 12.02 AI force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 12.03 AI supervision function List 04 — 1 = 1 12.04 AI supervision selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 12.11 AI1 actual value Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.12 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.13 AI1 forced value Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.15 AI1 unit selection List 2, 10 — 1 = 1 12.16 AI1 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 12.17 AI1 min Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.18 AI1 max Real 0.00020.000 mA or 0.00010.000 V
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.21 AI2 actual value Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.22 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.23 AI2 forced value Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.25 AI2 unit selection List 2, 10 — 1 = 1 12.26 AI2 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 12.27 AI2 min Real 4.00020.000 mA or
0.00010.000 V mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.28 AI2 max Real 4.00020.000 mA or 0.00010.000 V
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.00032767.000 — 1000 = 1 12.101 AI1 percent value Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 12.102 AI2 percent value Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 12.110 AI dead band Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1%
13 Standard AO 13.02 AO force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 13.11 AO1 actual value Real 0.00022.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 13.12 AO1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 13.13 AO1 forced value Real 0.00022.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 13.15 AO1 unit selection List 2, 10 — 1 = 1 13.16 AO1 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 13.17 AO1 source min Real -32768.032767.0 — 10 = 1 13.18 AO1 source max Real -32768.032767.0 — 10 = 1 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.00022.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.00022.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 13.91 AO1 data storage Real -327.68 327.67 — 100 = 1
15 I/O extension module 15.01 Extension module type List 0, 5…7 — 1 = 1 15.02 Detected extension module List 03 — 1 = 1 15.04 RO status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 15.05 RO force selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 15.06 RO forced data PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 15.07 RO4 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 15.08 RO4 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.09 RO4 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.10 RO5 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 15.11 RO5 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.12 RO5 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.13 RO6 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 15.14 RO6 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
468 Additional parameter data
15.15 RO6 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.16 RO7 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 15.17 RO7 ON delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s 15.18 RO7 OFF delay Real 0.03000.0 s 10 = 1 s
19 Operation mode 19.01 Actual operation mode List 15, 10, 20 — 1 = 1 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 19.12 Ext1 control mode List 15 — 1 = 1 19.14 Ext2 control mode List 15 — 1 = 1 19.16 Local control mode List 01 — 1 = 1 19.17 Local control disable List 01 — 1 = 1
20 Start/stop/direction 20.01 Ext1 commands List 06, 1112, 14…16,
21…23 — 1 = 1
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type List 01 — 1 = 1 20.03 Ext1 in1 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.04 Ext1 in2 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.05 Ext1 in3 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.06 Ext2 commands List 06, 1112, 14, 21…23 — 1 = 1 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type List 01 — 1 = 1 20.08 Ext2 in1 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.09 Ext2 in2 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.10 Ext2 in3 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.11 Run enable stop mode List 02 — 1 = 1 20.12 Run enable 1 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.19 Enable start signal Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.21 Direction List 02 — 1 = 1 20.22 Enable to rotate Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.25 Jog enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.26 Jog 1 start Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.27 Jog 2 start Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.30 Enable signal warning function PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 20.210 Fast stop input Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.211 Fast stop mode List 13 — 1 = 1 20.212 Power on acknowledge Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.213 Power on ackn reset delay Real 030000 ms 1 = 1 20.214 Joystick zero position Binary src — — 1 = 1 20.215 Joystick warning delay Real 030000 ms 1 = 1 20.216 Crane control word 1 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
21 Start/stop mode 21.01 Vector start mode List 02 — 1 = 1 21.02 Magnetization time Real 010000 ms 1 = 1 ms 21.03 Stop mode List 02 — 1 = 1 21.04 Emergency stop mode List 03 — 1 = 1 21.05 Emergency stop source Binary src — — 1 = 1 21.06 Zero speed limit Real 0.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 21.07 Zero speed delay Real 030000 ms 1 = 1 ms 21.08 DC current control PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 21.09 DC hold speed Real 0.001000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 21.10 DC current reference Real 0.0100.0 % 10 = 1% 21.11 Post magnetization time Real 03000 s 1 = 1 s 21.14 Pre-heating input source Binary src — — 1 = 1 21.15 Pre-heating time delay Real 10…3000 s 1 = 1 s 21.16 Pre-heating current Real 0.030.0 % 10 = 1% 21.18 Auto restart time Real 0.0, 0.1 10.0 s 10 = 1 s 21.19 Scalar start mode List 06 — 1 = 1 21.21 DC hold frequency Real 0.001000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 21.22 Start delay Real 0.0060.00 s 100 = 1 s
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 469
21.23 Smooth start Real 02 — 1 = 1 21.24 Smooth start current Real 10.0100.0 % 100 = 1% 21.25 Smooth start speed Real 2.0100.0 % 100 = 1% 21.26 Torque boost current Real 15.0300.0 % 100 = 1% 21.27 Torque boost time Real 0.0…60.0 % 100 = 1% 21.30 Speed compensated stop
mode Real 03 — 1 = 1
21.31 Speed compensated stop delay
Real 0.001000.00 s 100 = 1 s
21.32 Speed comp stop threshold Real 0100 % 1 = 1% 21.34 Force auto restart List 01 — 1 = 1
22 Speed reference selection 22.01 Speed ref unlimited Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Analog src — — 1 = 1 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2 Analog src — — 1 = 1 22.13 Ext1 speed function List 06 — 1 = 1 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Analog src — — 1 = 1 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Analog src — — 1 = 1 22.20 Ext2 speed function List 06 — 1 = 1 22.21 Constant speed function PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 22.22 Constant speed sel1 Binary src — — 1 = 1 22.23 Constant speed sel2 Binary src — — 1 = 1 22.24 Constant speed sel3 Binary src — — 1 = 1 22.26 Constant speed 1 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.27 Constant speed 2 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.28 Constant speed 3 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.29 Constant speed 4 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.30 Constant speed 5 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.31 Constant speed 6 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.32 Constant speed 7 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.41 Speed ref safe Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.42 Jogging 1 ref Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.43 Jogging 2 ref Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.51 Critical speed function PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 22.52 Critical speed 1 low Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.53 Critical speed 1 high Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.54 Critical speed 2 low Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.55 Critical speed 2 high Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.56 Critical speed 3 low Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.57 Critical speed 3 high Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.70 Motor potentiometer reference
enable Real 02 — 1 = 1
22.71 Motor potentiometer function List 04 — 1 = 1 22.72 Motor potentiometer initial
value Real -32768.0032767.00 — 100 = 1
22.73 Motor potentiometer up source Binary src — — 1 = 1 22.74 Motor potentiometer down
source Binary src — — 1 = 1
22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Real 0.03600.0 s 10 = 1 s
22.76 Motor potentiometer min value Real -32768.0032767.00 — 100 = 1 22.77 Motor potentiometer max
value Real -32768.0032767.00 — 100 = 1
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act Real -32768.0032767.00 — 100 = 1 22.86 Speed reference act 6 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.87 Speed reference act 7 Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.211 Speed reference shape List 02 — 1 = 1 22.220 Crane motpot enable List 0…7 — 1 = 1 22.223 Crane motpot accel sel List 0…7 — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
470 Additional parameter data
22.224 Crane motpot min speed Real 0…30000 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 22.225 Crane motpot sw PB 0000h…FFFFh — 100 = 1 22.226 Crane motpot min value Real -30000.00…30000.00 — 100 = 1 22.227 Crane motpot max value Real -30000.00…30000.00 — 100 = 1 22.230 Crane motpot ref act Real -30000.00…30000.00 — 100 = 1
23 Speed reference ramp 23.01 Speed ref ramp input Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 23.02 Speed ref ramp output Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 23.11 Ramp set selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 23.12 Acceleration time 1 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.13 Deceleration time 1 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.14 Acceleration time 2 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.20 Acc time jogging Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.21 Dec time jogging Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.23 Emergency stop time Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.28 Variable slope enable List 01 — 1 = 1 23.29 Variable slope rate Real 230000 ms 1 = 1 ms 23.32 Shape time 1 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.33 Shape time 2 Real 0.000 1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 23.206 Fast stop deceleration time Real 0.00 3000.000 s 1000 = 1 s
24 Speed reference conditioning 24.01 Used speed reference Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 24.02 Used speed feedback Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 24.03 Speed error filtered Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 24.04 Speed error inverted Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 24.11 Speed correction Real -10000.0010000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 24.12 Speed error filter time Real 010000 ms 1 = 1 ms
25 Speed control 25.01 Torque reference speed
control Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1%
25.02 Speed proportional gain Real 0.00250.00 — 100 = 1 25.03 Speed integration time Real 0.001000.00 s 100 = 1 s 25.04 Speed derivation time Real 0.00010.000 s 1000 = 1 s 25.05 Derivation filter time Real 010000 ms 1 = 1 ms 25.06 Acc comp derivation time Real 0.001000.00 s 100 = 1 s 25.07 Acc comp filter time Real 0.01000.0 ms 10 = 1 ms 25.15 Proportional gain em stop Real 1.00250.00 — 100 = 1 25.30 Flux adaptation enable Real 01 — 1 = 1 25.33 Speed controller auto tune Binary src — — 1 = 1 25.34 Autotune control preset List 0 2 — 1 = 1 25.37 Mechanical time constant Real 0.00 1000.00 s 100 = 1 s 25.38 Autotune torque step Real 0.00 20.00 % 100 = 1% 25.39 Autotune speed step Real 0.00 20.00 % 100 = 1% 25.40 Autotune repeat times Real 0 10 — 1 = 1 25.53 Torque prop reference Real -30000.030000.0 % 10 = 1% 25.54 Torque integral reference Real -30000.030000.0 % 10 = 1% 25.55 Torque deriv reference Real -30000.030000.0 % 10 = 1% 25.56 Torque acc compensation Real -30000.030000.0 % 10 = 1%
26 Torque reference chain 26.01 Torque reference to TC Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.02 Torque reference used Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.08 Minimum torque ref Real -1000.00.0 % 10 = 1% 26.09 Maximum torque ref Real 0.01000.0 % 10 = 1% 26.11 Torque ref1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 26.12 Torque ref2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 26.13 Torque ref1 function List 05 — 1 = 1 26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 471
26.17 Torque ref filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 26.18 Torque ramp up time Real 0.00060.000 s 1000 = 1 s 26.19 Torque ramp down time Real 0.00060.000 s 1000 = 1 s 26.20 Torque reversal List — — 1 = 1 26.70 Torque reference act 1 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.71 Torque reference act 2 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.72 Torque reference act 3 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.73 Torque reference act 4 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.74 Torque ref ramp out Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.75 Torque reference act 5 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.76 Torque reference act 6 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 26.81 Rush control gain Real 0.0 10000.0 — 10 = 1 26.82 Rush control integration time Real 0.0 10.0 s 10 = 1 s
28 Frequency reference chain 28.01 Frequency ref ramp input Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Analog src — — 1 = 1 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2 Analog src — — 1 = 1 28.13 Ext1 frequency function List 06 — 1 = 1 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 Analog src — — 1 = 1 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 Analog src — — 1 = 1 28.17 Ext2 frequency function List 06 — 1 = 1 28.21 Constant frequency function PB 0000h…FFFFh — 1 = 1 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Binary src — — 1 = 1 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Binary src — — 1 = 1 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Binary src — — 1 = 1 28.26 Constant frequency 1 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.27 Constant frequency 2 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.28 Constant frequency 3 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.29 Constant frequency 4 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.30 Constant frequency 5 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.31 Constant frequency 6 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.32 Constant frequency 7 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.41 Frequency ref safe Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.43 Jogging 2 frequency ref Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.51 Critical frequency function PB 00b11b — 1 = 1 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.53 Critical frequency 1 high Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.55 Critical frequency 2 high Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.57 Critical frequency 3 high Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.71 Freq ramp set selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Binary src — — 1 = 1 28.82 Shape time 1 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.83 Shape time 2 Real 0.0001800.000 s 1000 = 1 s 28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited Real -500.00 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 28.211 Frequency reference shape List 0…2 — 1 = 1
30 Limits 30.01 Limit word 1 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 30.02 Torque limit status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
472 Additional parameter data
30.11 Minimum speed Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 30.12 Maximum speed Real -30000.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 30.13 Minimum frequency Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 30.14 Maximum frequency Real -500.00500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 30.17 Maximum current Real 0.0030000.00 A 100 = 1 A 30.18 Torq lim sel Binary src — — 1 = 1 30.19 Minimum torque 1 Real -1600.00.0 % 10 = 1% 30.20 Maximum torque 1 Real 0.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 30.21 Min torque 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 30.22 Max torque 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 30.23 Minimum torque 2 Real -1600.00.0 % 10 = 1% 30.24 Maximum torque 2 Real 0.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 30.26 Power motoring limit Real 0.00600.00 % 100 = 1% 30.27 Power generating limit Real -600.000.00 % 100 = 1% 30.30 Overvoltage control List 01 — 1 = 1 30.31 Undervoltage control List 01 — 1 = 1 30.35 Thermal current limitation List 0…1 — 1 = 1 30.36 Speed limit selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 30.37 Min speed source Analog src — — 1 = 1 30.38 Max speed source Analog src — — 1 = 1 30.203 Deadband forward Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1% 30.204 Deadband reverse Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
31 Fault functions 31.01 External event 1 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.02 External event 1 type List 01 — 1 = 1 31.03 External event 2 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.04 External event 2 type List 01 — 1 = 1 31.05 External event 3 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.06 External event 3 type List 01 — 1 = 1 31.07 External event 4 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.08 External event 4 type List 01 — 1 = 1 31.09 External event 5 source Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.10 External event 5 type List 01 — 1 = 1 31.11 Fault reset selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 31.12 Autoreset selection PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 31.13 Selectable fault Real 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 31.14 Number of trials Real 05 — 1 = 1 31.15 Total trials time Real 1.0600.0 s 10 = 1 s 31.16 Delay time Real 0.0120.0 s 10 = 1 s 31.19 Motor phase loss List 01 — 1 = 1 31.21 Supply phase loss List 01 — 1 = 1 31.22 STO indication run/stop List 05 — 1 = 1 31.23 Wiring or earth fault List 01 — 1 = 1 31.24 Stall function List 02 — 1 = 1 31.25 Stall current limit Real 0.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 31.26 Stall speed limit Real 0.0010000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 31.27 Stall frequency limit Real 0.001000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 31.28 Stall time Real 03600 s 1 = 1 s 31.30 Overspeed trip margin Real 0.0010000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 31.31 Frequency trip margin Real 0.0010000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision Real 0300 % 1 = 1% 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision
delay Real 0100 s 1 = 1 s
31.40 Disable warning messages PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 31.54 Fault action Uint16 01 — 1 = 1 31.205 Crane warning masking Analog src 0, 1, 4, 6…10, 11…15 — 1 = 1
32 Supervision 32.01 Supervision status PB 0000h…FFFFh — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 473
32.05 Supervision 1 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.06 Supervision 1 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.07 Supervision 1 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.08 Supervision 1 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.09 Supervision 1 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.10 Supervision 1 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.11 Supervision 1 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 32.15 Supervision 2 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.16 Supervision 2 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.17 Supervision 2 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.18 Supervision 2 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.19 Supervision 2 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.20 Supervision 2 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.21 Supervision 2 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 32.25 Supervision 3 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.26 Supervision 3 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.27 Supervision 3 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.28 Supervision 3 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.29 Supervision 3 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.30 Supervision 3 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.31 Supervision 3 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 32.35 Supervision 4 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.36 Supervision 4 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.37 Supervision 4 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.38 Supervision 4 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.39 Supervision 4 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.40 Supervision 4 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.41 Supervision 4 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 32.45 Supervision 5 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.46 Supervision 5 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.47 Supervision 5 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.48 Supervision 5 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.49 Supervision 5 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.50 Supervision 5 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.51 Supervision 5 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 32.55 Supervision 6 function List 07 — 1 = 1 32.56 Supervision 6 action List 02 — 1 = 1 32.57 Supervision 6 signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 32.58 Supervision 6 filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 32.59 Supervision 6 low Real -21474830.00
21474830.00 — 100 = 1
32.60 Supervision 6 high Real -21474830.00 21474830.00
— 100 = 1
32.61 Supervision 6 hysteresis Real 0.00100000.00 — 100 = 1 33 Generic timer & counter
33.02 HS counter actual value Real 04294967295 — 1 = 1 33.04 HS counter status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 33.71 HS counter source selection Binary src — — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
474 Additional parameter data
33.72 HS counter limit mode selection
List 01 — 1 = 1
33.73 HS counter direction selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 33.74 HS counter lower limit Real 04294967295 — 1 = 1 33.75 HS counter upper limit Real 04294967295 — 1 = 1 33.76 HS counter preset selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 33.77 HS counter preset value Real 04294967295 — 1 = 1 33.79 HS counter divider Real 14294967295 — 1 = 1 33.80 HS counter enable Binary src — — 1 = 1
34 Timed functions 34.01 Timed functions status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.02 Timer status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.04 Season/exception day status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.10 Timed functions enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 34.11 Timer 1 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.12 Timer 1 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.13 Timer 1 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.14 Timer 2 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.15 Timer 2 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.16 Timer 2 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.17 Timer 3 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.18 Timer 3 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.19 Timer 3 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.20 Timer 4 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.21 Timer 4 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.22 Timer 4 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.23 Timer 5 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.24 Timer 5 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.25 Timer 5 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.26 Timer 6 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.27 Timer 6 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.28 Timer 6 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.29 Timer 7 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.30 Timer 7 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.31 Timer 7 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.32 Timer 8 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.33 Timer 8 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.34 Timer 8 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.35 Timer 9 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.36 Timer 9 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.37 Timer 9 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.38 Timer 10 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.39 Timer 10 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.40 Timer 10 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.41 Timer 11 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.42 Timer 11 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.43 Timer 11 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.44 Timer 12 configuration PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 34.45 Timer 12 start time Time 00:00:0023:59:59 s 1 = 1 s 34.46 Timer 12 duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min 34.60 Season 1 start date Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.61 Season 2 start date Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.62 Season 3 start date Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.63 Season 4 start date Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.70 Number of active exceptions Real 016 — 1 = 1 34.71 Exception types PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 34.72 Exception 1 start Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.73 Exception 1 length Real 060 d 1 = 1 d
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 475
34.74 Exception 2 start Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.75 Exception 2 length Real 060 d 1 = 1 d 34.76 Exception 3 start Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.77 Exception 3 length Real 060 d 1 = 1 d 34.78 Exception day 4 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.79 Exception day 5 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.80 Exception day 6 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.81 Exception day 7 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.82 Exception day 8 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.83 Exception day 9 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.84 Exception day 10 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.85 Exception day 11 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.86 Exception day 12 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.87 Exception day 13 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.88 Exception day 14 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.89 Exception day 15 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.90 Exception day 16 Date 01.0131.12 d 1 = 1 d 34.100 Timed function 1 PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 34.101 Timed function 2 PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 34.102 Timed function 3 PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 34.110 Boost time function PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 34.111 Boost time activation source Binary src — — 1 = 1 34.112 Boost time duration Duration 00 00:0007 00:00 min 1 = 1 min
35 Motor thermal protection 35.01 Motor estimated temperature Real -601000 C C or F 1 = 1 35.02 Measured temperature 1 Real -605000 C C, F or
ohm 1 = 1 unit
35.03 Measured temperature 2 Real -605000 C C, F or ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.05 Motor overload level Real 0.0…300.0% % 10 = 1% 35.11 Temperature 1 source List 0…2, 57, 11…16 — 1 = 1 35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit Real -60 5000 C C, F or
ohm 1 = 1 unit
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit Real -60 5000 C C, F or ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source Analog src — — 1 = 1 35.21 Temperature 2 source List 0, 1, 11 — 1 = 1 35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit Real -60 5000 C C, F or
ohm 1 = 1 unit
35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit Real -60 5000 C C, F or ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.24 Temperature 2 AI source Analog src — — 1 = 1 35.50 Motor ambient temperature Real -60100 C or
-75 212 F C or F 1 = 1
35.51 Motor load curve Real 50150 % 1 = 1% 35.52 Zero speed load Real 25150 % 1 = 1% 35.53 Break point Real 1.00 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 35.54 Motor nominal temperature
rise Real 0300 C C or F 1 = 1
35.55 Motor thermal time constant Real 10010000 s 1 = 1 s 35.56 Motor overload action List — — 10 = 1 35.57 Motor overload class List — — 10 = 1
36 Load analyzer 36.01 PVL signal source Analog src — — 1 = 1 36.02 PVL filter time Real 0.00120.00 s 100 = 1 s 36.06 AL2 signal source Analog src — — 1 = 1 36.07 AL2 signal scaling Real 0.0032767.00 — 100 = 1 36.09 Reset loggers List 03 — 1 = 1 36.10 PVL peak value Real -32768.0032767.00 — 100 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
476 Additional parameter data
36.11 PVL peak date Data 1/1/1980…6/5/2159 — 1 = 1 36.12 PVL peak time Data — — 1 = 1 36.13 PVL current at peak Real -32768.0032767.00 A 100 = 1 A 36.14 PVL DC voltage at peak Real 0.002000.00 V 100 = 1 V 36.15 PVL speed at peak Real -30000 30000 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 36.16 PVL reset date Data 1/1/1980…6/5/2159 — 1 = 1 36.17 PVL reset time Data — — 1 = 1 36.20 AL1 0 to 10% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.24 AL1 40 to 50% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.25 AL1 50 to 60% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.29 AL1 over 90% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.40 AL2 0 to 10% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.49 AL2 over 90% Real 0.00100.00 % 100 = 1% 36.50 AL2 reset date Data 1/1/1980…6/5/2159 — 1 = 1 36.51 AL2 reset time Data — — 1 = 1
37 User load curve 37.01 ULC output status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 37.02 ULC supervision signal Analog src — — 1 = 1 37.03 ULC overload actions List 03 — 1 = 1 37.04 ULC underload actions List 03 — 1 = 1 37.11 ULC speed table point 1 Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm 37.12 ULC speed table point 2 Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm 37.13 ULC speed table point 3 Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm 37.14 ULC speed table point 4 Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 Real -30000.030000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1 Real -500.0500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 37.17 ULC frequency table point 2 Real -500.0500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 Real -500.0500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 37.19 ULC frequency table point 4 Real -500.0500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 37.20 ULC frequency table point 5 Real -500.0500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 37.21 ULC underload point 1 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.22 ULC underload point 2 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.23 ULC underload point 3 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.24 ULC underload point 4 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.25 ULC underload point 5 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.31 ULC overload point 1 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.32 ULC overload point 2 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.33 ULC overload point 3 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.34 ULC overload point 4 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.35 ULC overload point 5 Real -1600.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 37.41 ULC overload timer Real 0.010000.0 s 10 = 1 s 37.42 ULC underload timer Real 0.010000.0 s 10 = 1 s
40 Process PID set 1 40.01 Process PID output actual Real -200000.00200000.00 % 100 = 1%
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 477
40.02 Process PID feedback actual Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.04 Process PID deviation actual Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.05 Process PID trim output act Real -32768…32767 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.06 Process PID status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 40.07 Process PID operation mode List 02 — 1 = 1 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.10 Set 1 feedback function List 011 — 1 = 1 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.15 Set 1 output scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function List 011 — 1 = 1 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID
customer units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time Real 0.01800.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time Real 0.01800.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.32 Set 1 gain Real 0.10100.00 — 100 = 1 40.33 Set 1 integration time Real 0.09999.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.34 Set 1 derivation time Real 0.00010.000 s 1000 = 1 s 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time Real 0.010.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.36 Set 1 output min Real -200000.00200000.00 — 10 = 1 40.37 Set 1 output max Real -200000.00200000.00 — 10 = 1 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.39 Set 1 deadband range Real 0.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Real 0.0 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.43 Set 1 sleep level Real 0200000.0 — 10 = 1 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Real 0.03600.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Real 0.03600.0 s 10 = 1 s 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Real -0.00200000.00 PID
customer units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
478 Additional parameter data
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Real 0.0060.00 s 100 = 1 s 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.51 Set 1 trim mode List 0…3 — 1 = 1 40.52 Set 1 trim selection List 1…3 — 1 = 1 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.54 Set 1 trim mix Real 0.000…1.000 — 1 = 1 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Real -100.000…100.000 — 1 = 1 40.56 Set 1 trim source List 1…2 — 1 = 1 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source Binary src — — 1 = 1 40.61 Setpoint scaling actual Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual Real -200000.00200000.00 PID
customer units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
40.65 Trim auto connection List 40.79 Set 1 units List — — 1 = 1 40.80 Set 1 PID output min source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.81 Set 1 PID output max source Analog src — — 1 = 1 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier Real —200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 40.91 Feedback data storage Real -327.68 327.67 — 100 = 1 40.92 Setpoint data storage Real -327.68 327.67 — 100 = 1 40.96 Process PID output % Real -100.00100.00 % 100 = 1 40.97 Process PID feedback % Real -100.00100.00 % 100 = 1 40.98 Process PID setpoint % Real -100.00100.00 % 100 = 1 40.99 Process PID deviation % Real -100.00100.00 % 100 = 1
41 Process PID set 2 41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.10 Set 2 feedback function List 011 — 1 = 1 41.11 Set 2 feedback filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.15 Set 2 output scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.18 Set 2 setpoint function List 011 — 1 = 1 41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint sel1 Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint sel2 Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID
customer units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0 Real -200000.00200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.27 Set 2 setpoint max Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase time Real 0.01800.0 s 10 = 1 s
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 479
41.29 Set 2 setpoint decrease time Real 0.01800.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.31 Set 2 deviation inversion Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.32 Set 2 gain Real 0.01100.00 — 100 = 1 41.33 Set 2 integration time Real 0.09999.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.34 Set 2 derivation time Real 0.00010.000 s 1000 = 1 s 41.35 Set 2 derivation filter time Real 0.010.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.36 Set 2 output min Real -200000.00 200000.00 — 10 = 1 41.37 Set 2 output max Real -200000.00 200000.00 — 10 = 1 41.38 Set 2 output freeze enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.39 Set 2 deadband range Real 0.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.40 Set 2 deadband delay Real 0.0 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.43 Set 2 sleep level Real 0.020000.00 — 10 = 1 41.44 Set 2 sleep delay Real 0.03600.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.45 Set 2 sleep boost time Real 0.03600.0 s 10 = 1 s 41.46 Set 2 sleep boost step Real 0.0020000.000 PID
customer units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation Real -200000.00 200000.00 PID customer
units
100 = 1 PID customer unit
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay Real 0.0060.00 s 100 = 1 s 41.49 Set 2 tracking mode Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.51 Set 2 trim mode List 0…3 — 1 = 1 41.52 Set 2 trim selection List 1…3 — 1 = 1 41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref pointer Analog src — — 1 = 1 41.54 Set 2 trim mix Real 0.000…1.000 — 1 = 1 41.55 Set 2 trim adjust Real -100.000…100.000 — 1 = 1 41.56 Set 2 trim source List 1…2 — 1 = 1 41.58 Set 2 increase prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 41.59 Set 2 decrease prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 41.60 Set 2 PID activation source Binary src — — 1 = 1 41.79 Set 2 units List — 1 = 1 41.80 Set 2 PID output min source List 01 — 1 = 1 41.81 Set 2 PID output max source List 01 — 1 = 1 41.89 Set 2 setpoint multiplier Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 41.90 Set 2 feedback multiplier Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1
43 Brake chopper 43.01 Braking resistor temperature Real 0.0120.0 % 10 = 1% 43.06 Brake chopper enable List 02 — 1 = 1 43.07 Brake chopper runtime enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 43.08 Brake resistor thermal tc Real 010000 s 1 = 1 s 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont Real 0.0010000.00 kW 100 = 1 kW 43.10 Brake resistance Real 0.01000.0 ohm 10 = 1 ohm 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit Real 0150 % 1 = 1% 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit Real 0150 % 1 = 1%
44 Mechanical brake control 44.01 Brake control status PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 44.02 Brake torque memory Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1% 44.03 Brake open torque reference Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1% 44.06 Brake control enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.08 Brake open delay Real 0.005.00 s 100 = 1 s 44.09 Brake open torque source Analog src — — 1 = 1 44.10 Brake open torque Real -1000…1000 % 10 = 1% 44.11 Keep brake closed Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.12 Brake close request Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.13 Brake close delay Real 0.0060.00 s 100 = 1 s
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
480 Additional parameter data
44.14 Brake close level Real 0.01000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 44.15 Brake close level delay Real 0.00…10.00 s 100 = 1 s 44.16 Brake reopen delay Real 0.00…10.00 s 100 = 1 s 44.17 Brake fault function List 0…2 — 1 = 1 44.18 Brake fault delay Real 0.00…60.00 s 100 = 1 s 44.202 Torque proving Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.203 Torque proving reference Real 0.0…300.0 % 10 = 1.0% 44.204 Brake system check time Real 0.1030 ms 10 = 1 s 44.205 Brake slip speed limit Real 0.0 30000.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 44.206 Brake slip fault delay Real 030000 ms 1 = 1 ms 44.207 Safety close select Binary src — — 1 = 1 44.208 Safety close speed Real 0.00 30000.00 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 44.209 Safety close delay Real 030000 ms 1 = 1 ms 44.211 Extended runtime Real 0.03600.0 s 1000 = 1 s 44.212 Extended runtime sw Binary src 0000h…FFFFh — —
45 Energy efficiency 45.01 Saved GW hours Real 065535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh 45.02 Saved MW hours Real 0999 MWh 1 = 1 MWh 45.03 Saved kW hours Real 0.0999.0 kWh 10 = 1 kWh 45.04 Saved energy Real 0.0214748364.7 kWh 10 = 1 kWh 45.05 Saved money x1000 Real 04294967295 thousands (selecta-
ble) 1 = 1 unit
45.06 Saved money Real 0.00999.99 (selecta- ble)
100 = 1 unit
45.07 Saved amount Real 0.0021474836.47 (selecta- ble)
100 = 1 unit
45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons Real 065535 metric kiloton
1 = 1 metric kiloton
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Real 0.0999.9 metric ton 10 = 1 metric ton
45.10 Total saved CO2 Real 0.0214748365.7 metric ton 10 = 1 metric ton
45.11 Energy optimizer List 01 — 1 = 1 45.12 Energy tariff 1 Real 0.0004294967.295 (selecta-
ble) 1000 = 1 unit
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Real 0.0004294967.295 (selecta- ble)
1000 = 1 unit
45.14 Tariff selection Binary src — — 1 = 1 45.18 CO2 conversion factor Real 0.00065.535 metric
ton/ MWh 1000 = 1 metric
ton/MWh 45.19 Comparison power Real 0.00100000.00 kW 10 = 1 kW 45.21 Energy calculations reset List 01 — 1 = 1 45.24 Hourly peak power value Real -3000.00 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW 45.25 Hourly peak power time Real N/A 45.26 Hourly total energy
(resettable) Real -3000.00 3000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
45.27 Daily peak power value (resettable)
Real -3000.00 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
45.28 Daily peak power time Real N/A 45.29 Daily total energy (resettable) Real -30000.00 30000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 45.30 Last day total energy Real -30000.00 30000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 45.31 Monthly peak power value
(resettable) Real -3000.00 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
45.32 Monthly peak power date Real 1/1/1980…6/5/2159 N/A 45.33 Monthly peak power time Real N/A 45.34 Monthly total energy
(resettable) Real -1000000.00 1000000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
45.35 Last month total energy Real -1000000.00 1000000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 45.36 Lifetime peak power value Real -3000.00 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 481
45.37 Lifetime peak power date Real N/A 45.38 Lifetime peak power time Real N/A
46 Monitoring/scaling settings 46.01 Speed scaling Real 0.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 46.02 Frequency scaling Real 0.101000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 46.03 Torque scaling Real 0.11000.0 % 10 = 1% 46.04 Power scaling Real 0.1030000.00 — 10 = 1 unit 46.05 Current scaling Real 030000 A 1 = 1 A 46.06 Speed ref zero scaling Real 0.00 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 46.07 Frequency ref zero scaling Real 0.00 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 46.11 Filter time motor speed Real 220000 ms 1 = 1 ms 46.12 Filter time output frequency Real 220000 ms 1 = 1 ms 46.13 Filter time motor torque Real 220000 ms 1 = 1 ms 46.14 Filter time power Real 220000 ms 1 = 1 ms 46.21 At speed hysteresis Real 0.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 46.22 At frequency hysteresis Real 0.001000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 46.23 At torque hysteresis Real 0.00300.00 % 1 = 1% 46.31 Above speed limit Real 0.0030000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 46.32 Above frequency limit Real 0.001000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 46.33 Above torque limit Real 0.01600.0 % 10 = 1% 46.41 kWh pulse scaling Real 0.0011000.000 kWh 1000 = 1 kWh 46.43 Power decimals List 0…3 — 1 = 1 46.44 Current decimals List 0…3 — 1 = 1
47 Data storage 47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Real -2147483.008
2147483.008 — 1000 = 1
47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Real -2147483.008 2147483.008
— 1000 = 1
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Real -2147483.008 2147483.008
— 1000 = 1
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Real -2147483.008 2147483.008
— 1000 = 1
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Real -3276832767 — 1 = 1 47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Real -3276832767 — 1 = 1 47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Real -3276832767 — 1 = 1 47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Real -3276832767 — 1 = 1
49 Panel port communication 49.01 Node ID number Real 132 — 1 = 1 49.03 Baud rate List 15 — 1 = 1 49.04 Communication loss time Real 0.33000.0 s 10 = 1 s 49.05 Communication loss action List 03 — 1 = 1 49.06 Refresh settings List 01 — 1 = 1 49.19 Basic panel home view 1 — — 49.20 Basic panel home view 2 — — 49.21 Basic panel home view 3 — — 49.30 Basic panel menu hiding 0000hFFFFh — 49.219 Basic panel home view 4 — — 49.220 Basic panel home view 5 — — 49.221 Basic panel home view 6 — —
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) 50.01 FBA A enable List 01 — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
482 Additional parameter data
50.02 FBA A comm loss func List 03 — 1 = 1 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out Real 0.36553.5 s 10 = 1 s 50.04 FBA A ref1 type List 05 — 1 = 1 50.05 FBA A ref2 type List 05 — 1 = 1 50.06 FBA A SW sel List 01 — 1 = 1 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type List 05 — 1 = 1 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type List 05 — 1 = 1 50.09 FBA A SW transparent source Analog src — — 1 = 1 50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source Analog src — — 1 = 1 50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source Analog src — — 1 = 1 50.12 FBA A debug mode List 02 — 1 = 1 50.13 FBA A control word Data 00000000hFFFFFFFFh — 1 = 1 50.14 FBA A reference 1 Real -2147483648
2147483647 — 1 = 1
50.15 FBA A reference 2 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
50.16 FBA A status word Data 00000000hFFFFFFFFh — 1 = 1 50.17 FBA A actual value 1 Real -2147483648
2147483647 — 1 = 1
50.18 FBA A actual value 2 Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
51 FBA A settings 51.01 FBA A type List — — 1 = 1 51.02 FBA A Par2 Real 065535 — 1 = 1
51.26 FBA A Par26 Real 065535 — 1 = 1 51.27 FBA A par refresh List 01 — 1 = 1 51.28 FBA A par table ver Data — — 1 = 1 51.29 FBA A drive type code Real 065535 — 1 = 1 51.30 FBA A mapping file ver Real 065535 — 1 = 1 51.31 D2FBA A comm status List 06 — 1 = 1 51.32 FBA A comm SW ver Data — — 1 = 1 51.33 FBA A appl SW ver Data — — 1 = 1
52 FBA A data in 52.01 FBA A data in1 List — — 1 = 1
52.12 FBA A data in12 List — — 1 = 1
53 FBA A data out 53.01 FBA A data out1 List — — 1 = 1
53.12 FBA A data out12 List — — 1 = 1
58 Embedded fieldbus 58.01 Protocol enable List 0, 1, 3 — 1 = 1
71 External PID1 71.01 External PID act value Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or
Hz 100 = 1 unit
71.02 Feedback act value Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or Hz
100 = 1 unit
71.03 Setpoint act value Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or Hz
100 = 1 unit
71.04 Deviation act value Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or Hz
100 = 1 unit
71.06 PID status word PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 71.07 PID operation mode List 02 — 1 = 1 71.08 Feedback 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 71.11 Feedback filter time Real 0.00030.000 s 1000 = 1 s 71.14 Setpoint scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 71.15 Output scaling Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 483
71.16 Setpoint 1 source Analog src — — 1 = 1 71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 Binary src — — 1 = 1 71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 Binary src — — 1 = 1 71.21 Internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or
Hz 100 = 1 unit
71.22 Internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or Hz
100 = 1 unit
71.23 Internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm, % or Hz
100 = 1 unit
71.26 Setpoint min Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 71.27 Setpoint max Real -200000.00200000.00 — 100 = 1 71.31 Deviation inversion Binary src — — 1 = 1 71.32 Gain Real 0.10100.00 — 100 = 1 71.33 Integration time Real 0.09999.0 s 10 = 1 s 71.34 Derivation time Real 0.00010.000 s 1000 = 1 s 71.35 Derivation filter time Real 0.010.0 s 10 = 1 s 71.36 Output min Real -200000.00200000.00 — 10 = 1 71.37 Output max Real -200000.00200000.00 — 10 = 1 71.38 Output freeze enable Binary src — — 1 = 1 71.39 Deadband range Real 0.0200000.0 — 10 = 1 71.40 Deadband delay Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s 71.58 Increase prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 71.59 Decrease prevention List 03 — 1 = 1 71.62 Internal setpoint actual Real -200000.00200000.00 rpm,% or
Hz 100 = 1 unit
71.79 External PID units List — 1 = 1 76 Application features
76.01 Limit to limit control status List 0…9 — 1 = 1 76.02 Enable limit to limit control Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.03 Limit to limit trigger type List 0…3 — 1 = 1 76.04 Forward stop limit Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.05 Forward slow down limit Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.06 Reverse stop limit Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.07 Reverse slow down limit Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.08 Slow down speed Real 0.0030000.00 rpm 1 = 1 76.09 Slow down frequency Real 0.00500.00 Hz 1 = 1 76.11 Limit stop mode List 0…1 — 1 = 1 76.12 Limit stop ramp time Real 0.000…3000.000 s S 1000 = 1 76.21 Conical motor control Binary src — 1 = 1 % 76.22 Start flux level Real 0…150 % 1 = 1 % 76.23 Start stop level Real 0…100 % 1 = 1 % 76.24 Start flux hold time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms 76.25 Flux ramp up time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms 76.26 Flux ramp down time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms 76.27 Flux reference Real 0…200 % 1 = 1 % 76.31 Motor speed match Binary src — — 1 = 1 76.32 Motor speed steady deviation
level Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 1 = 1
76.33 Motor speed ramp deviation level
Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 1 = 1
76.34 Speed match fault delay Real 0…30000 ms 1 = 1 90 Feedback selection
90.01 Motor speed for control Real -32768.00 32767.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 90.02 Motor position Real 0.00000000 1.00000000 rev 100000000 =
1 rev 90.10 Encoder 1 speed Real -32768.00 32767.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm 90.11 Encoder 1 position Real 0.00000000 1.00000000 rev 100000000 =
1 rev
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
484 Additional parameter data
90.13 Encoder 1 revolution extension
Real -2147483648 2147483647
— 1 = 1
90.41 Motor feedback selection List 02 — 1 = 1 90.42 Motor speed filter time Real 010000 ms 1 = 1 ms 90.45 Motor feedback fault List 01 — 1 = 1 90.46 Force open loop List 01 — 1 = 1 90.47 Enable motor encoder drift
detection List 01 — 1 = 1
91 Encoder module settings 91.10 Encoder parameter refresh List 01 — 1 = 1
92 Encoder 1 configuration 92.10 Pulses/revolution Real 065535 — 1 = 1
95 HW configuration 95.01 Supply voltage List 05 — 1 = 1 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits List 01 — 1 = 1 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage Real 065535 — 1 = 1 V 95.04 Control board supply List 01 — 1 = 1 95.15 Special HW settings List 01 . 1 = 1 95.20 HW options word 1 PB 0000hFFFFh — 1 = 1 95.26 Motor disconnect detection List 0…1 — 1 = 1 95.200 Cooling fan mode List 01 — 1 = 1
96 System 96.01 Language List — — 1 = 1 96.02 Pass code Data 099999999 — 1 = 1 96.03 Access levels status PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 96.04 Macro select List 0, 1, 5, 8, 9, 12…14 — 1 = 1 96.05 Macro active List 0, 1, 5, 8, 9, 12…14 — 1 = 1 96.06 Parameter restore List 0, 8, 62 — 1 = 1 96.07 Parameter save manually List 01 — 1 = 1 96.08 Control board boot Real 01 — 1 = 1 96.10 User set status List 07, 2023 — — 96.11 User set save/load List 05, 1821 — — 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 Binary src — — — 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 Binary src — — — 96.16 Unit selection PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 96.20 Time sync primary source List 0, 2, 6, 8, 9 — 1 = 1 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980 Real 159999 d 1 = 1 d 96.25 Time in minutes within 24h Real 11439 min 1 = 1 min 96.26 Time in ms within one minute Real 059999 ms 1 = 1 ms 96.51 Clear fault and event logger Real 0…1 — 1 = 1 96.54 Checksum action List 0…4 — 1 = 1 96.55 Checksum control word PB 0b0000…0b1111 — 1 = 1 96.68 Actual checksum A Real 0x0000…0xffff — 1 = 1 96.69 Actual checksum B Real 0x0000…0xffff — 1 = 1 96.70 Disable adaptive program Real 0…1 — 1 = 1 96.71 Approved checksum A Real 0x0000…0xffff — 1 = 1 96.72 Approved checksum B Real 0x0000…0xffff — 1 = 1 96.78 550 compatibility mode List 02 — 1 = 1
(Parameters 96.10096.102 only visible when enabled by parameter 96.02) 97 Motor control
97.01 Switching frequency reference List 412 kHz 1 = 1 97.02 Minimum switching frequency List 112 kHz 1 = 1 97.03 Slip gain Real 0200 % 1 = 1% 97.04 Voltage reserve Real -450 % 1 = 1% 97.05 Flux braking List 02 — 1 = 1 97.06 Flux reference select Binary src — — 1 = 1 97.07 User flux reference Real 0.0…200.0 % 100 = 1% 97.08 Optimizer minimum torque Real 0.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
Additional parameter data 485
97.11 TR tuning Real 25400 % 1 = 1% 97.13 IR compensation Real 0.0050.00 % 100 = 1% 97.15 Motor model temperature
adaptation List 01 — 1 = 1
97.16 Stator temperature factor Real 0200 % 1=1% 97.17 Rotor temperature factor Real 0200 % 1=1% 97.20 U/F ratio List List — 1 = 1 97.33 Speed estimate filter time Real 0.00100.00 ms 0 97.48 UDC stabilizer List 0, 50, 100, 300, 500, 800 — 1 = 1 97.49 Slip gain for scalar Real 0…200 % 1 = 1% 97.94 IR comp max frequency Real 1.0…200.0 % 10 = 1% 97.135 UDC ripple Real 0.0200.0 V 10 = 1V
98 User motor parameters 98.01 User motor model mode List 01 — 1 = 1 98.02 Rs user Real 0.00000.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.03 Rr user Real 0.00000.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.04 Lm user Real 0.0000010.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.05 SigmaL user Real 0.000001.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.06 Ld user Real 0.0000010.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.07 Lq user Real 0.0000010.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.08 PM flux user Real 0.000002.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.09 Rs user SI Real 0.00000100.00000 ohm 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.10 Rr user SI Real 0.00000100.00000 ohm 100000 = 1
p.u. 98.11 Lm user SI Real 0.00100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH 98.12 SigmaL user SI Real 0.00100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH 98.13 Ld user SI Real 0.00100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH 98.14 Lq user SI Real 0.00100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH 98.15 Position offset user Real 0.0…360 deg 1 = 1
99 Motor data 99.03 Motor type List 01 — 1 = 1 99.04 Motor control mode List 01 — 1 = 1 99.06 Motor nominal current Real 0.06400.0 A See P46.44. 99.07 Motor nominal voltage Real 0.0800.0 V See P46.43. 99.08 Motor nominal frequency Real 0.00 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 99.09 Motor nominal speed Real 0 30000 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 99.10 Motor nominal power Real -10000.0010000.00 kW
or -13405.83 13405.83 hp
kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
99.11 Motor nominal cos Real 0.00 1.00 — 100 = 1 99.12 Motor nominal torque Real 0.000 Nm or
lbft 1000 = 1 unit
99.13 ID run requested List 04, 6 — 1 = 1 99.14 Last ID run performed List 04, 6 — 1 = 1 99.15 Motor polepairs calculated Real 01000 — 1 = 1 99.16 Motor phase order List 01 — 1 = 1
No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
486 Additional parameter data
8 Fault tracing
Contents Safety Indications Warning/fault history QR Code generation for mobile service application Warning messages Fault messages
If the warnings and faults cannot be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter, contact an ABB service representative. If you use the Drive Composer PC tool, send the Support package created by the Drive Composer to the ABB service representative.
Warnings and faults are listed in separate tables. Each table is sorted by a warning/fault code.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive. Read the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the hardware
manual of the drive before working on the drive.
Indications
Warnings and faults Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of active warnings and faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as in the Drive Composer PC tool. Only the codes of warnings and faults are available over fieldbus.
Warnings do not need to be reset; they stop showing when the cause of the warning ceases. Warnings do not latch and the drive will continue to operate the motor.
Faults latch inside the drive and cause the drive to trip, and the motor stops. After the cause of a fault has been removed, the fault can be reset from the control panel, the Drive Composer PC tool, the fieldbus, or from some other source (like the digital inputs selected with parameter 31.11). Reseting the fault creates an event 64FF Fault reset. After the reset, the drive can be restarted.
Note that some faults require a reboot of the control unit either by switching the power off and on, or using parameter 96.08 Control board boot this is mentioned in the fault listing wherever appropriate.
Pure events In addition to warnings and faults, there are pure events that are only recorded in the event log of the drive. The codes of these events are included in the Warning messages table on page 490.
Warning/fault history
Event log All indications are stored in the event log. The event log stores information on the last 8 fault recordings, that is, faults that tripped the drive or fault resets the last 10 warnings or pure events that occurred.
See section Viewing warning/fault information on page 488.
Auxiliary codes
Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the problem. On the control panel, the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details of the event; in the Drive Composer PC tool, the auxiliary code is shown in the event listing.
Viewing warning/fault information The drive is able to store a list of the active faults actually causing the drive to trip at the present time. The drive also stores a list of faults and warnings that have previously occurred.
For each stored fault, the panel shows the fault code, time and values of nine parameters (actual signals and status words) stored at the time of the fault. The values of the parameters for the latest fault are in parameters 05.8005.88.
For active faults and warnings, see Main menu — Diagnostics — Active faults Main menu — Diagnostics — Active warnings Options menu — Active faults Options menu — Active warnings parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 133).
For previously occurred faults and warnings, see Main menu — Diagnostics — Fault & event log
Note: Active faults are also stored in the fault and event log. parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 133).
The event log can also be accessed (and reset) using the Drive Composer PC tool. See Drive Composer PC tool users manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]).
QR Code generation for mobile service application A QR Code (or a series of QR Codes) can be generated by the drive for display on the assistant control panel. The QR Code contains drive identification data, information on the latest events, and values of status and counter parameters. The code can be read with a mobile device containing the ABB service application, which then sends the data to ABB for analysis. For more information on the application, contact your local ABB service representative.
Warning messages Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
64FF Fault reset A fault has been reset from the panel, Drive Composer PC tool, fieldbus or I/O.
Event. Informative only.
A2B1 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded internal fault limit. In addition to an actual overcurrent situation, this warning may also be caused by an earth fault or supply phase loss.
Check motor load. Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed control), 26 Torque reference chain (torque control) or 28 Frequency reference chain (frequency control). Also check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling, 46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03 Torque scaling. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the hardware manual of the drive. Check there are no contactors opening and closing in motor cable. Check that the start-up data in parameter group 99 Motor data corresponds to the motor rating plate. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
A2B3 Earth leakage Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the hardware manual of the drive. If an earth fault is found, fix or change the motor cable and/or motor. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
A2B4 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor.
Check motor and motor cable for cabling errors. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the hardware manual of the drive. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
A2BA IGBT overload Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This warning protects the IGBT(s) and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable.
Check motor cable. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A3A1 DC link overvoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage too high (when the drive is stopped).
Check the supply voltage setting (parameter 95.01 Supply voltage). Note that the wrong setting of the parameter may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably, or may overload the brake chopper or resistor. Check the supply voltage. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative.
A3A2 DC link undervoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage too low (when the drive is stopped).
A3AA DC not charged The voltage of the intermediate DC circuit has not yet risen to operating level.
A490 Incorrect temperature sensor setup
Sensor type mismatch. Check the settings of temperature source parameters 35.11 and 35.21.
A491 External temperature 1 (Editable message text)
Measured temperature 1 has exceeded warning limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.02 Measured temperature 1. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of 35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit.
A492 External temperature 2 (Editable message text)
Measured temperature 2 has exceeded warning limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.03 Measured temperature 2. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of 35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit.
A4A1 IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A4A9 Cooling Drive module temperature is excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 50 C /122 F, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See chapter Technical data, section Derating in the hardware manual of the drive. Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.
A4B0 Excess temperature Power unit module temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
A4B1 Excess temperature difference
High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases.
Check the motor cabling. Check cooling of drive module(s).
A4F6 IGBT temperature Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
A580 PU communication Communication errors detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
Check the connections between the drive control unit and the power unit. Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
A591 Drive HW initialization Initialization of the drive hardware.
Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
0000 Drive hardware setup is initializing.
Wait for the setup to initialize.
0001 Initializing HW settings for the first time.
Wait for the setup to initialize.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A5A0 Safe torque off Programmable warning: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
Safe torque off function is active, ie safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is lost.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, chapter The Safe torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 278). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
A5EA Measurement circuit temperature
Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EB PU board powerfail Power unit power supply failure.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EC PU communication internal
Communication errors detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
Check the connections between the drive control unit and the power unit.
A5ED Measurement circuit ADC
Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EE Measurement circuit DFF
Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EF PU state feedback State feedback from output phases does not match control signals.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5F0 Charging feedback Charging feedback signal missing.
Check the feedback signal coming from the charging system.
A686 Checksum mismatch Programmable warning: 96.54 Checksum action
The calculated parameter checksum does not match any enabled reference checksum.
Check that all necessary approved (reference) checksums (96.7196.72) are enabled in 96.55 Checksum control word. Check the parameter configuration. Using 96.55 Checksum control word, enable a checksum parameter and copy the actual checksum into that parameter.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A687 Checksum configuration
An action has been defined for a parameter checksum mismatch but the feature has not been configured.
Contact your local ABB representative for configuring the feature, or disable the feature in 96.54 Checksum action.
A6A4 Motor nominal value The motor parameters are set incorrectly.
Check the settings of the motor configuration parameters in group 99.
The drive is not dimensioned correctly.
Check that the drive is sized correctly for the motor.
0001 Slip frequency is too small. Check the settings of the motor configuration parameters in groups 98 and 99. Check that the drive is sized correctly for the motor.
0002 Synchronous and nominal speeds differ too much.
0003 Nominal speed is higher than synchronous speed with 1 pole pair.
0004 Nominal current is outside limits.
0005 Nominal voltage is outside limits.
0006 Nominal power is higher than apparent power.
0007 Nominal power not consistent with nominal speed and torque.
A6A5 No motor data Parameters in group 99 have not been set.
Check that all the required parameters in group 99 have been set. Note: It is normal for this warning to appear during the start-up and continue until the motor data is entered.
A6A6 Voltage category unselected
The voltage category has not been defined.
Set voltage category in parameter 95.01 Supply voltage.
A6B0 User lock is open The user lock is open, ie. user lock configuration parameters 96.10096.102 are visible.
Close the user lock by entering an invalid pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass code. See section User lock (page 119).
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A6D1 FBA A parameter conflict
The drive does not have a functionality requested by a PLC, or requested functionality has not been activated.
Check PLC programming. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA).
A6E5 AI parametrization The current/voltage hardware setting of an analog input does not correspond to parameter settings.
Check the event log for an auxiliary code. The code identifies the analog input whose settings are in conflict. Adjust parameter 12.15/12.25. Note: Control board reboot (either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in the hardware settings.
A6E6 ULC configuration User load curve configuration error.
Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
0000 Speed points inconsistent. Check that each speed point (parameters 37.1137.15) has a higher value than the previous point.
0001 Frequency points inconsistent.
Check that each frequency point (37.1637.20) has a higher value than the previous point.
0002 Underload point above overload point.
Check that each overload point (37.3137.35) has a higher value than the corresponding underload point (37.2137.25).
0003 Overload point below underload point.
A780 Motor stall Programmable warning: 31.24 Stall function
Motor is operating in stall region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings. Check fault function parameters.
A783 Motor overload Motor current is too high. Check the motor, and the machinery coupled to motor, for overload. Adjust the parameters used for the motor overload function (35.5135.53) and 35.5535.56.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A784 Motor disconnect All three output phases are disconnected from motor.
Check if parameter 95.26 enables the use of a motor disconnect switch. If not, check the following: All switches between drive and motor
are closed. All cables between drive and motor
are connected and secured. If no issue was detected and drive output was actually connected to motor, contact ABB.
A791 Brake resistor Brake resistor broken or not connected.
Check that a brake resistor has been connected. Check the condition of the brake resistor.
A793 BR excess temperature
Brake resistor temperature has exceeded warning limit defined by parameter 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check warning limit setting, parameter 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit. Check that the resistor has been dimensioned correctly. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
A794 BR data Brake resistor data has not been given.
Check the resistor data settings (parameters 43.0843.10).
A79C BC IGBT excess temperature
Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal warning limit.
Let chopper cool down. Check for excessive ambient temperature. Check for cooling fan failure. Check for obstructions in the air flow. Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameters 43.0643.10). Check minimum allowed resistor value for the chopper being used. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed
Mechanical brake control warning.
Check mechanical brake connection. Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control. Check that acknowledgment signal matches the actual status of the brake.
A7A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed
Open conditions of mechanical brake cannot be fulfilled (e.g., brake has been prevented from opening by parameter 44.11)
Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control (especially 44.11). Check that the acknowledgment signal (if used) matches the actual status of the brake.
A7AB Extension I/O configuration failure
The I/O module is not connected to the device or parameterization conflict with currently connected I/O-module. For example, if the drive is connected to an I/O & Modbus module and removed later, the drive displays a warning if connection between any of the parameter and the configured digital/analog output signal is lost.
Make sure that the I/O module is connected to the device and no parameters are connected to non- existing I/O parameters. Make sure that the actual installed options match the values of parameters 07.35 (Drive configuration), 07.36 (Drive configuration 2), and 15.01 (Extension module type),See chapter Automatic option configuration on page 23.
A7AC I/O module internal error
Calibration data is not stored in the IO module. Analog signals are not working with full accuracy.
Replace the IO module.
A7B0 Motor speed feedback Programmable warning: 90.45 Motor feedback fault
Motor speed feedback has failed and drive continues operation with open loop control.
Check the settings of the parameters in groups 90 Feedback selection, 91 Encoder module settings and 92 Encoder 1 configuration. Check encoder installation.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A7C1 FBA A communication Programmable warning: 50.02 FBA A comm loss func
Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See user documentation of fieldbus interface. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Check cable connections. Check if communication master is able to communicate.
A7CE EFB comm loss Programmable warning: 58.14 Communication loss action
Communication break in embedded fieldbus (EFB) communication.
Check the status of the fieldbus master (online/offline/error etc.). Check cable connections to the EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on the control unit.
A7E1 Encoder Programmable warning: 90.45 Motor feedback fault
Encoder error. Check the auxiliary code. See below for actions.
0001 Cable fault. Check the encoder cable connection. If the encoder was working previously, check the encoder, encoder cable, and encoder interface module for damage.
A7EE Panel loss Programmable warning: 49.05 Communication loss action
Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel connection. Check control panel connector. Check mounting platform if being used. Disconnect and reconnect the control panel.
A8A0 AI supervision Programmable warning: 12.03 AI supervision function
An analog signal is outside the limits specified for the analog input.
Check signal level at the analog input. Check the wiring connected to the input. Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input in parameter group 12 Standard AI.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A8A1 RO life warning The relay has changed states more than the recommended number of times.
Change the control board or stop using the relay output.
0001 Relay output 1 Change the control board or stop using relay output 1.
A8A2 RO toggle warning The relay output is changing states faster than recommended, eg. if a fast changing frequency signal is connected to it. The relay lifetime will be exceeded shortly.
Replace the signal connected to the relay output source with a less frequently changing signal.
0001 Relay output 1 Select a different signal with parameter 10.24 RO1 source.
A8B0 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.06 Supervision 1 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
A8B1 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.16 Supervision 2 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
A8B2 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.26 Supervision 3 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
A8B3 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.36 Supervision 4 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
A8B4 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.46 Supervision 5 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
A8B5 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.56 Supervision 6 action
Warning generated by a signal supervision function.
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
A8C0 ULC invalid speed table
User load curve: X-axis points (speed) are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
A8C1 ULC overload warning User load curve: Signal has been too long over the overload curve.
See parameter 37.03 ULC overload actions.
A8C4 ULC underload warning
User load curve: Signal has been too long under the underload curve.
See parameter 37.04 ULC underload actions.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
A8C5 ULC invalid underload table
User load curve: Underload curve points are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
A8C6 ULC invalid overload table
User load curve: Overload curve points are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
A8C8 ULC invalid frequency table
User load curve: X-axis points (frequency) are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. — 500.0 Hz < 37.16 < 37.17 < 37.18 < 37.19 < 37.20 < 500.0 Hz. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
A981 External warning 1 (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.01 External event 1 source 31.02 External event 1 type
Fault in external device 1. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
A982 External warning 2 (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.03 External event 2 source 31.04 External event 2 type
Fault in external device 2. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.03 External event 2 source.
A983 External warning 3 (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.05 External event 3 source 31.06 External event 3 type
Fault in external device 3. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.05 External event 3 source.
A984 External warning 4 (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.07 External event 4 source 31.08 External event 4 type
Fault in external device 5. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.07 External event 4 source.
A985 External warning 5 (Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.09 External event 5 source 31.10 External event 5 type
Fault in external device 5. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.09 External event 5 source.
AF88 Season configuration warning
You have configured a season which starts before the previous season.
Configure the seasons with increasing start dates, see parameters 34.60 Season 1 start date34.63 Season 4 start date.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
AF90 Speed controller autotuning
The autotune routine has been interrupted.
Check the auxiliary code (format XXXX YYYY). YYYY indicates the problem (see actions for each code below).
0000 The drive was stopped before the autotune routine finished.
Repeat autotune until successful.
0001 The drive was started but was not ready to follow the autotune command.
Make sure the prerequisites of the autotune run are fulfilled. See section Before activating the autotune routine (page 69).
0002 Required torque reference could not be reached before the drive reached maximum speed.
Decrease torque step (parameter 25.38 or increase speed step (25.39).
0003 Motor could not accelerate/decelerate to maximum/minimum speed.
Increase torque step (parameter 25.38) or decrease speed step (25.39).
0005 Motor could not decelerate with full autotune torque.
Decrease torque step (parameter 25.38) or speed step (25.39).
AFAA Autoreset A fault is about to be autoreset.
Informative warning. See the settings in parameter group 31 Fault functions.
AFE1 Emergency stop (off2) Drive has received an emergency stop (mode selection off2) command.
Check that it is safe to continue operation. Then return emergency stop push button to normal position. Restart drive. If the emergency stop was unintentional, check the source selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 or off3)
Drive has received an emergency stop (mode selection off1 or off3) command.
AFEA Enable start signal missing (Editable message text)
No enable start signal received.
Check the setting of (and the source selected by) parameter 20.19 Enable start signal.
AFE9 Start delay The start delay is active and the drive will start the motor after a predefined delay.
Informative warning. See parameter 21.22 Start delay.
AFEB Run enable missing No run enable signal is received.
Check setting of parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source. Switch signal on (e.g. in the fieldbus Control Word) or check wiring of selected source.
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
AFEC External power signal missing
95.04 Control board supply is set to External 24V but no voltage is connected to the control unit.
Check the external 24 V DC power supply to the control unit, or change the setting of parameter 95.04.
AFED Enable to rotate Signal enable to rotate has not been received within a fixed time delay of 240s.
Switch enable to rotate signal on (eg. in digital inputs). Check the setting of (and source selected by) parameter 20.22 Enable to rotate.
AFF6 Identification run Motor ID run will occur at next start.
Informative warning.
AFF7 Autophasing Autophasing will occur at next start.
Informative warning.
B5A0 STO event Programmable event: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
Safe torque off function is active, ie. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is lost.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 278).
B686 Checksum mismatch Programmable event: 96.54 Checksum action
The calculated parameter checksum does not match any enabled reference checksum.
See A686 Checksum mismatch (page 494).
Cod e (hex)
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
Fault messages Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
1080 Backup/Restore timeout
Panel or PC tool has failed to communicate with the drive when backup was being made or restored.
Request backup or restore again.
1081 Rating ID fault Drive software has not been able to read the rating ID of the drive.
Reset the fault to make the drive try to reread the rating ID. If the fault reappears, cycle the power to the drive. You may have to be repeat this. If the fault persists, contact your local ABB representative.
2281 Calibration Measured offset of output phase current measurement or difference between output phase U2 and W2 current measurement is too great (the values are updated during current calibration).
Try performing the current calibration again. If the fault persists, contact your local ABB representative.
2310 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded internal fault limit. In addition to an actual overcurrent situation, this fault may also be caused by an earth fault or supply phase loss.
Check the auxiliary code (format XXXYYYZZ): ZZ indicates the overcurrent type and phase that triggered the fault: bit 7 =1 indicates SW overcurrent bit 0: Phase U bit 1: Phase V bit 2: Phase W For example: Aux code 0x83 indicates SW overcurrent of phase U and V. If there is no aux code, this indicates that hardware overcurrent is triggered. Check motor load. Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed control), 26 Torque reference chain (torque control) or 28 Frequency reference chain (frequency control). Also check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling, 46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03 Torque scaling. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check there are no contactors opening and closing in motor cable. Check that the start-up data in parameter group 99 Motor data corresponds to the motor rating plate. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the hardware manual of the drive.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
2330 Earth leakage Programmable fault: 31.20 Earth fault
Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. Try running the motor in scalar control mode if allowed. (See parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.) If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
2340 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor. Aux code 0x0080 indicates that the state feedback from output phases does not match the control signals.
Check motor and motor cable for cabling errors. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Cycle the power to the drive.
2381 IGBT overload Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects the IGBT(s) and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable.
Check motor cable. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
3130 Input phase loss Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse.
Check input power line fuses. Check for loose power cable connections. Check for input power supply imbalance.
3181 Output wiring or earth fault Programmable fault: 31.23 Wiring or earth fault
Incorrect input power and motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection).
Check input power connections.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
3210 DC link overvoltage Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage.
Check that overvoltage control is on (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control). Check that the supply voltage matches the nominal input voltage of the drive. Check the supply line for static or transient overvoltage. Check brake chopper and resistor (if present). Check deceleration time. Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable). Retrofit drive with brake chopper and brake resistor. Check that the brake resistor is dimensioned properly and the resistance is between acceptable range for the drive.
3220 DC link undervoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient because of a missing supply phase, blown fuse or fault in the rectifier bridge.
Check supply cabling, fuses and switchgear.
3381 Output phase loss Programmable fault: 31.19 Motor phase loss
Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection (any of the three phases not connected). In scalar control mode, the drive detects fault only when the output frequency is above 10% of the motor nominal frequency.
Connect motor cable. If the drive is in scalar mode and nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive, set parameter 31.19 Motor phase loss to No action.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
3385 Autophasing Autophasing routine (see section Autophasing on page 55) has failed.
Try other autophasing modes (see parameter 21.13 Autophasing mode) if possible.
Check that the motor ID run has been successfully completed. Clear parameter 98.15 Position offset user. Check that the encoder is not slipping on the motor shaft. Check that the motor is not already turning when the autophasing routine starts. Check the setting of parameter 99.03 Motor type.
4110 Control board temperature
Control board temperature is too high.
Check proper cooling of the drive. Check the auxiliary cooling fan.
4210 IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
4290 Cooling Drive module temperature is excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 50 C /122 F, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See chapter Technical data, section Derating in the hardware manual of the drive. Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.
42F1 IGBT temperature Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
4310 Excess temperature Power unit module temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
4380 Excess temperature difference
High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases.
Check the motor cabling. Check cooling of drive module(s).
4981 External temperature 1 (Editable message text)
Measured temperature 1 has exceeded fault limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.02 Measured temperature 1. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of parameter 35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit.
4982 External temperature 2 (Editable message text)
Measured temperature 2 has exceeded fault limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.03 Measured temperature 2. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of parameter 35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit.
5090 STO hardware failure STO hardware diagnostics has detected hardware failure.
Contact your local ABB representative for hardware replacement.
5091 Safe torque off Programmable fault: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
Safe torque off function is active, i.e. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is broken during start or run.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 278). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
5092 PU logic error Power unit memory has cleared.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5093 Rating ID mismatch The hardware of the drive does not match the information stored in the memory. This may occur e.g. after a firmware update.
Cycle the power to the drive. You may have to be repeat this.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
5094 Measurement circuit temperature
Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5098 I/O communication loss
Communication failure to standard I/O.
Try resetting the fault or cycle the power to the drive.
50A0 Fan Cooling fan stuck or disconnected.
Check fan operation and connection. Replace fan if faulty.
5681 PU communication Communication errors detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
Check the connection between the drive control unit and the power unit. Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
5682 Power unit lost Connection between the drive control unit and the power unit is lost.
Check the connection between the control unit and the power unit.
5690 PU communication internal
Internal communication error.
This is an internal control system failure. If reset or re-powering of the drive unit does not help, or this fault appears frequently, please replace the drive.
5691 Measurement circuit ADC
Measurement circuit fault. This is an internal control system failure. If reset or re-powering of the drive unit does not help, or this fault appears frequently, please replace the drive.
5692 PU board powerfail Power unit power supply failure.
This is an internal control system failure. If reset or re-powering of the drive unit does not help, or this fault appears frequently, please replace the drive.
5693 Measurement circuit DFF
Measurement circuit fault. This is an internal control system failure. If reset or re-powering of the drive unit does not help, or this fault appears frequently, please replace the drive.
5697 Charging feedback Charging feedback signal missing.
Check the feedback signal coming from the charging system.
6181 FPGA version incompatible
Firmware and FPGA versions are incompatible.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
6200 Checksum mismatch Programmable event: 96.54 Checksum action
The calculated parameter checksum does not match any enabled reference checksum.
See A686 Checksum mismatch (page 494).
6306 FBA A mapping file Fieldbus adapter A mapping file read error.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6481 Task overload Internal fault. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
6487 Stack overflow Internal fault. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
64A1 Internal file load File read error. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
64A6 Adaptive program file incompatible or corrupted
Adaptive program has faulted.
Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
000A Program corrupted or block non-existent.
Restore the template program or download the program to the drive.
000C Required block input missing.
Check the inputs of the block.
000E Program corrupted or block non-existent.
Restore the template program or download the program to the drive.
0011 Program too large. Remove blocks until the error stops. 0012 Program is empty. Correct the program and download
it to the drive. 001C A non-existing parameter
or block is used in the parameter.
Edit the program to correct the parameter reference, or use an existing block.
001E Output to parameter failed because the parameter was write-protected.
Check the parameter reference in the program. Check for other sources affecting the target parameter.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
0023 Program file incompatible with current firmware version.
Adapt the program to current block library and firmware version.
0024 Program file incompatible with current firmware version.
Adapt the program to current block library and firmware version.
Other — Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the auxiliary code.
64B2 User set fault Loading of user parameter set failed because requested set does not exist set is not compatible with
control program drive was switched off
during loading.
Ensure that a valid user parameter set exists. Reload if uncertain.
64E1 Kernel overload Operating system error. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
6581 Parameter system Parameter load or save failed.
Try forcing a save using parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually. Retry.
65A1 FBA A parameter conflict
The drive does not have a functionality requested by PLC, or requested functionality has not been activated.
Check PLC programming. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings.
6681 EFB comm loss Programmable fault: 58.14 Communication loss action
Communication break in embedded fieldbus (EFB) communication.
Check the status of the fieldbus master (online/offline/error etc.). Check cable connections to the EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on the control unit.
6682 EFB config file Embedded fieldbus (EFB) configuration file could not be read.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6683 EFB invalid parameterization
Embedded fieldbus (EFB) parameter settings inconsistent or not compatible with selected protocol.
Check the settings in parameter group 58 Embedded fieldbus.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
6684 EFB load fault Embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol firmware could not be loaded.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Version mismatch between EFB protocol firmware and drive firmware.
6685 EFB fault 2 Fault reserved for the EFB protocol application.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
6686 EFB fault 3 Fault reserved for the EFB protocol application.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
6882 Text 32-bit table overflow
Internal fault. Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists.
6885 Text file overflow Internal fault. Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists.
7081 Control panel loss Programmable fault: 49.05 Communication loss action
Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel connection. Check control panel connector. Disconnect and reconnect the control panel.
7082 I/O module comm loss Communication between IO module and drive is not working properly.
Check the IO module installation.
7086 I/O module AI Over voltage
Overvoltage detected in AI. AI is changed to voltage mode. AI will return automatically back to mA mode when the AI signal level is in accepted limits.
Check AI signal levels.
7087 I/O module configuration
I/O module configuration not supported or illegal.
Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
0001 S1/S2 DIP switch position on BIO-01 has changed after power up.
Reboot control unit either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot to activate new DIP switch position.
0002 S1/S2 DIP switch positions are such that DO1 would be in both S1 and S2 pins. This is not a supported combination.
Change S1/S2 DIP switch positions to a supported combination, see parameter 05.99 BIO-01 DIP switch status.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
7121 Motor stall Programmable fault: 31.24 Stall function
Motor is operating in stall region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings. Check fault function parameters.
7122 Motor overload Motor current is too high. Check the motor, and the machinery coupled to motor, for overload. Adjust the parameters used for the motor overload function (35.5135.53) and 35.5535.56.
7181 Brake resistor Brake resistor broken or not connected.
Check that a brake resistor has been connected. Check the condition of the brake resistor. Check the dimensioning of the brake resistor.
7183 BR excess temperature
Brake resistor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check fault limit setting, parameter 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
7184 Brake resistor wiring Brake resistor short circuit or brake chopper control fault.
Check brake chopper and brake resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
7191 BC short circuit Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT.
Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged. Check the electrical specifications of the brake resistor against chapter Resistor braking in the hardware manual of the drive. Replace brake chopper (if replaceable).
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
7192 BC IGBT excess temperature
Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal fault limit.
Let chopper cool down. Check for excessive ambient temperature. Check for cooling fan failure. Check for obstructions in the air flow. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
71A2 Mechanical brake closing failed Programmable fault: 44.17 Brake fault function
Mechanical brake control fault. Activated e.g., if brake acknowledgment is not as expected during brake closing.
Check mechanical brake connection. Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control. Check that the acknowledgment signal matches the actual status of the brake.
71A3 Mechanical brake opening failed Programmable fault: 44.17 Brake fault function
Mechanical brake control fault. Activated e.g. if brake acknowledgment is not as expected during brake opening.
Check mechanical brake connection. Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control. Check that acknowledgment signal matches actual status of brake.
71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed
Open conditions of mechanical brake cannot be fulfilled (e.g., the brake has been prevented from opening by parameter 44.11).
Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control (especially 44.11). Check that the acknowledgment signal (if used) matches the actual status of the brake.
7301 Motor speed feedback Programmable fault: 90.45 Motor feedback fault
No motor speed feedback received. Encoder speed differs too much from internal speed estimate. Aux code 4 = Drift detected. Aux code 3FC = Incorrect motor feedback configuration.
Check the parameter 90.41 setting and the actual source selected. Check electrical connection of the encoder and pulse sin/cos nr.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
7310 Overspeed Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference.
Check minimum/maximum speed settings, parameters 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
7381 Encoder Programmable fault: 90.45 Motor feedback fault
Encoder feedback fault. See A7E1 Encoder (page 499).
73F0 Overfrequency Maximum allowed output frequency exceeded.
Check minimum/maximum frequency settings, parameters 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
00FA Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed frequency due to incorrectly set minimum/maximum frequency or the motor rushes because of too high supply voltage or incorrect supply voltage selection in parameter 95.01 Supply voltage.
Check minimum/maximum frequency settings, parameters 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency. Check used supply voltage and voltage selection parameter 95.01 Supply voltage.
Other — Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the auxiliary code.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
73B0 Emergency ramp failed
Emergency stop did not finish within expected time.
Check the settings of parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay. Check the predefined ramp times (23.1123.15 for mode Off1, 23.23 for mode Off3).
7510 FBA A communication Programmable fault: 50.02 FBA A comm loss func
Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See user documentation of fieldbus interface. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Check cable connections. Check if communication master is able to communicate. Note: If the module has been changed from FieldBus (for example FPBA) to some other option module (for example BMIO), the factory defaults need to be applied (see parameter 96.06).
8001 ULC underload fault User load curve: Signal has been too long under the underload curve.
See parameter 37.04 ULC underload actions.
8002 ULC overload fault User load curve: Signal has been too long over the overload curve.
See parameter 37.03 ULC overload actions.
80A0 AI supervision Programmable fault: 12.03 AI supervision function
An analog signal is outside the limits specified for the analog input.
Check signal level at the analog input. Check the wiring connected to the input. Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input in parameter group 12 Standard AI.
80B0 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.06 Supervision 1 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 1 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
80B1 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.16 Supervision 2 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 2 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
80B2 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.26 Supervision 3 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 3 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
80B3 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.36 Supervision 4 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 4 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
80B4 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.46 Supervision 5 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 5 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
80B5 Signal supervision (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.56 Supervision 6 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision 6 function.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
9081 External fault 1 (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.01 External event 1 source 31.02 External event 1 type
Fault in external device 1. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
9082 External fault 2 (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.03 External event 2 source 31.04 External event 2 type
Fault in external device 2. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.03 External event 2 source.
9083 External fault 3 (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.05 External event 3 source 31.06 External event 3 type
Fault in external device 3. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.05 External event 3 source.
9084 External fault 4 (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.07 External event 4 source 31.08 External event 4 type
Fault in external device 5. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.07 External event 4 source.
9085 External fault 5 (Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.09 External event 5 source 31.10 External event 5 type
Fault in external device 5. Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.09 External event 5 source.
FA81 Safe torque off 1 Safe torque off function is active, ie. STO circuit 1 is broken.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 278). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
FA82 Safe torque off 2 Safe torque off function is active, ie. STO circuit 2 is broken.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
FF61 ID run Motor ID run was not completed successfully.
Check the nominal motor values in parameter group 99 Motor data. Check that no external control system is connected to the drive. Cycle the power to the drive (and its control unit, if powered separately). Check that no operation limits prevent the completion of the ID run. Restore parameters to default settings and try again. Check that the motor shaft is not locked. Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below
0001 Maximum current limit too low.
Check settings of parameters 99.06 Motor nominal current and 30.17 Maximum current. Make sure that 30.17 > 99.06. Check that the drive is dimensioned correctly according to the motor.
0002 Maximum speed limit or calculated field weakening point too low.
Check settings of parameters 30.11 Minimum speed 30.12 Maximum speed 99.07 Motor nominal voltage 99.08 Motor nominal frequency 99.09 Motor nominal speed. Make sure that 30.12 > (0.55 99.09) >
(0.50 synchronous speed) 30.11 < 0, and supply voltage > (0.66 99.07).
0003 Maximum torque limit too low.
Check settings of parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque, and the torque limits in group 30 Limits. Make sure that the maximum torque limit in force is greater than 100%.
0004 Current measurement calibration did not finish within reasonable time
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxiliary code.
00050008 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
0009 (Asynchronous motors only) Acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
000A (Asynchronous motors only) Deceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
000B (Asynchronous motors only) Speed dropped to zero during ID run.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
000C (Permanent magnet motors only) First acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
000D (Permanent magnet motors only) Second acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
000E0010 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
0011 (Synchronous reluctance motors only) Pulse test error.
Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
0012 Motor too large for advanced standstill ID run.
Check that the motor and drive sizes are compatible. Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
0013 (Asynchronous motors only) Motor data error.
Check that the motor nominal value settings in the drive are the same as in the motor nameplate. Contact your local ABB representative and quote this fault and auxliary code.
FF81 FB A force trip A fault trip command has been received through fieldbus adapter A.
Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
FF8E EFB force trip A fault trip command has been received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
D10A Brake not selected Mechanical brake control was inactive when the Conical motor control function was enabled.
Activate mechanical brake control with parameter 44.06 Brake control enable.
Cod e (hex)
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 523
9 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Contents System overview Modbus CANopen
System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system through a communication link using either a fieldbus adapter or the embedded fieldbus interface.
Two protocols are supported by the embedded fieldbus interface: Modbus and CANopen.
Modbus Embedded fieldbus is for the following instruments: Standard variant ACS380-04xS Configured variant (ACS380-04xC) with the I/0 and Modbus extension module
(option +L538).
The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive control program can handle 10 Modbus registers in a 10-millisecond time level. For example, if the drive receives a request to read 20 registers, it will start its response within 22 ms of receiving the request 20 ms for processing the request and 2 ms
524 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
overhead for handling the bus. The actual response time depends on other factors as well, such as the baud rate (a parameter setting in the drive).
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the embedded fieldbus interface and other available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.
Connecting the fieldbus to the drive
Connect the fieldbus to the EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal on the BMIO-01 module which is attached on the control unit of the drive. The connection diagram is shown below.
…
Process I/O (cyclic)
Service messages (acyclic)
Data flow Control Word (CW)
References
Status Word (SW) Actual values
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Fieldbus controller
Fieldbus
Drive
Termination ON 1)
1) The device at both ends on the fieldbus must have termination ON. 2) One device, preferably at the end on the fieldbus must have bias ON.
Termination & bias OFF
EIA-485
Drive
Termination & bias OFF
EIA-485
Drive
Termination & bias ON 1) 2)
EIA-485
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 525
Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus)
To take the Modbus into use:
1. Select Modbus RTU from the Control macros menu (see section Submenus on page 20).
The following parameters change automatically:
You can manually set the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters shown in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives either the value to use or the default value. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Modbus parameter settings for embedded fieldbus interface
Parameter Setting 20.01 Ext1 commands Embedded fieldbus 20.03 Ext1 in1 Not selected 20.04 Ext1 in2 Not selected 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 22.22 Constant speed sel1 Not selected 22.23 Constant speed sel2 Not selected 23.11 Ramp set selection Acc/Dec time 1 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 EFB ref1 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Not selected 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Not selected 28.71 Freq ramp set sel Acc/Dec time 1 31.11 Fault reset selection DI1 58.01 Protocol enable Modbus RTU
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 58.01 Protocol enable Modbus RTU Initializes embedded fieldbus communication.
EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION 58.03 Node address 1 (default) Node address. There must be no two nodes
with the same node address online. 58.04 Baud rate 19.2 kbps (default) Defines the communication speed of the link.
Use the same setting as in the master station. 58.05 Parity 8 EVEN 1 (default) Selects the parity and stop bit setting. Use the
same setting as in the master station. 58.14 Communication
loss action Fault (default) Defines the action taken when a
communication loss is detected.
526 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
58.15 Communication loss mode
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2 (default)
Enables/disables communication loss monitoring and defines the means for resetting the counter of the communication loss delay.
58.16 Communication loss time
3.0 s (default) Defines the timeout limit for the communication monitoring.
58.17 Transmit delay 0 ms (default) Defines a response delay for the drive. 58.25 Control profile ABB Drives
(default) Selects the control profile used by the drive. See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface (page 529).
58.26 58.27
EFB ref1 type EFB ref2 type
Speed or frequency (default for 58.26), Transparent, General, Torque (default for 58.27), Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of fieldbus references 1 and 2. The scaling for each reference type is defined by parameters 46.0146.03. With the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the currently active drive control mode.
58.28 58.29
EFB act1 type EFB act2 type
Speed or frequency (default for 58.28), Transparent (default for 58.29), General, Torque, Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of actual values 1 and 2. The scaling for each actual value type is defined by parameters 46.0146.03. With the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the currently active drive control mode.
58.31 58.32
EFB act1 transparent source EFB act2 transparent source
Other Defines the source of actual values 1 and 2 when the 58.26 EFB ref1 type (58.27 EFB ref2 type) is set to Transparent.
58.33 Addressing mode
Mode 0 (default) Defines the mapping between parameters and holding registers in the 400001465536 (10065535) Modbus register range.
58.34 Word order LO-HI (default) Defines the order of the data words in the Modbus message frame.
58.101 58.114
Data I/O 1 Data I/O 14
For example, the default settings (I/Os 16 contain the control word, the status word, two references and two actual values)
Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameters. Select the parameters that you want to read or write through the Modbus I/O words.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 527
The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Setting the drive control parameters
After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
RO/DIO control word, AO1 data storage, Feedback data storage, Setpoint data storage
These settings write the incoming data into storage parameters 10.99 RO/DIO control word, 13.91 AO1 data storage, 40.91 Feedback data storage or 40.92 Setpoint data storage.
58.06 Communication control
Refresh settings Validates the settings of the configuration parameters.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 20.01 Ext1 commands
Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
20.02 Ext2 commands
Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 1.
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 2.
TORQUE REFERENCE SELECTION 26.11 Torque ref1 source
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 1.
26.12 Torque ref2 source
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 2.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
528 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
FREQUENCY REFERENCE SELECTION 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 1.
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 2.
OTHER SELECTIONS EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1 or 03.10 EFB reference 2.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 96.07 Parameter save manually
Save (reverts to Done)
Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 529
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit data words or 32-bit data words (with a transparent control profile).
The diagram below illustrates the operation of the embedded fieldbus interface. The signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the diagram.
CW REF1 REF2
SW ACT1 ACT2
I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 69
EFB CW 03.09 EFB reference
1 03.10 EFB reference
2
EFB SW Actual 1 Actual 2
Par. 01.01255.255
1. See also other parameters which can be controlled through fieldbus. 2. Data conversion if parameter 58.25 Control profile is set to ABB Drives. See section About the control
profiles on page 531.
1)
Fieldbus network
Data I/O selection
EXT1/2 Start commands
Reference selection
Groups 22/26/28/40 etc.
Cyclic communication
Acyclic communication
58.25
SEL 2)
Parameter table
0 1 2 3
58.25
SEL 0
1 2 3
2)
EFB profile
Reference selection
Groups 22/26/28/40 etc.
58.101 58.114
20.01 20.06
530 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Control word and Status word
The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The CW is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. With drive parameters, the user selects the EFB CW as the source of drive control commands (such as start/stop, emergency stop, selection between external control locations 1/2, or fault reset). The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the CW.
The fieldbus CW is either written to the drive as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
The fieldbus Status Word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It contains status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. The drive SW is either written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
References
EFB references 1 and 2 are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each reference word can be used as the source of virtually any signal, such as the speed, frequency, torque or process reference. In embedded fieldbus communication, references 1 and 2 are displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2 respectively. Whether the references are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
Actual values
Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. Whether the actual values are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
Data input/outputs
Data input/outputs are 16-bit or 32-bit words containing selected drive parameter values. Parameters 58.101 Data I/O 1 58.114 Data I/O 14 define the addresses from which the master either reads data (input) or to which it writes data (output).
Register addressing
The address field of Modbus requests for accessing holding registers is 16 bits. This allows the Modbus protocol to support addressing of 65536 holding registers.
Historically, Modbus master devices used 5-digit decimal addresses from 40001 to 49999 to represent holding register addresses. The 5-digit decimal addressing limited to 9999 the number of holding registers that could be addressed.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 531
Modern Modbus master devices typically provide a means to access the full range of 65536 Modbus holding registers. One of these methods is to use 6-digit decimal addresses from 400001 to 465536. This manual uses 6-digit decimal addressing to represent Modbus holding register addresses.
Modbus master devices that are limited to the 5-digit decimal addressing may still access registers 400001 to 409999 by using 5-digit decimal addresses 40001 to 49999. Registers 410000-465536 are inaccessible to these masters. For more information, see parameter 58.33 Addressing mode.
Note: Register addresses of 32-bit parameters cannot be accessed by using 5-digit register numbers.
About the control profiles
A control profile defines the rules for data transfer between the drive and the fieldbus master, for example: if packed boolean words are converted and how if signal values are scaled and how how drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master.
You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the two profiles: ABB Drives DCU Profile.
For the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The DCU Profile involves no data conversion or scaling. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile selection.
Profile selection
Control profile selection with parameter 58.25 Control profile is: (0) ABB Drives (5) DCU Profile.
58.25
SELData conversion &
scaling 0
5Fieldbus Drive 58.2658.29
532 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Control Word
Control Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 537.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description 0 OFF1_
CONTROL 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE. 0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to
OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2_ CONTROL
1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive). 0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3_ CONTROL
1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive). 0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive
parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Warning: Ensure that the motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_ OPERATION
1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED. Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal. See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 143).
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED. 4 RAMP_OUT_
ZERO 1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED. 0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force). 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED. 0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ ZERO
1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 533
Control Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive Control Word bits 0 to 15. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Control Word are not in use.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH- ON INHIBITED. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 8 JOGGING_1 1 Request running at Jogging 1 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 9 JOGGING_2 1 Request running at Jogging 2 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 10 REMOTE_
CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled. 0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control
Word and Reference. Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT_CTRL_ LOC
1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
12 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.13 USER_1
14 USER_2 15 USER_3
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 STOP 1 Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop
mode request bits (bits 79). 0 (no op)
1 START 1 Start the drive. 0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction of motor rotation. 0 (no op)
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
534 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
3 Reserved 4 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0 (no op) 5 EXT2 1 Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
0 Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0 Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
7 STOPMODE_RA MP
1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 8 STOPMODE_EM
ERGENCY_RAM P
1 Emergency ramp stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 9 STOPMODE_CO
AST 1 Coast stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 10 Reserved for
RAMP_PAIR _2 Not yet implemented.
11 RAMP_OUT_ZER O
1 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0 Normal operation. 12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0 Normal operation. 13 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0 Normal operation. 14 REQ_LOCAL_LO
CK 1 0
15 Reserved for TORQ_LIM_PAIR _2
Not yet implemented.
16 FB_LOCAL_CTL 1 Local mode for control from the fieldbus is requested. Steal control from the active source.
0 (no op) 17 FB_LOCAL_REF 1 Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal reference from the active source. 0 (no op)
Bit Name Value State/Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 535
Status Word
Status Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 537.
18 Reserved for RUN_DISABLE_1
Not yet implemented.
19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic
for application-specific functionality.23 USER_1 24 USER_2 25 USER_3 26 31
Reserved
Bit Name Value STATE/Description 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON. 1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE. 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED. See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 143).
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT. 0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STATUS 1 OFF2 inactive. 0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STATUS 1 OFF3 inactive. 0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_ INHIB
1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. 0
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm. 0 No warning/alarm.
Bit Name Value State/Description
536 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Status Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the drive Status Word bits 0 to 15 to the fieldbus Status Word as is. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Status Word are not in use.
8 AT_ SETPOINT
1 OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference (is within tolerance limits, e.g. in speed control, speed error is 10% max. of nominal motor speed).
0 Actual value differs from Reference (is outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). 0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 ABOVE_ LIMIT
1 Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both directions of rotation.
0 Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit. 11 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.12 USER_1 13 USER_2 14 USER_3 15 Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0 Drive is not ready. 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal is active.
0 External run enable signal is not active. 2 Reserved for
ENABLED_TO_R OTATE
Not yet implemented.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating. 0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed. 0 Drive is not at zero speed.
5 ACCELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
6 DECELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. 0 Drive is not at setpoint.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 537
State transition diagrams
State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile
8 LIMIT 1 Drive operation is limited. 0 Drive operation is not limited.
9 SUPERVISION 1 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.3146.33
0 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within limits.
10 REVERSE_REF 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
11 REVERSE_ACT 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode. 0 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOC AL
1 Fieldbus is in local control mode. 0 Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 External control location EXT2 is active. 0 External control location EXT1 is active.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is faulted. 0 Drive is not faulted.
16 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm is active. 0 No warning/alarm.
17 Reserved 18 Reserved for
DIRECTION_LO CK
Not yet implemented.
19 Reserved 20 CTL_MODE 1 Vector motor control mode is active.
0 Scalar motor control mode is active 21 Reserved 22 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.23 USER_1 24 USER_2 25 USER_3 26 REQ_CTL 1 Control is requested in this channel.
0 Control is not requested in this channel. 27 31
Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description
538 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words.
See sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 532 and Status Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 535.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 539
MAINS OFF
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit0=0)
from any state
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
(SW Bit1=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(SW Bit2=0)
A B C D
(CW Bit3=0)
operation inhibited
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit0=1)
(CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
C D
(CW Bit5=0)
(SW Bit2=1)
(SW Bit5=0)
from any state from any state Emergency Stop OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
Emergency OFF OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit4=0)
B
B C D
(CW Bit4=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
D
(CW Bit6=0)
A
C (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
(SW Bit8=1) D
from any state
Fault
(SW Bit3=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and SW Bit12=1)
CW = Control Word SW = Status Word
n = Speed I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
ABB Drives profileSWITCH-ON INHIBITED
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO OPERATE
OPERATION INHIBITED
OFF1 ACTIVE
OPERATION ENABLED
RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED
RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
OPERATION
OFF2 ACTIVE
FAULT
OFF3 ACTIVE
STATE
condition
rising edge of the bit
540 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
A control word sequence example is given below:
Start: 476h —> NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
If MSW bit 0 = 1 then 477h —> READY TO SWITCH ON (Stopped) 47Fh —> OPERATION (Running)
Stop: 477h = Stop according to 21.03 Stop mode 47Eh = OFF1 ramp stop (Note: uninterpretable ramp stop)
Fault reset: Rising edge of MCW bit 7
Start after STO: If 31.22 STO indication run/stop is not fault/fault make sure that 06.18 Start inhibit
status word, bit 7 STO = 0 before giving a start command.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 541
References
References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB reference 2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive reference.
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type (see page 399).
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2.
Actual values
Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive value.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type (see page 399).
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
0
-20000
20000
DriveFieldbus
0
10000
-10000
46.03 (with torque reference) 46.04 (with power reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
-(46.03) (with torque reference) -(46.04) (with power reference)
542 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Modbus holding register addresses
Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The table below shows the default Modbus holding register addresses for the drive data with the ABB Drives profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to the drive data.
Note: Only the 16 least significant bits of the drives 32-bit Control and Status Words can be accessed.
Note: Bits 16 through 32 of the DCU Control/Status word are not in use if 16-bit control/status word is used with the DCU Profile. Register address Register data (16-bit words) 400001 Default: Control word (CW 16bit). See sections Control Word for the
ABB Drives profile (page 532) and Control Word for the DCU Profile (page 533). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
400002 Default: Reference 1 (Ref1 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400003 Default: Reference 2 (Ref2 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400004 Default: Status Word (SW 16bit). See sections Status Word for the ABB Drives profile (page 535) and Status Word for the DCU Profile (page 536). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
0
-20000
20000
DriveFieldbus
0
10000
-10000
46.03 (with torque reference) 46.04 (with power reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
-(46.03) (with torque reference) -(46.04) (with power reference)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 543
The Transparent profile
The Transparent profile involves no data conversion of the control or status word.
The transparent profile can be set with parameter 58.25 Control profile, using values Transparent 16 (for 16-bit control word) and Transparent 32 (for 32-bit control word).
Whether references or actual values are scaled depends on the setting of parameters 58.2658.29. The references received from the fieldbus are visible in parameters 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2.
The Modbus holding register addresses for the Transparent profile are as with the ABB drives profile (see page 562).
Modbus function codes
The table below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.
400005 Default: Actual value 1 (Act1 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.105 Data I/O 5.
400006 Actual value 2 (Act2 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.106 Data I/O 6.
400007400014 Data in/out 714. Selected by parameters 58.107 Data I/O 7 58.114 Data I/O 14.
400015400089 Unused 400090400100 Error code access. See section Error code registers (holding registers
400090400100) (page 548). 400101465536 Parameter read/write.
Parameters are mapped to register addresses according to parameter 58.33 Addressing mode.
Code Function name Description 01h Read Coils Reads the 0/1 status of coils (0X references). 02h Read Discrete Inputs Reads the 0/1 status of discrete inputs (1X
references). 03h Read Holding Registers Reads the binary contents of holding registers (4X
references). 05h Write Single Coil Forces a single coil (0X reference) to 0 or 1. 06h Write Single Register Writes a single holding register (4X reference).
544 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
08h Diagnostics Provides a series of tests for checking the communication, or for checking various internal error conditions. Supported subcodes: 00h Return Query Data: Echo/loopback test. 01h Restart Comm Option: Restarts and initializes
the EFB, clears communications event counters. 04h Force Listen Only Mode 0Ah Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register 0Bh Return Bus Message Count 0Ch Return Bus Comm. Error Count 0Dh Return Bus Exception Error Count 0Eh Return Slave Message Count 0Fh Return Slave No Response Count 10h Return Slave NAK (negative acknowledge)
Count 11h Return Slave Busy Count 12h Return Bus Character Overrun Count 14h Clear Overrun Counter and Flag
0Bh Get Comm Event Counter
Returns a status word and an event count.
0Fh Write Multiple Coils Forces a sequence of coils (0X references) to 0 or 1. 10h Write Multiple Registers Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding
registers (4X references). 16h Mask Write Register Modifies the contents of a 4X register using a
combination of an AND mask, an OR mask, and the registers current contents.
17h Read/Write Multiple Registers
Writes the contents of a contiguous block of 4X registers, then reads the contents of another group of registers (the same or different than those written) in a server device.
Code Function name Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 545
Exception codes
The table below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.
Coils (0xxxx reference set)
Coils are 1-bit read/write values. Control Word bits are exposed with this data type. The table below summarizes the Modbus coils (0xxxx reference set). Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
2Bh / 0Eh Encapsulated Interface Transport
Supported subcodes: 0Eh Read Device Identification: Allows reading the
identification and other information. Supported ID codes (access type): 00h: Request to get the basic device identification
(stream access) 04h: Request to get one specific identification
object (individual access) Supported Object IDs: 00h: Vendor Name (ABB) 01h: Product Code (for example, ASCCL) 02h: Major Minor Revision (combination of contents
of parameters 07.05 Firmware version and 58.02 Protocol ID).
03h: Vendor URL («www.abb.com») 04h: Product name: (ACS380).
Code Name Description 01h ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code received in the query is not an
allowable action for the server. 02h ILLEGAL ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not an
allowable address for the server. 03h ILLEGAL VALUE The requested quantity of registers is larger than the
device can handle. This error does not mean that a value written to the device is outside of the valid range.
04h DEVICE FAILURE An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was attempting to perform the requested action. See section Error code registers (holding registers 400090400100) on page 548.
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile 000001 OFF1_CONTROL STOP 000002 OFF2_CONTROL START
Code Function name Description
546 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
000003 OFF3_CONTROL Reserved 000004 INHIBIT_OPERATION Reserved 000005 RAMP_OUT_ZERO RESET 000006 RAMP_HOLD EXT2 000007 RAMP_IN_ZERO RUN_DISABLE 000008 RESET STOPMODE_RAMP 000009 JOGGING_1 STOPMODE_EMERGENCY_RAMP 000010 JOGGING_2 STOPMODE_COAST 000011 REMOTE_CMD Reserved 000012 EXT_CTRL_LOC RAMP_OUT_ZERO 000013 USER_0 RAMP_HOLD 000014 USER_1 RAMP_IN_ZERO 000015 USER_2 Reserved 000016 USER_3 Reserved 000017 Reserved FB_LOCAL_CTL 000018 Reserved FB_LOCAL_REF 000019 Reserved Reserved 000020 Reserved Reserved 000021 Reserved CTL_MODE 000022 Reserved Reserved 000023 Reserved USER_0 000024 Reserved USER_1 000025 Reserved USER_2 000026 Reserved USER_3 000027 Reserved Reserved 000028 Reserved Reserved 000029 Reserved Reserved 000030 Reserved Reserved 000031 Reserved Reserved 000032 Reserved Reserved 000033 Control for relay output RO1
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 0)
Control for relay output RO1 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 0)
000034 Control for relay output RO4 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 1)
Control for relay output RO4 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 1)
000035 Control for relay output RO5 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 2)
Control for relay output RO5 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 2)
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 547
Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set)
Discrete inputs are 1-bit read-only values. Status Word bits are exposed with this data type. The table below summarizes the Modbus discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set). Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
000036 Control for relay output RO6 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 3)
Control for relay output RO6 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 3)
000037 Control for relay output RO7 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 4)
Control for relay output RO7 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 4)
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile 0 RDY_ON READY 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 2 RDY_REF Reserved 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 4 OFF_2_STATUS ZERO_SPEED 5 OFF_3_STATUS Reserved 6 SWC_ON_INHIB Reserved 7 ALARM AT_SETPOINT 8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Reserved 11 USER_0 Reserved 12 USER_1 PANEL_LOCAL 13 USER_2 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 14 USER_3 EXT2_ACT 15 Reserved FAULT 16 Reserved ALARM 17 Reserved Reserved 18 Reserved Reserved 19 Reserved Reserved 20 Reserved Reserved 21 Reserved Reserved 22 Reserved USER_0 23 Reserved USER_1 24 Reserved USER_2 25 Reserved USER_3
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile
548 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Error code registers (holding registers 400090400100)
These registers contain information about the last query. The error register is cleared when a query has finished successfully.
26 Reserved REQ_CTL 27 Reserved Reserved 28 Reserved Reserved 29 Reserved Reserved 30 Reserved Reserved 31 Reserved Reserved 32 Delayed status of digital input
DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0)
Delayed status of digital input DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0)
33 Delayed status of digital input DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1)
Delayed status of digital input DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1)
34 Delayed status of digital input DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2)
Delayed status of digital input DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2)
35 Delayed status of digital input DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3)
Delayed status of digital input DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3)
36 Delayed status of digital input DIO1 (parameter 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 4)
Delayed status of digital input DI01 (parameter 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 4)
37 Delayed status of digital input DI02 (parameter 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 5)
Delayed status of digital input DI02 (parameter 11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 5)
Reference Name Description 89 Reset Error Registers 1 = Reset internal error registers (9195). 0 = Do
nothing. 90 Error Function Code Function code of the failed query. 91 Error Code Set when exception code 04h is generated (see table
above). 00h No error 02h Low/High limit exceeded 03h Faulty Index: Unavailable index of an array
parameter 05h Incorrect Data Type: Value does not match the
data type of the parameter 65h General Error: Undefined error when handling
query
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 549
CANopen Embedded fieldbus with CANopen protocol is for the following instrument: Configured variant (ACS380-04xC) with the BCAN-11 CANopen extension
module (option+K495).
The embedded CANopen operates on multiple time levels. High priority cyclical data (control word, references, status word and actual values), and most of CANopen message handling are processed at 2ms time level. SDO messages and drive parameter access are processed at 10ms time level. Saving objects into non-volatile memory and restoring objects from non-volatile memory are processed in the background task.
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the embedded fieldbus interface and other available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.
Connecting the fieldbus to the drive
Connect the fieldbus to terminal X1on the BCAN-11, which is attached to the control unit of the drive.
The pins in the connector are identified on the BCAN-11 sticker.
Note: When taking the CANopen module into use, it is recommended that the cord is not connected during the first start. This is to avoid disturbing the CAN bus when the drive attempts to recognize the attached module.
92 Failed Register The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that failed to be read or written.
93 Last Register Written Successfully
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that was written successfully.
94 Last Register Read Successfully
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that was read successfully.
Reference Name Description
550 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
CANopen network example
Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (CANopen)
Set up the drive automatically
1. Power up the drive. The software recognizes the CANopen interface module that is connected to the drive. The software checks that the CANopen adapter is attached.
2. Press OK. The parameters listed in the table CANopen parameters are automatically set.
CANopen parameters
Parameter Setting 20.01 Ext1 commands Embedded fieldbus 20.03 Ext1 in1 Not selected 20.04 Ext1 in2 Not selected 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 22.22 Constant speed sel1 Not selected 22.23 Constant speed sel2 Not selected 23.11 Ramp set selection Acc/Dec time 1 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 EFB ref1 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Not selected 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Not selected 28.71 Freq ramp set sel Acc/Dec time 1 31.11 Fault reset selection DI1
CANopen master
T
Data Flow Control Word (CW)
References
Status Word (SW) Actual values
Object reads and writes
Other slave device
ABB drive Other slave device
ABB drive
T
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 551
Set up the drive manually.
1. Power up the drive. The software recognizes the CANopen interface module that is connected to the drive. The software checks that the CANopen adapter is attached.
2. Do not press OK. Set up the parameters listed in the table CANopen parameters.
3. Set up the drive for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters shown in the table below (CANopen parameter settings for embedded fieldbus interface). The Setting for fieldbus control column shows either the value to use, or the default value. The Function/Information column describes the parameter.
Note: The CANopen module must be connected to the drive for the CANopen parameters to be visible (58.01 = [3] CANopen).
CANopen parameter settings for embedded fieldbus interface
58.01 Protocol enable CANopen
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 58.01 Protocol enable CANopen Initializes embedded fieldbus
communication.
EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION 58.03 Node ID 3 (default) Node address. There must be no
two nodes with the same node address online.
58.04 Baud rate 125 kbps (default) Defines the communication speed of the link. Use the same setting as in the master station.
58.14 Communication loss action Fault (default) Defines the action taken when a communication loss is detected.
58.23 Configuration location CAN objects Bus: PDOs are configured by the fieldbus master with SDO. Drive parameters: PDO configuration is determined by drive parameters 58.76, 58.93, and 58.101…58.124.
58.25 Control profile CiA 402 (default) Selects the control profile used by the drive. See section Basics of the user interface.
Parameter Setting
552 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
58.26 58.27
EFB ref1 type EFB ref2 type
Speed or frequency (default for 58.26), Transparent, General, Torque (default for 58.27), Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of fieldbus references 1 and 2. The scaling for each reference type is defined by parameters 46.0146.03. With the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the currently active drive control mode.
58.28 58.29
EFB act1 type EFB act2 type
Speed or frequency (default for 58.28), Transparent (default for 58.29), General, Torque, Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of actual values 1 and 2. The scaling for each actual value type is defined by parameters 46.0146.03. With the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the currently active drive control mode.
58.76 58.82 58.88
RPDO1 COB-ID RPDO6 COB-ID RPDO21 COB-ID
1 (default) for 58.76), 0 (default for 58.82 and 58.88)
Defines the COB-ID for the PDO and also enables or disables it. 0= Disable this PDO 1= Enable this PDO with default COB-ID other= Enable this PDO with given (COB-ID)
58.77 58.83 58.89
RPDO1 transmission type RPDO6 transmission type RPDO21 transmission type
255 (default) Defines the transmission type of the PDO. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 254255 = asynchronous
58.78 58.84 58.90
RPDO1 event timer RPDO6 event timer RPDO21 event timer
0 (default) Defines the time-out time for the PDO. 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and not received for event timer milliseconds, 58.14 Communication loss action is performed Note: The timeout supervision is activated upon a successful reception of the RPDO.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 553
The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Setting the drive control parameters
After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired
58.79 58.85 58.91
TPDO1 COB-ID TPDO6 COB-ID RPDO21 COB-ID
1 (default for 58.79), 0 (default for 58.85 and 58.91)
Defines the COB-ID for the PDO and also enables or disables it. 0 = Disable this PDO 1 = Enable this PDO with default COB-ID other = Enable this PDO with given COB-ID
58.80 58.86 58.92
TPDO1 transmission type TPDO6 transmission type TPDO21 transmission type
255 (default) Defines the transmission type of the PDO. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254255 = asynchronous
58.81 58.87 58.93
TPDO1 event timer TPDO6 event timer TPDO21 event timer
100 (default for 58.81) 0 (default for 58.87, 58.93)
Defines the time-out time for the PDO. 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and has not been transmitted for event timer milliseconds, a transmission is forced
58.101 58.114
TPDO1 word 1 RPDO21 word 4
With the default settings, TPDO1 contains 16-bit status word and two 16-bit actual values and RPDO1 contains 16-bit control word and two 16-bit reference values.
Defines the objects mapped to PDOs to and from the drive.
58.06 Communication control Refresh settings Validates the settings of the configuration parameters.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
554 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 20.01 Ext1 commands
Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
20.02 Ext2 commands
Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 1.
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 2.
TORQUE REFERENCE SELECTION 26.11 Torque ref1 source
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 1.
26.12 Torque ref2 source
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 2.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE SELECTION 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 1.
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 2.
OTHER SELECTIONS EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1 or 03.10 EFB reference 2.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 96.07 Parameter save manually
Save (reverts to Done)
Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 555
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit data words or 32-bit data words. The diagram below illustrates the operation of the CANopen embedded fieldbus interface. The signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the diagram.
CANopen embedded fieldbus interface operation
Control word and Status word
The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The CW is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. With drive parameters, the user selects the EFB CW as the source of drive control commands (such as start/stop, emergency stop, selection between external control locations 1/2, or fault reset). The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the CW. The fieldbus CW is either written to the drive as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
The fieldbus Status Word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It contains status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. The drive SW is either written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
Cyclic communication
(PDO)
Acyclic communication
SDO
CANopen objects
2001h …
2106h
DRIVE
Select 2)
CiA 402 Data conversion
ABB Drives Data conversion
Transparent 16 Optional reference, actual value scaling
Transparent 32
CANopen objects
6040h 6042 6041 6044
2000h03 2000h06
6071h 6077h 60FF
606Ch
CANopen objects
4001h …
4063h
Select 2)
1)
1)
Control word, reference, Status word and actual values according to CANopen profile CiA 402 or ABB Drives profile
Drive parameters
1) Native profile 2) Selection with CANopen EFB configuration parame- ters (58.25 Control profile)
Control word, reference, Status word and actual values according to Transparent 16, Transparent 32 or ABB Drives profile
556 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
References
EFB references 1 and 2 are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each reference word can be used as the source of virtually any signal, such as the speed, frequency, torque or process reference. In embedded fieldbus communication, references 1 and 2 are displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2 respectively. Whether the references are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
Actual values
Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. Whether the actual values are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type. See section About the control profiles on page 531.
About the control profiles
A control profile defines the rules for data transfer between the drive and the fieldbus master, for example: if control word and status word are converted and how if signal values are scaled and how functionality and content of certain objects in section Object dictionary on
page 573).
You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the four profiles: CiA 402 ABB Drives Transparent 16 Transparent 32
For the ABB Drives and CiA 402 profiles, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The Transparent profiles perform no data conversion, but the Transparent 16 profile may optionally scale the reference and actual values with a configured scaling value (58.24 Transparent 16 scale).
CiA 402 profile
Control Word for the CiA 402 profile
Control word of the CiA 402 profile can be written to the object 6040h.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 557
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the CiA 402 control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive.
Operation mode specific bits:
Device commands are triggered by the Control word bits as follows:
1) Bits marked as x are irrelevant
2) When Control word bit 3 (Enable operation) is 1, the drive does not perform any tasks in the Switched on state.When bit 3 is 0, the state Switched on tasks are performed.
The states and state transitions refer to those shown in the State transition diagram for the CiA 402 profile on page 560.
Bit Name 0 Switch on 1 Enable voltage 2 Quick stop 3 Enable operation 4…6 Operation -mode specific 7 Fault reset 8 Halt 9…10 Reserved 11…15 Drive specific
Bit Velocity mode Profile velocity mode Profile torque 4 Ramp function generator enable Reserved Reserved 5 Ramp function generator unlock Reserved Reserved 6 Ramp function generator use ref Reserved Reserved
Command Control word bit 1) Fault reset, bit 7
Enable operation, bit 3
Quick stop, bit 2
Enable voltage, bit 1
Switch on, bit 0
State transitions
Shut down 0 x 1 1 0 2,6,8 Switch on 0 0 1 1 1 3 2)
Switch on 0 1 1 1 1 3 2)
Disable voltage 0 x x 0 x 7,9,10,12 Quick stop 0 x 0 1 x 7,10,11 Disable operation 0 0 1 1 1 5 Enable operation 0 1 1 1 1 4 Fault reset 0=>1 x x x x 15
558 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
The following stop modes are associated with the control commands and other events:
The halt mode is controlled with bit 8 of the CiA 402 control word. When the halt bit is set during the OPERATION ENABLED state, the drive stops and the state machine remains in the OPERATION ENABLED state. When the bit is reset, the drive starts running again. In all modes supporting the halt function, CiA 402 Status Word bit 10 (target reached) is set when the drive is stopped.
Note: The drive may not necessarily stop completely as it is still the in running (OPERATION ENABLED) state.
The following table summarizes the drive features used to perform the ramp stop during the halt function, as well as the different halt option codes supported by each CiA 402 operating mode. The halt option code is selected by CANopen object 605Dh.
Status Word for the CiA 402 profile
Status word of the CiA 402 profile can be read from the object 6041h.The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the CiA 402 control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the fieldbus.
Command/Event Drive stop mode Quick stop Emergency stop Shut down Coast stop Disable voltage Ramp stop Halt Ramp stop (configurable with CANopen object 605Dh Fault Fault reaction specified by the drive. Typically a Coast stop.
Mode Description Halt option codes Profile velocity Dynamic limiter ramp 1 Profile torque Sets the torque reference to 0. Ramp depends on the drive
parameters 1
Velocity Halt mode1: Ramp input is set to 0. Halt mode 2,3,4: Ramp output is set to 0.
1, 2, 3, 4
Other modes Halt bit has no effect. N/A
Bit Name 0 Ready to switch on 1 Switched on 2 Operation enabled 3 Fault 4 Voltage enabled 5 Quick stop 6 Switch on disabled 7 Warning 8 Drive-specific bit 9 Remote
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 559
Operation mode specific bits:
Modes of operation
The operation mode defines the behavior of the drive. The following CiA 402 operation modes are supported: Profile velocity mode Profile torque mode Velocity mode Cyclic synchronous velocity mode Cyclic synchronous torque mode
The ACS380 CANopen implementation supports minimal implementation of the operation modes. In this chapter scalings of the reference and actual values are described for each operation mode. Operation-mode-specific objects are defined in section Object dictionary on page 573.
The mode of operation is automatically selected to be either velocity mode or profile torque mode according to the control mode configured with parameter 19.12 Ext1 control mode or 19.14 Ext2 control mode (depending on the current control location). The correct reference scaling must be selected with parameters 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. When in Velocity mode, the drive can be switched to Profile velocity mode or Cyclic synchronous velocity mode with the object 6060h. When in Profile torque mode, the drive can be switched to Cyclic synchronous torque mode with the object 6060h.
Velocity mode
Velocity mode is a basic mode to control the velocity of the drive with limits and ramp functions. Target velocity is set with the object 6042h and velocity actual value can be read from the object 6044h. Velocity values are scaled with the dimension factor given in object 604Ch. By default the dimension factor is 1, and the velocity values are given in rpm, e.g. 1 = 1 rpm.
Profile velocity mode
The profile velocity mode is used to control the velocity of the drive with no special regard of the position. Target velocity is set with the object 60FFh and the velocity actual value can be read from the object 606Ch. Velocity values are given in
10 Target reached 11 Internal limit active 12…13 Operation mode specific 14…15 Drive specific
Bit Velocity mode Profile velocity mode Profile torque mode 12 Reserved Speed is zero Reserved 13 Reserved Max slippage reached Reserved
Bit Name
560 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
increments per second. Increment resolution is defined by the object 608Fh. The default values in object 608Fh are 65536 increments per 1 revolution. This means that 1 rpm equals 1 [rpm] * 65536 [inc/s] / 60 [s/min] = 1092 inc/s.
Cyclic synchronous velocity mode
In cyclic synchronous velocity mode, the trajectory generator is in the control device and not in the drive. The control device delivers a new target velocity value to the drive periodically at a fixed interval. Target velocity is set with the object 60FFh and the velocity actual value can be read from the object 606Ch. Velocity values are given in increments per second. Increment resolution is defined by the object 608Fh. The default values in object 608Fh are 65536 increments per 1 revolution. This means that 1 rpm equals 1 [rpm] * 65536 [inc/s] / 60 [s/min] = 1092 inc/s.
Profile torque mode
The profile torque mode enables the drive torque to be controlled directly. Target torque is set with the object 6071h and the torque actual value can be read from the object 6077h. Torque values are given in per thousand of the rated torque, e.g. 10 = 1%.
Cyclic synchronous torque mode
In cyclic synchronous torque mode, the trajectory generator is in the control device and not in the drive. The control device delivers a new target torque value to the drive periodically at a fixed interval. Target torque is set with the object 6071h and the torque actual value can be read from the object 6077h. Torque values are given in per thousand of the rated torque, e.g. 10 = 1%.
State transition diagram for the CiA 402 profile
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the CiA 402 profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 561
CiA 402 profile state machine
CW: Control word SW: Status word
From any state
START FAULT REACTION ACTIVE
SW: xxxxxxxxx0xx1111
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
SW: xxxxxxxxx0xx0000
FAULT
SW: xxxxxxxxx0xx1000
SWITCH-ON DISABLED
SW: xxxxxxxxx1xx0000
READY TO SWITCH ON SW: xxxxxxxxx01x0001
SWITCHED ON SW: xxxxxxxxx01x0011
OPERATION ENABLED
SW: xxxxxxxxx01x0111
QUICK STOP ACTIVE SW: xxxxxxxxx0xx0111(9)
(11)
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0x CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx01x
(8)
(12) (4)
(5) CW: xxxxxxxxxxxx1111
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx110
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxx0111
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx110
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx111 (3)
(6)
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0x
Quick stop completed or
(10)CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx01x or
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0x
(2)
(7)
(15)(1)
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx110 CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxx01x or
CW: xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0x
CW: xxxxxxxx1xxxxxxx Initialized successfully
Fault reaction completed
Power-on, self-initialization
State transition (0)
562 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
ABB drives profile
Control Word for the ABB Drives profile
Control word of the ABB Drives profile can be written to the object 2101h, or alternatively to the object 6040h.
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 566.
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive). 0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Proceed toOFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive). 0 Emergency stop. Emergency stop, stop within time
defined by drive parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure that the motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT OPERATION 1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED. Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED. 4 RAMP OUT ZERO 1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED. 0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force). 5 RAMP HOLD 1 Enable ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED. 0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP IN ZERO 1 Proceed to OPERATING. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 563
Status Word for the ABB Drives profile
Status word of the ABB Drives profile can be read from the object 2104h, or alternatively from the object 6041h.
The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 537.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 No warning/alarm. 8 JOGGING 1 1 Request running at Jogging 1 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 9 JOGGING 2 1 Request running at Jogging 2 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 10 REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference. Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
12 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.13 USER_1
14 USER_2 15 USER_3
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
Bit Name Value State/Description
564 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
References for the ABB Drives profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB reference 2. The references are 16-bit signed integers.
The reference values can be written to the objects 2102h and 2103h, or alternatively to corresponding objects in the CiA 402 profile object area, see Object dictionary (p.573).
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE. 0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED. 0 OPERATION INHIBITED.
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT. 0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STATUS 1 OFF2 inactive. 0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STATUS 1 OFF3 inactive. 0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. 0
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm. 0 No warning/alarm.
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference (is within tolerance limits, e.g. in speed control, speed error is 10% max. of nominal motor speed).
0 Actual value differs from Reference (is outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). 0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both directions of rotation. Set by drive parameters: 46.31, 46.32, 46.33. These parameters are indicated by bit 10 of 06.11 Main status word.
0 Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit. 11 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.12 USER_1 13 USER_2 14 USER_3 15 Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 565
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type (see the table CANopen parameter settings for embedded fieldbus interface).
ABB Drives profile scaling from fieldbus to drive
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.09 EFB reference 2 and 03.10 EFB reference 2.
Actual values for the ABB Drives profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive value.
The actual values can be read from the objects 2105h and 2106h, or alternatively from corresponding objects in the CiA 402 profile object area, see section Object dictionary on page 573.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type.
Fieldbus Drive
-20000
-10000
0
10000
20000 46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
—46.03 (with torque reference)
—46.01 (with speed reference) —46.02 (with frequency reference)
566 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
ABB Drives profile scaling from drive to fieldbus
State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words. See sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 532 and Status Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 535.
Fieldbus Drive
-20000
-10000
0
10000
20000 46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
—46.03 (with torque reference)
—46.01(with speed reference) —46.02(with frequency reference)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 567
ABB Drives profile state machine
MAINS OFF
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit0=0)
from any state
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
(SW Bit1=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(SW Bit2=0)
A B C D
(CW Bit3=0)
operation inhibited
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
(SW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit0=1)
(CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
C D
(CW Bit5=0)
(SW Bit2=1)
(SW Bit5=0)
from any state from any state Emergency Stop OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
Emergency OFF OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit4=0)
B
B C D
(CW Bit4=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
D
(CW Bit6=0)
A
C (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
(SW Bit8=1) D
from any state
Fault
(SW Bit3=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and SW Bit12=1)
CW = Control Word SW = Status Word
n = Speed I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
ABB Drives profileSWITCH-ON INHIBITED
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO OPERATE
OPERATION INHIBITED
OFF1 ACTIVE
OPERATION ENABLED
RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED
RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
OPERATION
OFF2 ACTIVE
FAULT
OFF3 ACTIVE
STATE
condition
rising edge of the bit
568 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Transparent 16 profile
Control Word for the Transparent 16 Profile
Control word of the Transparent 16 profile can be written to the object 2051h. The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive.
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 STOP 1 Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop
mode request bits (bits 79). 0 (no op)
1 START 1 Start the drive. 0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction of motor rotation. 0 (no op)
3 Reserved 4 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0 (no op) 5 EXT2 1 Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
0 Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0 Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
7 STOPMODE_RA MP
1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 8 STOPMODE_EM
ERGENCY_RAM P
1 Emergency ramp stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 9 STOPMODE_CO
AST 1 Coast stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 10 Reserved for
RAMP_PAIR _2 Not yet implemented.
11 RAMP_OUT_ZER O
1 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0 Normal operation. 12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0 Normal operation.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 569
Status Word for the Transparent 16 Profile
Status word of the Transparent 16 profile can be read from the object 2054h.
13 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero. 0 Normal operation.
14 REQ_LOCAL_LO CK
1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
15 Reserved for TORQ_LIM_PAIR _2
Not yet implemented.
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0 Drive is not ready. 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal is active.
0 External run enable signal is not active. 2 Reserved for
ENABLED_TO_R OTATE
Not yet implemented.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating. 0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed. 0 Drive is not at zero speed.
5 ACCELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
6 DECELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. 0 Drive is not at setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Drive operation is limited. 0 Drive operation is not limited.
9 SUPERVISION 1 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.3146.33
0 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within limits.
10 REVERSE_REF 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
11 REVERSE_ACT 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
Bit Name Value State/Description
570 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
References for the Transparent 16 profile
The reference values can be written to the objects 2052h and 2053h. The references are scaled with the scaling value defined in 58.24 Transparent 16 scale.
Actual values for the Transparent 16 profile
The actual values can be read from the objects 2055h and 2056h. The actual values are scaled with the scaling value defined in 58.24 Transparent 16 scale.
Transparent 32 profile
Control Word for the Transparent 32 Profile
Control word of the Transparent 32 profile can be written to the object 2001h. The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode. 0 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOC AL
1 Fieldbus is in local control mode. 0 Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 External control location EXT2 is active. 0 External control location EXT1 is active.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is faulted. 0 Drive is not faulted. 0 No warning/alarm
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 STOP 1 Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop
mode request bits (bits 79). 0 (no op)
1 START 1 Start the drive. 0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction of motor rotation. 0 (no op)
3 Reserved 4 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0 (no op) 5 EXT2 1 Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
0 Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
Bit Name Value State/Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 571
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0 Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
7 STOPMODE_RA MP
1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 8 STOPMODE_EM
ERGENCY_RAM P
1 Emergency ramp stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 9 STOPMODE_CO
AST 1 Coast stop mode. 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 79 are all
0. 10 Reserved for
RAMP_PAIR _2 Not yet implemented.
11 RAMP_OUT_ZER O
1 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0 Normal operation. 12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0 Normal operation. 13 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0 Normal operation. 14 REQ_LOCAL_LO
CK 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
15 Reserved for TORQ_LIM_PAIR _2
Not yet implemented.
16 FB_LOCAL_CTL 1 Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested. Steal control from the active source.
0 (no op) 17 FB_LOCAL_REF 1 Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal reference from the active source. 0 (no op)
18 Reserved for RUN_DISABLE_1
Not yet implemented.
19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description
572 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Status Word for the Transparent 32 Profile
Status word of the Transparent 32 profile can be read from the object 2004h.
22 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.23 USER_1
24 USER_2 25 USER_3 26… 31
Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0 Drive is not ready. 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal is active.
0 External run enable signal is not active. 2 Reserved for
ENABLED_TO_R OTATE
Not yet implemented.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating. 0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed. 0 Drive is not at zero speed.
5 ACCELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
6 DECELERATING 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. 0 Drive is not at setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Drive operation is limited. 0 Drive operation is not limited.
9 SUPERVISION 1 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.3146.33
0 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within limits.
10 REVERSE_REF 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
11 REVERSE_ACT 1 Not yet implemented. 0 Not yet implemented.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode. 0 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
Bit Name Value State/Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 573
References for the Transparent 32 profile
The reference values can be written to the objects 2002h and 2003h.
Actual values for the Transparent 32 profile
The actual values can be read from the objects 2005h and 2006h.
Object dictionary
The Object dictionary consists of objects. Each object within the dictionary is addressed using a 16-bit index (hexadecimal values 0000h-FFFFh). The object addresses are divided in this manual into three categories:
1. Communication profile area (1000…1FFF) Lists the communication related objects.
2. Manufacturer specific profile area (2000…5FFF) Lists the manufacturer specific objects.
3. Standardized profile area (6000…9FFF) Lists the CiA standard profile objects.
13 FIELDBUS_LOC AL
1 Fieldbus is in local control mode. 0 Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 External control location EXT2 is active. 0 External control location EXT1 is active.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is faulted. 0 Drive is not faulted.
16 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm is active. 0 No warning/alarm.
17 Reserved 18 Reserved for
DIRECTION_LO CK
Not yet implemented.
19…21 Reserved 22 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality. 23 USER_1 24 USER_2 25 USER_3 26 REQ_CTL 1 Control is requested in this channel.
0 Control is not requested in this channel. 27…31 Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description
574 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Communication profile area (1000…1FFF)
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
1000h 0 Device Type U32 RO The device type specifies the kind of device. The lower 16 bits contain the device profile number and the upper 16 bits additional information depending on the profile.
1001h 0 Error Register U8 RO The error register is a field of 8 bits, each for a certain error type. If an error occurs the bit is set. Bit meaning 0 = generic error, always set on error 1 = current 2 = voltage 3 = temperature 4 = communication error (overrun, error state) 5 = device profile specific 6 = reserved 7 = manufacturer specific
1003h 0 Number of Errors
U8 RW This object holds errors that have occurred on the device and have been signaled via Emergency Object. The most recent error is at sub-index 1. When a new error occurs, the previous errors move down the list. See Fault tracing on page 487 for details on the meaning of error codes. Writing 0 to sub index 0 deletes the entire error history. Note: Only sub-indices up to 1001h:0h (Number of Errors) can be read. E.g. if Number of Errors is 2, reading 1001h:2h is possible, but attempting to read 1001h:3h causes an SDO abort.
1 Standard Error Field
U32 RO
2 Standard Error Field
U32 RO
3 Standard Error Field
U32 RO
4 Standard Error Field
U32 RO
5 Standard Error Field
U32 RO
1005h 0 COB-ID Sync Message
U32 RW
1008h 0 Manufacturer Device Name
Visible string
Const Contains the device name.
1009h 0 Manufacturer Software Version
Visible string
RW Contains the device software version.
100Ch 0 Guard Time U6 RW This entry contains the guard time in ms. The value 0 means, that the guard time is not used.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 575
100Dh 0 Life Time Factor
U8 RW The life time factor multiplied with the guard time gives the life time for the device. If it is 0, it is not used.
1010h 0 Largest Subindex Supported
U8 RO This entry supports saving of parameters in non-volatile memory. With read access the device provides information about its saving capabilities. Several parameter groups are distinguished. Sub index 1: all parameters Sub index 2: communication parameters (1000h1FFFh) Sub index 3: application parameters (6000h9FFFh) Sub index 4: request drive to perform parameter save function For saving the signature ‘save’ (65766173h) must be written.
1 Save All Parameters
U32 RW
2 Save Communicati on parameters
U32 RW
3 Save Application parameters
U32 RW
4 Save Drive parameters
U32 RW
1011h 0 Largest Subindex Supported
U8 RO This entry supports restoring of default parameters. With read access the device provides information about its capabilities to restore these values. Several parameter groups are distinguished. Sub index 1: all parameters Sub index 2: communication parameters (1000h1FFFh) Sub index 3: application parameters (6000h9FFFh) Sub index 4: request drive to perform parameter restore function For restoring, the signature ‘load’ (64616F6Ch) must be written.
1 Restore All Default Parameters
U32 RW
2 Restore Communicati on Default Parameters
U32 RW
3 Restore Application Default Parameters
U32 RW
4 Restore Drive Default Parameters
U32 RW
1014h 0 COB-ID Emergency Message
U32 RW COB-ID used for emergency message (Emergency Producer).
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
576 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
1016h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO The consumer heartbeat time defines the expected heartbeat cycle time and thus has to be higher than the corresponding producer heartbeat time configured on the device producing this heartbeat.
The bits 31-24 of each sub-index have to be 0. The bits 23-16 contain the node-id. The lower 16 bits contain the heartbeat time
1 Consumer Heartbeat Time
U32 RW
1017h 0 Producer Heartbeat Time
U16 RW The producer heartbeat time defines the cycle time of the heartbeat. If the time is 0 it is not used. The time has to be a multiple of 1 ms.
1018h 0 Number of Entries
U8 RO This object contains general information about the device. Sub-Index 1 contains the vendor ID (B7h = ABB) Sub-Index 2 identifies the drive type. Sub-Index 3 contains the revision number. Bit 31-16 is the major revision number and Bit 15-0 the minor revision number. Sub-Index 4 contains a numerical representation of the drives serial number.
1 Vendor ID U32 RO 2 Product Code U32 RO 3 Module
revision U32 RO
4 Serial number U32 RO
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 577
1400h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO Contain the communication parameters of the PDOs the device is able to receive. Sub-index 0 contains the number of PDO- parameters implemented. Sub-index 1 describes the COB-ID for the PDO. If bit 31 is set the PDO is disabled. Sub-index 2 defines the transmission mode. Sub-index 3 is not used with RPDOs. Sub-index 5 defines a timeout for asynchronous PDOs.
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
1405h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
1414h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
578 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
1600h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW Contain the mapping of data in PDOs to objects in the object dictionary. Sub-index 0 defines the number of objects mapped to the PDO. The other sub-indices each map one object to the PDO. Their structure is as follows: Index (top 16bits) Sub-index (8bits) Length in bits (bottom 8bits)
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
1605h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
1614h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 579
1800h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO Contain the communication parameters of the PDOs the device sends. Sub-index 0 contains the number of PDO- parameters implemented. Sub-index 1 describes the COB-ID for the PDO. If bit 31 is set the PDO is disabled. Sub-index 2 defines the transmission mode. Sub-index 3 defines inhibit time (10 = 1ms). Sub-index 5 defines a timeout for asynchronous PDOs.
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
1805h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
1814h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
1 COB-ID U32 RW 2 Transmission
Type U8 RW
3 Inhibit Time U6 RW 5 Event Timer U6 RW
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
580 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
1A00h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW Contain the mapping of data in PDOs to objects in the object dictionary. Sub-index 0 defines the number of objects mapped to the PDO. The other sub-indices each map one object to the PDO. Their structure is as follows: Index (top 16bits) Sub-index (8bits) Length in bits (bottom 8bits)
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
1A05h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
1A14h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RW
1 PDO Mapping Entry 1
U32 RW
2 PDO Mapping Entry 2
U32 RW
3 PDO Mapping Entry 3
U32 RW
4 PDO Mapping Entry 4
U32 RW
2000h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
3 REFERENCE 2
INT16 RWW Transparent 16 and ABB Drives profile reference value 2 (alternative)
6 ACTUAL VALUE 2
INT16 RO Transparent 16 and ABB Drives profile actual value 2 (alternative)
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 581
Manufacturer specific profile area (2000…5FFF)
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
2000h 0 Number Of Entries
U8 RO
3 REFERENCE 2
INT16 RWW Transparent 16 and ABB Drives profile reference value 2 (alternative)
6 ACTUAL VALUE 2
INT16 RO Transparent 16 and ABB Drives profile actual value 2 (alternative)
2001h 0 T32 CW U32 RWW Transparent 32 profile command word 2002h 0 T32 Ref1 INT32 RWW Transparent 32 profile 2003h 0 T32 Ref2 INT32 RWW Transparent 32 profile reference value 1 2004h 0 T32 SW U32 RO Transparent 32 profile reference value 2 2005h 0 T32 Act1 INT32 RO Transparent 32 profile actual value 1 2006h 0 T32 Act2 INT32 RO Transparent 32 profile actual value 2 2051h 0 T16 CW U6 RWW Transparent 16 profile command word 2052h 0 T16 Ref1 INT16 RWW Transparent 16 profile reference value 1 2053h 0 T16 Ref2 INT16 RWW Transparent 16 profile reference value 2 2054h 0 T16 SW U6 RO Transparent 16 profile status word 2055h 0 T16 Act1 INT16 RO Transparent 16 profile actual value 1 2056h 0 T16 Act2 INT16 RO Transparent 16 profile actual value 2 2100h 0 Number Of
Entries U8 RO Maximum sub-index in the object
1 U6 RO Alarm code 1 2 U6 RO Alarm code 2 3 U6 RO Alarm code 3 4 U6 RO Alarm code 4 5 U6 RO Alarm code 5
2101h 0 ABB CW U6 RWW ABB Drives profile command word 2102h 0 ABB Ref1 INT16 RWW ABB Drives profile reference value 1 2103h 0 ABB Ref2 INT16 RWW ABB Drives profile reference value 2 2104h 0 ABB SW U6 RO ABB Drives profile status word 2105h 0 ABB Act1 INT16 RO ABB Drives profile actual value 1 2106h 0 ABB Act2 INT16 RO ABB Drives profile actual value 2
582 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Standardized profile area (6000…9FFF)
4001h — 4063h
The objects 4001h-4063h provide access to the drive parameters. Each object corresponds to a parameter group and each sub-index in the object corresponds to a single parameter in the group, e.g., 4001h.01 corresponds to parameter 01.01 and 400Ah.04 corresponds to parameter 10.04.
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
603Fh 0 Error code U6 RO This object provides the error code of the last error occurred in the drive device.
6040h 0 Control Word U6 RWW See CiA 402 profile on page 556 and ABB drives profile on page 562 for details.
6041h 0 Status Word U6 RO
6042h 0 VI Target Velocity
INT16 RWW This object is the required velocity of the system in velocity mode. The value is multiplied by Vl Dimension Factor Numerator and divided by Vl Dimension Factor Denominator. If both of these are 1 (default), the velocity is given in rpm.
6043h 0 VI Velocity Demand
INT16 RO This object provides the velocity generated by the ramp function. It is an internal value of the drive. The value shall be given in the same unit as the Vl Target Velocity. Positive values indicate forward direction and negative values indicate reverse direction.
6044h 0 VI Control Effort
INT16 RO This object provides the actual velocity. The value shall be given in the same unit as the Vl Target Velocity. Positive values indicate forward direction and negative values indicate reverse direction.
6046h 0 Number of Entries
U8 RO The values shall be given in rotations per minute (rpm) or in user-defined velocity unit if the Vl Dimension Factor object is not set to 1.
1 VI Velocity Min Amount
U32 RWW Always zero.
2 VI Velocity Max Amount
U32 RWW Mapped internally to the Vl Velocity Max Pos and Vl Velocity Max Neg values.
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 583
6048h 0 Number of Entries
U8 RO This object indicates the configured delta speed and delta time of the slope of the acceleration ramp: Vl Velocity Acceleration = Delta Speed / Delta Time
1 Delta Speed U32 RWW The value shall be given in rotations per minute (rpm) or in user-defined velocity unit if the Vl Dimension Factor object is not set to 1.
2 Delta Time U6 RWW Value shall be given in seconds. 6049h 0 Number of
Entries U8 RO This object indicates the configured delta
speed and delta time of the slope of the deceleration ramp: Vl Velocity Deceleration = Delta Speed / Delta Time
1 Delta Speed U32 RWW The value shall be given in rotations per minute (rpm) or in user-defined velocity unit if the Vl Dimension Factor object is not set to 1.
2 Delta Time U6 RWW Value shall be given in seconds. 604Ch 0 Highest sub-
index supported
U8 Const This object indicates the configured numerator and denominator of the Vl Dimension Factor. The Vl Dimension Factor serves to include gearing in calculation or serves to scale the frequencies or specific units of the user. It influences the Vl Target Velocity, Vl Velocity Demand, Vl Velocity Actual Value as well as the velocity limit function and the ramp function.
1 VI Dimension Factor Numerator
INT32 RW Multiplier for VI velocity values. Shall not be 0.
2 VI Dimension Factor Denominator
INT32 RW Divider for VI velocity values. Shall not be 0.
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
584 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
605Dh 0 Halt option code
INT16 RW This object indicates what action is performed when the halt function is executed, i.e. when the halt bit in the Control word is set. The slow down ramp is the deceleration value of the used mode of operations.
The following value definition is valid: 1 = slow down on slow down ramp and stay in OPERATION ENABLED 2 = slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in OPERATION ENABLED 3 = slow down on the current limit and stay in OPERATION ENABLED 4 = slow down on voltage limit and stay in OPERATION ENABLED
6060h 0 Mode of Operation
INT8 RW The operational mode is selectable by this object. This object shows only the value of the requested operation mode, the actual operation mode of the PDS is reflected in the object 6061h.
The following value definition is valid: 0 = no mode change / no mode assigned 1 = profile position mode (not supported) 2 = velocity mode 3 = profile velocity mode 4 = profile torque mode 5 = reserved 6 = homing mode (not supported) 7 = interpolated position mode (not supported) 8 = cyclic synchronous position mode (not supported) 9 = cyclic synchronous velocity mode 10 = cyclic synchronous torque mode
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 585
6061h 0 Mode of Operation Display
INT8 RO This object provides the actual operation mode. The following value definition is valid: 0 = no mode change / no mode assigned 1 = profile position mode (not supported) 2 = velocity mode 3 = profile velocity mode 4 = profile torque mode 5 = reserved 6 = homing mode (not supported) 7 = interpolated position mode (not supported) 8 = cyclic synchronous position mode (not supported) 9 = cyclic synchronous velocity mode 10 = cyclic synchronous torque mode
6069h 0 Velocity sensor actual value
INT32 RO This object provides the value read from a velocity sensor.
606Bh 0 Velocity demand value
INT32 RO This object provides the output value of the trajectory generator.
606Ch 0 Velocity actual value
INT32 RO This object provides the actual velocity value derived either from the velocity sensor or the position sensor.
6071h 0 Target torque INT16 RWW This object indicates the input value for the torque controller in profile torque mode.
6072h 0 Max torque U6 RWW This object indicates the maximum permissible torque in the motor. 10 = 1%
6073h 0 Max current U6 RWW This object indicates the maximum permissible torque creating current in the motor. 10 = 1%
6077h 0 Torque actual value
INT16 RO This object provides the actual value of the torque. It shall correspond to the instantaneous torque in the motor. 10 = 1%
6083h 0 Profile acceleration
U32 RWW This object defines the commanded acceleration. This object is used in the profile velocity mode.
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
586 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
6084h 0 Profile deceleration
U32 RWW This object defines the deceleration. This object is used in the profile velocity mode.
6087h 0 Torque slope U32 RW This object indicates the rate of change of torque.
608Fh 0 Highest sub- index supported
U8 Const This object indicates the configured encoder increments and number of motor revolutions. The position encoder resolution is calculated by the following formula: position encoder resolution = encoder increments / motor revolutions
1 Encoder Increments
U32 RW
2 Motor Revolutions
U32 RW
60C2h 0 Highest sub- index supported.
U8 Const This object indicates the interpolation cycle time.
1 Interpolation time period value
U8 RW Value of the time.
2 Interpolation time index
INT8 RW Dimension index to the time value in sub- index 1
60FFh 0 Target velocity
INT32 RWW This object indicates the configured target velocity.
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 587
6402h 0 Motor type U6 RO This object indicates the type of motor attached to and driven by the drive device.
The following value definition is valid: 0000h = non-standard motor 0001h = phase modulated DC motor 0002h = frequency controlled DC motor 0003h = PM synchronous motor 0004h = FC synchronous motor 0005h = switched reluctance motor 0006h = wound rotor induction motor 0007h = squirrel cage induction motor 0008h = stepper motor 0009h = micro-step stepper motor 0010h = sinusoidal PM BL motor 0011h = trapezoidal PM BL motor 0012h = AC synchronous reluctance sync 0013h = DC commutator PM 0014h = DC commutator wound field series 0015h = DC commutator wound field compound 7FFFh = no motor type assigned 8000h-FFFFh = manufacturer-specific
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
588 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
CANopen status indicators
The status of CANopen communication can be determined from virtual LEDs which are displayed on the integrated panel. The two CANopen virtual LEDs, RUN and ERROR, can be found on Connection Status View of the integrated panel.
Both LEDs can be either ON or OFF. The following table defines the image shown for a LED that is ON and for a LED that is OFF.
6502h 0 Supported drive modes
U32 RO This object provides information on the supported drive modes.
This object is organized bit-wise. The bits have the following meaning: bit 0: profile position mode bit 1: velocity mode bit 2: profile velocity mode bit 3: profile torque mode bit 4: reserved bit 5: homing mode bit 6: interpolated position mode bit 7: cyclic synchronous position mode bit 8: cyclic synchronous velocity mode bit 9: cyclic synchronous torque mode bit 10-15: reserved bit 16-31: manufacturer-specific
The bit values have the following meaning: bit value = 0: mode is not supported bit value = 1: mode is supported
6504h 0 Drive manufacturer
Visible string
Const This object indicates the manufacturer: ABB Drives
6505h http drive catalog address
Visible string
Const This object indicates the assigned web address of the drive manufacturer: www.abb.com
LED State
Off
Index Sub- index Name Type Access Description
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 589
LED blinking descriptions.
On
Name State Description ERROR Off No error
Blinking General configuration error Single flash CANopen controller error counters have reached the warning
limit (too many error frames). Double flash A guard event or a receive heartbeat time-out has occurred. Quadruple flash An expected PDO has not been received before the event-
timer elapsed. On The CAN controller is bus off.
RUN Blinking The device is in PRE-OPERATIONAL state. Single flash The device is in STOPPED state. On The device is in OPERATIONAL state.
LED State
590 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 591
10 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Contents System overview Basics of the fieldbus control interface Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control Setting up the drive for fieldbus control manually
System overview For the following instrument: ACS380-04xC with fieldbus adapter connected (excluding BCAN-11 CANopen
interface +K405)
The drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network (fieldbus) through an optional fieldbus adapter module.
The drive can be connected to an external control system through an optional fieldbus adapter (fieldbus adapter A = FBA A) mounted onto the control unit of the drive. The drive can be configured to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or other available sources such as digital and analog inputs, depending on how control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are configured.
592 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus adapters are available as loose options for ACS380 base variants (ACS380- 04xN-xxAx-x) or as built-in options for ACS380 configured variants (ACS380-04xC- xxAx-x types). For example following protocols are supported: PROFIBUS DP CANopen EtherNet/IPTM
EtherCATTM
When you use loose option, make sure that the adapter is compatible.
Note: The text and examples in this chapter describe the configuration of one fieldbus adapter (FBA A) by parameters 50.0150.18 and parameter groups 51 FBA A settings53 FBA A data out.
Data Flow
Process I/O (cyclic)
Process I/O (cyclic) or Service messages (acyclic)
Control word (CW) References
Fieldbus controller
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Status word (SW) Actual values
Fieldbus
Other devices
Drive
Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter installed onto drive control unit (slot 1)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 593
Basics of the fieldbus control interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16- or 32-bit input and output data words. The drive is able to support a maximum of 12 data words (16 bits) in each direction.
Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters 52.01 FBA A data in1 52.12 FBA A data in12. The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 FBA A data out1 53.12 FBA A data out12.
DATA OUT 2)
4) 1 2 3 12
DATA IN 2)
5) 1 2 3 12
FBA MAIN SW FBA ACT1 FBA ACT2
Par. 01.0199.99
FBA MAIN CW FBA REF1 FBA REF2
Par. 10.0199.99
1) See also other parameters which can be controlled from fieldbus. 2) The maximum number of data words used is protocol-dependent. 3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more information, see the users manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module. 4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly. 5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.
3)
3)
Parameter table
4)
5)
1) Fieldbus network
Fieldbus adapter
Fi el
db us
-s pe
ci fic
in te
rfa ce
Profile selection
Profile selection
DATA OUT selection
Group 53
DATA IN selection
Group 52
FBA Profile EXT1/2
Start func
20.01 20.06
Speed/Torque REF1 sel
22.11 / 26.11 / 26.12
Speed/Torque REF2 sel
22.12 / 26.11 / 26.12
Cyclic communication
Acyclic communication See the manual of the fieldbus adapter module.
594 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Control word and Status word The Control word is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is sent by the fieldbus master station to the drive through the adapter module. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions in the Control word, and returns status information to the master in the Status word.
For the ABB Drives communication profile, the contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 597 and 598 respectively. The drive states are presented in the state diagram (page 599). For other fieldbus-specific communication profiles, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
When transparent16 or transparent32 profile is selected from the fieldbus group 51 profile parameter, the drive will implement the DCU profile in command and status words as well as reference and actual value scalings. See sections Control Word for the DCU Profile (page 533) and Status Word for the DCU Profile (page 536).
For more details on the Control word, go to page 597, and on the Status word, got to page 598. The drive states are presented in the state diagram on page 599.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast, the Control word received from the fieldbus is shown by parameter 50.13 FBA A control word, and the Status word transmitted to the fieldbus network by 50.16 FBA A status word. This raw data is very useful to determine if the fieldbus master is transmitting the correct data before handing control to the fieldbus network.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 595
References References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive reference.
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources including analog and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a fieldbus adapter module. In order to have the drive controlled through the fieldbus, the module must be defined as the source for control information such as reference. This is done using the source selection parameters in groups 22 Speed reference selection, 26 Torque reference chain and 28 Frequency reference chain.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast, the references received from the fieldbus are displayed by 50.14 FBA A reference 1 and 50.15 FBA A reference 2.
Scaling of references
Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 50.04 FBA A ref1 type and 50.05 FBA A ref2 type.
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.05 FB A reference 1 and 03.06 FB A reference 2.
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
0
-20000
20000
DriveFieldbus
0
10000
-10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
596 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Actual values Actual values are 16-bit words containing information on the operation of the drive. The types of the monitored signals are selected by parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast the actual values sent to the fieldbus are displayed by 50.17 FBA A actual value 1 and 50.18 FBA A actual value 2.
Scaling of actual values
Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.0146.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type.
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
0
-20000
20000
DriveFieldbus
0
10000
-10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 597
Contents of the fieldbus Control word (ABB Drives profile) The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram on page 599.
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 Off1 control 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 Off2 control 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive). 0 Emergency OFF, coast to a stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 Off3 control 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive). 0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive
parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH- ON INHIBITED.
WARNING: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 Run 1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED. Note: Run enable signal must be active; see drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal. See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 143).
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED. 4 Ramp out zero 1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED. 0 Force Ramp function generator output to zero. The drive will
immediately decelerate to zero speed (observing the torque limits).
5 Ramp hold 1 Enable ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held). 6 Ramp in zero 1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Force Ramp function generator input to zero. 7 Reset 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source of the reset signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation. 8 Inching 1 1 Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 1.
Notes: Bits 46 must be 0. See also section Jogging on page 71.
0 Inching (jogging) 1 disabled. 9 Inching 2 1 Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 2.
See notes at bit 8. 0 Inching (jogging) 2 disabled.
10 Remote cmd 1 Fieldbus control enabled. 0 Control word and reference not getting through to the drive,
except for bits 02.
598 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Contents of the fieldbus Status word (ABB Drives profile) The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram on page 599.
11 Ext ctrl loc 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
12 User bit 0 1 User configurable. 0
13 User bit 1 1 0
14 User bit 2 1 0
15 User bit 3 1 0
Bit Name Value State/Description 0 Ready to switch
ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON. 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 Ready run 1 READY TO OPERATE. 0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 Ready ref 1 OPERATION ENABLED. 0 OPERATION INHIBITED. See also parameter 06.18 Start
inhibit status word (page 143). 3 Tripped 1 FAULT.
0 No fault. 4 Off 2 inactive 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE. 5 Off 3 inactive 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE. 6 Switch-on
inhibited 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. 0
7 Warning 1 Warning active. 0 No warning active.
8 At setpoint 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference = is within tolerance limits (see parameters 46.2146.23).
0 Actual value differs from reference = is outside tolerance limits.
9 Remote 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). 0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 Above limit — See bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 11 User bit 0 — See parameter 06.30 MSW bit 11 selection. 12 User bit 1 — See parameter 06.31 MSW bit 12 selection. 13 User bit 2 — See parameter 06.32 MSW bit 13 selection. 14 User bit 3 — See parameter 06.33 MSW bit 14 selection. 15 Reserved
Bit Name Value State/Description
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 599
The state diagram (valid for ABB drives profile only)
A B C D
C D
B
B C D
D
A
C
D
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO SWITCH ON
READY TO OPERATE
OPERATION INHIBITED
OFF1 ACTIVE
OPERATION ENABLED
RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED
RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
OPERATION
OFF2 ACTIVE
FAULT
OFF3 ACTIVE
MAINS OFF SW b6=1
SW b0=0
CW b0=0
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110
SW b0=1
SW b1=1
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111
CW = Control word SW = Status word bx = bit x n = Speed I = Input Current RFG = Ramp Function
Generator f = Frequency
SW b2=0
from any state
Fault
from any state
from any state
SW b1=0
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
SW b5=0
Emergency stop OFF3 (CW b2=0)
SW b2=1
CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111
CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111
CW b4=0
CW b5=0
CW b6=0
OFF1 (CW b0=0)
from any state
CW b3=0
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
STATE
condition
rising edge of bit
operation inhibited
Power ON
SW b3=1
CW b7=1
Emergency stop OFF2 (CW b1=0)
SW b4=0
SW b8=1
CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111
600 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
A control word sequence example is given below:
Start: 476h —> NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
If MSW bit 0 = 1 then 477h —> READY TO SWITCH ON (Stopped) 47Fh —> OPERATION (Running)
Stop: 477h = Stop according to 21.03 Stop mode 47Eh = OFF1 ramp stop (Note: uninterpretable ramp stop)
Fault reset: Rising edge of MCW bit 7
Start after STO:
If 31.22 STO indication run/stop is not Fault/Fault make sure that 06.18 Start inhibit status word, bit 7 STO = 0 before giving a start command.
Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control The software automatically sets the relevant parameters when the fieldbus adapter module is connected to the drive. The preset settings apply to the CANopen, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS and PROFINET (default in the FENA-21-M module) protocols.
Warning! The drive needs to be unpowered for five (5) minutes before electrical installation.
To configure fieldbus communications:
1. Power up the drive.
2. The drive software recognizes the connected fieldbus adapter and automatically creates the basic configuration, if this was the first power-up with an adapter present..
3. If you need to change other parameters, you can set them manually.
If the relevant parameters are not automatically set, follow the instructions in section Setting up the drive for fieldbus control manually on page 606.
Automatic configuration is a minimum configuration, and you can change the parameters after it. There are certain parameters that you need to change, e.g. the station ID.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 601
The fieldbus autosetting function is activated automatically after power boot if parameter 07.35 is set to 0. It also activates again if you change to another adapter and parameter 07.35 is 0.
Example: If you change to another adapter you need to configure parameter 07.35 Drive configuration again. Select 0 Not initialized, go to parameter 96.07 and save the parameter. Reboot the drive, and the drive starts again with the new configuration.
The fieldbus autosetting function is not activated automatically after fieldbus parameter changes, or after changing the fieldbus module.
When the fieldbus adapter is connected to the drive, the drive control program sets the applicable parameters. The preset settings apply to the CANopen, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS and PROFINET (the default in the FENA-21 module) protocols. If you have a BCAN-11 adapter, refer to the exceptions in the table.
602 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Automatically changed parameters (all adapters)
Specific fieldbus adapter parameters
Parameter Setting (general) Setting (BCAN-11) 20.01 Ext1 commands Fieldbus A Embedded fieldbus 20.03 Ext1 in1 Always off Always off 20.04 Ext1 in2 Always off Always off 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 FB A ref1 EFB ref1 22.22 Constant speed sel1 Always off Always off 22.23 Constant speed sel2 Always off Always off 23.11 Ramp set selection Acc/Dec time 1 Acc/Dec time 1 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 FB A ref1 EFB ref1 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Always off Always off 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Always off Always off 28.71 Freq ramp set sel Acc/Dec time 1 Acc/Dec time 1 31.11 Fault reset selection DI1 DI1 50.01 FBA A enable Enable Disable 50.02 FBA A comm loss func Fault No action
Parameter Setting CANopen (FCAN-01) 51.05 Profile CiA 402 EtherCAT 51.02 Profile CiA 402 PROFIBUS 51.02 Node address 3 51.05 Profile ABB Drives 52.01 FBA A data in1 SW 16bit 52.02 FBA A data in2 Act1 16bit 53.01 FBA A data out1 CW 16bit 53.02 FBA A data out2 Ref1 16bit PROFINET (default in FENA-21) 51.02 Protocol/profile 11 = PNIO ABB Pro (PROFINET IO protocol:
ABB Drives profile). 51.04 IP configuration 0 (Static IP) 52.01 Data In 4 (SW 16 bit (Status word (16 bit))) 52.02 Data In 2 5 (Act 1 16 bit) 53.01 Data Out 1 1 (CW 16 bit) 53.02 Data Out 2 2 (ref 1 16-bit) Modbus TCP/IP 51.02 Protocol / Profile 1 = MB/TCP T16. (Modbus/TCP: ABB Drives
profile — Enhanced)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 603
Parameters set by module detection The parameters set on module detection are shown in the tables below. These values are valid with the ABB Standard macro (96.04). Some values vary by macro selection. See also parameters 07.35 and 07.36.
Ethernet IP 51.02 Protocol / Profile EIP ABB Pro. (EtherNet/IP protocol: ABB
Drives profile.) CANopen (BCAN-11) 58.01 Protocol enable CANopen
Option 20.01 Ext1 commands 20.03 Ext1 in1 source
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
BMIO-01 2 (In1 Start, In2 Dir) 2 (DI1) 3 (DI2) BIO-01 2 (In1 Start, In2 Dir) 2 (DI1) 3 (DI2) FECA-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FCAN-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FSCA-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FEIP-21 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FENA-21 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FMBT-21 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FPNO-21 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FEPL-02 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FDNA-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FCNA-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FPBA-01 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 FSPS-21 12 (Fieldbus A) 0 0 BCAN-11 14 (Embedded fieldbus) 0 0
Option 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 22.22
Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant
speed sel2 BMIO-01 1 (AI1 scaled) 4 (DI3) 5 (DI4) BIO-01 1 (AI1 scaled) 4 (DI3) 5 (DI4) FECA-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FCAN-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FSCA-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FEIP-21 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FENA-21 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FMBT-21 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FPNO-21 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FEPL-02 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FDNA-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FCNA-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0
Parameter Setting
604 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
FPBA-01 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FSPS-21 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 BCAN-11 8 (EFB ref 1) 0 0
Option 23.11 Ramp set selection
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1
28.22 Constant frequency
sel1
28.23 Constant frequency
sel2 BMIO-01 10 (DIO1) 1 (AI1
scaled) 4 (DI3) 5 (DI4)
BIO-01 6 (DI5) 1 (AI1 scaled)
4 (DI3) 5 (DI4)
FECA-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FCAN-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FSCA-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FEIP-21 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FENA-21 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FMBT-21 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FPNO-21 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FEPL-02 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FDNA-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FCNA-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FPBA-01 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 FSPS-21 0 4 (FB A ref1) 0 0 BCAN-11 0 8 (EFB ref 1) 0 0
Option 28.71 Freq ramp set selection
31.11 Fault reset
selection BMIO-01 10 (DIO1) 0 BIO-01 6 (DI5) 0 FECA-01 0 2 (DI1) FCAN-01 0 2 (DI1) FSCA-01 0 2 (DI1) FEIP-21 0 2 (DI1) FENA-21 0 2 (DI1) FMBT-21 0 2 (DI1) FPNO-21 0 2 (DI1) FEPL-02 0 2 (DI1) FDNA-01 0 2 (DI1) FCNA-01 0 2 (DI1) FPBA-01 0 2 (DI1) FSPS-21 0 2 (DI1) BCAN-11 0 2 (DI1)
Option 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 22.22
Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant
speed sel2
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 605
Option 50.01 FBA A enable
50.02 FBA A comm loss
func 51.02 FBA A
Par2 51.04 FBA A
Par4
BMIO-01 0 0 — — BIO-01 0 0 — — FECA-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 0 — FCAN-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FSCA-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FEIP-21 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 100 0 FENA-21 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 11 0 FMBT-21 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 0 0 FPNO-21 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 11 0 FEPL-02 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FDNA-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FCNA-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FPBA-01 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) — — FSPS-21 1 (Enable) 1 (Fault) 11 0 BCAN-11 0 0 — —
Option 51.05 FBA A Par5
51.06 FBA A Par6
51.07 FBA A Par7
51.21 FBA A Par21
51.23 FBA A Par23
51.24 FBA A Par24
BMIO-01 — — — — — — BIO-01 — — — — — — FECA-01 — — — — — — FCAN-01 0 — — — — — FSCA-01 — 10 1 — — — FEIP-21 — — — — 128 128 FENA-21 — — — — — — FMBT-21 — — — 1 — — FPNO-21 — — — — — — FEPL-02 — — — — — — FDNA-01 — — — — — — FCNA-01 — — — — — — FPBA-01 1 — — — — — FSPS-21 — — — — — — BCAN-11 — — — — — —
Option 52.01 FBA data in1
52.02 BA data in2
53.01 FBA data out1
53.02 FBA data out2
58.01 Protocol enable
BMIO-01 — — — — — BIO-01 — — — — — FECA-01 — — — — 0 FCAN-01 — — — — 0 FSCA-01 — — — — 0
606 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control manually The fieldbus adapter module is typically pre-installed. The device automatically recognizes the module.
If the adapter is not pre-installed, you can install it mechanically and electrically.
1. Install the fieldbus adapter module mechanically and electrically according to the instructions given in the users manual of the module.
2. Power up the drive.
3. Enable the communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module with parameter 50.01 FBA A enable.
4. With 50.02 FBA A comm loss func, select how the drive should react to a fieldbus communication break. Note: This function monitors both the communication between the fieldbus master and the adapter module and the communication between the adapter module and the drive.
5. With 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out, define the time between communication break detection and the selected action.
6. Select application-specific values for the rest of the parameters in group 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), starting from 50.04. Examples of appropriate values are shown in the tables above.
7. Set the fieldbus adapter module configuration parameters in group 51 FBA A settings. As a minimum, set the required node address and the communication profile.
8. Define the process data transferred to and from the drive in parameter groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Note: Depending on the communication protocol and profile being used, the
FEIP-21 — — — — 0 FENA-21 4 5 1 2 0 FMBT-21 — — — — 0 FPNO-21 4 5 1 2 0 FEPL-02 — — — — 0 FDNA-01 — — — — 0 FCNA-01 — — — — 0 FPBA-01 4 5 1 2 0 FSPS-21 4 5 1 2 0 BCAN-11 — — — — 3 (CANopen)
Option 52.01 FBA data in1
52.02 BA data in2
53.01 FBA data out1
53.02 FBA data out2
58.01 Protocol enable
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 607
Control word and Status word may already be configured to be sent/received by the communication system.
9. Save the valid parameter values to permanent memory by setting parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually to Save.
10. Validate the settings made in parameter groups 51, 52 and 53 by setting parameter 51.27 FBA A par refresh to Configure.
11. Configure control locations EXT1 and EXT2 to allow control and reference signals to come from the fieldbus.
608 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Control chain diagrams 609
11 Control chain diagrams
Contents of this chapter This chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain diagrams can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters have an effect within the drive parameter system.
For a more general diagram, see section Operating modes and motor control modes on page 52.
Note: The panel references in the diagrams refer to ACX-AP-x Assistant control panels and the Drive Composer PC tool.
610 Control chain diagrams
Frequency reference selection
28 .4
1 Fr
eq ue
nc y
re f s
af e
Fr eq
ue nc
y re
fe re
nc e
sa fe
c om
m an
d
N et
w or
k re
fe re
nc e
03 .0
1 Pa
ne l r
ef er
en ce
28 .9
6 Fr
eq ue
nc y
re f a
ct 7
28 .9
2 Fr
eq ue
nc y
re f a
ct 3
Va lu
e
Fi el
db us
: O
D VA
C IP
Va lu
e
Se le
ct io
n
>
28 .1
1 Ex
t1 fr
eq ue
nc y
re f1
28 .1
2 Ex
t1 fr
eq ue
nc y
re f2
19 .1
1 Ex
t1 /E
xt 2
se le
ct io
n Se
le ct
io n
>
AN D
AN D
O R
Pa ne
l c om
m lo
ss a
ct iv
e Pa
ne l a
s lo
ca l c
on tro
l d ev
ic e
Fi el
db us
c om
m lo
ss a
ct iv
e C
on tro
l f ro
m F
ie ld
bu s
ac tiv
e
49 .0
5 C
om m
un ic
at io
n lo
ss a
ct io
n =
Sp ee
d re
f s af
e
50 .0
2 FB
A A
co m
m lo
ss fu
nc =
S pe
ed re
f s af
e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
28 .1
3 Ex
t1 fr
eq ue
nc y
fu nc
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
>
M U
L
A D
D
SU B
M IN
M A
X
Se le
ct io
n
>
28 .1
5 Ex
t2 fr
eq ue
nc y
re f1
Se le
ct io
n
>
28 .1
7 Ex
t2 fr
eq ue
nc y
fu nc
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
> M U
L
A D
D
SU B
M IN
M A
X 28
.1 6
Ex t2
fr eq
ue nc
y re
f2
6. 16
b it
9 N
et w
or k
co nt
ro l
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 06
.1 6
bi t 8
L oc
al c
on tro
l
C on
st an
t f re
qu en
cy c
om m
an d
C on
st an
t f re
qu en
cy re
f
28 .2
2 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
s el
1 28
.2 3
C on
st an
t f re
qu en
cy s
el 2
28 .2
4 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
s el
3
28 .2
6 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
1
28 .3
2 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
7 28
.3 1
C on
st an
t f re
qu en
cy 6
28 .2
9 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
4
28 .2
7 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
2
28 .3
0 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
5
28 .2
8 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
3
Se le
ct io
n
>
28 .2
1 C
on st
fr eq
ue nc
y fu
nc tio
n Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
C O
N ST
AN T
FR EQ
U EN
C Y
SE LE
C TI
O N 0
D ire
ct io
n Lo
ck
Va lu
e
70 .1
b it
1 O
ve rri
de A
ct iv
e
O ve
rri de
re fe
re nc
e
28 .2
5 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
s el
4 28
.4 6
C on
st an
t f re
qu en
cy s
el 5
28 .4
7 C
on st
an t f
re qu
en cy
s el
6
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Control chain diagrams 611
Frequency reference modification
28 .5
1 C
rit ic
al fr
eq ue
nc y
fu nc
tio n
30 .1
3 M
in im
um fr
eq ue
nc y
30 .1
4 M
ax im
um fr
eq ue
nc y
28 .7
2 Fr
eq a
cc el
er at
io n
tim e
1
28 .8
2 Sh
ap e
tim e
1
28 .7
4 Fr
eq a
cc el
er at
io n
tim e
2
28 .8
3 Sh
ap e
tim e
2
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
28 .9
7 Fr
eq re
f u nl
im ite
d 28
.9 6
Fr eq
ue nc
y re
f a ct
7
28 .7
6 Fr
eq ra
m p
in z
er o
so ur
ce Se
le ct
io n
> Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
28 .5
2 C
rit ic
al fr
eq ue
nc y
1 lo
w
Se le
ct io
n
>
28 .5
3 C
rit ic
al fr
eq ue
nc y
1 hi
gh
28 .5
4 C
rit ic
al fr
eq ue
nc y
2 lo
w 28
.5 5
C rit
ic al
fr eq
ue nc
y 2
hi gh
28 .5
6 C
rit ic
al fr
eq ue
nc y
3 lo
w 28
.5 7
C rit
ic al
fr eq
ue nc
y 3
hi gh
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
C R
IT IC
AL FR
EQ
O R
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
0
Va lu
e
6. 1
bi t 6
R am
p in
z er
o
6. 1
bi t 5
R am
p ho
ld
6. 1
bi t 4
R am
p ou
t z er
o
R AM
P
28 .0
1 Fr
eq ue
nc y
re f r
am p
in pu
t
28 .7
3 Fr
eq d
ec el
er at
io n
tim e
1
28 .7
5 Fr
eq d
ec el
er at
io n
tim e
2
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
0
AN D
O R
20 .2
6 Jo
gg in
g 1
st ar
t s ou
rc e
20 .2
7 Jo
gg in
g 2
st ar
t s ou
rc e
20 .2
5 Jo
gg in
g en
ab le
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
23 .2
0 Ac
c tim
e jo
gg in
g
23 .2
1 D
ec ti
m e
jo gg
in g
0
XO R
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
6. 1
bi t 4
R am
p ou
t z er
o
6. 1
bi t 5
R am
p ho
ld
6. 1
bi t 6
R am
p in
z er
o
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 8 In
ch in
g 1
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 9 In
ch in
g 2
AN D
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
28 .4
2 Jo
gg in
g 1
fre qu
en cy
re f
28 .4
3 Jo
gg in
g 2
fre qu
en cy
re f
23 .2
0 Ac
c tim
e jo
gg in
g
23 .2
1 D
ec ti
m e
jo gg
in g
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 9 In
ch in
g 2
R AM
P
28 .7
1 Fr
eq ra
m p
se t s
el ec
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
>
+
Va lu
e
28 .0
2 Fr
eq ue
nc y
re f r
am p
ou tp
ut
Fr eq
ue nc
y tri
m R
ef er
to P
ID tr
im a
ut o
co nn
ec tio
n d
ia gr
am
Fi na
l f re
qu en
cy re
f
612 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference source selection I
22 .1
1 Ex
t1 s
pe ed
re f1
19 .1
1 Ex
t1 /E
xt 2
se le
ct io
n
22 .1
3 Ex
t1 s
pe ed
fu nc
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
>
22 .8
6 Sp
ee d
re fe
re nc
e ac
t 6
Va lu
e
22 .1
2 Ex
t1 s
pe ed
re f2
Se le
ct io
n
> 22
.1 8
Ex t2
s pe
ed re
f1
22 .2
0 Ex
t2 s
pe ed
fu nc
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
>
22 .1
9 Ex
t2 s
pe ed
re f2
M U
L
A D
D
SU B
M IN
M A
X
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
M U
L
A D
D
SU B
M IN
M A
X
Control chain diagrams 613
Speed reference source selection II
22 .8
6 Sp
ee d
re f a
ct 6
22 .5
2 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
1 lo
w
22 .5
1 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
fu nc
tio n
22 .4
2 Jo
gg in
g 1
re f
22 .4
3 Jo
gg in
g 2
re f
20 .2
7 Jo
gg in
g 2
st ar
t s ou
rc e
20 .2
6 Jo
gg in
g 1
st ar
t s ou
rc e
22 .4
1 Sp
ee d
re f s
af e
Sp ee
d re
f s af
e co
m m
an d
N et
w or
k re
fe re
nc e
22 .0
1 Sp
ee d
re f u
nl im
ite d
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
C R
IT IC
AL
SP EE
D S
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 22
.5 3
C rit
ic al
s pe
ed 1
h ig
h
22 .5
4 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
2 lo
w
22 .5
5 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
2 h
ig h
22 .5
6 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
3 lo
w
22 .5
7 C
rit ic
al s
pe ed
3 h
ig h
AN D
AN D
22 .8
7 Sp
ee d
re fe
re nc
e ac
t 7
Fi el
db us
: O
D VA
C IP
AN D
AN D
O R
49 .0
5 C
om m
un ic
at io
n lo
ss
ac tio
n =
Sp ee
d re
f s af
e
Pa ne
l c om
m lo
ss a
ct iv
e
Pa ne
l a s
lo ca
l c on
tro l d
ev ic
e
50 .0
2 FB
A A
co m
m lo
ss fu
nc =
S pe
ed re
f s af
e
Fi el
db us
c om
m lo
ss a
ct iv
e
C on
tro l f
ro m
F ie
ld bu
s ac
tiv e
20 .2
5 Jo
gg in
g en
ab le
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e Jo
gg in
g 2
Jo gg
in g
1
Va lu
e 6.
16 b
it 9
N et
w or
k co
nt ro
l
3. 01
P an
el re
fe re
nc e
6. 16
b it
8 Lo
ca l c
on tro
l
22 .2
2 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
1
22 .2
3 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
2
22 .2
4 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
3
22 .2
6 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
1
22 .3
2 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
7
22 .3
1 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
6
22 .2
9 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
4
22 .2
7 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
2
22 .3
0 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
5
22 .2
8 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
3
Se le
ct io
n
>
22 .2
1 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
fu nc
tio n
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
C O
N ST
AN T
SP EE
D SE
LE C
TI O
N 0
D ire
ct io
n Lo
ck
22 .2
5 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
4
22 .4
6 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
5
22 .4
7 C
on st
an t s
pe ed
s el
6
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
614 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference ramping and shaping
0
0
23 .2
3 Em
er ge
nc y
st op
ti m
e
23 .1
2 Ac
ce le
ra tio
n tim
e 1
23 .1
3 D
ec el
er at
io n
tim e
1
23 .1
4 Ac
ce le
ra tio
n tim
e 2
23 .1
5 D
ec el
er at
io n
tim e
2
23 .2
8 Va
ria bl
e sl
op e
en ab
le
23 .2
9 Va
ria bl
e sl
op e
ra te
46 .0
1 Sp
ee d
sc al
in g
SH AP
E
23 .0
1 Sp
ee d
re f r
am p
in pu
t
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
R AM
P
23 .0
2 Sp
ee d
re f r
am p
ou tp
ut
Va lu
e
AN D
O R
20 .2
6 Jo
gg in
g 1
st ar
t s ou
rc e
20 .2
7 Jo
gg in
g 2
st ar
t s ou
rc e
20 .2
5 Jo
gg in
g en
ab le
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
23 .1
1 R
am p
se t s
el ec
tio n
AN D
St op
c om
m an
d
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 22
.0 1
Sp ee
d re
f u nl
im ite
d
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
AC C
T IM
E
D EC
T IM
E
Va lu
e
23 .2
0 Ac
c tim
e jo
gg in
g
23 .2
1 D
ec ti
m e
jo gg
in g
6. 11
b it
5 O
ff 3
in ac
tiv e
Va lu
e
30 .1
1 M
in im
um s
pe ed
6. 1
bi t 6
R am
p in
z er
o
30 .1
2 M
ax im
um s
pe ed
6. 11
b it
5 O
ff 3
in ac
tiv e
6. 1
bi t
4 R
am p
ou t z
er o
22 .4
2 Jo
gg in
g 1
re f
22 .4
3 Jo
gg in
g 2
re f
23 .2
0 Ac
c tim
e jo
gg in
g
23 .2
1 D
ec ti
m e
jo gg
in g
XO R
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
6. 1
bi t 4
R am
p ou
t z er
o
6. 1
bi t 5
R am
p ho
ld
6. 1
bi t 6
R am
p in
z er
o
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 8 In
ch in
g 1
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 9
In ch
in g
2
Va lu
e 6.
1 bi
t 9
In ch
in g
2
AN D
23 .3
2 Sh
ap e
tim e
1 23
.3 3
Sh ap
e tim
e 2
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
0
R AM
P AC
C T
IM E
D EC
T IM
E
SH AP
E TI
M E
Se le
ct io
n
>
30 .3
6 Sp
ee d
lim it
se le
ct io
n Se
le ct
io n
>
30 .3
8 M
ax s
pe ed
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
30 .3
7 M
in s
pe ed
s ou
rc e
M IN
M AX
Control chain diagrams 615
Speed error calculation
2 4 .1
1 S
p e
e d
c o
rr e
ct io
n
2 4 .1
2 S
p e
e d
e rr
o r
fil te
r tim
e
T A
cc C
o m
2 5 .0
6 A
cc c
o m
p d
e ri
va tio
n t im
e 2
5 .0
7 A
cc c
o m
p f
ilt e
r tim
e
d d t
2 4 .0
3 S
p e
e d
e rr
o r
fil te
re d
2 5 .5
6 T
o rq
u e a
cc c
o m
p e
n sa
tio n
2 4 .0
1 U
se d s
p e
e d
r e
fe re
n ce
2 3 .0
2 S
p e
e d
r e
f ra
m p o
u tp
u t
V a lu
e V
a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
—
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
+
2 4 .0
4 S
p e
e d
e rr
o r
in ve
rt e
d V
a lu
e x
-1
2 4 .0
2 U
se d s
p e
e d
f e
e d b
a ck
V a lu
e
S p
e e d
t ri
m R
e fe
r to
P ID
t ri
m a
u to
c o n
n e
ct io
n d
ia g
ra m
616 Control chain diagrams
Speed controller
25 .0
4 S
pe ed
d er
iv at
io n
tim e
25 .0
5 D
er iv
at io
n fil
te r
tim e
25 .0
2 S
pe ed
p ro
po rt
io na
l g ai
n
25 .1
5 P
ro po
rt io
na l g
ai n
em s
to p
25 .5
4 T
or qu
e in
te gr
al r
ef er
en ce
25 .5
5 T
or qu
e de
riv r
ef er
en ce
25 .5
6 T
or qu
e ac
c co
m pe
ns at
io n
V al
ue
V al
ue
V al
ue
V al
ue
V al
ue
V al
ue
V al
ue
25 .0
3 S
pe ed
in te
gr at
io n
tim e
V al
ue
30 .1
9 M
in im
um to
rq ue
V al
ue
P ID
V al
ue 25
.5 3
T or
qu e
pr op
r ef
er en
ce
S pe
ed r
eg ul
at or
V al
ue 24
.0 3
S pe
ed e
rr or
fi lte
re d
25 .0
1 T
or qu
e re
fe re
nc e
sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
V al
ue
30 .2
1 M
in to
rq ue
2 s
ou rc
e
30 .1
8 T
or q
lim s
el V
al ue
30 .2
0 M
ax im
um to
rq ue
V al
ue
30 .2
2 M
ax to
rq ue
2 s
ou rc
e
30 .1
8 T
or q
lim s
el V
al ue
S el
ec tio
n
>
S el
ec tio
n
>
Control chain diagrams 617
Reference selection for torque controller
21 .0
5 Em
er ge
nc y
st op
s ou
rc e
19 .1
2 Ex
t1 c
on tro
l m od
e
19 .1
4 Ex
t2 c
on tro
l m od
e
19 .1
1 Ex
t1 /E
xt 2
se l
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
SP EE
D
Va lu
e
SP EE
D
Va lu
e
SC AL
AR
99 .0
4 M
ot or
c trl
m od
e
SP EE
D
Sa fe
ty fu
nc tio
n ac
tiv e
19 .0
1 Ac
tu al
o pe
ra tio
n m
od e
Va lu
e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
Fi el
db us
: O
D VA
C
IP
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 19
.1 6
Lo ca
l c on
tro l m
od e
SP EE
D
O R
Va lu
e
SP EE
D
Va lu
e
AN D
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
6. 01
b it
0 O
ff1 c
on tro
l
6. 01
b it
2 O
ff3 c
on tro
l
06 .1
7 bi
t 5 Sa
fe re
fe re
nc e
ac tiv
e
06 .1
7 bi
t 6 La
st s
pe ed
a ct
iv e
6. 16
b it
9 N
et w
or k
co nt
ro l
06 .1
6 bi
t 8 Lo
ca l c
on tro
l
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
26 .0
1 To
rq ue
re fe
re nc
e to
T C
Va lu
e Sp
ee d
lim ita
tio n
SP EE
D
TO R
Q U
E
M IN
A D
D
ZE RO M AX
26 .7
4 To
rq ue
re f r
am p
ou t
25 .0
1 To
rq re
fe re
nc e
sp ee
d co
nt ro
l
Va lu
e
0
To rq
ue s
el ec
to r
Va lu
e
01 .0
1 M
ot or
s pe
ed u
se d
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 30
.1 1
M in
im um
s pe
ed
30 .1
2 M
ax im
um s
pe ed
Se le
ct io
n
>
30 .3
6 Sp
ee d
lim it
se le
ct io
n Se
le ct
io n
>
30 .3
8 M
ax s
pe ed
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
30 .3
7 M
in s
pe ed
s ou
rc e
M IN
M AX
+ Va
lu e
26 .7
5 To
rq ue
re fe
re nc
e ac
t 5 Va
lu e
26 .7
6 To
rq ue
re fe
re nc
e ac
t 6
To rq
ue tr
im R
ef er
to P
ID tr
im a
ut o
co nn
ec tio
n di
ag ra
m
618 Control chain diagrams
Torque limitation
30 .30
Ov erv
olt age
con tro
l Va
lue
26 .01
To rq
ref ere
nc e t
o T C
Va lue
DC vo
lta ge
lim ite
r
30 .31
Un de
rvo lta
ge con
tro l
Va lue
Po we
r li mi
ter To
rqu e l
im ite
r
24 .02
Us ed
sp ee
d f ee
db ac
k Va
lue
30. 26
Po we
rm oto
rin gli
mi t
30. 27
Po we
rg en
era tin
gli mi
t
Va lue
Va lue
26 .02
To rqu
e r efe
ren ce
us ed
Cu rre
nt lim
ite r
Lo ad
an gle
lim ita
tio n
Mo tor
pu ll-o
ut lim
ita tio
n
30 .17
M ax
im um
cu rre
nt Va
lue
30 .02
To rqu
e l im
it s tat
us To TC
Va lue
30 .02
To rqu
e l im
it s tat
us
Bit N
am e
0 = Un
de rvo
lta ge
1 = O
ve rvo
lta ge
2 = M
inim um
to rqu
e 3 =
M ax
im um
to rqu
e 4 =
In ter
na l cu
rre nt
5 = Lo
ad an
gle 6 =
M oto
r p ull-
ou t
7 = Re
se rve
d 8 =
Th erm
al 9 =
M ax
cu rre
nt 10
= Us
er cu
rre nt
11 =
Th erm
al IG
BT 12
= IG
BT ov
ert em
pe rat
ure 13
= IG
BT ov
erl oa
d 14
= 15
=
30 .19
M inim
um to
rqu e
Va lue
30 .21
M in
tor qu
e 2 so
urc e
30 .18
To rq
lim se
l Va
lue
Se lec
tio n
>
30 .20
M ax
im um
to rqu
e Va
lue
Se lec
tio n
>
30 .22
M ax
to rqu
e 2 so
urc e
Control chain diagrams 619
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection
40 .2
6 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t m
in
40 .2
7 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t m
ax
40 .1
8 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t f
un ct
io n
40 .1
0 Se
t 1 fe
ed ba
ck fu
nc tio
n
40 .1
1 Se
t 1 fe
ed ba
ck fi
lte r t
im e
40 .2
8 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t i
nc re
as e
tim e
40 .2
9 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t d
ec re
as e
tim e
Va lu
e
40 .1
6 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t 1
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
40 .1
7 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t 2
s ou
rc e
40 .2
1 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t 1
40 .2
2 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t 2
40 .2
3 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t 3
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
40 .3
0 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t f
re ez
e en
ab le
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
40 .0
8 Se
t 1 fe
ed ba
ck 1
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
40 .0
9 Se
t 1 fe
ed ba
ck 2
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
40 .0
2 Pr
oc es
s PI
D fe
ed ba
ck a
ct ua
l
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
M ul
Ad d
Fe ed
ba ck
1
A D
D
SU B
M U
L
D IV
M IN
M A
X
A VE a a-
b
a+ b
a +
b
M ul
Ad d
Se tp
oi nt
1
A D
D
SU B
M U
L
D IV
M IN
M A
X
A VE a a-
b a+
b
40 .4
5 Se
t 1 s
le ep
b oo
st ti
m e
Va lu
e
40 .4
6 Se
t 1 s
le ep
b oo
st s
te p
Va lu
e
0
R AM
P 40
.0 3
Pr oc
es s
PI D
s et
po in
t a ct
ua l
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
a +
b
+
Va lu
e
Pu ls
e
N ot
e! P
ro ce
ss P
ID p
ar am
et er
s et
2 is
a ls
o av
ai la
bl e.
S ee
p ar
am et
er g
ro up
4 1.
Va lu
e
40 .6
2 PI
D in
te rn
al s
et po
in t a
ct ua
l Va
lu e
40 .0
6 Pr
oc es
s PI
D s
ta tu
s w
or d:
b it
4 PI
D s
le ep
m od
e
40 .1
9 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t s
el 1
40 .2
0 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t s
el 2
BI N
TO IN
T SE
L
b0 b1 0
Se le
ct io
n
>
Se le
ct io
n
>
O U
T
1 2
3
0
Fe ed
ba ck
Sc
al e
40 .9
0 Se
t 1 fe
ed ba
ck m
ul tip
lie r
Va lu
e
Se tp
oi nt
Sc
al e
40 .8
9 Se
t 1 s
et po
in t m
ul tip
lie r
Va lu
e
40 .2
4 Se
t 1 in
te rn
al s
et po
in t 0
Va lu
e
620 Control chain diagrams
Process PID controller
N ot
e! P
ro ce
ss P
ID p
ar am
et er
s et
2 is
a ls
o av
ai la
bl e.
S ee
p ar
am et
er g
ro up
4 1.
40 .3
2 Se
t 1 g
ai n
40 .3
6 Se
t 1 o
ut pu
t m in
40 .3
7 Se
t 1 o
ut pu
t m ax
40 .4
3 Se
t 1 s
le ep
le ve
l 40
.4 4
Se t 1
s le
ep d
el ay
40 .4
7 Se
t 1 w
ak e-
up d
ev ia
tio n
40 .4
8 Se
t 1 w
ak e-
up d
el ay
1 -1
40 .3
4 Se
t 1 d
er iv
at io
n tim
e 40
.3 5
Se t 1
d er
iv at
io n
fil te
r t im
e
40 .3
3 Se
t 1 in
te gr
at io
n tim
e
40 .3
1 Se
t 1 d
ev ia
tio n
in ve
rs io
n
40 .0
3 Pr
oc es
s PI
D s
et po
in t a
ct ua
l Va
lu e
40 .0
2 Pr
oc es
s PI
D fe
ed ba
ck a
ct ua
l
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
— In
pu t
Sc al
e
40 .4
3 Se
t 1 s
le ep
le ve
l
40 .0
1 Pr
oc es
s PI
D O
ut pu
t a ct
ua l
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Sl ee
p Fu
nc tio
n
Va lu
e
40 .4
9 Se
t 1 tr
ac ki
ng m
od e
Se le
ct io
n
>
40 .5
0 Se
t 1 tr
ac ki
ng re
f s el
ec tio
n
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
PR O
C ES
S PI
D F
U N
C TI
O N
40 .0
4 Pr
oc es
s PI
D d
ev ia
tio n
ac tu
al
x 40 .0
7 Se
t 1 P
ID o
pe ra
tio n
m od
e Va
lu e
Va lu
e
40 .0
6 bi
t 3 S
le ep
m od
e 40
.4 6
Se t 1
s le
ep b
oo st
s te
p Va
lu e
Va lu
e 40
.4 5
Se t 1
s le
ep b
oo st
ti m
e
40 .0
6 Pr
oc es
s PI
D s
ta tu
s w
or d
Pr oc
es s
PI D
st at
us Va
lu e
40 .0
6 bi
t 4 S
le ep
b oo
st 40
.5 8
Se t 1
in cr
ea se
p re
ve nt
at io
n Va
lu e
40 .5
9 Se
t 1 D
ec re
as e
pr ev
en ta
tio n
Va lu
e
Va lu
e 40
.1 4
Se t 1
s et
po in
t s ca
lin g
O ut
pu t
Sc al
e
Va lu
e 40
.1 5
Se t 1
o ut
pu t s
ca lin
g
40 .9
7 Pr
oc es
s PI
D fe
ed ba
ck %
Va lu
e
40 .9
8 Pr
oc es
s PI
D s
et po
in t %
Va lu
e
40 .9
9 Pr
oc es
s PI
D D
ev ia
tio n
% Va
lu e
10 0%
% s
ca lin
g
% s
ca lin
g
PI D
40 .8
0 Se
t 1 o
ut pu
t m in
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n >
40 .8
1 Se
t 1 o
ut pu
t m ax
s ou
rc e
Se le
ct io
n
>
40 .3
8 O
ut pu
t f re
ez e
Se le
ct io
n
>
40 .3
9 D
ea db
an d
ra ng
e Va
lu e
40 .4
0 D
ea db
an d
de la
y Va
lu e
C om
pa re
D el
ay
O R
AB S
40 .5
2 Se
t 1 tr
im s
el ec
tio n
Se le
ct io
n
>
30 .2
0 M
ax im
um to
rq ue
1 Va
lu e
30 .1
2 M
ax im
um s
pe ed
Va lu
e
30 .1
4 M
ax im
um fr
eq ue
nc y
Va lu
e
40 .5
4 Se
t 1 tr
im m
ix Va
lu e
40 .5
3 Se
t 1 tr
im m
ed re
f p oi
nt er
Se le
ct io
n
>
-x
x +
1
x
x
O ff
0
40 .5
1 Se
t 1 tr
im m
od e
Se le
ct io
n
>
40 .5
5 Se
t 1 tr
im a
dj us
t Va
lu e
Va lu
e
40 .0
5 Pr
oc es
s PI
D tr
im o
ut pu
t a ct
40 .0
3 Pr
oc es
s PI
D s
et po
in t a
ct ua
l Va
lu e
40 .5
6 Se
t 1 tr
im s
ou rc
e Se
le ct
io n
>
TR IM
F U
N C
TI O
N
(ra ng
e 0.
..1 )
D ire
ct Pr
op or
tio na
l C
om bi
ne d
Control chain diagrams 621
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection
7 1 .2
6 S
e tp
o in
t m
in
7 1 .2
7 S
e tp
o in
t m
a x
7 1 .1
1 F
e e
d b
a ck
f ilt
e r
tim e
V a lu
e
7 1 .1
6 S
e tp
o in
t 1 s
o u
rc e
7 1 .2
1 I
n te
rn a
l s e tp
o in
t 1
7 1 .2
2 I
n te
rn a
l s e tp
o in
t 2
7 1 .2
3 I
n te
rn a
l s e tp
o in
t 3
S e le
ct io
n
>
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
7 1 .0
8 F
e e
d b
a ck
1 s
o u rc
e S
e le
ct io
n
>
7 1 .0
2 F
e e
d b
a ck
a ct
v a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
7 1 .0
3 S
e tp
o in
t a ct
v a
lu e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
V a lu
e
7 1 .6
2 P
ID in
te rn
a l s
e tp
o in
t a
ct u
a l
V a lu
e
7 1 .1
9 I
n te
rn a
l s e tp
o in
t se
l1
7 1 .2
0 I
n te
rn a
l s e tp
o in
t se
l2
B IN
T
O IN
T S
E L
b 0 b 1
0 S
e le
ct io
n
>
S e le
ct io
n
>
O U
T
0 1 2
3
0
622 Control chain diagrams
External PID controller
71 .3
2 G
ai n
71 .3
6 O
ut pu
t m in
71 .3
7 O
ut pu
t m ax
1 -1 71
.3 4
D er
iv at
io n
tim e
71 .3
5 D
er iv
at io
n fil
te r t
im e
71 .3
3 In
te gr
at io
n tim
e
71 .3
1 D
ev ia
tio n
in ve
rs io
n
71 .0
3 Se
tp oi
nt a
ct v
al ue
Va lu
e
71 .0
2 Fe
ed ba
ck a
ct v
al ue
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
— Sc
al e
71 .0
1 Ex
te rn
al P
ID a
ct v
al ue
71 .3
8 O
ut pu
t f re
ez e
Se le
ct io
n
>
Va lu
e
Va lu
e
Va lu
e Va
lu e
PI D
71 .0
4 D
ev ia
tio n
ac t v
al ue
x
71 .0
7 PI
D o
pe ra
tio n
m od
e Va
lu e
71 .0
6 PI
D s
ta tu
s w
or d
Ex te
rn al
PI
D st
at us
Va lu
e
71 .1
4 Se
tp oi
nt s
ca lin
g Va
lu e
71 .1
5 O
ut pu
t s ca
lin g
Va lu
e
71 .3
9 D
ea db
an d
ra ng
e Va
lu e
71 .4
0 D
ea db
an d
de la
y Va
lu e
71 .5
8 In
cr ea
se p
re ve
nt io
n Va
lu e
71 .5
9 D
ec re
as e
pr ev
en tio
n Va
lu e
C om
pa re
D el
ay
O R
AB S
Control chain diagrams 623
Direction lock
O u tp
u t re
fe re
n ce
In p u
t re
fe re
n ce
2 0 .2
1 D
ir e ct
io n
= R
e q u
e st
A N
D
O R
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m F
B
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m M
o to
r p o
te n
tio m
e te
r
Jo g
g in
g R
e fe
re n ce
L a st
/S a fe
r e
fe re
n ce
C o
n st
a n t
re fe
re n ce
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m A
P p
ro g ra
m
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m P
ID
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m P
a n
e l
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m A
I
O R
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m F
B R
e fe
re n ce
f ro
m M
o to
r p o
te n
tio m
e te
r R
e fe
re n ce
f ro
m P
a n
e l
L a st
/S a fe
r e
fe re
n ce
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m A
I R
e fe
re n ce
f ro
m A
P p
ro g ra
m
O R
2 0 .2
1 D
ir e ct
io n
= R
e ve
rs e
A N
D 2
0 .2
1 D
ir e ct
io n =
R e
q u
e st
R e
ve rs
e c
o m
m a
n d a
ct iv
e
X M
A X
X -1
-1 0
A N
D
2 0 .2
1 D
ir e ct
io n
= R
e q u
e st
R e
ve rs
e c
o m
m a
n d a
ct iv
e In
p u
t re
fe re
n ce
> 0
R e
fe re
n ce
f ro
m N
e tw
o rk
624 Control chain diagrams
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 625
12 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications This chapter describes the functions within the control program that are specific to the crane application, how to use them, and how to configure them to operate. If required, you can use these functions for other applications also.
Contents Overview of the crane control program Quick start-up Crane mechanical brake control Speed matching Crane warning masking Dead-band function Start/stop interlocking Crane stop limit function Crane slowdown function Fast stop Power on acknowledgment Speed reference handling Crane motor potentiometer Conical motor control
626 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Overview of the crane control program The ACS380 drives can be used in cranes such as indoor electric overhead traveling (EOT) cranes, outdoor tower cranes, and Tower cranes.
These cranes require independent movements. Indoor EOT cranes and tower cranes have motions such as hoist, trolley and long travel. Outdoor tower cranes typically have motions such as hoist, trolley, and slew.
The start, stop and control signals can be analog, digital, or fieldbus-based from a programmable logic controller (PLC) or a manual control device such as joystick. For a typical crane control interface, see section Control connections on page 668.
ABB product offering for cranes highlights safety and performance and every component that increases safety must be used with the crane drives. For example, in hoist drives, closed loop control (encoder or external supervision) must be used for safe speed supervision.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 627
Quick start-up This section contains the following alternative control schemes for starting up the drive with the control program: Control through the I/O interface using a joystick (page 628) Control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control
(page 633) Control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word (page 638).
In addition, this section describes how to configure the following program features: Configuring slowdown with two limits and stop limit logic (page 643) Configuring speed feedback using a HTL/TTL pulse encoder (page 642) Configuring Mechanical brake control (page 647).
Before the start-up, perform the following:
1. Make sure that the necessary IO connections are available. To configure necessary I/O connections, set the below parameters:
2. In scalar motor control or in trolley and long travel movements, disable torque proving and brake open torque. See Configuring Mechanical brake control on page 647.
No. Name Value 11.09 DIO2 configuration Input 22.22 Constant speed sel1 Always off 22.23 Constant speed sel2 Always off 23.11 Ramp set selection Acc/Dec time 1
628 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Control through the I/O interface using a joystick This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the I/O interface with a joystick.
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Preliminary actions Make sure that you have completed the basic start-up sequence of the drive. See Start- up, ID run and use on page 23. Make sure that the motor control method is selected as vector control (99.04). Power up the drive and wait for 10 seconds. This is to make sure that all the boards are powered and the application is running. Switch to local control.
Brake circuit check Make sure that you can safely do the brake circuit check. For example, make sure that the load is not hanging from a hook. Make sure that the brake circuit is working as expected according to the command given by the default brake control signal interface (relay output RO1): Open the brake temporarily by setting parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Energized.
Verify that the break opens. Set parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Brake command to use the default brake control
signal interface.
Control signal settings Select the signal sources for start and stop control. 20.01 Ext1 commands = In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type = Edge 20.03 Ext1 in1 source = DI1 20.04 Ext1 in2 source = DI2 Select the signal source for speed reference 1. 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled 22.13 Ext1 speed function = Abs (ref1) Define the analog input AI1 scales. 12.15 AI1 unit selection = V 12.17 AI1 min = 0 V 12.18 AI1 max = 10 V 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min = The required maximum speed for reverse direction 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = The required maximum speed for forward direction
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 629
Set the required ramp times. 23.11 Ramp set selection 23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Set the speed limits. 30.11 Minimum speed = The same value as for 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min 30.12 Maximum speed = The same value as for 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Set the torque and current limits. 30.17 Maximum current = Nominal motor current [A] 30.19 Minimum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, -100%) 30.20 Maximum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, 100%) Note: After the trial run, you must set the above limits according to the application requirements.
Brake control settings Make sure that the brake control logic is activated. 44.06 Brake control enable = Selected 10.24 RO1 source = Brake command Define brake opening and closing delays. 44.08 Brake open delay = eg. 1 s 44.13 Brake close delay = eg. 1 s Select the source for the brake acknowledgment signal. 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection = as per the application requirements (eg. No acknowledge) If you set up a hoist drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Brake open torque 44.10 Brake open torque = 30% (this value works as minimum value when Brake torque memory is selected) 44.202 Torque proving = Selected 44.203 Torque proving reference = 25.0 44.204 Brake system check time = 0.30 If you set up a trolley or long travel drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque = 0% 44.202 Torque proving = Not selected Note: These values are also recommended when you use scalar control mode (99.04) for the hoist drive.
630 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Trial run Do a trial run with no load.
Make sure that the brake and safety circuits are working.
Do a trial run with real load.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 631
Control connections
The diagram shows the control connections for the joystick set-up described on page 628.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common DI1 Start forward DI2 Start reverse DI3 Stop limit 1 (forward) DI4 Stop limit 2 (reverse) DIO1 Slowdown DIO2 Not configured DIO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage DIO COM Digital input/output common
Analog I/O AI1 Speed / freq (0…10V)
AGND Analog input circuit common AI2 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AO Output frequency (0…20 mA) AGND Analog output circuit common SCR Signal cable shield (screen) +10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe torque off (STO) S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory.
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open).
SGND S1 S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)RA RB
Main contactor aux. contacts
Brake relay
632 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Input signals Start forward (DI1) Start reverse (DI2) Stop limit 1 (forward) (DI3) Stop limit 2 (reverse) (DI4) Slowdown (DIO1)
Output signals Speed / freq (0…10V) (AI1) Output frequency (0…20mA) (AO) Brake command (RO1)
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 633
Control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control
This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control.
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Preliminary actions Make sure that you have completed the basic start-up sequence of the drive. See Start- up, ID run and use on page 23. Make sure that the motor control method is selected as vector control (99.04). Power up the drive and wait for 10 seconds. This is to make sure that all the boards are powered and the application is running. Switch to local control.
Brake circuit check Make sure that you can safely do the brake circuit check. For example, make sure that the load is not hanging from a hook. Make sure that the brake circuit is working as expected according to the command given by the default brake control signal interface (relay output RO1): Open the brake temporarily by setting parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Energized.
Verify that the brake opens. Set parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Brake command to use the default brake control
signal interface.
Control signal settings Select the signal sources for start and stop control. 20.01 Ext1 commands = In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type = Edge 20.03 Ext1 in1 source = DI1 20.04 Ext1 in2 source = DI2 Define the step reference logic (4 steps). 22.21 Constant speed function = Set speed step bit 2 = 1 (0b0100) 22.22 Constant speed sel1 = DI3 22.23 Constant speed sel2 = DI4 22.24 Constant speed sel3 = DIO1 (11.05 DIO1 configuration = Input) 22.26 Constant speed 1 = 300.00 22.27 Constant speed 2 = 600.00 22.28 Constant speed 3 = 1000.00 22.29 Constant speed 4 = 1500.00
634 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Set the required ramp times. 23.11 Ramp set selection 23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Set the speed limits. 30.11 Minimum speed = The same value as for 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min 30.12 Maximum speed = The same value as for 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Set the torque and current limits. 30.17 Maximum current = Nominal motor current [A] 30.19 Minimum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, -100%) 30.20 Maximum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, 100%) Note: After the trial run, you must set the above limits according to the application requirements.
Brake control settings Make sure that the brake control logic is activated. 44.06 Brake control enable = Selected 10.24 RO1 source = Brake command Define brake opening and closing delays. 44.08 Brake open delay = eg. 1 s 44.13 Brake close delay = eg. 1 s Select the source for the brake acknowledgment signal. 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection = as per the application requirements (eg. No acknowledge) If you set up a hoist drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Brake open torque 44.10 Brake open torque = 30% (this value works as minimum value when Brake torque memory is selected) 44.202 Torque proving = Selected 44.203 Torque proving reference = 25.0 44.204 Brake system check time = 0.30 If you set up a trolly or a long travel drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque = 0% 44.202 Torque proving = Not selected Note: These values are also recommended when you use scalar control mode (99.04) for the hoist drive.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 635
Trial run Do a trial run with no load.
Make sure that the brake and safety circuits are working.
Do a trial run with real load.
636 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Control connections
The diagram shows the control connections for the step reference set-up described on page 678.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common DI1 Start forward (Serial with stop limit 1) DI2 Start reverse (Serial with stop limit 2) DI3 Speed step sel 2 DI4 Speed step sel 3 DIO1 Speed step sel 4 DIO2 Not configured DIO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage DIO COM Digital input/output common
Analog I/O AI1 Speed / freq.(0…10V)
AGND Analog input circuit common AI2 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AO Output frequency (0…20 mA) AGND Analog output circuit common SCR Signal cable shield (screen) +10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe torque off (STO) S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory.
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open), 20.212 Power on acknowledge, and 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
SGND S1 S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)RA RB
SL1
SL2
Speed step 2
Speed step 3
Speed step 4
Main contactor aux. contacts
Brake relay
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 637
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Input signals Start forward (Serial with stop limit 1) (DI1) Start reverse (Serial with stop limit 2) (DI2) Speed step sel 2 (DI3) Speed step sel 3 (DI4) Speed step sel 4 (DIO1)
Output signals Speed / freq (0…10V) (AI1) Output frequency (0…20 mA) (AO) Brake command (RO1)
638 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word
This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word.
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Preliminary actions Make sure that you have completed the basic start-up sequence of the drive. See Start- up, ID run and use on page 23. Note: While performing the start up procedures, make sure that the motor control method is selected as vector control (99.04). Power up the drive and wait for 10 seconds. This is to make sure that all the boards are powered and the application is running. Switch to local control.
Brake circuit check Make sure that you can safely do the brake circuit check. For example, make sure that the load is not hanging from a hook. Make sure that the brake circuit is working as expected according to the command given by the default brake control signal interface (relay output RO1): Open the brake temporarily by setting parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Energized.
Verify that the break opens. Set parameter 10.24 RO1 source to Brake command to use the default brake control
signal interface.
Basic fieldbus adapter settings See chapter Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control on page 600.
Control signal settings Select the signal sources for start and stop control. 20.01 Ext1 commands = Fieldbus A 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type = Level Select the signal source for speed reference 1. 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = FB A ref1
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 639
Set the required ramp times. 23.11 Ramp set selection 23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.14 Deceleration time 2 Set the speed limits. 30.11 Minimum speed 30.12 Maximum speed 46.01 Speed scaling Set the torque and current limits. 30.17 Maximum current = Nominal motor current [A] 30.19 Minimum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, -100%) 30.20 Maximum torque 1 = Nominal motor torque (for example, 100%) Note: After the trial run, you must set the above limits according to the application requirements.
Brake control settings Make sure that the brake control logic is activated. 44.06 Brake control enable = Selected 10.24 RO1 source = Brake command Define brake opening and closing delays. 44.08 Brake open delay = eg. 1 s 44.13 Brake close delay = eg. 1 s Select the source for the brake acknowledgment signal. 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection = as per the application requirements (eg. DI3 or No acknowledge) If you set up a hoist drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Brake open torque 44.10 Brake open torque = 30% (this value works as minimum value when Brake torque memory is selected) 44.202 Torque proving = Selected 44.203 Torque proving reference = 25.0 44.204 Brake system check time = 0.30 If you set up a trolley or long travel drive, set the parameters as below: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque = 0% 44.202 Torque proving = Not selected Note: These values are also recommended when you use scalar control mode (99.04) for the hoist drive.
640 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Trial run Do a trial run with an empty hook.
Make sure that the brake and safety circuits are working.
Do a trial run with real load.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 641
Control connection for the fieldbus control set-up
The diagram below shows the control connections for the fieldbus control word set-up described on page 638.
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common DI1 Fault reset DI2 Not configured
Analog I/O Safe torque off (STO)
S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open),20.212 Power on acknowledge and 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
SGND S1
S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)RA RB
Fieldbus module connections +K457 FCAN-01-M CANopen +K454 FPBA-01-M PROFIBUS DP +K469 FECA-01-M EtherCAT +K475 FENA-21-M Ethernet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus TCP +K495 BCAN-11 CANopen interface
DSUB9 CANopen
DSUB9 Profibus DP
RJ45 X 2 EtherCAT
RJ45 X 2 Ethernet IP
RJ45 X 2 Profinet
RJ45 X 2 Modbus TCP Terminal Block CANopen
642 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Input signals Fault reset (DI1) Control words and reference words through the fieldbus adapter module
Output signals Status words and status signals through the fieldbus adapter module Brake command (RO1)
Configuring speed feedback using a HTL/TTL pulse encoder You can configure the speed feedback with a BTAC pulse encoder interface module (option +L535). This adds a digital pulse encoder interface to the drive and provides accurate speed or position (angle) feedback from the motor shaft.
Note: ABB product offering for cranes highlights safety and performance. You should use components that increases safety. For example, in hoist crane application drives, closed loop control (encoder or external supervision) must be used for safe speed supervision.
The figure below shows the ACS380 drive with BTAC module.
For information related to mechanical and electrical installation, see the hardware manual of the drive.
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Parameter settings Power up the BTAC module and the drive (if external supply).
Set the feedback selection. 90.41 Motor feedback selection = Encoder 1 90.45 Motor feedback fault = Fault Set the number of pulses according to encoder nameplate (92.10 Pulses/revolution).
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 643
Configuring slowdown with two limits and stop limit logic
Slowdown limit inputs
Set parameter 91.10 Encoder parameter refresh to Refresh, to apply the new parameter settings. The parameter automatically changes to Done after application of the new settings. This must be performed whenever you change the encoder parameters.
Trial run Temporarily set parameter 90.41 to Estimate. Perform a trial run. Observe encoder feedback from signal 90.10 Encoder 1 speed and compare with 01.02 Motor speed estimated. If the difference between values are not high, set 90.41 90.41 to Encoder 1.
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Parameter settings Enable limit control. 76.02 Enable limit to limit control = Selected Set triggering type for signals. 76.03 Limit to limit trigger type = Level low Select slowdown inputs. 76.05 Forward slow down limit 76.07 Reverse slow down limit Either select one incoming signal in both directions, or two inputs, one input for each direction. See section Crane slowdown function on page664. Select slowdown speed or frequency according to the selected reference. 76.08 Slow down speed or 76.09 Slow down frequency
Trial run Test the connected inputs and outputs in the local control mode before the final trial run. Note: If digital input/output (DIO1 or DIO2) is in use, set correct configuration. 11.05 DIO1 configuration =Input or 11.09 DIO2 configuration = Input
644 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Stop limit
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Parameter settings Enable limit control. 76.02 Enable limit to limit control = Selected Set triggering type for signals to be level. 76.03 Limit to limit trigger type = Level low Select stop limit inputs 76.04 Forward stop limit 76.06 Reverse stop limit Select stop ramp mode. 76.11 Limit stop mode
If 76.11 Limit stop mode = Limit ramp stop mode, enter required ramp time to stop. 76.12 Limit stop ramp time = e.g 0.500 s
Trial run Test the connected inputs and outputs in the local control mode before the final trial run. Note: Instead of stop limit logic, the switches can be connected serial with start orders
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 645
Control connection diagram
The diagram below shows the control connection example for the slowdown limit and stop limit function described on page 643.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common DI1 Start forward DI2 Start reverse DI3 Stop limit 1 (forward) DI4 Stop limit 2 (reverse) DIO1 Slowdown DIO2 Not configured DIO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage DIO COM Digital input/output common
Analog I/O AI1 Speed / freq.(0…10V)
AGND Analog input circuit common AI2 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AO Output frequency (0…20 mA) AGND Analog output circuit common SCR Signal cable shield (screen) +10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe torque off (STO) S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory.
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open).
SGND S1 S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)RA RB
Main contactor aux. contacts
Brake relay
646 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Input signals Start forward (DI1) Start reverse (DI2) Stop limit 1 (forward) (DI3) Stop limit 2 (reverse) (DI4) Slowdown (DIO1)
Output signals Speed/freq(0…10V) (AI1) Output frequency (0…20 mA) (AO) Brake command (RO1)
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 647
Configuring Mechanical brake control
Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
Parameter settings Activate the brake control logic. 44.06 Brake control enable = Selected Select the source for the brake acknowledgment signal. 44.07 Brake acknowledge selection = as per the application requirements (eg. DI3 or No acknowledge) Define the brake open and close delay. 44.08 Brake open delay = eg. 1 s 44.13 Brake close delay = eg. 1 s Notes: Close delay time can be longer than the mechanical delay time provided by the
mechanical brake manufacturer. Longer delay time can cause small roll back, and short delay time can cause wear of
the brake pads. Select the source for the brake opening torque. At first, select the following: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Brake open torque 44.10 Brake open torque = 30% Notes: The break opening torque is meant for hoisting application only, and is not necessary to
use it with trolley and long travel movement applications. If used for trolley or long travel movement applications, set the value of both parameters as 0%.
In scalar motor control or in trolley and long travel movements, disable Torque proving and Brake open torque. Select the following: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque = 0% 44.202 Torque proving = Not selected 44.203 Torque proving reference = 0%
Set the brake close level. 44.14 Brake close level = 30 rpm or 60 rpm When an encoder is used, the value needs to be set as 10-30 rpm else set the value as 60 rpm. Set break fault function to fault. 44.17 Brake fault function = Fault
648 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
For hoist drives, set the parameters as below: 44.202 Torque proving = Selected 44.203 Torque proving reference = 30%
Set the extended runtime to keep the drive modulating after the brake is closed. This magnetizes the drive before the next start and enables faster response to the control commands. 44.211 Extended runtime If a pulse encoder does not exist in the system, activate the Brake safe closure function in parameter 44.207 Safety close select.
Trial run Tune the brake control parameters during final testing and when you monitor the actual speed and torque. This helps to get the fastest possible response for the control commands without any jerk or roll-back in the actual speed while opening or closing the brake.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 649
Crane mechanical brake control In addition to the existing mechanical brake control function (see page 98), the crane mechanical brake control function consists of brake system check (see page 650) and extended run time (see page 655) functions.
The Crane brake control timing diagram below shows an example of a close-open- close sequence and illustrates the operation of the crane brake control function.
Crane brake control timing diagram
Note: In case of any fault, the brake closes immediately. By default, the brake control uses relay output RO1.
Tpv Torque proving reference (parameter 44.203 Torque proving reference) Ts Start torque at brake open (parameter 44.03 Brake open torque reference) Tmem Stored torque value at brake close (44.02 Brake torque memory) tmd Motor magnetization delay tod Brake open delay (parameter 44.08 Brake open delay) ncs Brake close speed (parameter 44.14 Brake close level) tccd Brake close command delay (parameter 44.15 Brake close level delay) tcd Brake close delay (parameter 44.13 Brake close delay) tcfd Brake close fault delay (parameter 44.18 Brake fault delay) trod Brake reopen delay (parameter 44.16 Brake reopen delay) tbscd Brake system check time (parameter 44.204 Brake system check time) textmt Extended run time (parameter 44.211 Extended runtime)
Start command (06.16 b5) Modulating (06.16 b6)
Tmem
Following reference (06.16 b4)
Torque reference
Speed reference Brake control signal (44.01 b0) Opening torque request (44.01 b1)
Ramp to stopped request (44.01 b3)
Hold stopped request (44.01 b2)
tod
Ts
ncs
tccd tcd tcfd
trod
tmd
Torque proved
Tp
tbsc
textmt
650 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Brake system checks overview The brake system checks consist of electrical and mechanical tests. The electrical test makes sure that the drive can produce torque before it releases
the brake and starts the crane operation. That is, electrical components like the drive, motor cable, and motor itself are ready to start.
The mechanical test makes sure that the motor brake is not slipping.
Both tests are done in parallel (at the same time) during a check time (44.204). If both tests are performed successfully during the check time, the drive opens the brake, and the crane hoist motion starts.
For more detailed information on the tests, see sections: Brake system checks Torque proving on page 652 Brake system checks Brake slip on page 653.
Note: In scalar motor control or in trolley and long travel movements, disable Torque proving and Brake open torque. Select the following: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10 Brake open torque= 0% 44.202Torque proving = Not selected
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 651
This flowchart shows the brake system check sequence.
Enable Brake control (44.01 bit 0)
Enable Torque proving
Start command activated and motor running
DC magnetization time (21.02) elapsed
Brake system check time (44.204) started
Torque reference = Torque proving reference
Brake system check time (44.204)
elapsed
Motor torque (01.10) > Torque proving
Motor speed > Brake slip speed limit
(44.205)
Brake slip fault delay
Torque proving ok Brake slip ok
Torque proving okD100 Torque prove Brake slip ok D101 Brake slip
Brake open command
No
Yes
No
Yes No
Brake system check time
(44.204) elapsed
Brake system check time
(44.204) elapsed
652 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Timing diagram
This timing diagram shows the operation of the Torque proving and Brake system check functions.
Brake system checks Torque proving Torque proving makes sure that the drive can produce torque before it releases the brake and starts the crane operation. The function is mainly intended for hoist drives, but you can also activate it in drives that control other crane motions if the drives uses encoder feedback.
Torque proving gives a positive or negative torque reference against a closed mechanical brake. If torque proving is successful, in other words, the actual torque of the drive reaches the reference level (44.203), the drive lets the brake open and starts the next step in the starting sequence.
Torque (%)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
t
t (s)
Speed (rpm)
Started & magnetized
D100 Torque prove
Brake slip speed limit (44.205)
26.02
01.01
D101 Brake slip
* Torque proving reference is held for the brake system check time even though the torque has been proved.
*
Torque prove ok (09.01 b1) and Brake open cmd (44.205 b0)
01.10a a a a a a a a b b b b
Symbol Description a Brake system check time (44.204) b Brake slip fault delay (44.206)
Torque prove ok (09.01 b1) and Brake open cmd (44.01 b0)
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 653
A time delay (44.204) defines the time during which the torque reference (44.203) is active and completes the electrical and mechanical tests of the crane system. Unsuccessful torque proving trips the drive (D100).
See also the Timing diagram on page 652.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 44.202 Torque proving, 44.203 Torque proving reference, 44.204 Brake system check time
Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: — Faults: D100 Torque prove
Brake system checks Brake slip The Brake slip function examines the system for brake slips while the control program performs Torque proving with the brake closed. If the motor actual speed exceeds speed limit (44.205) during a check time (44.204), and stays there for longer than a time delay (44.206), the drive trips on a fault (D101).
See, Timing diagram on page 652.
Note: In scalar motor control or in trolley and long travel movements, disable Torque proving and Brake open torque. Select the following: 44.09 Brake open torque source = Zero 44.10Brake open torque= 0% 44.202Torque proving = Not selected
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters:44.204 Brake system check time, 44.205 Brake slip speed limit, 44.206 Brake slip fault delay
Signals: 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: — Faults: D101 Brake slip
654 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Brake safe closure The Brake safe closure function performs a forced closure of the brake and prevents the end-user from operating the drive at very low speeds. We recommend this function especially in hoist drives which, for some reason, have no pulse encoder. (As a safety measure, a speed feedback device is highly recommended in hoist drives.)
The Brake safe closure function monitors the motor speed estimate when the drive is running. When both the estimated motor speed (01.01) and the ramped and shaped speed reference (23.02) are below a user-defined speed limit (44.208) longer than a user-defined delay (44.209), the drive trips on a fault (D102) and closes the motor brake.
Timing diagram
The below diagram shows the operation of the Brake safe closure fault.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters:44.207 Safety close select, 44.208 Safety close speed, 44.209 Safety close delay
Signals: 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: — Faults: D102 Brake safe closure
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
Speed (rpm)
44.209
01.01
D102 Brake safe closure
44.207 = Enable
Start command
44.208 (-)
44.208 (+)
23.02
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 655
Extended run time The Extended run time function minimizes the delay between consecutive start commands. After the brake closes and the brake close delay time elapses, the extended run time function keeps the motor magnetized for a defined time period. During the delay period, the motor is kept magnetized (modulating), to be ready for immediate restart. Because of this action, the next start can be considerably faster by skipping certain start sequence steps, such as magnetization (page 78) and torque proving (page 652).
The function activates when the following parameters are set: 44.06 Brake control enable = Selected 44.211 Extended runtime > 0. 44.212 Extended runtime sw (Bit 0) = 1. After the brake closes, this modulates the
drive for the defined time in parameter 44.211 Extended runtime.
If the drive trips during the extended run time operation, the function timer resets.
Refer the Crane brake control timing diagram (page 649), to see the operation of the Extended run time function.
Notes: The Extended run time function is available only in vector control mode (see page
52) when the drive is in Remote mode and only when parameter 21.03 Stop mode is set as Ramp.
If you enable Post magnetization function at the same time, post magnetization function executes first, and when post magnetization time elapses, the extended runtime should be set for the remaining time if extended runtime is longer than post magnetization time.
WARNING: Make sure the motor is capable of absorbing or dissipating the thermal energy generated by continuous magnetization, for example by forced ventilation.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 44.211 Extended runtime Signals: 44.01 Brake control status, 44.212 Extended runtime sw Warnings: — Faults: —
656 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Speed matching The Speed matching function compares the crane speed reference continuously to the actual motor speed to detect any differences. The function makes sure that the motor follows the speed reference when stopped, during acceleration or deceleration, and when running at the constant speed. The function also makes sure that the brake does not slip when the drive has stopped with the brake closed.
The function has two deviation levels: one for checking the speed deviation during a ramping state, that is, acceleration
and deceleration (76.33) one for checking the speed deviation during a constant speed (76.32).
The drive trips on a fault (D105) if the drive is running, and the motor is running in a steady state, and the difference between the motor
actual speed (90.01) and the ramped and shaped speed reference (24.01) is greater than the steady state deviation level for longer than a delay (76.34) or
the motor is accelerating or decelerating, and the difference between the motor actual speed (90.01) and the ramped and shaped speed reference (24.01) is greater than the ramping state deviation level for longer than a delay (76.34).
The drive generates a warning (D200) if the drive stops, and the difference between the motor actual speed (90.01) and the speed reference is
greater than the steady state deviation level for longer than a delay (76.34) and
the brake control is active and the brake is closed.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 657
Timing diagrams
The diagram shows the operation of the Speed match fault.
The diagram shows the operation of the Brake slip at standstill2 warning.
Speed (rpm)
76.32 (+30 rpm)
76.32 (+30 rpm)
76.33 (+50 rpm)
t (s)
t (s)
76.3476.34
90.01
24.01
D105 Speed match
Speed (rpm)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
Drive stopped Brake control active
D200 Brake slip at standstill2
76.32 (+30 rpm)
76.34
90.01
24.01
Because the drive is stopped, the ramped and shaped speed reference (24.01) is zero.
658 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 76.31 Motor speed match Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: D200 Brake slip at standstill2 Faults: D105 Speed match
Crane warning masking The Crane warning masking function masks the predefined crane control warnings. The masked warnings do not appear in the event logger or on the control panel
Parameter: 31.205 Crane warning masking
Settings and diagnostics
Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1 Warnings: — Faults: —
Dead-band function The accuracy of an analog input signal near zero is poor. With the Dead-band function, you can freeze the speed reference for a defined band area (that is, dead band) or ignore a low speed reference caused by possible crane vibrations on the joystick.
The function re-scales the analog signal based on the dead-band settings, and then calculates a new speed reference.
Example
In the example Analog input reference (AI1) comes from the joystick:
— Par. 12.18 AI1 max = 10 V — Par. 12.17 AI1 min = 0 V — Par. 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500
05 V gives the reverse speed reference. 5 V is the joystick zero position. 510 V gives the forward speed reference.
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 659
When parameter 30.203 Deadband forward is set to 2%, it means that there is a deadband area of 30 rpm (2% of par. 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500 rpm) in the forward direction. Inside this deadband area, the resulting speed reference is zero. Actual signal 09.06 Crane speed reference shows the final speed reference used, and when the speed reference is outside this dead-band area. In this case, actual signal 09.06 starts to show a positive reference starting from the point where the scaled value of analog input AI1 (12.12 AI1 scaled value) exceeds 30 rpm.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 30.203 Deadband forward, 30.204 Deadband reverse Signals: 09.06 Crane speed reference, 09.16 Crane frequency reference Warnings: — Faults: —
Start/stop interlocking The Start/stop interlocking function of the control program lets the end-user start the crane only when the drive is ready to operate.
The function includes the following features: Joystick zero position interlocking (page 659) Joystick reference interlocking (page 660)
Joystick zero position interlocking This function supervises the zero position of the joystick while the drive is running and a stop command is given, or if the drive trips on a fault. A falling edge of the zero position input (20.214) must occur before the end-user can give a new start command after stopping or tripping. If the drive logic does not detect a falling edge (that is, the signal remains high) before a new start command is given, the drive generates a warning (D209).
660 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
This figure shows how the joystick works with NO (normally open) contact elements for start/stop in the forward and reverse directions and one NC (normally closed) contact element for the zero position.
Joystick reference interlocking You can use this function to check the analog reference that comes from the joystick. If the joystick zero position input (20.214) is active and the speed reference or torque reference is greater than +/- 10% of the minimum or maximum scaled value of the used reference, the drive generates a warning (D208) after a time delay (20.215).
NC
NO CO
NC
NO CO
Dead band
Reverse Forward direction
NC
NO CO
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 661
Timing diagram
The diagram shows the operation of the Joystick reference check warning.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 20.214 Joystick zero position, 20.215 Joystick warning delay Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1 Warnings: D208 Joystick reference check, D209 Joystick zero position Faults: —
+10%
-10%
t (s)
t (s)
t (s)
20.214 Joystick zero position
D208 Joystick reference check
20.215 Joystick warning delay
22.01 Speed ref unlimited
10% of AI1 (AI2) scaled at AI1 (AI2) max
10% of AI1 (AI2) scaled at AI1 (AI2) min
662 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Crane stop limit function The crane stop limit function stops the crane movement safely when it reaches the end position. You can use the stop limit function in both horizontal (long travel trolley) and vertical (hoist) movement.
The stop limit function has two stop limits:
1. Forward stop limit (76.04) for forward (positive) direction.
2. Reverse stop limit (76.06) for reverse (negative) direction.
For forward and reverse stop limit, the input is wired to the forward and reverse limit switch respectively.
If one of the two limits is active, the function activates a stop command and stops the movement according to the stop mode selection (76.11). The two limits are independent of each other.
For both forward and reverse limit, the active and inactive conditions are applicable as follows: The limits are active when the limit input to the drive is False (0), i.e. when the
normally-closed limit switch is open. The limits are inactive when the limit input to the drive is True (1), i.e. the
normally-closed limit switch is closed. This condition is valid when the crane movement has not reached the limit.
The following steps describe the forward stop limit operation in the forward lifting (positive) direction. The same can be applied for reverse stop limit in the reverse lowering (negative) direction: If the forward stop limit is activated while the drive is running in the forward (up)
direction, the function stops the motor according to the selected stop mode (76.11) — If limit ramp stop mode is selected (76.11), the drive decelerates according to
the defined limit ramp stop time (76.12) — If limit normal stop mode is selected (76.11), the drive stops according to the
selected stop mode (21.03). When the forward stop limit is active, the drive generates a warning D205
Forward stop limit. You can run the motor only in the reverse direction when the forward stop limit is
active.
Typically, for the crane stop limit function, the parameters are set as follows: No. Name Value 76.01 Limit to limit control status (Actual status of limit control) 76.02 Enable limit to limit control Selected
76.03 Limit to limit trigger type Level low
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 663
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 76.01 Limit to limit control status, 76.02 Enable limit to limit control,76.03 Limit to limit trigger type, 76.04 Forward stop limit, 76.06 Reverse stop limit, 76.11 Limit stop mode,76.12 Limit stop ramp time
Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: D205 Forward stop limit, D206 Reverse stop limit Faults: D108 Stop limits I/O error
76.04 Forward stop limit DI3 (sample value) 76.05 Forward slow down limit Selected
76.06 Reverse stop limit DI4 (sample value) 76.07 Reverse slow down limit Selected 76.11 Limit stop mode Limit ramp stop mode 76.12 Limit stop ramp time 0.5 s (sample value)
No. Name Value
664 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Crane slowdown function The slowdown function limits the forward and reverse movements of the load between two points.
The function supports monitoring of the slowdown sensors in the movement area and reduces the speed accordingly. The system installer must install the sensors and connect them to the drive.
You can use the crane slowdown function in both horizontal (long travel and trolley) and vertical (hoist) movements of the crane.
The crane slowdown function uses Limit to limit trigger type Level low (76.03) and has two modes:
1. Slowdown with two limit inputs.
2. Slowdown with direction.
Slowdown with two limit inputs The two limit inputs of slowdown function are (see figure above):
1. Forward slowdown limit (76.05) for forward (positive) direction.
2. Reverse slowdown limit (76.07) for reverse (negative) direction.
Forward (Up)
Reverse (Down)
Emergency stop
Emergency stop
stop limits 1/2 area (76.04/76.06) Slowdown area (76.05/76.07) Speed reference = Drive speed reference
Speed reference = Drive speed reference limited to slowdown reference (76.08/76.09)
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 665
For both forward and reverse limit, the active and inactive conditions are applicable as follows: The limits are active when the limit input to the drive is False (0), i.e. when the
normally-closed limit switch is open. The limits are inactive when the limit input to the drive is True (1), i.e. the
normally-closed limit switch is closed. This condition is applicable for the normal operation of the crane.
Slowdown with direction
The control program activates this mode when you have the same signal source in the parameters 76.05 Forward slow down limit and 76.07 Reverse slow down limit and any of these source signals is set to False (0).
On activation of slowdown with direction, the function limits the speed reference to the slowdown reference limit (76.08/76.09) in the direction of motion at the time of activation. As long as the supply voltage is not switched off, the drive remembers the direction of motion and allows full speed in the opposite direction.
If you activate the slowdown command after the drive stops, the function allows only slow speed in both directions. The function also limits the speed reference in both directions if you activate the slowdown command when the drive powers up.
Typically, for the crane slowdown function, parameters are set as follows:
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 76.01 Limit to limit control status, 76.02 Enable limit to limit control,76.03 Limit to limit trigger type, 76.05 Forward slow down limit, 76.07 Reverse slow down limit, 76.08 Slow down speed, 76.09 Slow down frequency
Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: D201 Forward slow down limit, D202 Reverse slow down limit Faults: —
For the control connection diagram, see Configuring slowdown with two limits and stop limit logic on page 643.
No. Name Value 76.01 Limit to limit control status (Actual status of limit control) 76.02 Enable limit to limit control Selected 76.03 Limit to limit trigger type Level low 76.05 Forward slow down limit DIO1
76.07 Reverse slow down limit DIO1 76.08 Slow down speed 300 rpm 76.09 Slow down frequency 0.00 Hz
666 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Fast stop The Fast stop function stops the drive immediately, even if the drive is at high speed. For example, the function can be used to stop the swift downward movement of a bucket crane before the ropes unwind and pile up on top of the crane. The Fast stop function is not an emergency stop function.
The fast stop mode activates when the fast stop input changes to false (0). The drive stops the motor according to the selected fast stop mode (20.211) and displays warning D20A Fast stop. The function reverts to normal operation once the fast stop input is changed to 1 (true).
The function has three modes: Ramping and mechanical braking drive decelerates to zero speed according
to a defined ramp time. The mechanical brake closes when the drive reaches the brake close speed.
Torque limit and mechanical braking drive decelerates to zero speed against the drive torque limits. The mechanical brake closes when the drive reaches the brake close speed.
Mechanical braking only the function forces the mechanical brake to close.
Typically, for the crane fast stop feature, parameters are set as follows:
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 20.210 Fast stop input, 20.211 Fast stop mode, 23.206 Fast stop
deceleration time Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1 Warnings: D20A Fast stop Faults: —
No. Name Value 20.210 Fast stop input DIO2
20.211 Fast stop mode Ramp 23.206 Fast stop deceleration time 0.5 s
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 667
Power on acknowledgment The Power on acknowledgment function makes sure that the main power is connected and the drive is ready for operation. You can use this function, for example, to automatically reset faults that are generated during the drive in standby.
The source to Power on acknowledgment signal (20.212) can be from the following sources: From the Safe torque off (STO), parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word, bit 7
inverted. or
Digital input. For example parameter 20.212 Power on acknowledge, DIO2.
If the drive trips on a fault, and you activate the Power on acknowledgment signal (a rising edge), the drive generates an internal fault reset after a time delay (20.213).
If the Power on acknowledgment circuit is open (20.212 = False), then the drive shows the warning D20B Power on acknowledge.
Timing diagram
Typically, for the crane power acknowledgment feature, parameters are set as follows:
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 20.212 Power on acknowledge, 20.213 Power on ackn reset delay Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1 Warnings: D20B Power on acknowledge Faults: —
No. Name Value 20.12 Run enable 1 source value of parameter 06.18 bit 7.
(if run enabled is used) 20.212 Power on acknowledge value of parameter 06.18 bit 7. 20.213 Power on ackn reset delay 500 ms
Internal fault reset
Power on acknowledgement
20.213
668 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Control connections
The diagram below shows control connection diagram to enable the power acknowledge feature (through STO or DIO2) with external 24V supply.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections BTAC
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA X103 DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common VIN DI1 Start forward
VOUT DI2 Start reverse DI3 Stop limit 1 (forward) GND DI4 Stop limit 2 (reverse) DIO1 Slowdown DIO2 Power acknowledge DIO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage DIO COM Digital input/output common
Analog I/O AI1 Speed / freq (0…10V)
AGND Analog input circuit common AI2 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AO Output frequency (0…20 mA) AGND Analog output circuit common SCR Signal cable shield (screen) +10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe torque off (STO)
S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory. Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open)
SGND S1 S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)
RA RB
External 24V supply
Brake relay
Main contactor aux. contacts
Main contactor aux. contacts
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 669
Notes
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Input signals: Start forward (DI1) Start reverse (DI2) Stop limit 1 (forward) (DI3) Stop limit 2 (reverse) (DI4) Slowdown (DIO1) Power acknowledge (DIO2)
Output signals: Speed / freq (0…10V) (AI1) Output frequency (0…20mA) (AO) Brake command
670 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Speed reference handling The crane speed reference can be provided through any of the following sources: Joystick connected through digital and analog I/O PLC device connected to a fieldbus Pendant control connected to digital inputs or the step references Crane motor potentiometer.
Unipolar joysticks Unipolar joysticks give the speed reference value with analog signal 010 V where 0 V is -maximum speed, 5 V is zero speed, and +10 V is +maximum speed. The direction commands are specified with two digital inputs. For example, digital input DI1 can be used for Start forward and DI2 for Start reverse.
Typically, for unipolar joysticks, parameters are set as follows:
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 12.17 AI1 min, 12.18 AI1 max, 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min, 12.20
AI1 scaled at AI1 max, 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1, 22.13 Ext1 speed function Signals: — Warnings: — Faults: —
For the control connection diagram, see Control through the I/O interface using a joystick on page 628.
Parabolic speed reference In general, joystick movements cause a linear change to the speed reference: a 50% change in position gives a 50% speed reference.
Often, accurate load handling is needed in lower speed areas. For example, when the end-user needs to position the load manually, or when the lack of space causes limitations. In such situations, the end-user can control joystick movements more accurately with a parabolic speed reference instead of a linear reference.
No. Name Value 12.17 AI1 min 0.000 12.18 AI1 max 10.000 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min -1500 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max 1500 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 AI1 scaled
22.13 Ext1 speed function Abs (ref1)
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 671
The Parabolic speed reference function (par. 22.211) changes the interrelationship of the incoming signal (joystick movement) and the speed reference according to a mathematical function. The mathematical functions available are X2 (Parabolic 1), X3 (Parabolic 2) and linear interrelationship (Linear). The joystick has parameters for setting the deadband in the forward (30.203) and reverse (30.204) directions.
Besides the joystick, the source of a parabolic speed reference can also be an analog signal from an external device.
Operation chart
This graph shows the parabolic reference curves compared to the linear speed reference curve.
0 10020 40 60 80 0
20
40
60
80
100
Incoming signal (%)
Crane speed reference (%)
a
Symbol Description 1 Linear interrelationship (Linear) 2 X2 (Parabolic 1) 3 X3 (Parabolic 2) a Most affected area
1 2 3
672 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 22.211 Speed reference shape Signals: 09.06 Crane speed reference Warnings: — Faults: —
Step reference speed selection/Pendant control In step reference, you can select speed between four step reference speeds. A pendant controller is commonly used with the step reference logic.
The figure below shows a pendant controller.
To activate a pendant control/step control, set parameter 22.21 Constant speed function, bit 2 to 1. The polarity of the references depends on the direction in which the end-user gives the start command using digital inputs (20.03 and 20.04)
The table below shows how the control program determines which step reference speed is used. To activate the subsequent speed step, the previous speed step must be retained.
Typically, for the step reference logic, parameters are set as follows:
22.21 Constant speed function
22.22 Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant speed sel2
22.24 Constant speed sel3
Used reference
1 0 0 0 22.26 Constant speed 1 1 1 0 0 22.27 Constant speed 2 1 1 1 0 22.28 Constant speed 3 1 1 1 1 22.29 Constant speed 4 1 0 1 1 22.26 Constant speed 1 1 1 0 1 22.27 Constant speed 2 1 0 0 1 22.26 Constant speed 1 1 0 1 0 22.26 Constant speed 1
No. Name Value 22.21 Constant speed function 0b0100 (Bit 2 = 1) 22.22 Constant speed sel1 DI3 22.23 Constant speed sel2 DI4 22.24 Constant speed sel3 Always off
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 673
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 22.21 Constant speed function, 22.22 Constant speed sel1, 22.23
Constant speed sel2, 22.24 Constant speed sel3, 22.26 Constant speed 1, 22.27 Constant speed 2, 22.28 Constant speed 3, 22.29 Constant speed 4
Signals: — Warnings: — Faults: —
Crane motor potentiometer The crane motor potentiometer function can be used in retrofit cases with older controllers. For example, a pendant controller with push-buttons for start forward, start reverse, and increase speed (three buttons). The function is used instead of the normal motor potentiometer which contains separate incoming signals for increasing and decreasing the reference. These signals are not effective when the drive is stopped.
To activate crane potentiometer, use parameter 22.220 Crane motpot enable.
Forward direction
You can increase the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) with any of these two methods: Activating the forward command: When you activate the forward command, the
motor potentiometer reference (22.230) increases to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224). or
Activating the crane motor potentiometer acceleration command (22.223) together with forward command: This increases the motor potentiometer reference (22.230).
22.26 Constant speed 1 300.00 22.27 Constant speed 2 750 22.28 Constant speed 3 1500 22.29 Constant speed 4 1500
No. Name Value
674 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
When you activate a forward command, when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is less than the crane motor
potentiometer minimum speed (22.224), the crane accelerates to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224).
when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is higher than the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224) and the crane travels in forward direction the speed reference remains at the last speed before the forward command.
when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is higher than the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224) and the crane travels in reverse direction, the crane decelerates to zero speed, changes direction and then accelerates to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224).
Notes:
1. When you release the acceleration command (22.223), the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) remains in the last reached level. To accelerate further, you need to activate the acceleration command (22.223) again.
2. When you release the forward command, the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) decreases to zero as per the deceleration time (23.202).
Reverse direction
You can increase the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) to the reverse direction with any of these two methods: Activating the reverse command: The motor potentiometer reference (22.230)
increases to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224). or
Activating the crane motor potentiometer acceleration command (22.223) together with the reverse command: This increases the motor potentiometer reference (22.230).
When you activate a reverse command, when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is less than the crane motor
potentiometer minimum speed (22.224), the crane accelerates to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224).
when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is higher than the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224) and the crane travels in reverse direction the speed reference remains at the last speed before the reverse command.
when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is higher than the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224) and the crane travels in the forward direction, the crane decelerates to zero speed, changes direction and then accelerates to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224).
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 675
Notes:
1. When you release the acceleration command (22.223), the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) remains in the last reached level. To accelerate further, you need to activate the acceleration command (22.223) again.
2. When you release the reverse command immediately, the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) decreases to zero as per the deceleration time (23.202). On activating the acceleration command again (22.223), the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) remains in the last reached level.
The following example shows the behavior of the motor potentiometer value:
Typically, for the motor potentiometer function, parameters are set as follows: No. Name Value 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 MotPot Crane 22.220 Crane motpot enable Selected 22.223 Crane motpot accel sel DIO2 22.224 Crane motpot min speed 300.00 22.226 Crane motpot min value -1500.00 22.227 Crane motpot max value 1500.00 23.201 Crane motpot acc time 1 4.0 (visible only if parameter 22.220 Crane
motpot enable is set to Selected) 23.202 Crane motpot dec tme 1 4.0 (visible only if parameter 22.220 Crane
motpot enable is set to Selected)
22.227 Crane motpot max value
22.224 Crane motpot min speed
22.226 Crane motpot min value 23.201 C
rane m otpot acc
tim e 1
23.202 C rane m
otpot dec tm
e 1
0 1
1 0
0
1Start fwd command
Start rev command Time
Time
Time
Time 22.223 Crane motpot accel sel
23.201 C rane m
otpot acc tim
e 1
23.202 C rane m
otpot dec tm
e 1
23.201 C rane m
otpot acc tim
e 1
23.201 C rane m
otpot acc tim
e 1
23.202 C rane m
otpot dec tm
e 1
676 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
The start forward and start reverse commands are defined in parameter group 20 Start/stop/direction.
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1, 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1, 22.220 Crane
motpot enable, 22.223 Crane motpot accel sel, 22.224 Crane motpot min speed, 22.226 Crane motpot min value, 22.227 Crane motpot max value, 23.201 Crane motpot acc time 1, 23.202 Crane motpot dec tme 1, group 20 Start/stop/direction
Signals: — 22.230 Crane motpot ref act, 22.225 Crane motpot sw Warnings: — Faults: —
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 677
Control connections
The diagram below shows the I/O control connection diagram for the crane motor potentiometer.
Terminals Description Digital I/O connections
+24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. voltage output common DCOM Digital input common DI1 Start forward DI2 Start reverse DI3 Stop limit 1 (forward) DI4 Stop limit 2 (reverse) DIO1 Slowdown DIO2 Accelerate (22.223) DIO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage DIO COM Digital input/output common
Analog I/O AI1 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AI2 Not configured AGND Analog input circuit common AO Output frequency (0…20 mA) AGND Analog output circuit common SCR Signal cable shield (screen) +10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
Safe torque off (STO) S+ Safe torque off. Connected at factory.
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. Status from 06.18 Start inhibit status word (1 = STO active, circuits are open), 20.212 Power on acknowledge, and 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
SGND S1 S2
Relay output 1 RC Brake command
(10.24 RO1 source = Brake command)RA RB
Main contactor aux. contacts
Brake relay
678 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
76.25
Notes:
Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm 1.5 mm.
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (0.4 lbfft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Input signals: Start forward (DI1) Start reverse (DI2) Stop limit 1 (forward) (DI3) Stop limit 2 (reverse) (DI4) Slowdown (DIO1) Accelerate (DIO2)
Output signals: Output frequency (AO) Brake command
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 679
Conical motor control This function handles the brake control for conical motors, which do not have a external mechanical brake. A conical motor has an internal brake, which opens or closes according to the motor flux level. The brake opens when the motor flux level is higher than the normal flux level and closes when the flux is below the normal flux level. You can find the opening and closing flux levels on the motor rating plate or ask the motor manufacturer for the levels. The opening flux level has to be kept active for a certain period of time. The time depends on the motor.
When a conical motor is switched on, axial force is created as a result of the electromagnetic field (flux) and the air gap between the cone-shaped rotor and stator. This axial force overcomes the return force of the brake spring and moves the rotor shaft and brake disc in an axial direction. The brake is then released, allowing the motor to start up. After the motor is switched off or if the voltage fails, the magnetic force collapses, and the motor mechanically brakes to a standstill by the return force of the brake spring.
Notes: Mechanical brake control (44.06) must be disabled when the Conical motor
control function is used. If mechanical brake control is not disabled, the drive trips on a fault (D10A).
Brake close delay (44.13) must be greater than 0 seconds.
2
3
4
No. Description 1 Conical rotor 2 Brake rotor spring 3 Motor housing 4 Internal brake
1
680 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
When the Conical motor control function is enabled and the start command is given, the motor flux ramps up over the normal level (100%) to the start flux level (76.22) during a flux ramp-up time (76.25). The ramp-up time makes sure that the brake opens faster and there is minimal roll-back that can cause a load dip. The start flux level is kept as the reference for a hold time (76.24) to make sure that there is enough time for the brake to open.
After the start flux hold time is over, the normal flux level (100%) is activated for normal running. The flux ramps down from the start flux level to the normal level (100%) during a flux ramp-down time (76.26).
When the stop command is given, the drive decelerates the motor. When the motor speed (01.01) decreases below the zero speed limit (21.06), the motor starts to use the stop flux level (76.23) as the flux reference. The flux ramps down from the normal level (100%) to the stop flux level during the ramp-down time. When the actual motor flux reaches the stop flux level, the brake closes.
Timing diagram
This diagram shows brake opening and closing as well as the normal running flux levels.
Speed (rpm)
t (s)
t (s)
01.01
76.24
100% flux 76.22
Flux ref (%) (76.27)
Start command
76.23
Rotor released
76.2676.25 76.26
Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications 681
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 76.21…76.26 Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 76.27 Flux reference Warnings: — Faults: D10A Brake not selected
682 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications
Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to new.abb.com/channel- partners/search.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate6 to new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.
Document library on the Internet
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at library.abb.com.
abb.com/drives
Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change without notice. 3A
X D </
-
Contents
Table of Contents -
Bookmarks
Quick Links
ACS380 FW.book Page 1 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM
—
ABB MACHINERY DRIVES
ACS380 machinery control program
Firmware manual
ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de
Related Manuals for ABB ACS380
Summary of Contents for ABB ACS380
-
Page 1
ACS380 FW.book Page 1 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM — ABB MACHINERY DRIVES ACS380 machinery control program Firmware manual ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 2
ACS380 FW.book Page 2 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM — List of related manuals Drive hardware manuals and guides Code (English) Drive/converter/inverter safety instructions 3AXD50000037978 ACS380 Hardware manual 3AXD50000029274 Drive firmware manuals and guides ACS380 Firmware manual 3AXD50000029275 ACS380 Quick installation and start-up guide… -
Page 3
ACS380 FW.book Page 3 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Firmware manual ACS380 machinery control program Table of contents 3. Start-up, ID run and use 2018 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. 3AXD50000029275 Rev E EFFECTIVE: 2018-05-05 ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 4
ACS380 FW.book Page 4 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 5: Table Of Contents
ABB limited macro …………35 Default control connections for the ABB limited macro ……35 Fieldbus control macro .
-
Page 6: Table Of Contents
ACS380 FW.book Page 6 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 6 Table of contents Motor potentiometer macro ……….41 Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro .
-
Page 7: Table Of Contents
ACS380 FW.book Page 7 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Table of contents Switching frequency ……….. . . 79 Speed compensated stop .
-
Page 8: Table Of Contents
ACS380 FW.book Page 8 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 8 Table of contents 13 Standard AO …………146 15 I/O extension module .
-
Page 9: Table Of Contents
Contents of the fieldbus Status word (ABB Drives profile) ….. . . 488 The state diagram (valid for ABB drives profile only) ……489 Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control .
-
Page 10: Table Of Contents
ACS380 FW.book Page 10 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 10 Table of contents External PID setpoint and feedback source selection ……508 External PID controller .
-
Page 11: Contents
Contents of the manual • Terms and abbreviations • Related manuals Applicability The manual applies to the ACS380 machinery control program 2.05 or later. To check the version of the control program, see parameter 07.05 Firmware version. Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions.
-
Page 12: Target Audience
ACS380 FW.book Page 12 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 12 Introduction to the manual Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols. The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
-
Page 13
ACS380 FW.book Page 13 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Introduction to the manual Terms and abbreviations Term/abbreviation Explanation ACS-AP-x Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for communication with the drive. The ACS380 support types ACS-AP-1, ACS-AP-S and ACS-AP- W (with a Bluetooth interface). -
Page 14
ACS380 FW.book Page 14 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 14 Introduction to the manual FENA -21/-21-M Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP and PROFINET IO protocols FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module FPBA-01/-01-M Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module Frame (size) Refers to the drive physical size, for example R0 and R1. -
Page 15: Cybersecurity Disclaimer
ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
-
Page 16
ACS380 FW.book Page 16 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 16 Introduction to the manual ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 17
ACS380 FW.book Page 17 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control panel Control panel Contents • Control panel • Home view and Message view • Options menu • Main menu • Submenus Control panel By default, ACS 380 has an integrated panel. If required, you can use external control panels such as assistant control panel or a basic panel. -
Page 18: Home View And Message View
ACS380 FW.book Page 18 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 18 Control panel Home view and Message view The Home view is the main view. Open the Main menu and Options menu from the Home view. Home view 1. Control selection — local or remote 2.
-
Page 19: Options Menu And Main Menu
ACS380 FW.book Page 19 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control panel Options menu and Main menu Options menu Main menu 1. To open: press the Back 2. To open: press the OK button in the Home view. button in the Home view.
-
Page 20
ACS380 FW.book Page 20 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 20 Control panel Submenus The Main menu items have submenus. Some submenus also have menus and/or option lists. The content of the submenus depend on the drive type. Motor Data 1. -
Page 21
ACS380 FW.book Page 21 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control panel Motor Control 1. Start mode — Const time, Automatic 2. Stop mode — Coast, Ramp, DC hold 3. Acceleration time 4. Deceleration time 5. Maximum allowed speed 6. Maximum allowed current 7. -
Page 22
ACS380 FW.book Page 22 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 22 Control panel Diagnostics 1. Active Fault — shows the fault code 2. Fault History — list of latest fault codes (newest first) 3. Active Warnings — shows the warning code 4. -
Page 23
ACS380 FW.book Page 23 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Start-up, ID run and use Start-up, ID run and use Contents • Start up the drive • Do the identification (ID) run • Start and stop the drive • Change the rotation direction •… -
Page 24
ACS380 FW.book Page 24 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 24 Start-up, ID run and use Scalar: Frequency reference. Use this mode when: — The number of motors can change. — The nominal motor current is less than 20% of the nominal drive current. -
Page 25: Do The Identification (Id) Run
ACS380 FW.book Page 25 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Start-up, ID run and use Do the identification (ID) run Background information The drive automatically estimates motor characteristics using Standstill ID run when the drive is started for the first time, and after any motor parameter (group 99 Motor data) is changed.
-
Page 26
ACS380 FW.book Page 26 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 26 Start-up, ID run and use Do not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. If you need to stop the ID run, press Stop. After the ID run is completed, the status light stops blinking. -
Page 27: Start And Stop The Drive
ACS380 FW.book Page 27 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Start-up, ID run and use Start and stop the drive 1. Press the Start button to start the drive. 2. Press the Stop button to stop the drive. Change the rotation direction 1.
-
Page 28: Set The Drive Parameters
ACS380 FW.book Page 28 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 28 Start-up, ID run and use Set the drive parameters 1. Select the Main menu from the Home view. 2. Scroll to Parameters, and press the OK button to open the submenu.
-
Page 29: Change The Units
ACS380 FW.book Page 29 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Start-up, ID run and use Change the units 1. Select the Main menu from the Home view. 2. Scroll to Motor data and press the OK button to open the submenu.
-
Page 30
ACS380 FW.book Page 30 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 30 Start-up, ID run and use ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 31
Control macros are sets of default parameter values that apply to a specific control configuration. They make it faster and easier to set up a drive for use. By default, macro for I/O controlled drive is set as ABB standard macro and macro for Fieldbus controlled drive is set as Fieldbus control macro. -
Page 32: Abb Standard Macro
96.04 Macro select to value ABB standard. This is the default macro for the standard drive variant (ACS380-04xS) and configured drive variant ACS380-4xC +L538. ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 33: Default Control Connections For The Abb Standard Macro
ACS380 FW.book Page 33 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Default control connections for the ABB standard macro This connection diagram is valid for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the ABB standard macro selected). Terminals…
-
Page 34
ACS380 FW.book Page 34 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 34 Control macros Reference from the integrated panel. In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain. In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection. Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04… -
Page 35: Abb Limited Macro
The ABB limited macro is suitable for an IO-controlled drive which has the minimum number of I/O available. The ABB limited macro is optimized for the base drive variant (ACS380-04xN) with no optional module connected. You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select…
-
Page 36: Fieldbus Control Macro
You can activate the macro manually from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter 96.04 Macro select to the correct value based on the selected fieldbus. The macro is optimal for the configured variant (ACS380-04xC) which is equipped with a fieldbus adapter module. Default control connections for the Fieldbus macro This is the default control connection diagram for the configured variant (ACS380-04xC) with the Fieldbus macro selected.
-
Page 37
When the fieldbus adapter module is connected, the drive control signals are expected to come from the fieldbus typically. When taking the drive variant ACS380-04xC +K495 (with the BCAN-11 CANopen interface module) into use, it is recommended that the cord is not connected during the first start. -
Page 38: Alternate Macro
Alternate. The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant (ACS380-04xS) and configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538. You can use it also with the base drive variant (ACS380-04xN) but then you cannot use all the I/O available in the macro.
-
Page 39: Default Control Connections For The Alternate Macro
ACS380 FW.book Page 39 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Default control connections for the Alternate macro This connection diagram is valid for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the Alternate macro selected). Terminals Description Digital I/O connections Aux.
-
Page 40
ACS380 FW.book Page 40 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 40 Control macros In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain. In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection. Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04… -
Page 41: Motor Potentiometer Macro
108. The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant (ACS380-04xS) and configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538. ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 42: Default Control Connections For The Motor Potentiometer Macro
42 Control macros Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro This connection diagram is valid for drives with the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the Motor potentiometer macro selected). Terminals Description Digital I/O connections Aux.
-
Page 43
ACS380 FW.book Page 43 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. When the input signal is on, the speed/frequency increase or decrease along a parameter-defined change rate. See parameters 22.75, 22.76, and 22.77. If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the frequency/speed reference is unchanged. -
Page 44: Pid Control Macro
The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538. Default control connections for PID control macro This connection diagram is valid for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the PID control macro selected). Terminals Description Digital I/O connections Aux.
-
Page 45
ACS380 FW.book Page 45 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. See parameters 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 source table. -
Page 46: Modbus Macro
96.04 Macro select to value Modbus TCP. The macro is optimized for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538. ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 47: Default Control Connections For The Modbus Macro
ACS380 FW.book Page 47 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Default control connections for the Modbus macro This connection diagram is valid for the standard drive variant ACS380-04xS and the configured drive variant ACS380-04xC +L538 (with the Modbus macro selected). Terminals Description Digital I/O connections Aux.
-
Page 48
ACS380 FW.book Page 48 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 48 Control macros The embedded parameters also change, see the embedded macros 20.03 Ext1 in1 source (Not selected). Select the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the parameter 12.25. -
Page 49: Parameter Default Values For Different Macros
ACS380 FW.book Page 49 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control macros Parameter default values for different macros Chapter Parameters shows the default values of all parameters for the ABB standard macro (factory macro). Some parameters have different default values for other macros.
-
Page 50
ACS380 FW.book Page 50 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 50 Control macros 96.04 Macro select 12 = 13 = 14 = ABB standard Alternate Motor potenti- ometer 22.71 Motor Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled potentiometer (init at power- function 22.73 Motor… -
Page 51
ACS380 FW.book Page 51 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Program features Contents • Local and external control locations • Operating modes and motor control modes • Drive configuration and programming • Control interfaces • Motor control •… -
Page 52: Local And External Control Locations
ACS380 FW.book Page 52 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 52 Program features Local and external control locations There are two main control locations: local and external. Select the control by pressing the Loc/Rem key on the panels, or from the Drive composer PC tool.
-
Page 53: External Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 53 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features External control When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through: • the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) • the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus adapter module) •…
-
Page 54: Operating Modes And Motor Control Modes
ACS380 FW.book Page 54 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 54 Program features Operating modes and motor control modes The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference. The operating mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and EXT2) when the motor control mode is Vector (99.04).
-
Page 55
ACS380 FW.book Page 55 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection Process PID controller Torque reference Speed reference Frequency reference source selection and source selection I source selection and modification modification Speed reference source… -
Page 56: Speed Control Mode
ACS380 FW.book Page 56 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 56 Program features Speed control mode In speed control mode, the motor follows a speed reference given to the drive. This mode can be used with either estimated or measured speed used as feedback.
-
Page 57: Settings
ACS380 FW.book Page 57 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Settings Parameter groups 19 Operation mode (page153) and 99.04 Motor control mode (page 347). Autophasing Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position of the magnetic flux of a permanent magnet synchronous motor or the magnetic axis of a synchronous reluctance motor.
-
Page 58
ACS380 FW.book Page 58 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 58 Program features The autophasing routine is performed with permanent magnet synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors in the following cases: 1. One-time measurement of the rotor and encoder position difference when an absolute encoder, a resolver, or an encoder with commutation signals is used 2. -
Page 59
ACS380 FW.book Page 59 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features An autophasing fault (3385 Autophasing) can occur with a running motor if the estimated angle of the motor differs too much from the measured angle. This could be caused by, for example, the following: •… -
Page 60: Drive Configuration And Programming
ACS380 FW.book Page 60 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 60 Program features Drive configuration and programming The drive control program is divided into two parts: • firmware program • application program Drive control program Application program Firmware Speed control…
-
Page 61: Adaptive Programming
ACS380 FW.book Page 61 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Adaptive programming Conventionally, you can control the operation of the drive by parameters. However, the standard parameters have a fixed set of choices or a setting range. To further customize the operation of the drive, an adaptive program can be constructed out of a set of function blocks.
-
Page 62
ACS380 FW.book Page 62 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 62 Program features Inputs available to the adaptive program Input Source Inhibited 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1 Ready to start 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 3 Tripped 06.11 Main status… -
Page 63
ACS380 FW.book Page 63 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Outputs available to the adaptive program Output Target External event 4 31.07 External event 4 source External event 5 31.09 External event 5 source Data Storage Data storage 1 real32 47.01 Data storage 1 real32… -
Page 64: Control Interfaces
ACS380 FW.book Page 64 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 64 Program features Control interfaces The number of inputs and outputs depend on the product variant and if the drive is equipped with any optional I/O extension modules. S variant: •…
-
Page 65: Programmable Relay Outputs
ACS380 FW.book Page 65 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Programmable relay outputs There is one relay output as standard. The signal indicated by the output can be selected by parameters. Settings Parameter groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 131).
-
Page 66: Motor Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 66 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 66 Program features Motor control Motor types The drive supports the following motor types: • Asynchronous AC induction motors • Permanent magnet (PM) motors • Synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM).
-
Page 67: Reference Ramping
ACS380 FW.book Page 67 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features The main difference between traditional control and vector control is that torque control operates at the same time level as the power switch control. There is no separate voltage and frequency controlled PWM modulator; the output stage switching is wholly based on the electromagnetic state of the motor.
-
Page 68: Constant Speeds/Frequencies
ACS380 FW.book Page 68 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 68 Program features Settings • Speed reference ramping — Parameters 23.11…23.15, 23.32 Shape time 1 (page 193), 23.33 Shape time 2 (page 193) and 46.01 Speed scaling (page 289). • Torque reference ramping — Parameters 01.30 Nominal torque scale…
-
Page 69
ACS380 FW.book Page 69 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make the drive avoid these speed ranges, • enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51, and •… -
Page 70: Rush Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 70 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 70 Program features Rush control Rush control is automatically on when the operation mode is torque. In torque control, the motor could potentially rush if the load were suddenly lost. The control program has a rush control function that decreases the torque reference whenever the motor speed exceeds the set minimum speed or maximum speed.
-
Page 71
ACS380 FW.book Page 71 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features When jogging is activated, the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed along the defined jogging acceleration ramp. After the activation signal switches off, the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp. -
Page 72
ACS380 FW.book Page 72 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 72 Program features Start Phase Description enable 10-11 Drive follows the speed reference. 11-12 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15). 12-13 Drive is stopped. -
Page 73: Speed Control Performance Figures
ACS380 FW.book Page 73 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Speed control performance figures The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control. load Speed control Performance Static accuracy 20% of motor nominal slip Dynamic accuracy <…
-
Page 74: Scalar Motor Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 74 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 74 Program features Scalar motor control Scalar motor control is the default motor control method. It is suitable for applications which do not require the control accuracy available in vector control. In scalar control, you control the drive output frequency reference, and you do not need to do any motor identification run at the first start.
-
Page 75: User Load Curve
ACS380 FW.book Page 75 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features User load curve The User load curve provides a supervisory function that monitors an input signal as a function of frequency or speed, and load. It shows the status of the monitored signal and can give a warning or fault based on the violation of a user defined profile.
-
Page 76: U/F Ratio
ACS380 FW.book Page 76 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 76 Program features Settings Parameter group 37 User load curve (page 255). U/f ratio The U/f function is only available in scalar motor control mode, which uses frequency control.
-
Page 77: Dc Magnetization
ACS380 FW.book Page 77 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features • The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
-
Page 78
ACS380 FW.book Page 78 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 78 Program features current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.10. When the reference exceeds parameter 21.09, normal drive operation continues. Motor speed… -
Page 79: Energy Optimization
ACS380 FW.book Page 79 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features pre-heating is delayed by the time defined by parameter 21.15 Pre-heating time delay to prevent excessive current. The function can be defined to be always active when the drive is stopped or it can be activated by a digital input, fieldbus, timed function or supervision function.
-
Page 80: Speed Compensated Stop
ACS380 FW.book Page 80 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 80 Program features Example 1: If you need to fix the switching frequency to a certain value as with some external filters, e.g. with EMC C1 filters (see the hardware manual), set both the reference and the minimum switching frequency to this value and the drive will retain this switching frequency.
-
Page 81: Application Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 81 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction. Speed compensation is supported in both vector and scalar motor control. Settings Parameters 21.30 Speed compensated stop mode (page 176), 21.31 Speed…
-
Page 82
ACS380 FW.book Page 82 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 82 Program features Sleep and boost functions for process PID control The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range. -
Page 83
ACS380 FW.book Page 83 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Setpoint Sleep boost time (40.45) Sleep boost step (40.46) Time Wake-up delay Actual value (40.48) Non-inverted (40.31 Not inverted (Ref — Fbk)) Wake-up level (Setpoint — Wake-up deviation [40.47]) -
Page 84: Mechanical Brake Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 84 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 84 Program features Tracking In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection 41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection).The internal I term…
-
Page 85
ACS380 FW.book Page 85 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Outputs of the brake control logic The mechanical brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output (or a digital input/output in output mode) which is then wired to the brake actuator through a relay. -
Page 86
ACS380 FW.book Page 86 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 86 Program features State name Description BRAKE OPENING DELAY Opening conditions have been met and open signal activated (44.01 Brake control status b0 is set). The opening torque request is removed (44.01 Brake… -
Page 87
ACS380 FW.book Page 87 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Timing diagram The simplified timing diagram below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. Refer to the Brake state diagram on page 85. Start command (06.16 Modulating (06.16… -
Page 88
ACS380 FW.book Page 88 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 88 Program features Wiring example The figure below shows a brake control wiring example. The brake control hardware and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer. WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations. -
Page 89
ACS380 FW.book Page 89 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Settings Parameters 06.11 Main status word (page 124), 06.16 Drive status word 1 (page 125) and parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control (page 278). Events A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed… -
Page 90: Dc Voltage Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 90 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 90 Program features DC voltage control Overvoltage control Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or when the load overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than the applied speed or frequency.
-
Page 91: Voltage Control And Trip Limits
ACS380 FW.book Page 91 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Implementing the undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) Implement the undervoltage control function as follows: • Check that the undervoltage control function of the drive is enabled with parameter 30.31 Undervoltage…
-
Page 92
ACS380 FW.book Page 92 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 92 Program features The following table shows the values of the selected DC voltage levels in volts. Note that the absolute voltages vary according to drive/inverter type and AC supply voltage range. -
Page 93: Brake Chopper
ACS380 FW.book Page 93 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Brake chopper A brake chopper can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating motor. When the DC voltage rises high enough, the chopper connects the DC circuit to an external brake resistor.
-
Page 94: Limit To Limit Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 94 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 94 Program features Limit to limit control The Limit to limit control function restricts the forward and reverse movement of a load inside two extreme points. The function supports the monitoring of two sensors at both ends of the movement range: one for the slow down point and the other for the stop point.
-
Page 95: Limit To Limit Control Function
ACS380 FW.book Page 95 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Limit to limit control function LIMIT-TO-LIMIT PHASE 1 +SLOW ZERO -SLOW STATES Limitations • The external stop or slow down signals (in either direction) must not be on when the Limit to limit function is activated for the first time.
-
Page 96: Tips
ACS380 FW.book Page 96 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 96 Program features Tips • You can connect Slow down and Stop signals into the same signal source by setting the Stop limit and Slow down parameters to the same digital input (76.01…
-
Page 97: Safety And Protections
ACS380 FW.book Page 97 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Safety and protections Fixed/Standard protections Overcurrent If the output current exceeds the internal overcurrent limit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive. DC overvoltage…
-
Page 98: Motor Thermal Protection
ACS380 FW.book Page 98 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 98 Program features Notes: • The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency stop devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill the required emergency stop categories.
-
Page 99
ACS380 FW.book Page 99 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I/O terminals are used as the connection interface. Motor temperature can be measured using Pt100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output. -
Page 100
ACS380 FW.book Page 100 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 100 Program features Temperature monitoring using Pt1000 sensors 1…3 Pt1000 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output. The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 0.1 mA through the sensor. -
Page 101: Programmable Protection Functions
ACS380 FW.book Page 101 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius. The figure and table below show typical KTY83 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
-
Page 102
ACS380 FW.book Page 102 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 102 Program features needs to be enabled or disabled based on the motor control mode and the nominal current as follows: • With the vector control, the motor phase loss detection is always on and there are no operational limits. -
Page 103: Automatic Fault Resets
ACS380 FW.book Page 103 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features Local control loss detection (parameter 49.05) The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break. AI supervision (parameters 12.03…12.04) The parameters select how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input.
-
Page 104: Diagnostics
ACS380 FW.book Page 104 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 104 Program features Diagnostics Signal supervision Six signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a supervised signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01 Supervision status…
-
Page 105
ACS380 FW.book Page 105 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude. -
Page 106: Miscellaneous
ACS380 FW.book Page 106 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 106 Program features Miscellaneous Backup and restore You can make backups of the settings manually to the assistant panel. The panel also keeps one automatic backup. You can restore a backup to another drive, or a new drive replacing a faulty one.
-
Page 107: Data Storage Parameters
ACS380 FW.book Page 107 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Program features A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10…99 except • I/O extension module settings (15 I/O extension module) • Data storage parameters (47 Data storage) •…
-
Page 108: Motor Potentiometer
ACS380 FW.book Page 108 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 108 Program features Settings Parameters 96.54…96.55, 96.68…96.69 and 96.71…96.72. Events A686 Checksum mismatch (page 395), B686 Checksum mismatch (page 400) and 6200 Checksum mismatch (page 405). Motor potentiometer The motor potentiometer is a counter whose value can be adjusted up and down using two digital signals selected by parameters.
-
Page 109: User Lock
For better cybersecurity, you can set a master password to prevent eg. the changing of parameter values and/or the loading of firmware and other files. WARNING! ABB will not be liable for damages or losses caused by the failure to activate the user lock using a new pass code. See Cybersecurity disclaimer (page 15).
-
Page 110
ACS380 FW.book Page 110 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 110 Program features ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 111
ACS380 FW.book Page 111 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Parameters Contents • Terms and abbreviations • Fieldbus addresses • Summary of parameter groups • Parameter listing • Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 112: Terms And Abbreviations
ACS380 FW.book Page 112 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 112 Parameters Terms and abbreviations Term Definition Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.
-
Page 113: Summary Of Parameter Groups
ACS380 FW.book Page 113 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Summary of parameter groups Group Contents Page 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive. 03 Input references Values of references received from various sources. 04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
-
Page 114
ACS380 FW.book Page 114 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 114 Parameters Group Contents Page 46 Monitoring/scaling settings Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings. 47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters’… -
Page 115: Parameter Listing
ACS380 FW.book Page 115 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Parameter listing Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. Note: Values of these actual signals are filtered with the…
-
Page 116
ACS380 FW.book Page 116 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 116 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 01.10 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See also parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.13 Filter time motor… -
Page 117
ACS380 FW.book Page 117 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 01.30 Nominal torque scale Nominal torque in N•m which corresponds to 100%. Note: This parameter is copied from parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque if given. Otherwise the value is calculated from other motor data. -
Page 118: Input References
ACS380 FW.book Page 118 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 118 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 01.57 Inverter kWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in (resettable) either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.56 Inverter MWh counter…
-
Page 119: Warnings And Faults
ACS380 FW.book Page 119 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 -100000.00… Control panel or PC tool reference. 1 = 10 unit 100000.00 rpm, Hz or 03.05 FB A reference 1 Scaled fieldbus A reference 1. See parameter 50.14 FBA…
-
Page 120
ACS380 FW.book Page 120 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 120 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 04.08 Active warning 3 3rd active warning in warning register. 0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 04.11 Latest fault Latest fault in the trip log store. The trip log store is loaded with the active faults in the order they occur. -
Page 121
ACS380 FW.book Page 121 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 05.20 Diagnostic word 1 Diagnostic word 1. For possible causes and remedies, 0b0000 see chapter Fault tracing. Name Value Any warning or fault Yes = Drive has generated a warning or tripped on a fault. -
Page 122
ACS380 FW.book Page 122 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 122 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 05.83 Motor current at fault Displays the motor current (01.07) at which fault occurred. — 0.00…30000.00 A Motor current at fault. See par. -
Page 123: Control And Status Words
ACS380 FW.book Page 123 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06 Control and status Drive control and status words. words 06.01 Main control word The main control word of the drive. This parameter shows…
-
Page 124
ACS380 FW.book Page 124 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 124 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06.11 Main status word ABB Drives Profile Main status word. Reflects the status 0000h of the drive irrespective of control source e.g. a fieldbus… -
Page 125
ACS380 FW.book Page 125 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06.16 Drive status word 1 Drive status word 1. This parameter is read-only. Name Description Enabled 1 = Both run enable (see par. 20.12) and start enable (20.19) signals are present. -
Page 126
ACS380 FW.book Page 126 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 126 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06.18 Start inhibit status Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source of word the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from starting. -
Page 127
ACS380 FW.book Page 127 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06.19 Speed control status Speed control status word. word This parameter is read-only. Name Description 1 = Drive has been running below zero speed limit (par. 21.06) -
Page 128: System Info
ACS380 FW.book Page 128 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 128 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 06.21 Drive status word 3 Drive status word 3. This parameter is read-only. Name Description DC hold active 1 = DC hold is active…
-
Page 129
ACS380 FW.book Page 129 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 07.11 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. 0…100% Microprocessor load. 1 = 1- 07.25 Customization First five ASCII letters of the name given to the package name customization package. -
Page 130: Crane Application Signals
ACS380 FW.book Page 130 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 130 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 09 Crane application Signals related to crane applications. signals All parameters in this group are read-only. 09.01 Crane SW1 Shows the crane status word 1.
-
Page 131: Standard Di, Ro
ACS380 FW.book Page 131 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 09.03 Crane FW1 Shows the crane fault status word 1 with fault bits. 0000h Name Description Reserved Speed match D105 Speed match (page 413)
-
Page 132
ACS380 FW.book Page 132 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 132 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 10.03 DI force selection Selects the digital inputs, states of which will be controlled 0000h by parameter 10.04 DI forced data. A bit in parameter 10.04 DI forced data… -
Page 133
ACS380 FW.book Page 133 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 10.22 RO force selection Selects the relay outputs that will be controlled by 0000h parameter 10.23. The signals connected to the relay outputs can be overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.23 RO forced data… -
Page 134
ACS380 FW.book Page 134 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 134 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. -
Page 135: Standard Dio, Fi, Fo
ACS380 FW.book Page 135 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 10.25 RO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1. 0.0 — Status of selected source RO status Time 10.25 RO1 ON delay 10.26 RO1 OFF delay…
-
Page 136
ACS380 FW.book Page 136 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 136 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 11.03 DIO force selection Selects the digital inputs, states which will be controlled by 0000h parameter 11.04. A bit in parameter 11.04 is provided for each digital input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. -
Page 137
ACS380 FW.book Page 137 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. -
Page 138
ACS380 FW.book Page 138 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 138 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Input DIO2 is used as a digital input. Frequency output DIO2 is used as frequency output. 11.10 DIO2 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital… -
Page 139
ACS380 FW.book Page 139 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 11.42 Freq in 1 min Defines the minimum for the frequency actually arriving at 0 Hz frequency input 1. The incoming frequency signal (11.38 Freq in 1 actual value) is scaled into an internal signal (11.39 Freq in 1… -
Page 140
ACS380 FW.book Page 140 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 140 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 11.52 Freq in 2 at scaled min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0.000 frequency input 2 value defined by parameter Freq in 2 min. -
Page 141: Standard Ai
ACS380 FW.book Page 141 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 0 … 16000 Hz Maximum value of frequency output 1. 1 = 1 Hz 11.62 Freq out 2 actual value Displays the value of frequency output 2 after scaling. See parameter 11.66 Freq out 2 source…
-
Page 142
ACS380 FW.book Page 142 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 142 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 12.03 AI supervision function Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal No action moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input. -
Page 143
ACS380 FW.book Page 143 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 12.15 AI1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI1. See the default control connections of the macro in use, in chapter Control macros (page 31). -
Page 144
ACS380 FW.book Page 144 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 144 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.17 AI1… -
Page 145
ACS380 FW.book Page 145 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 12.26 AI2 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 0.100 s parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time. Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). -
Page 146: Standard Ao
ACS380 FW.book Page 146 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 146 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs. 13.02 AO force selection Selects the analog outputs that will be forced to values 0000h defined by parameters.
-
Page 147
ACS380 FW.book Page 147 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Abs output power 01.65 Abs output power Abs motor shaft power 01.68 Abs motor shaft power External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage… -
Page 148
ACS380 FW.book Page 148 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 148 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 13.17 AO1 source min Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the minimum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src… -
Page 149: I/O Extension Module
ACS380 FW.book Page 149 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1. 20.000 mA See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
-
Page 150
ACS380 FW.book Page 150 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 150 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 15.05 RO force selection The electrical statuses of the relay outputs can be 0000h overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 15.06 RO forced data… -
Page 151
ACS380 FW.book Page 151 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Fault/Warning Bit 3 OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. Overcurrent Relay is energized when drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. Overvoltage Relay is energized when drive is tripped to overvoltage fault. -
Page 152
ACS380 FW.book Page 152 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 152 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 15.08 RO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2. 0.0 s Status of selected source RO status Time 15.08 RO2 ON delay 15.09 RO2 OFF delay… -
Page 153: Operation Mode
ACS380 FW.book Page 153 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Status of selected source RO status Time 15.08 RO4 ON delay 15.09 RO4 OFF delay 0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO4. 1 = 1 s 15.15…
-
Page 154
ACS380 FW.book Page 154 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 154 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed controller (25.01) and torque reference (26.74) and the smaller of the two is used (in vector motor control mode). -
Page 155: Start/Stop/Direction
ACS380 FW.book Page 155 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain). Minimum Combination of selections Speed…
-
Page 156
ACS380 FW.book Page 156 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 156 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows: State of source 1 (20.03) -
Page 157
ACS380 FW.book Page 157 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected In3 Dir by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. -
Page 158
ACS380 FW.book Page 158 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 158 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 20.03 Ext1 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. Always off 0 (always off). Always on 1 (always on). Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed… -
Page 159
ACS380 FW.book Page 159 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source determines the direction. -
Page 160
ACS380 FW.book Page 160 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 160 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected In3 Dir by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source 20.09 Ext1 in2 source. -
Page 161
ACS380 FW.book Page 161 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 20.08 Ext2 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Always off For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. -
Page 162
ACS380 FW.book Page 162 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 162 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 EFB MCW bit 3 Control word bit 3 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). 20.19 Enable start signal Selects the source for the start enable signal. -
Page 163
ACS380 FW.book Page 163 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 20.21 Direction Reference direction lock. Defines the direction of the drive Request rather than the sign of the reference, except in some cases. In the table the actual drive rotation is shown as a function of parameter 20.21 Direction… -
Page 164
ACS380 FW.book Page 164 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 164 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 20.22 Enable to rotate Setting this parameter to 0 stops motor rotating but does Selected not affect any other conditions for rotating. Setting the parameter back to 1 starts motor rotating again. -
Page 165
ACS380 FW.book Page 165 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0). 11 DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1). 12 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions… -
Page 166
ACS380 FW.book Page 166 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 166 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 20.27 Jog 2 start If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jog enable, selects the Not selected source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20.25.) -
Page 167
ACS380 FW.book Page 167 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). -
Page 168
ACS380 FW.book Page 168 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 168 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 112). 20.215 Joystick warning delay Defines the time delay for generating warning D208… -
Page 169: Start/Stop Mode
ACS380 FW.book Page 169 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source selection; DC magnetization settings. 21.01 Vector start mode Selects the motor start function for the vector motor Const time control mode, ie.
-
Page 170
ACS380 FW.book Page 170 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 170 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.02 Magnetization time Defines the pre-magnetization time when 500 ms • parameter 21.01 Vector start mode is set to Const time (in vector motor control mode), or •… -
Page 171
ACS380 FW.book Page 171 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Coast stop (Off2) With the drive running: • 1 = Normal operation. • 0 = Stop by coasting. With the drive stopped: • 1 = Starting allowed. -
Page 172
ACS380 FW.book Page 172 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 172 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The 0 ms function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. -
Page 173
ACS380 FW.book Page 173 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.08 DC current control Activates/deactivates the DC hold and post-magnetization 0b0000 functions. See section DC magnetization on page 77. Note: DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC magnetization times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. -
Page 174
ACS380 FW.book Page 174 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 174 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.14 Pre-heating input Selects the source for triggering pre-heating for the motor. source The status of the pre-heating is shown as bit 2 of 06.21… -
Page 175
ACS380 FW.book Page 175 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.19 Scalar start mode Selects the motor start function for the scalar motor Const time control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar. -
Page 176
ACS380 FW.book Page 176 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 176 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 21.21 DC hold frequency Defines the DC hold frequency, which is used instead of 5.00 Hz parameter 21.09 DC hold speed when the operating mode in use is Scalar frequency mode. -
Page 177: Speed Reference Selection
ACS380 FW.book Page 177 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Speed comp REV If the direction of rotation is reverse, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
-
Page 178
ACS380 FW.book Page 178 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 178 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Selects Ext1 speed reference source 1. Integrated panel (ref Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and saved) 22.12 Ext1 speed… -
Page 179
ACS380 FW.book Page 179 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller). Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input). -
Page 180
ACS380 FW.book Page 180 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 180 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input). Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel… -
Page 181
ACS380 FW.book Page 181 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 1. Zero Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. -
Page 182
ACS380 FW.book Page 182 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 182 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 2. Zero For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 22.18 Ext2 speed… -
Page 183
ACS380 FW.book Page 183 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.22 Constant speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1. Note: The default value depends on the selected macro. -
Page 184
ACS380 FW.book Page 184 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 184 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.23 Constant speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function Always off 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 2. -
Page 185
ACS380 FW.book Page 185 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.41 Speed ref safe Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with 0.00 rpm supervision functions such as • 12.03 AI supervision function •… -
Page 186
ACS380 FW.book Page 186 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 186 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.56 Critical speed 3 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3. 0.00 rpm Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of parameter 22.57… -
Page 187
ACS380 FW.book Page 187 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. -
Page 188
ACS380 FW.book Page 188 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 188 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.87 Speed reference act 7 Displays the value of speed reference before application 0.00 rpm of critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page 498. -
Page 189
ACS380 FW.book Page 189 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Selected Increases the motor potentiometer value depending on the selected direction. The possible effect can be seen in parameter 22.225 Crane motpot sw, bits 3 and 4. -
Page 190: Speed Reference Ramp
ACS380 FW.book Page 190 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 190 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 22.227 Crane motpot max Defines the maximum value of Crane motor 50.00 value potentiometer. -30000.00… Maximum value 1 = 1 30000.00 22.230 Crane motpot ref act Displays the output of the motor potentiometer function.
-
Page 191
ACS380 FW.book Page 191 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 23.12 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling… -
Page 192
ACS380 FW.book Page 192 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 192 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 23.23 Emergency stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an 3.000 s emergency stop Off3 is activated (ie. the time required for… -
Page 193
ACS380 FW.book Page 193 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 23.32 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s ramps used with the set 1. 0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. -
Page 194: Speed Reference Conditioning
ACS380 FW.book Page 194 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 194 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 23.201 Crane motpot acc time (Visible only when parameter 22.220 is selected) 40.000 s Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the…
-
Page 195: Speed Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 195 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 24.12 Speed error filter time Defines the time constant of the speed error low-pass 0 ms filter. If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter.
-
Page 196
ACS380 FW.book Page 196 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 196 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 25.03 Speed integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The 2.50 s integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. -
Page 197
ACS380 FW.book Page 197 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 25.04 Speed derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. 0.000 s Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. -
Page 198
ACS380 FW.book Page 198 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 198 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 25.06 Acc comp derivation Defines the derivation time for acceleration(/deceleration) 0.00 s time compensation. In order to compensate for a high inertia load during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. -
Page 199: Torque Reference Chain
ACS380 FW.book Page 199 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 25.53 Torque prop reference Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 502.
-
Page 200
ACS380 FW.book Page 200 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 200 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 26.11 Torque ref1 source Selects torque reference source 1. Zero Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. -
Page 201
ACS380 FW.book Page 201 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 118) for copied) the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID);… -
Page 202
ACS380 FW.book Page 202 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 202 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). -
Page 203: Frequency Reference Chain
ACS380 FW.book Page 203 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 26.73 Torque reference act 4 Displays the torque reference after application of reference additive 1. See the control chain diagram on page 503. This parameter is read-only.
-
Page 204
ACS380 FW.book Page 204 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 204 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 1. Integrated panel (ref Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and saved) 28.12 Ext1 frequency… -
Page 205
ACS380 FW.book Page 205 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller). Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input). -
Page 206
ACS380 FW.book Page 206 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 206 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a frequency input). Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel… -
Page 207
ACS380 FW.book Page 207 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 1. Zero Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. -
Page 208
ACS380 FW.book Page 208 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 208 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 2. Zero For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 28.15 Ext2 frequency… -
Page 209
ACS380 FW.book Page 209 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.22 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency sel1 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 1. -
Page 210
ACS380 FW.book Page 210 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 210 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.23 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Always off sel2 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 2. -
Page 211
ACS380 FW.book Page 211 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.41 Frequency ref safe Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with 0.00 Hz supervision functions such as • 12.03 AI supervision function •… -
Page 212
ACS380 FW.book Page 212 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 212 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.57 Critical frequency 3 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3. 0.00 Hz high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.56 Critical frequency 3… -
Page 213
ACS380 FW.book Page 213 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.73 Freq deceleration time Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s frequency to change from the frequency defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling… -
Page 214
ACS380 FW.book Page 214 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 214 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.82 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s ramps used with the set 1. 0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. -
Page 215: Limits
ACS380 FW.book Page 215 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Displays the frequency reference after the function 0.00 Hz applied by parameter 28.13 Ext1 frequency function any), and after selection (19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection…
-
Page 216
ACS380 FW.book Page 216 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 216 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 30.02 Torque limit status Displays the torque controller limitation status word. This parameter is read-only. Name Description Undervoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage… -
Page 217
ACS380 FW.book Page 217 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 30.11 Minimum speed Defines together with 30.12 Maximum speed allowed -1500.00 speed range. See the figure below. A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. -
Page 218
ACS380 FW.book Page 218 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 218 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 30.13 Minimum frequency Defines together with 30.14 Maximum frequency allowed -50.00 Hz frequency range. See the figure below. A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. -
Page 219
ACS380 FW.book Page 219 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 30.17 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current. 2.88 A The system sets the default value to 90% of the rated current. If required, you can increase the parameter value by 10%. -
Page 220
ACS380 FW.book Page 220 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 220 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1) 7 Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 15 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. -
Page 221
ACS380 FW.book Page 221 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller). Maximum torque 2 30.24 Maximum torque Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
Page 222
ACS380 FW.book Page 222 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 222 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Enable Undervoltage control enabled. 30.35 Thermal current Enables/disables temperature-based output current Enable limitation limitation. The limitation should only be disabled if required by the application. -
Page 223: Fault Functions
ACS380 FW.book Page 223 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Torque control Adjustable speed limits are enabled if Torque control mode (vector motor control) is active. Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
-
Page 224
ACS380 FW.book Page 224 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 224 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). -
Page 225
ACS380 FW.book Page 225 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). -
Page 226
ACS380 FW.book Page 226 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 226 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 31.14 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31.15 Total trials time. -
Page 227
ACS380 FW.book Page 227 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Fault/Warning Inputs Indication Running Stopped Fault 5091 Safe Warning A5A0 Safe torque off torque off Fault FA81 Safe Fault FA81 Safe torque torque off 1… -
Page 228
ACS380 FW.book Page 228 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 228 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 31.23 Wiring or earth fault Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and Fault motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection). -
Page 229
ACS380 FW.book Page 229 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 31.30 Overspeed trip margin Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed 30.12 500.00 rpm Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor (overspeed protection). If the speed (24.02 Used… -
Page 230
ACS380 FW.book Page 230 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 230 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 31.31 Frequency trip margin Defines, together with 30.13 Minimum frequency 15.00 Hz 30.14 Maximum frequency, the maximum allowed frequency of the motor. If the speed (28.01 Frequency ref… -
Page 231
ACS380 FW.book Page 231 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 31.33 Emergency ramp If parameter 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision is set to supervision delay 0%, this parameter defines the maximum time an emergency stop (mode Off1 or Off3) is allowed to take. If… -
Page 232: Supervision
ACS380 FW.book Page 232 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 232 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…3. Three values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or fault is generated whenever predefined limits are exceeded.
-
Page 233
ACS380 FW.book Page 233 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.06 Supervision 1 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 1 exceeds its limits. -
Page 234
ACS380 FW.book Page 234 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 234 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.15 Supervision 2 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2. Disabled Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.17) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.19… -
Page 235
ACS380 FW.book Page 235 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.25 Supervision 3 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3. Disabled Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.27) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.29… -
Page 236
ACS380 FW.book Page 236 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 236 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.35 Supervision 4 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 4. Disabled Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.37 is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.39… -
Page 237
ACS380 FW.book Page 237 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.45 Supervision 5 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 5. Disabled Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.47) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.49… -
Page 238
ACS380 FW.book Page 238 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 238 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 32.55 Supervision 6 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 6. Disabled Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.57) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.59… -
Page 239: Timed Functions
ACS380 FW.book Page 239 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 34 Timed functions Configuration of the timed functions. 34.01 Timed functions status Status of the timed functions. The status of a timed function is the logical OR of all timers connected to it.
-
Page 240
ACS380 FW.book Page 240 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 240 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 34.10 Timed functions Selects the source for the timed functions enable signal. Disabled enable 0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled. Note: The ACS380 drives do not have an inbuilt timer. -
Page 241
ACS380 FW.book Page 241 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 34.12 Timer 1 start time Defines the daily start time of timer 1. The time can be 00:00:00 changed in second steps. The timer can be started at an other time than the start time. -
Page 242
ACS380 FW.book Page 242 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 242 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 34.36 Timer 9 start time 34.12 Timer 1 start time. 00:00:00 34.37 Timer 9 duration 34.13 Timer 1 duration. 00 00:00 34.38 Timer 10 configuration 34.11 Timer 1… -
Page 243
ACS380 FW.book Page 243 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Name Description Exception 1 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday Exception 2 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday Exception 3 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday Exception 4 0 = Workday. -
Page 244
ACS380 FW.book Page 244 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 244 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 34.85 Exception day 11 34.79 Exception day 01.01 34.86 Exception day 12 34.79 Exception day 01.01 34.87 Exception day 13 34.79 Exception day 01.01… -
Page 245
ACS380 FW.book Page 245 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). -
Page 246
ACS380 FW.book Page 246 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 246 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 35.11 Temperature 1 source Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is Estimated read. temperature Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the… -
Page 247
ACS380 FW.book Page 247 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Direct temperature The temperature is taken from the source selected by parameter 35.14. The value of the source is assumed to be degrees Celsius. -
Page 248
ACS380 FW.book Page 248 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 248 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Ni1000 Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: •… -
Page 249
ACS380 FW.book Page 249 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 35.22 Temperature 2 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision 130 °C limit function 2. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. -
Page 250
ACS380 FW.book Page 250 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 250 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 35.51 Motor load curve Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 110% 35.52 Zero speed load 35.53 Break point. The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model to estimate the motor temperature. -
Page 251
ACS380 FW.book Page 251 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 35.54 Motor nominal Defines the temperature rise of the motor above ambient 80 °C or temperature rise when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the 176 °F… -
Page 252: Load Analyzer
ACS380 FW.book Page 252 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 252 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. See also section Load analyzer (page 104). 36.01 PVL signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value Output logger.
-
Page 253
ACS380 FW.book Page 253 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. Reset the peak value logger. Reset amplitude logger 2. 36.10 PVL peak value Shows the peak value recorded by the peak value logger. -
Page 254
ACS380 FW.book Page 254 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 254 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 36.25 AL1 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00% that fall between 50 and 60%. 0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%. -
Page 255
ACS380 FW.book Page 255 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 36.50 AL2 reset date The date on which amplitude logger 2 was last reset. 01/01/1980 1/1/1980…6/5/2159 Last reset date of amplitude logger 2. 36.51 AL2 reset time The time at which amplitude logger 2 was last reset. -
Page 256
ACS380 FW.book Page 256 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 256 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Warning/Fault The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the signal has been continuously over the overload curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload… -
Page 257
ACS380 FW.book Page 257 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 37.15 ULC speed table point Defines the fifth speed point. 1800.0 rpm See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point -30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm 37.16… -
Page 258
ACS380 FW.book Page 258 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 258 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 37.23 ULC underload point 3 Defines the third underload point. 25.0% See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point -1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1% 37.24… -
Page 259: Process Pid Set 1
ACS380 FW.book Page 259 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control. The drive output can be controlled by the process PID. When the process PID control is enabled, the drive controls the process feedback to the reference value.
-
Page 260
ACS380 FW.book Page 260 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 260 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.06 Process PID status Displays status information on process PID control. 0000h word This parameter is read-only. Name Value PID active 1 = Process PID control active. -
Page 261
ACS380 FW.book Page 261 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. -
Page 262
ACS380 FW.book Page 262 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 262 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer). Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value AI1 percent 12.101 AI1 percent value… -
Page 263
ACS380 FW.book Page 263 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. -
Page 264
ACS380 FW.book Page 264 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 264 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Selected Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). -
Page 265
ACS380 FW.book Page 265 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to 0.0 s time increase from 0% to 100%. 0.0…1800.0 s Setpoint increase time. -
Page 266
ACS380 FW.book Page 266 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 266 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.33 Set 1 integration time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller. 60.0 s This time needs to be set to the same order of magnitude as the reaction time of the process being controlled, otherwise instability will result. -
Page 267
ACS380 FW.book Page 267 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to 0.0 s time smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller. -
Page 268
ACS380 FW.book Page 268 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 268 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status… Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status… -
Page 269
ACS380 FW.book Page 269 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See 0.0 s parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step. -
Page 270
ACS380 FW.book Page 270 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 270 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref Selects the value source for tracking mode. See… -
Page 271
ACS380 FW.book Page 271 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor. This value is 1.000 multiplied by the result of parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. -
Page 272
ACS380 FW.book Page 272 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 272 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Limiting The PID integration term is not decreased if the minimum value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1. -
Page 273: Process Pid Set 2
ACS380 FW.book Page 273 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 112). 40.89 Set 1 setpoint Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function 1.00…
-
Page 274
ACS380 FW.book Page 274 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 274 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source. Not selected source 41.10 Set 2 feedback See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function. -
Page 275
ACS380 FW.book Page 275 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 41.38 Set 2 output freeze See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not selected enable 41.39 Set 2 deadband range See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range. -
Page 276
ACS380 FW.book Page 276 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 276 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 43 Brake chopper Settings for the internal brake chopper. 43.01 Braking resistor Displays the estimated temperature of the brake resistor, temperature or how close the brake resistor is to being too hot. -
Page 277
ACS380 FW.book Page 277 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 43.07 Brake chopper runtime Selects the source for quick brake chopper on/off control. enable 0 = Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off 1 = Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation allowed. -
Page 278
ACS380 FW.book Page 278 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 278 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 44 Mechanical brake Configuration of mechanical brake control. control See also parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1 Process PID set 44.01 Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word. -
Page 279
ACS380 FW.book Page 279 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status. Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status. Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions… -
Page 280
ACS380 FW.book Page 280 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 280 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 FBA ref1 03.05 FB A reference FBA ref2 03.06 FB A reference Brake torque memory Parameter 44.02 Brake torque memory. Brake open torque Parameter 44.10 Brake open… -
Page 281
ACS380 FW.book Page 281 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 44.12 Brake close request Selects the source of an external brake close request Not selected signal. When on, the signal overrides the internal logic and closes the brake. -
Page 282
ACS380 FW.book Page 282 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 282 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 44.16 Brake reopen delay Defines a minimum time between brake closure and a 0.00 s subsequent open command. 0.00 … 10.00 s Brake reopen delay. -
Page 283
ACS380 FW.book Page 283 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status. Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status… -
Page 284: Energy Efficiency
ACS380 FW.book Page 284 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 284 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status.
-
Page 285
ACS380 FW.book Page 285 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 45.02 Saved MW hours Energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.03 Saved kW hours rolls over. -
Page 286
ACS380 FW.book Page 286 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 286 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 45.08 CO2 reduction in Reduction in CO emissions in metric kilotons compared kilotons to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is incremented when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in tons… -
Page 287
ACS380 FW.book Page 287 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 45.14 Tariff selection Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre- Energy tariff defined energy tariff is used. 45.12 Energy tariff 1 45.13 Energy tariff 2… -
Page 288
ACS380 FW.book Page 288 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 288 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 45.27 Daily peak power Value of the peak power since midnight of the present day. 0.00 kW value (resettable) You can reset the value by setting it to zero. -
Page 289: Monitoring/Scaling Settings
ACS380 FW.book Page 289 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 46 Monitoring/scaling Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings. settings 46.01 Speed scaling Defines the maximum speed value used to define the 1500.00 rpm…
-
Page 290
ACS380 FW.book Page 290 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 290 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 46.11 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used 500 ms speed 01.02 Motor speed estimated. 2…20000 ms Motor speed signal filter time. -
Page 291
ACS380 FW.book Page 291 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 46.22 At frequency Defines the “at setpoint” limits for frequency control of the 2.00 Hz hysteresis drive. When the absolute difference between reference (28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual frequency (01.06 Output… -
Page 292: Data Storage
ACS380 FW.book Page 292 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 292 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 46.33 Above torque limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.0% torque control. When actual torque exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2…
-
Page 293: Panel Port Communication
ACS380 FW.book Page 293 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Data storage parameter 20. -32768…32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1 49 Panel port Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
-
Page 294
ACS380 FW.book Page 294 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 294 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Motor current 01.07 Motor current Motor current % of 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom motor nominal Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage… -
Page 295: Fieldbus Adapter (Fba)
ACS380 FW.book Page 295 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Value Motor data Motor control Control macros Diagnostics Energy efficiency Parameters 6…15 Reserved 0000h…FFFFh 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) Fieldbus communication configuration. See also chapter…
-
Page 296
ACS380 FW.book Page 296 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 296 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by 0.3 s parameter 50.02 FBA A comm loss func is taken. -
Page 297
ACS380 FW.book Page 297 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Transparent mode The source selected by parameter 50.09 FBA A SW transparent source is transmitted as the status word to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. -
Page 298
ACS380 FW.book Page 298 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 298 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 2. -
Page 299: Fba A Settings
ACS380 FW.book Page 299 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 50.16 FBA A status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug…
-
Page 300
ACS380 FW.book Page 300 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 300 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 51.29 FBA A drive type code Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive). -
Page 301: Embedded Fieldbus
ACS380 FW.book Page 301 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits) Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits) CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits)
-
Page 302
ACS380 FW.book Page 302 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 302 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.02 Protocol ID Displays the protocol ID and revision. This parameter is read-only. Protocol ID and revision. 1 = 1 58.03 Node address Defines the node address of the drive on the fieldbus link. -
Page 303
ACS380 FW.book Page 303 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.05 Parity Selects the type of parity bit and number of stop bits. 8 EVEN 1 Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh… -
Page 304
ACS380 FW.book Page 304 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 304 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.07 Communication Displays the status of the EFB communication. diagnostics This parameter is read-only. Note that the name is only visible when the error is present (bit value is 1). -
Page 305
ACS380 FW.book Page 305 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.10 All packets Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any device on the bus. During normal operation, this number increases constantly. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. -
Page 306
ACS380 FW.book Page 306 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 306 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Fault always Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This happens even thought the drive is in a control location where the EFB start/stop or reference is not used. -
Page 307
ACS380 FW.book Page 307 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.22 CANopen NMT state This parameter tells the CANopen NMT state of the drive. Uninitialized Note: If parameter 58.01 = [1] Modbus RTU, this parameter is hidden. -
Page 308
ACS380 FW.book Page 308 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 308 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.26 EFB ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received Speed or through the embedded fieldbus interface. frequency The scaled reference is displayed by 03.09 EFB reference… -
Page 309
ACS380 FW.book Page 309 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.29 EFB act2 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 2 Transparent transmitted to the fieldbus network through the embedded fieldbus interface. -
Page 310
ACS380 FW.book Page 310 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 310 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.33 Addressing mode Defines the mapping between parameters and holding Mode 0 registers in the 400101…465535 Modbus register range. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh… -
Page 311
ACS380 FW.book Page 311 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Enable Debug mode enabled. 58.18 EFB control word, 58.71 EFB reference 58.72 EFB reference 58.19 EFB status word, 58.73 EFB actual value 1 58.74 EFB actual value 2 are updated. -
Page 312
ACS380 FW.book Page 312 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 312 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.77 RPDO1 transmission Set the transmission type of the PDO. type Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location Drive parameters… -
Page 313
ACS380 FW.book Page 313 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 0…255 Transmission type. 0 = acyclic synchronous 1…240 = cyclic synchronous 252 = synchronous RTR only 253 = asynchronous RTR only 254…255 = asynchronous 58.81… -
Page 314
ACS380 FW.book Page 314 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 314 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.84 RPDO6 event timer Set the event timer of the PDO. Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location Drive parameters… -
Page 315
ACS380 FW.book Page 315 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 0…65535 Event timer 1=1 ms 0 = no timeout other = if this PDO is enabled and has not been transmitted for event timer milliseconds, a transmission is forced 58.88… -
Page 316
ACS380 FW.book Page 316 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 316 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.91 RPDO21 COB-ID Set the COB-ID of the PDO. 0x0000 Changing this parameter has an effect only if 58.23 Configuration location Drive parameters… -
Page 317
ACS380 FW.book Page 317 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.101 Data I/O 1 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master CW 16bit accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus register 1 (400001). -
Page 318
ACS380 FW.book Page 318 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 318 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.102 Data I/O 2 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master Ref1 16bit accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400002. -
Page 319
ACS380 FW.book Page 319 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.111 Data I/O 11 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400011. None For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O TPDO6 word 3 Selects a parameter that is mapped to TPDO6 word 3. For… -
Page 320: External Pid1
ACS380 FW.book Page 320 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 320 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 58.122 RPDO21 word 2 Selects a parameter that is mapped to RPDO21 word 2. None For selections, see parameter 58.101 TPDO1 word Note: If parameter 58.01…
-
Page 321
ACS380 FW.book Page 321 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 71.14 Setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 71.15 Output scaling, a 1500.00 general scaling factor for the external PID control chain. The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. -
Page 322: Application Features
ACS380 FW.book Page 322 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 322 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 0.0…200000.0 Range 1 = 1 71.40 Deadband delay Defines the deadband delay for the deadband function. 0.0 s See parameter 71.39 Deadband range.
-
Page 323
ACS380 FW.book Page 323 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 DIO1 Digital input/output DIO1 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 0) 10 DIO2 Digital input/output DIO2 (11.02 DIO delayed status, bit 1) 11 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status… -
Page 324
ACS380 FW.book Page 324 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 324 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status… -
Page 325
ACS380 FW.book Page 325 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 76.06 Reverse stop limit Selects the source to activate the Reverse stop limit Not selected function. When the command is enabled, the function activates an… -
Page 326
ACS380 FW.book Page 326 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 326 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 76.23 Start stop level Defines the stop flux level, that is, the flux level for closing 75 % the brake. The drive uses this value as the flux reference… -
Page 327: Feedback Selection
ACS380 FW.book Page 327 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 76.32 Motor speed steady Defines the allowed motor speed deviation level (absolute 30.00 deviation level value) for the steady state operation (motor started and running).
-
Page 328: Encoder Adapter Settings
ACS380 FW.book Page 328 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 328 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 90.41 Motor feedback Selects the motor speed feedback value used during Estimate selection motor control. Note: With a permanent magnet motor, make sure an autophasing routine (see page 57) is performed using the selected encoder.
-
Page 329: Encoder 1 Configuration
ACS380 FW.book Page 329 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Done The refreshing is completed. Refresh Refresh function is running. 92 Encoder 1 Settings for encoder 1. configuration Notes: • The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected encoder type.
-
Page 330: System
Refer to the hardware manual of the drive. Name Information Reserved ABB Sine filter 1 = An ABB sine filter is connected to the output of the drive/inverter 2…15 Reserved 0…1 Hardware options configuration word. 1 = 1 95.20…
-
Page 331
ACS380 FW.book Page 331 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Español Spanish. 3082 Portugues Portuguese. 2070 Nederlands Dutch. 1043 Français French. 1036 Suomi Finnish. 1035 Svenska Swedish. 1053 Russki Russian. 1049 Polski Polish. 1045 Türkçe… -
Page 332
ACS380 FW.book Page 332 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 332 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.04 Macro select Selects the control macro. See chapter Control macros Done more information. After a selection is made, the parameter reverts automatically to Done. -
Page 333
ACS380 FW.book Page 333 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Clear all All editable parameter values are restored to default values, except • end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults (external faults and changed), and the drive name •… -
Page 334
ACS380 FW.book Page 334 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 334 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Loading A user set is being loaded. Saving A user set is being saved. Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. User1 IO active User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User… -
Page 335
ACS380 FW.book Page 335 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User Not selected set I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together with parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2… -
Page 336
ACS380 FW.book Page 336 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 336 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.16 Unit selection Selects the unit of parameters indicating power, 0b0000 temperature and torque. Name Information Power unit 0 = kW 1 = hp… -
Page 337
ACS380 FW.book Page 337 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.55 Checksum control Bits 8…9 select which comparison(s) are made: 0b0000 word • Bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A): 96.68 Actual checksum A is compared to 96.71 Approved checksum… -
Page 338
ACS380 FW.book Page 338 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 338 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.69 Actual checksum B Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum B. 0x0000 The checksum B is generated and updated whenever an action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action… -
Page 339
ACS380 FW.book Page 339 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 96.102 User lock functionality (Visible when user lock is open) 0000h Selects the actions or functionalities to be prevented by the user lock. Note that the changes made take effect only when the user lock is closed. -
Page 340
ACS380 FW.book Page 340 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 340 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97 Motor control Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation. 97.01 Switching frequency Defines the switching frequency of the drive that is used… -
Page 341
ACS380 FW.book Page 341 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97.05 Flux braking Defines the level of flux braking power. (Other stopping Disabled and braking modes can be configured in parameter group 21 Start/stop mode). -
Page 342
ACS380 FW.book Page 342 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 342 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97.10 Signal injection Enables the anti-cogging function: a high-frequency Disabled alternating signal is injected to the motor in the low speed region to improve the stability of torque control. This removes the “cogging”… -
Page 343
ACS380 FW.book Page 343 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97.13 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR 3.20% compensation). The function is useful in applications with a high break-away torque where vector control cannot be applied. -
Page 344
ACS380 FW.book Page 344 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 344 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97.15 Motor model Selects whether the temperature-dependent parameters Disabled temperature (such as stator or rotor resistance) of the motor model adaptation adapt to actual (measured or estimated) temperature or not. -
Page 345: User Motor Parameters
ACS380 FW.book Page 345 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 97.94 IR comp max Sets the frequency at which IR compensation (set by 80.0 frequency parameter 97.13 IR compensation) reaches 0 V. The unit is % of motor nominal frequency.
-
Page 346
ACS380 FW.book Page 346 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 346 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 98.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance R of the motor model. 0.00000 p.u. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors. -
Page 347: Motor Data
ACS380 FW.book Page 347 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 98.13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. 0.00 mH Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors. 0.00 …100000.00 mH Direct axis inductance.
-
Page 348
ACS380 FW.book Page 348 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 348 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Scalar Scalar control. Suitable for most applications, if top performance is not required. Motor identification run is not required. Note: Scalar control must be used in the following situations: •… -
Page 349
ACS380 FW.book Page 349 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 99.08 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must 50.00 Hz frequency match the value on the rating plate of the motor. -
Page 350
ACS380 FW.book Page 350 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 350 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 99.13 ID run requested Selects the type of the motor identification routine (ID run) None performed at the next start of the drive. During the ID run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. -
Page 351
ACS380 FW.book Page 351 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Normal Normal ID run. Guarantees good control accuracy for all cases. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode should be selected whenever it is possible. -
Page 352
ACS380 FW.book Page 352 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 352 Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 Autophasing The autophasing routine determines the start angle of a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor (see page 57). Autophasing does not update the other motor model values. -
Page 353
ACS380 FW.book Page 353 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Parameters Name/Value Description Default FbEq 16 99.16 Motor phase order Switches the rotation direction of motor. This parameter U V W can be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for… -
Page 354: Differences In The Default Values Between 50 Hz And 60 Hz Supply Frequency Settings
ACS380 FW.book Page 354 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 354 Parameters Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings Parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 changes the drive parameter default values according to the supply frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
-
Page 355
ACS380 FW.book Page 355 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Additional parameter data Contents • Terms and abbreviations • Fieldbus addresses • Parameter groups 1…9 • Parameter groups 10…99 Terms and abbreviations Term Definition Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored but not adjusted;… -
Page 356: Fieldbus Addresses
ACS380 FW.book Page 356 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 356 Additional parameter data Term Definition List Selection list. Parameter number. Packed Boolean (bit list). Real Real number. Type Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real. Fieldbus addresses Refer to the user’s manual of the fieldbus adapter.
-
Page 357: Parameter Groups 1…9
ACS380 FW.book Page 357 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Parameter groups 1…9 Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 01 Actual values 01.01 Motor speed used Real -30000.00…30000.00 100 = 1 rpm 01.02 Motor speed estimated Real -30000.00…30000.00 100 = 1 rpm 01.03…
-
Page 358
ACS380 FW.book Page 358 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 358 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 01.64 Abs motor torque Real 0.00…1600.0 10 = 1% 01.65 Abs output power Real 0.00… 32767.00 100 = 1 kW 01.66 Abs output power % mot nom Real 0.00…300.00… -
Page 359
ACS380 FW.book Page 359 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 05.84 Motor torque at fault Real -1600.0…1600.0 10 = 1% 05.85 Main status word at fault 0000h…FFFFh 1 = 1 05.86 DI delayed status at fault 0000h…FFFFh… -
Page 360: Parameter Groups 10…99
ACS380 FW.book Page 360 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 360 Additional parameter data Parameter groups 10…99 Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 10 Standard DI, RO 10.02 DI delayed status 0000h…FFFFh 1 = 1 10.03 DI force selection 0000h…FFFFh 1 = 1 10.04…
-
Page 361
ACS380 FW.book Page 361 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 11.55 Freq out 1 source List 0, 1, 3, 4, 6…8, 10…14, 16 1 = 1 11.58 Freq out 1 src min Real -32768.000…32767.000… -
Page 362
ACS380 FW.book Page 362 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 362 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 13 Standard AO 13.02 AO force selection 0000h…FFFFh 1 = 1 13.11 AO1 actual value Real 0.000…22.000 1000 = 1 mA 13.12… -
Page 363
ACS380 FW.book Page 363 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 20.03 Ext1 in1 source Binary src 1 = 1 20.04 Ext1 in2 source Binary src 1 = 1 20.05 Ext1 in3 source… -
Page 364
ACS380 FW.book Page 364 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 364 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 21.16 Pre-heating current Real 0.0…30.0 10 = 1% 21.18 Auto restart time Real 0.0, 0.1 … 10.0 10 = 1 s 21.19… -
Page 365
ACS380 FW.book Page 365 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 22.56 Critical speed 3 low Real -30000.00…30000.00 100 = 1 rpm 22.57 Critical speed 3 high Real -30000.00…30000.00 100 = 1 rpm 22.71… -
Page 366
ACS380 FW.book Page 366 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 366 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 23.206 Fast stop deceleration time Real 0.00 …3000.000 1000 = 1 s 24 Speed reference conditioning 24.01 Used speed reference Real -30000.00…30000.00… -
Page 367
ACS380 FW.book Page 367 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 26.75 Torque reference act 5 Real -1600.0…1600.0 10 = 1% 26.81 Rush control gain Real 0.0 … 10000.0 10 = 1 26.82… -
Page 368
ACS380 FW.book Page 368 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 368 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited Real -500.00 … 500.00 100 = 1 Hz 28.211 Frequency reference shape List 0…2 1 = 1 30 Limits 30.01… -
Page 369
ACS380 FW.book Page 369 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 31.14 Number of trials Real 0…5 1 = 1 31.15 Total trials time Real 1.0…600.0 10 = 1 s 31.16 Delay time Real 0.0…120.0… -
Page 370
ACS380 FW.book Page 370 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 370 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 32.29 Supervision 3 low Real -21474830.00… 100 = 1 21474830.00 32.30 Supervision 3 high Real -21474830.00… 100 = 1 21474830.00 32.31… -
Page 371
ACS380 FW.book Page 371 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 34.18 Timer 3 start time Time 00:00:00…23:59:59 1 = 1 s 34.19 Timer 3 duration Duration 00 00:00…07 00:00 1 = 1 min 34.20… -
Page 372
ACS380 FW.book Page 372 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 372 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 34.78 Exception day 4 Date 01.01…31.12 1 = 1 d 34.79 Exception day 5 Date 01.01…31.12 1 = 1 d 34.80… -
Page 373
ACS380 FW.book Page 373 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 35.55 Motor thermal time constant Real 100…10000 1 = 1 s 36 Load analyzer 36.01 PVL signal source Analog src 1 = 1 36.02… -
Page 374
ACS380 FW.book Page 374 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 374 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 37.04 ULC underload actions List 0…3 1 = 1 37.11 ULC speed table point 1 Real -30000.0…30000.0 10 = 1 rpm 37.12… -
Page 375
ACS380 FW.book Page 375 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 40.15 Set 1 output scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 100 = 1 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source Analog src 1 = 1 40.17… -
Page 376
ACS380 FW.book Page 376 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 376 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 40.51 Set 1 trim mode List 0…3 1 = 1 40.52 Set 1 trim selection List 1…3 1 = 1 40.53… -
Page 377
ACS380 FW.book Page 377 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00…200000.00 100 = 1 PID customer customer unit units 41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0 Real -200000.00…200000.00… -
Page 378
ACS380 FW.book Page 378 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 378 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 41.89 Set 2 setpoint multiplier Real -200000.00…200000.00 100 = 1 41.90 Set 2 feedback multiplier Real -200000.00…200000.00 100 = 1 43 Brake chopper 43.01… -
Page 379
ACS380 FW.book Page 379 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 45.02 Saved MW hours Real 0…999 1 = 1 MWh 45.03 Saved kW hours Real 0.0…999.0 10 = 1 kWh 45.04 Saved energy Real 0.0…214748364.7… -
Page 380
ACS380 FW.book Page 380 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 380 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 46 Monitoring/scaling settings 46.01 Speed scaling Real 0.00…30000.00 100 = 1 rpm 46.02 Frequency scaling Real 0.10…1000.00 100 = 1 Hz 46.03… -
Page 381
ACS380 FW.book Page 381 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 49.04 Communication loss time Real 0.3…3000.0 10 = 1 s 49.05 Communication loss action List 0…3 1 = 1 49.06 Refresh settings List 0…1… -
Page 382
ACS380 FW.book Page 382 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 382 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 51.33 FBA A appl SW ver Data 1 = 1 52 FBA A data in 52.01 FBA A data in1 List 1 = 1 …… -
Page 383
ACS380 FW.book Page 383 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 58.70 EFB debug mode List -100000…100000 1 = 1 58.71 EFB reference 1 Real -100000…100000 1 = 1 58.72 EFB reference 2 Real -100000…100000… -
Page 384
ACS380 FW.book Page 384 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 384 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 58.110 Data I/O 10 Analog src 1 = 1 TPDO6 word 2 Analog src 1 = 1 58.111 Data I/O 11… -
Page 385
ACS380 FW.book Page 385 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 71.23 Internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit or Hz 71.26 Setpoint min Real -200000.00…200000.00 100 = 1 71.27… -
Page 386
ACS380 FW.book Page 386 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 386 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 76.34 Speed match fault delay Real 0…30000 1 = 1 90 Feedback selection 90.01 Motor speed for control Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 100 = 1 rpm 90.02… -
Page 387
ACS380 FW.book Page 387 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 96.51 Clear fault and event logger Real 0…1 1 = 1 96.54 Checksum action List 0…4 1 = 1 96.55 Checksum control word 0b0000…0b1111… -
Page 388
ACS380 FW.book Page 388 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 388 Additional parameter data Name Type Range Unit FbEq32 98.06 Ld user Real 0.00000…10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1 p.u. 98.07 Lq user Real 0.00000…10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1 p.u. 98.08… -
Page 389
If the warnings and faults cannot be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter, contact an ABB service representative. If you use the Drive composer PC tool, send the Support package created by the Drive composer to the ABB service representative. -
Page 390: Indications
ACS380 FW.book Page 390 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 390 Fault tracing Indications Warnings and faults Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of active warnings and faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as in the Drive composer PC tool.
-
Page 391: Qr Code Generation For Mobile Service Application
The code can be read with a mobile device containing the ABB service application, which then sends the data to ABB for analysis. For more information on the application, contact your local ABB service representative.
-
Page 392: Warning Messages
ACS380 FW.book Page 392 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 392 Fault tracing Warning messages Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log. Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 64FF Fault reset A fault has been reset from the Event.
-
Page 393
ACS380 FW.book Page 393 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A2B4 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) Check motor and motor cable for cabling or motor. errors. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). -
Page 394
ACS380 FW.book Page 394 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 394 Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A4A9 Cooling Drive module temperature is Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds excessive. 50 °C /122 °F, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. -
Page 395
ACS380 FW.book Page 395 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A5EF PU state feedback State feedback from output Contact your local ABB representative. phases does not match control signals. -
Page 396
ACS380 FW.book Page 396 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 396 Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 0002 Underload point above Check that each overload point overload point. (37.31…37.35) has a higher value than… -
Page 397
ACS380 FW.book Page 397 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A79C BC IGBT excess Brake chopper IGBT Let chopper cool down. temperature temperature has exceeded Check for excessive ambient internal warning limit. -
Page 398
ACS380 FW.book Page 398 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 398 Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A7EE Panel loss Control panel or PC tool Check PC tool or control panel selected as active control connection. -
Page 399
ACS380 FW.book Page 399 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) A8C0 ULC invalid speed User load curve: X-axis points Check that points fulfill conditions. See table (speed) are not valid. -
Page 400
ACS380 FW.book Page 400 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 400 Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) AF8C Process PID sleep The drive is entering sleep Informative warning. See section Sleep mode mode. and boost functions for process PID control, and parameters 40.43…40.48. -
Page 401
ACS380 FW.book Page 401 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) D202 Reverse slow down Slowdown command is active Run the motor in the opposite direction limit in the reverse (down) direction… -
Page 402: Fault Messages
ACS380 FW.book Page 402 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 402 Fault tracing Fault messages Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 1080 Backup/Restore Panel or PC tool has failed to Request backup or restore again. timeout…
-
Page 403
ACS380 FW.book Page 403 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 2340 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) Check motor and motor cable for cabling or motor errors. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. -
Page 404
ACS380 FW.book Page 404 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 404 Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 3381 Output phase loss Motor circuit fault due to Connect motor cable. missing motor connection (any Programmable fault: 31.19… -
Page 405
ACS380 FW.book Page 405 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 5091 Safe torque off Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections. For active, ie. safety circuit… -
Page 406
ACS380 FW.book Page 406 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 406 Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 6481 Task overload Internal fault. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. -
Page 407
ACS380 FW.book Page 407 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 65A1 FBA A parameter The drive does not have a Check PLC programming. conflict functionality requested by Check settings of parameter groups… -
Page 408
ACS380 FW.book Page 408 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 408 Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 71A3 Mechanical brake Mechanical brake control fault. Check mechanical brake connection. opening failed Activated e.g. if brake… -
Page 409
ACS380 FW.book Page 409 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 7301 Motor speed feedback No motor speed feedback Check the parameter 90.41 setting and received. the actual source selected. -
Page 410
ACS380 FW.book Page 410 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 410 Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 7510 FBA A communication Cyclical communication Check status of fieldbus communication. between drive and fieldbus See user documentation of fieldbus Programmable fault: 50.02… -
Page 411
ACS380 FW.book Page 411 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 9083 External fault 3 Fault in external device 3. Check the external device. (Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.05… -
Page 412
ACS380 FW.book Page 412 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 412 Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) 0003 Maximum torque limit too low. Check settings of parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque, and the torque limits in group Limits. -
Page 413
ACS380 FW.book Page 413 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fault tracing Code Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do (hex) D101 Brake slip Brake slipped during Torque Check the brake. proving. Check whether the brake is slipping when it is in the closed state. -
Page 414
ACS380 FW.book Page 414 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 414 Fault tracing ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 415
ACS380 FW.book Page 415 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 416
ACS380 FW.book Page 416 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 416 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Contents • System overview • Modbus • Connecting the fieldbus to the drive • Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus) •… -
Page 417: Modbus
Modbus Embedded fieldbus is for the following instruments: • Standard variant ACS380-04xS • Configured variant (ACS380-04xC) with the I/0 and Modbus extension module (option +L538). The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive control program can handle 10 Modbus registers in a 10-millisecond time level. For example, if the drive receives a request to read 20 registers, it will start its response within 22 ms of receiving the request –…
-
Page 418
ACS380 FW.book Page 418 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 418 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Connecting the fieldbus to the drive Connect the fieldbus to the EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal on the BMIO-01 module which is attached on the control unit of the drive. The connection diagram is shown below. -
Page 419
ACS380 FW.book Page 419 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus) To take the Modbus into use 1. Select Modbus RTU from the Control macros menu (see section Submenus page 20). -
Page 420
ACS380 FW.book Page 420 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 420 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control 58.15 Communication Cw / Ref1 / Ref2 Enables/disables communication loss loss mode (default) monitoring and defines the means for resetting the counter of the communication loss delay. -
Page 421
ACS380 FW.book Page 421 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control 58.06 Communication Refresh settings Validates the settings of the configuration control parameters. The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh… -
Page 422
ACS380 FW.book Page 422 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 422 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control OTHER SELECTIONS EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1… -
Page 423
ACS380 FW.book Page 423 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit data words or 32-bit data words (with a transparent control profile). -
Page 424
ACS380 FW.book Page 424 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 424 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Control word and Status word The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. -
Page 425
• Profile. For the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The DCU Profile involves no data conversion or scaling. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile selection. -
Page 426
Control Word Control Word for the ABB Drives profile The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 431. -
Page 427
ACS380 FW.book Page 427 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value STATE/Description JOGGING_1 Request running at Jogging 1 speed. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters. -
Page 428
ACS380 FW.book Page 428 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 428 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description EXT2 Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus. -
Page 429
Status Word Status Word for the ABB Drives profile The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in… -
Page 430
ACS380 FW.book Page 430 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 430 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value STATE/Description ABOVE_ Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds LIMIT supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both directions of rotation. -
Page 431
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words. -
Page 432
ACS380 FW.book Page 432 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 432 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) SWITCH-ON ABB Drives profile MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1) Power ON (CW Bit0=0) NOT READY TO CW = Control Word SWITCH ON… -
Page 433
ACS380 FW.book Page 433 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) A control word sequence example is given below: Start: • 476h —> NOT READY TO SWITCH ON If MSW bit 0 = 1 then •… -
Page 434
References References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB reference 2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. -
Page 435
Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile The table below shows the default Modbus holding register addresses for the drive data with the ABB Drives profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to the drive data. -
Page 436
ACS380 FW.book Page 436 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 436 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 400005 Default: Actual value 1 (Act1 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.105 Data I/O 400006 Actual value 2 (Act2 16bit). -
Page 437
ACS380 FW.book Page 437 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Code Function name Description Get Comm Event Returns a status word and an event count. Counter Write Multiple Coils Forces a sequence of coils (0X references) to 0 or 1. -
Page 438
ACS380 FW.book Page 438 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 438 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Coils (0xxxx reference set) Coils are 1-bit read/write values. Control Word bits are exposed with this data type. The table below summarizes the Modbus coils (0xxxx reference set). Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire. -
Page 439
ACS380 FW.book Page 439 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile 000033 Control for relay output RO1 Control for relay output RO1 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control… -
Page 440
ACS380 FW.book Page 440 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 440 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved USER_0 Reserved USER_1 Reserved USER_2 Reserved USER_3 Reserved… -
Page 441: Canopen
ACS380 FW.book Page 441 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Reference Name Description Error Code Set when exception code 04h is generated (see table above). • 00h No error • 02h Low/High limit exceeded •…
-
Page 442
ACS380 FW.book Page 442 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 442 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Note: When taking the CANopen module into use, it is recommended that the cord is not connected during the first start. This is to avoid disturbing the CAN bus when the drive attempts to recognize the attached module. -
Page 443
ACS380 FW.book Page 443 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Parameter Setting 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Not selected 28.71 Freq ramp set sel Acc/Dec time 1 31.11 Fault reset selection 58.01 Protocol enable CANopen Set up the drive manually. -
Page 444
ACS380 FW.book Page 444 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 444 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control 58.26 EFB ref1 type Speed or Defines the types of fieldbus frequency (default references 1 and 2. The scaling 58.27… -
Page 445
ACS380 FW.book Page 445 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control 58.80 TPDO1 transmission type 255 (default) Defines the transmission type of the PDO. 58.86 TPDO6 transmission type 0 = acyclic synchronous 58.92… -
Page 446
ACS380 FW.book Page 446 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 446 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Setting for Parameter Function/Information fieldbus control SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 1. -
Page 447
ACS380 FW.book Page 447 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) CANopen embedded fieldbus interface operation Control word, reference, Status word and actual values according to CANopen profile CiA 402 or ABB Drives… -
Page 448
• Transparent 16 • Transparent 32 For the ABB Drives and CiA 402 profiles, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The Transparent profiles perform no data conversion, but the Transparent 16 profile may optionally scale the reference and actual values with a configured scaling value (58.24 Transparent 16… -
Page 449
ACS380 FW.book Page 449 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Fault reset Halt 9…10 Reserved 11…15 Drive specific Operation mode specific bits Velocity mode Profile velocity mode Profile torque Ramp function generator enable… -
Page 450
ACS380 FW.book Page 450 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 450 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Command/Event Drive stop mode Fault Fault reaction specified by the drive. Typically a Coast stop. The halt mode is controlled with bit 8 of the CiA 402 control word. When the halt bit is set during the OPERATION ENABLED state, the drive stops and the state machine remains in the OPERATION ENABLED state. -
Page 451
ACS380 FW.book Page 451 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Operation mode specific bits: Velocity mode Profile velocity mode Profile torque mode Reserved Speed is zero Reserved Reserved Max slippage reached Reserved Modes of operation The operation mode defines the behavior of the drive. -
Page 452
ACS380 FW.book Page 452 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 452 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Cyclic synchronous velocity mode In cyclic synchronous velocity mode, the trajectory generator is in the control device and not in the drive. The control device delivers a new target velocity value to the drive periodically at a fixed interval. -
Page 453
ACS380 FW.book Page 453 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) CiA 402 profile state machine From any state CW: Control word SW: Status word FAULT REACTION START ACTIVE SW: xxxxxxxxx0xx1111 State transition… -
Page 454
ABB drives profile Control Word for the ABB Drives profile Control word of the ABB Drives profile can be written to the object 2101h, or alternatively to the object 6040h. The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives control profile. -
Page 455
USER_3 Status Word for the ABB Drives profile Status word of the ABB Drives profile can be read from the object 2104h, or alternatively from the object 6041h. The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile. -
Page 456
Reserved References for the ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB reference 2. The references are 16-bit signed integers. The reference values can be written to the objects 2102h and 2103h, or alternatively… -
Page 457
(with frequency reference) Actual values for the ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive value. -
Page 458
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words. -
Page 459
ACS380 FW.book Page 459 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) ABB Drives profile state machine SWITCH-ON ABB Drives profile MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1) Power ON (CW Bit0=0) NOT READY TO CW = Control Word… -
Page 460
ACS380 FW.book Page 460 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 460 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Transparent 16 profile Control Word for the Transparent 16 Profile Control word of the Transparent 16 profile can be written to the object 2051h. The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive. -
Page 461
ACS380 FW.book Page 461 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description RAMP_IN_ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero. Normal operation. REQ_LOCAL_LO Not yet implemented. Not yet implemented. Reserved for Not yet implemented. -
Page 462
ACS380 FW.book Page 462 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 462 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description PANEL_LOCAL Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode. Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode. -
Page 463
ACS380 FW.book Page 463 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description RUN_DISABLE Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal. -
Page 464
ACS380 FW.book Page 464 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 464 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description 26… Reserved Status Word for the Transparent 32 Profile Status word of the Transparent 32 profile can be read from the object 2004h. -
Page 465
ACS380 FW.book Page 465 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Name Value State/Description EXT2_ACT External control location EXT2 is active. External control location EXT1 is active. FAULT Drive is faulted. Drive is not faulted. -
Page 466
ACS380 FW.book Page 466 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 466 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Communication profile area (1000…1FFF) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1000h 0 Device Type The device type specifies the kind of device. -
Page 467
ACS380 FW.book Page 467 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1010h 0 Largest This entry supports saving of parameters Subindex in non-volatile memory. With read access… -
Page 468
ACS380 FW.book Page 468 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 468 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1017h 0 Producer The producer heartbeat time defines the Heartbeat cycle time of the heartbeat. If the time is 0 Time it is not used. -
Page 469
ACS380 FW.book Page 469 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1600h 0 Number Of Contain the mapping of data in PDOs to Entries objects in the object dictionary. -
Page 470
ACS380 FW.book Page 470 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 470 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1800h 0 Number Of Contain the communication parameters of Entries the PDOs the device sends. -
Page 471
ACS380 FW.book Page 471 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 1A00h 0 Number Of Contain the mapping of data in PDOs to Entries objects in the object dictionary. -
Page 472
ACS380 FW.book Page 472 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 472 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Manufacturer specific profile area (2000…5FFF) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 2000h 0 Number Of Entries REFERENCE INT16 Transparent 16 and ABB Drives profile… -
Page 473
ACS380 FW.book Page 473 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 4001h The objects 4001h-4063h provide access to the drive parameters. Each object 4063h corresponds to a parameter group and each sub-index in the object corresponds to a single parameter in the group, e.g.,… -
Page 474
ACS380 FW.book Page 474 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 474 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 6048h 0 Number of This object indicates the configured delta Entries speed and delta time of the slope of the… -
Page 475
ACS380 FW.book Page 475 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 605Dh 0 Halt option INT16 This object indicates what action is code performed when the halt function is executed, i.e. -
Page 476
ACS380 FW.book Page 476 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 476 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 6061h 0 Mode of INT8 This object provides the actual operation Operation mode. Display… -
Page 477
ACS380 FW.book Page 477 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 608Fh 0 Highest sub- Const This object indicates the configured index encoder increments and number of motor supported revolutions. -
Page 478
ACS380 FW.book Page 478 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 478 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) Sub- Index Name Type Access Description index 6502h 0 Supported This object provides information on the drive modes supported drive modes. -
Page 479
ACS380 FW.book Page 479 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) LED blinking descriptions. Name State Description ERROR No error Blinking General configuration error Single flash CANopen controller error counters have reached the warning limit (too many error frames). -
Page 480
ACS380 FW.book Page 480 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 480 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 481
ACS380 FW.book Page 481 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Contents • System overview • Basics of the fieldbus control interface • Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control •… -
Page 482
ACS380 FW.book Page 482 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 482 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Fieldbus adapters are available as loose options for ACS380 base variants (ACS380- 04xN-xxAx-x) or as built-in options for ACS380 configured variants (ACS380-04xC- xxAx-x types). For example following protocols are supported: •… -
Page 483: Basics Of The Fieldbus Control Interface
ACS380 FW.book Page 483 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Basics of the fieldbus control interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16- or 32-bit input and output data words. The drive is able to support a maximum of 12 data words (16 bits) in each direction.
-
Page 484: Control Word And Status Word
The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions in the Control word, and returns status information to the master in the Status word. For the ABB Drives communication profile, the contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages respectively.
-
Page 485: References
50.14 FBA A reference 1 50.15 FBA A reference Scaling of references Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
-
Page 486: Actual Values
50.17 FBA A actual value 1 50.18 FBA A actual value Scaling of actual values Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
-
Page 487: Contents Of The Fieldbus Control Word (Abb Drives Profile)
ACS380 FW.book Page 487 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Contents of the fieldbus Control word (ABB Drives profile) The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram on page 489.
-
Page 488: Contents Of The Fieldbus Status Word (Abb Drives Profile)
ACS380 FW.book Page 488 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 488 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Name Value State/Description Ext ctrl loc Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus. Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
-
Page 489: The State Diagram (Valid For Abb Drives Profile Only)
ACS380 FW.book Page 489 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter The state diagram (valid for ABB drives profile only) SWITCH-ON from any state MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW b6=1 Fault Power ON CW b0=0…
-
Page 490
ACS380 FW.book Page 490 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 490 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter A control word sequence example is given below: Start: • 476h —> NOT READY TO SWITCH ON If MSW bit 0 = 1 then •… -
Page 491: Automatic Drive Configuration For Fieldbus Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 491 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control The software automatically sets the relevant parameters when the fieldbus adapter module is connected to the drive. The preset settings apply to the CANopen, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS and PROFINET (default in the FENA-21-M module) protocols.
-
Page 492: Automatically Changed Parameters (All Adapters)
ACS380 FW.book Page 492 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 492 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Automatically changed parameters (all adapters) Parameter Setting (general) Setting (BCAN-11) 20.01 Ext1 commands Fieldbus A Embedded fieldbus 20.03 Ext1 in1 Not selected Not selected 20.04 Ext1 in2…
-
Page 493
ACS380 FW.book Page 493 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Parameter Setting Ethernet IP 51.02 Protocol / Profile EIP ABB Pro. (EtherNet/IP protocol: ABB Drives profile.) CANopen (BCAN-11) 58.01 Protocol enable CANopen ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 494: Setting Up The Drive For Fieldbus Control Manually
ACS380 FW.book Page 494 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 494 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Setting up the drive for fieldbus control manually The fieldbus adapter module is typically pre-installed. The device automatically recognizes the module. If the adapter is not pre-installed, you can install it mechanically and electrically.
-
Page 495: Contents Of This Chapter
ACS380 FW.book Page 495 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Control chain diagrams Contents of this chapter This chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain diagrams can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters have an effect within the drive parameter system.
-
Page 496: Frequency Reference Selection
ACS380 FW.book Page 496 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 496 Control chain diagrams Frequency reference selection > > > > > > > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 497: Frequency Reference Modification
ACS380 FW.book Page 497 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Frequency reference modification > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 498: Speed Reference Source Selection I
ACS380 FW.book Page 498 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 498 Control chain diagrams Speed reference source selection I > > > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 499: Speed Reference Source Selection Ii
ACS380 FW.book Page 499 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Speed reference source selection II > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 500: Speed Reference Ramping And Shaping
ACS380 FW.book Page 500 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 500 Control chain diagrams Speed reference ramping and shaping > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 501: Speed Error Calculation
ACS380 FW.book Page 501 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Speed error calculation ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 502: Speed Controller
ACS380 FW.book Page 502 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 502 Control chain diagrams Speed controller > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 503: Torque Reference Source Selection And Modification
ACS380 FW.book Page 503 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Torque reference source selection and modification > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 504: Reference Selection For Torque Controller
ACS380 FW.book Page 504 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 504 Control chain diagrams Reference selection for torque controller > > > > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 505: Torque Limitation
ACS380 FW.book Page 505 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Torque limitation > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 506: Process Pid Setpoint And Feedback Source Selection
ACS380 FW.book Page 506 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 506 Control chain diagrams Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection > > > > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 507: Process Pid Controller
ACS380 FW.book Page 507 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams Process PID controller > > > > > > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 508: External Pid Setpoint And Feedback Source Selection
ACS380 FW.book Page 508 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 508 Control chain diagrams External PID setpoint and feedback source selection > > > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 509: External Pid Controller
ACS380 FW.book Page 509 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Control chain diagrams External PID controller > > ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 510: Direction Lock
ACS380 FW.book Page 510 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 510 Control chain diagrams Direction lock ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…
-
Page 511
ACS380 FW.book Page 511 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications This chapter describes the functions within the control program that are specific to the crane application, how to use them, and how to configure them to operate. If required, you can use these functions for other applications also. -
Page 512: Overview Of The Crane Control Program
ACS380 FW.book Page 512 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 512 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Overview of the crane control program The ACS380 drives can be used in cranes such as • indoor electric overhead traveling (EOT) cranes, •…
-
Page 513: Quick Start-Up
ACS380 FW.book Page 513 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Quick start-up This section contains the following alternative control schemes for starting up the drive with the control program: • Control through the I/O interface using a joystick (page 514) •…
-
Page 514: Control Through The I/O Interface Using A Joystick
ACS380 FW.book Page 514 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 514 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control through the I/O interface using a joystick This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the I/O interface with a joystick.
-
Page 515
ACS380 FW.book Page 515 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Set the required ramp times. 23.11 Ramp set selection 23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Set the speed limits. -
Page 516
ACS380 FW.book Page 516 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 516 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connections The diagram shows the control connections for the joystick set-up described on page 514. Terminals Description Digital I/O connections +24V Aux. -
Page 517
ACS380 FW.book Page 517 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm² … 1.5 mm². Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. -
Page 518: Control Through The I/O Interface Using The Step Reference Logic/Pendant Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 518 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 518 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the I/O interface using the step reference logic/pendant control.
-
Page 519
ACS380 FW.book Page 519 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Set the required ramp times. 23.11 Ramp set selection 23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Set the speed limits. -
Page 520
ACS380 FW.book Page 520 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 520 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connections The diagram shows the control connections for the step reference set-up described on page 562. Terminals Description Digital I/O connections +24V Aux. -
Page 521
ACS380 FW.book Page 521 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm² … 1.5 mm². Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. -
Page 522: Control Through The Fieldbus Interface Using The Fieldbus Control Word
ACS380 FW.book Page 522 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 522 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word This section describes how to set up the drive for control through the fieldbus interface using the fieldbus control word.
-
Page 523
ACS380 FW.book Page 523 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Set the speed limits. 30.11 Minimum speed 30.12 Maximum speed 46.01 Speed scaling Set the torque and current limits. 30.17 Maximum current = Nominal motor current [A] 30.19 Minimum torque 1… -
Page 524
ACS380 FW.book Page 524 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 524 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connection for the fieldbus control set-up The diagram below shows the control connections for the fieldbus control word set-up described on page 522. -
Page 525: Configuring Speed Feedback Using A Htl/Ttl Pulse Encoder
(option +L535). This adds a digital pulse encoder interface to the drive and provides accurate speed or position (angle) feedback from the motor shaft. Note: ABB product offering for cranes highlights safety and performance. You should use components that increases safety. For example, in hoist crane application drives, closed loop control (encoder or external supervision) must be used for safe speed supervision.
-
Page 526
ACS380 FW.book Page 526 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 526 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Set parameter 91.10 Encoder parameter refresh to Refresh, to apply the new parameter settings. The parameter automatically changes to Done after application of the new settings. -
Page 527: Configuring Slowdown With Two Limits And Stop Limit Logic
ACS380 FW.book Page 527 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Configuring slowdown with two limits and stop limit logic Slowdown limit inputs Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
-
Page 528
ACS380 FW.book Page 528 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 528 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Select stop ramp mode. 76.11 Limit stop mode 76.11 Limit stop mode Limit ramp stop mode, enter required ramp time to stop. -
Page 529
ACS380 FW.book Page 529 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connection diagram The diagram below shows the control connection example for the slowdown limit and stop limit function described on page 527. -
Page 530
ACS380 FW.book Page 530 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 530 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm² … 1.5 mm². Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. -
Page 531: Configuring Mechanical Brake Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 531 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Configuring Mechanical brake control Safety WARNING! Obey all safety instructions for the drive. Only qualified electricians are allowed to start up the drive.
-
Page 532
ACS380 FW.book Page 532 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 532 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Set the extended runtime to keep the drive modulating after the brake is closed. This magnetizes the drive before the next start and enables faster response to the control commands. -
Page 533: Crane Mechanical Brake Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 533 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Crane mechanical brake control In addition to the existing mechanical brake control function (see page 84), the crane mechanical brake control function consists of brake system check (see page 534) and extended run time (see page 539) functions.
-
Page 534: Brake System Checks – Overview
ACS380 FW.book Page 534 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 534 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Brake system checks – overview The brake system checks consist of electrical and mechanical tests. • The electrical test makes sure that the drive can produce torque before it releases the brake and starts the crane operation.
-
Page 535
ACS380 FW.book Page 535 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications This flowchart shows the brake system check sequence. Enable Brake control (44.01 bit 0) Enable Torque proving (44.202 = Selected) Start command activated… -
Page 536: Brake System Checks – Torque Proving
ACS380 FW.book Page 536 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 536 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Timing diagram This timing diagram shows the operation of the Torque proving and Brake system check functions. Torque (%) 26.02 01.10 t (s) Started &…
-
Page 537: Brake System Checks – Brake Slip
ACS380 FW.book Page 537 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications A time delay (44.204) defines the time during which the torque reference (44.203) is active and completes the electrical and mechanical tests of the crane system.
-
Page 538: Brake Safe Closure
ACS380 FW.book Page 538 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 538 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Brake safe closure The Brake safe closure function performs a forced closure of the brake and prevents the end-user from operating the drive at very low speeds. We recommend this function especially in hoist drives which, for some reason, have no pulse encoder.
-
Page 539: Extended Run Time
ACS380 FW.book Page 539 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Extended run time The Extended run time function minimizes the delay between consecutive start commands. After the brake closes and the brake close delay time elapses, the extended run time function keeps the motor magnetized for a defined time period.
-
Page 540: Speed Matching
ACS380 FW.book Page 540 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 540 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Speed matching The Speed matching function compares the crane speed reference continuously to the actual motor speed to detect any differences. The function makes sure that the motor follows the speed reference when stopped, during acceleration or deceleration, and when running at the constant speed.
-
Page 541
ACS380 FW.book Page 541 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Timing diagrams The diagram shows the operation of the Speed match fault. 90.01 Speed (rpm) 24.01 76.32 (+30 rpm) 76.33 (+50 rpm) 76.32… -
Page 542: Crane Warning Masking
ACS380 FW.book Page 542 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 542 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Settings Parameters: 76.31 Motor speed match Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 09.03 Crane FW1 Warnings: D200 Brake slip at standstill2 Faults: D105 Speed match Crane warning masking The Crane warning masking function masks the predefined crane control warnings.
-
Page 543: Start/Stop Interlocking
ACS380 FW.book Page 543 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications When parameter 30.203 Deadband forward is set to 2%, it means that there is a deadband area of 30 rpm (2% of par.
-
Page 544: Joystick Reference Interlocking
ACS380 FW.book Page 544 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 544 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications This figure shows how the joystick works with NO (normally open) contact elements for start/stop in the forward and reverse directions and one NC (normally closed) contact element for the zero position.
-
Page 545
ACS380 FW.book Page 545 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Timing diagram The diagram shows the operation of the Joystick reference check warning. 20.214 t (s) Joystick zero position 10% of AI1 (AI2) scaled… -
Page 546: Crane Stop Limit Function
ACS380 FW.book Page 546 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 546 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Crane stop limit function The crane stop limit function stops the crane movement safely when it reaches the end position. You can use the stop limit function in both horizontal (long travel trolley) and vertical (hoist) movement.
-
Page 547
ACS380 FW.book Page 547 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Name Value 76.04 Forward stop limit (sample value) 76.05 Forward slow down limit Selected 76.06 Reverse stop limit (sample value) 76.07 Reverse slow down limit Selected 76.11… -
Page 548: Crane Slowdown Function
ACS380 FW.book Page 548 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 548 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Crane slowdown function The slowdown function limits the forward and reverse movements of the load between two points. The function supports monitoring of the slowdown sensors in the movement area and reduces the speed accordingly.
-
Page 549
ACS380 FW.book Page 549 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications For both forward and reverse limit, the active and inactive conditions are applicable as follows: • The limits are active when the limit input to the drive is False (0), i.e. when the normally-closed limit switch is open. -
Page 550: Fast Stop
ACS380 FW.book Page 550 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 550 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Fast stop The Fast stop function stops the drive immediately, even if the drive is at high speed. For example, the function can be used to stop the swift downward movement of a bucket crane before the ropes unwind and pile up on top of the crane.
-
Page 551: Power On Acknowledgment
ACS380 FW.book Page 551 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Power on acknowledgment The Power on acknowledgment function makes sure that the main power is connected and the drive is ready for operation. You can use this function, for example, to automatically reset faults that are generated during the drive in standby.
-
Page 552
ACS380 FW.book Page 552 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 552 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connections The diagram below shows control connection diagram to enable the power acknowledge feature (through STO or DIO2) with external 24V supply. -
Page 553
ACS380 FW.book Page 553 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm² … 1.5 mm². Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. -
Page 554: Speed Reference Handling
ACS380 FW.book Page 554 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 554 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Speed reference handling The crane speed reference can be provided through any of the following sources: • Joystick connected through digital and analog I/O •…
-
Page 555
ACS380 FW.book Page 555 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications The Parabolic speed reference function (par. 22.211) changes the interrelationship of the incoming signal (joystick movement) and the speed reference according to a mathematical function. -
Page 556: Step Reference Speed Selection/Pendant Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 556 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 556 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Signals: 09.06 Crane speed reference Warnings: — Faults: — Step reference speed selection/Pendant control In step reference, you can select speed between four step reference speeds. A pendant controller is commonly used with the step reference logic.
-
Page 557: Crane Motor Potentiometer
ACS380 FW.book Page 557 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Name Value 22.27 Constant speed 2 22.28 Constant speed 3 1500 22.29 Constant speed 4 1500 Settings Parameters: 22.21 Constant speed function, 22.22 Constant speed sel1, 22.23…
-
Page 558
ACS380 FW.book Page 558 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 558 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications When you activate a forward command, • when the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) is less than the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224), the crane accelerates to the crane motor potentiometer minimum speed (22.224). -
Page 559
ACS380 FW.book Page 559 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: 1. When you release the acceleration command (22.223), the motor potentiometer reference (22.230) remains in the last reached level. To accelerate further, you need to activate the acceleration command (22.223) again. -
Page 560
ACS380 FW.book Page 560 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 560 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications The start forward and start reverse commands are defined in parameter group Start/stop/direction. Settings Parameters: 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1, 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1, 22.220 Crane motpot… -
Page 561
ACS380 FW.book Page 561 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Control connections The diagram below shows the I/O control connection diagram for the crane motor potentiometer. Terminals Description Digital I/O connections +24V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA DGND Aux. -
Page 562
ACS380 FW.book Page 562 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 562 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 mm² … 1.5 mm². Tightening torque: 0.5 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft). Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. -
Page 563: Conical Motor Control
ACS380 FW.book Page 563 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Conical motor control This function handles the brake control for conical motors, which do not have a external mechanical brake. A conical motor has an internal brake, which opens or closes according to the motor flux level.
-
Page 564
ACS380 FW.book Page 564 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 564 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications When the Conical motor control function is enabled and the start command is given, the motor flux ramps up over the normal level (100%) to the start flux level (76.22) during a flux ramp-up time (76.25). -
Page 565
ACS380 FW.book Page 565 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications Settings Parameters: 76.21…76.26 Signals: 09.01 Crane SW1, 76.27 Flux reference Warnings: — Faults: D10A Brake not selected ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 566
ACS380 FW.book Page 566 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM 566 Appendix A — ACS380 in crane applications ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de… -
Page 567
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to abb.com/searchchannels. Product training For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training. -
Page 568
ACS380 FW.book Page 568 Friday, May 4, 2018 4:18 PM abb.com/drives © Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change without notice. ghv Vertriebs-GmbH | Am Schammacher Feld 47 | 85567 Grafing | Telefon + 49 80 92 81 89 0 | info@ghv.de | www.ghv.de…